Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.

2

Command Reference

part number: 320506-A, January 2006

4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 Phone 1-800-4Nortel http://www.nortel.com

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Copyright 2006 Nortel Networks, Inc., 4655 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, California 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 320506-A. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Nortel Networks, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of noninfringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995). Nortel Networks, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. Nortel Networks, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Nortel Networks, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of Nortel Networks, Inc.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System, Nortel Application Switch 2424, Nortel Application
Switch 2424-SSL, Nortel Application Switch 2224, 2216, 2208, 3408, Nortel Application Switch 180, Nortel Application Switch 180e, Nortel Application Switch 184, Nortel Application Switch AD3, Nortel Application Switch AD4, and ACEswitch are trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Check Point® and FireWall-1® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Check Point Software Technologies Ltd. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies. Originated in the U.S.A.

2
320506-A, January 2006

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Who Should Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 How This Book Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 How to Get Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 The Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Connecting to the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Establishing a Console Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Establishing a Telnet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Using a BOOTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Running Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Establishing an SSH Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Running SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Accessing the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 CLI Versus Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Command Line History and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Idle Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 First-Time Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Information Needed For Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Starting Setup When You Log In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Stopping Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Restarting Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
3
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Setup Part 2: Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Setup Part 3: VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 IP Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Default Gateways. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Setup Part 5: Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Optional Setup for SNMP Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Optional Setup for Telnet Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Setting Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing the Default Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing the Default User Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password. . . . . . . . . . 51 Menu Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 The Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Menu Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Global Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Command Line History and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Command Line Interface Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Command Stacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Command Abbreviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Tab Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Configuration Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 The Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 SNMPv3 System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 SNMPv3 USM User Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 SNMPv3 View Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 SNMPv3 Access Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 SNMPv3 Group Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 SNMPv3 Community Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information . . . . . . . . . . 70 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information . . . . . . . . 71 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 SNMPv3 Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

General System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Show System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Show Last 64 Syslog Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Last 64 Saved Syslog Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Management Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 SONMP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 System Capacity Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Show switch fan status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Show switch temperature sensor status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Show encryption licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Show current user status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 System Information Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Layer 2 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Layer 2 FDB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Show All FDB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu . . . . . . . . 93 LACP Aggregator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 LACP Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 LACP Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Show common internal spanning tree (CIST) information . 101 Trunk Group Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Status of port teams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Layer2 Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Layer3 Information Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 IP Routing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Show All IP Route Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Type Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

IPv6 Routing Information Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ARP Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Show All ARP Entry Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ARP Address List Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 IPv6 Neighbor Cache Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

5

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

BGP Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 BGP Peer information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 BGP Summary information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Dump BGP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 OSPF Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 OSPF General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 OSPF Interface Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 OSPF Database Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 OSPF Information Route Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 OSPF Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 IP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 VRRP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Layer3 Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Layer 4 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Session Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications . . . . . . 135 Session dump information in Nortel Application Switch Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Global SLB Information Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Show All Layer 4 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Bandwidth Management Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 BWM IP User Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 BWM Contract Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Security Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Link Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Software Enabled Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Information Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
The Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 System statistics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Port Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Bridging Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Ethernet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Interface Protocol Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Link Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

RMON Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Port Dump Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Port mirroring statistics menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Layer 2 Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 FDB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 LACP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Spanning Tree Group Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Layer 3 Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 OSPF Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 OSPF Global Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 IP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 IP6 Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Route Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ARP statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 VRRP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 DNS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 ICMP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 TCP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 UDP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 SP Real Server Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 SP Filter Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 SP Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Global SLB Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Real Server Global SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Global SLB Site Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Real Server SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Per Service Octet Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Real Server Group Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Virtual Server SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Filter SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Layer7 Redirection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

7

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Layer7 Pooling Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu. . . . . 220 Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics. . . . . . . . . 221 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 FTP SLB Statistics Dump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 RTSP SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 DNS SLB Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 WAP SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 SLB Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 SIP SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Display Workload Manager SASP statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Clear Workload Manager SASP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Display Workload Manager SASP statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 BWM Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 BWM Switch Processor Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu . . . . . 233 BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics . . . . . . 233 BWM Contract Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 BWM Contract Rate Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 BWM History Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 BWM Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 BWM IP Users Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Security Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 DOS Attack Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Types of DOS Attacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

IP Access Control List Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 UDP Blast Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 UDP Blast Dump Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 UDP Pattern Match Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Rate Limiting Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Dump Statistics for Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Management Processor Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 MP Packet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 TCP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 UCB Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
8 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

MP-Specific SFD Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 CPU Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 SP Specific Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 CPU Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Port Mirroring Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Management Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Dump Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
The Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Viewing Pending Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Applying Pending Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Saving the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 System Host Log Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Seven Levels of Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

Management Port Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Management Port Link Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 RADIUS Server Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration . . 273 System SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 User Security Model Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 278 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu280 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu . . . . . 283 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu . . 284 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu 285 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . 286 System Health Check Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 System Access Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Management Networks Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Port Management Access Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

9

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

User Access Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 System User ID Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 SSH Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 XML Configuration Access Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Example of enabling or disabling XML access . . . . . . . 299 Configure the Timezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 Series . . . . . . 302 Fast Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 SFP GBIC Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Port Link Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Nortel Application Switch 3000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Port Configuration on Nortel Application Switch 3408. . . . . . . . . 306 Single-Mode ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Dual-Mode Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration . . . . . . . . . 313 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu . . . . 314
Temporarily Disabling a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Port Mirroring Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Port-Mirroring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Bandwidth Management Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration . . . . . . . . 319 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu . . . . . 320 Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 322 Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu . . . . . 323 Bandwidth Management Current Configuration . . . . . . . . . 324 Layer 2 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Multiple Spanning Tree Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Multiple Spanning Tree Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 CIST Bridge Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Current configuration for CIST Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Spanning Tree Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
10 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Spanning Tree Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Trunk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 LACP Port Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Port Team Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Layer 3 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 IP Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Default IP Gateway Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Default Gateway Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

IP Static Route Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ARP Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ARP Static Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Local Network Route Caching Definition . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache . . . . . . . .351

Network Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Route Map Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 IP Access List Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Autonomous System Filter Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Routing Information Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 RIP Interface Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Open Shortest Path First Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Area Index Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . 364 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. . . . . . 370 Border Gateway Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 BGP Peer Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . 377 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Domain Name System Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . 380
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

11

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

VRRP Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Virtual Router Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration . . . . . . . 385 Virtual Router Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Virtual Router Group Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration . 392 VRRP Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 VRRP Tracking Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Default Gateway Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Security Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Port Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu . . . . . 400 UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Anomaly and Denial of Service Attack Prevention Menu . . 403 Pattern Matching Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 SSL Processor Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Saving the Active Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
The SLB Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Real Server SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Real Server Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Buddy Server Health Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Real server IDS Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Real Server Group SLB Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
SLB Health Check Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Server Load Balancing Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Virtual Server SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Virtual Server Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 WTS Load Balancing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 HTTP Load Balancing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
12 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

SIP Load Balancing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 RTSP Load Balancing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Cookie-Based Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444

SLB Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Advanced Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 802.1p Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Advanced Filter TCP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 IP Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
ICMP Message Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . 457 Layer 7 SIP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Proxy Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu. 462 Port SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Global SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 GSLB Remote Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . 469 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Web Cache Redirection Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu . . . . . . 475 SDP Mapping Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 WAP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Peer Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Advanced Layer 4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu . 483 Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu . . . . . . . 484 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu . . . . . 485 Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu . . . . . . . 486 Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . 486 Scriptable Health Checks Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 SNMP Health Check Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 WAP Health Check Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

13

. . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Activating Optional Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Operations-Level BGP Options . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Command Reference WSP Content Health Check . . . . . 505 Security Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Selecting a Software Image to Run . . . .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. . . . . . 522 Forwarding Database Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Operations-Level IP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Maintenance Menu . . . 499 Operations-Level Port Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Scheduled Reboot of the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Operations-Level SLB Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 14 Contents 320506-A. . . . . . . . . 502 Real Server Group Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Global SLB Operations Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 IP ACL Operations Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Resetting the Switch . . . . . . . . 504 Operations-Level VRRP Options. . . . . . . . . 523 ARP Entries on a Single Port . 517 The Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 WorkLoad Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 System Maintenance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Boot Menu . . . . . . .0. . . . . . . . . 512 Scheduled Reboot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January 2006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Downloading New Software to Your Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Updating the Switch Software Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Selecting a Configuration Block . 510 The Boot Options Menu. 514 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 496 SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 ARP Cache Options . 498 The Operations Menu . . .499 Operations Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Removing Optional Software . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Uuencode Flash Dump . . . 540 SSL Performance Statistics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 IPv6 Manipulation Menu . . 547 AAA Statistics Menu . . 546 SSL Performance: Single IPSEC ISD Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 SSL Performance Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 SSL Configuration Server Menu . . . . . . . . 543 SSL Performance: Single ISD SSL Statistics Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 System Dump Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January 2006 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Menu . . . 558 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Menu559 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Cookie Menu. . . . 535 SSL Performance information menu . . . . . . . . . . 562 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Health Script Menu . . . . . . . . . . 536 SSL Performance Menu. . . . . 533 SSL Processor Menu. . . . . . . 529 Panic Command . . . . 557 SSL Configuration Server Advanced String Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 The SSL Processor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Debugging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 SSL Configuration Server-specific Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 Contents 320506-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 SSL Configuration Server-specific SSL Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 IPSEC Statistics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Unscheduled System Dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Command Reference IP Route Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 SSL Performance Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Login to the SSL processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 SSL Configuration Server-specific Trace Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 SSL Performance: Local IPSEC Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Clearing Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Local VIP Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 542 SSL Performance SSL Local Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 SSL Configuration Server-specific TCP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . 591 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Linkset Menu . . 580 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Macro Menu .0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 SSL VPN Configuration Network Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 589 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Access Menu . . 566 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Menu. . . . 571 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Automatic Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 SSL VPN Configuration Application specific Paths Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Linkset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Menu . . . . . . . . . . 582 SSL VPN Configuration Network Subnet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 SSL VPN Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Filter Menu . . . . . 592 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 SSL VPN Configuration TunnelGuard Menu . . . . . . 579 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Servers Menu . 593 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Access Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Backend Server Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Session Timeout Menu. . . . . 595 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Enabled Domains Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 SSL VPN Configuration Application specific Menu . . . . 581 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Advanced Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Command Reference SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Verification Menu . . . . 573 SSL VPN Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 16 Contents 320506-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 SSL VPN Configuration Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. . . . . . . . January 2006 . . . . 578 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Menu . . . . . . . 588 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 565 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group IPsec Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . 615 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Diffie-Hellman Group Mask Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu . . . . . .2 Command Reference SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Headers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. . . . . . . . . 617 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Dead Peer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile NAT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 SSL VPN Configuration Server Intranet Proxy settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 SSL VPN Configuration Server Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 SSL VPN Configuration Server UDP Syslog Traffic Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL triggered rewrite Menu. . . 610 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect Menu . . . 621 Contents 320506-A. . . . . 599 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting VPN attributes Menu . . . . . . . . 605 SSL VPN Configuration Server HTTP Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect verify Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Menu . . . . . . . 617 SSL VPN Configuration IP Pool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . January 2006 17 . . . . . 612 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 SSL VPN Configuration Server TCP endpoint Settings Menu . . . 608 SSL VPN Configuration Server Portal settings Menu . . . 614 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Encryption Menu . . . . . . . . 601 SSL VPN Configuration Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Colors Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 SSL VPN Configuration Server Traffic Trace Menu . . . . . . . . 599 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Servers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 SSL Configuration System Access List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Language Menu . . . . . . . . . . 639 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMPv2 MIB SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Menu . . . . . . . . .2 Command Reference SSL VPN Configuration Portal Full Access Menu . . . . . . January 2006 . . . . . . . 640 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Users Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 SSL Configuration System Host Routes Menu . . . . . . . . . 641 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Target Menu . . . . 635 SSL Configuration System RSA servers Menu . . . . . . . . . . 626 SSL VPN Configuration Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . 634 SSL Configuration System DNS Servers settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Community Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 SSL Configuration System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 18 Contents 320506-A. 633 SSL Configuration System Time Menu . . . . . . . . 627 SSL VPN Configuration Advanced DNS settings Menu . . . . . 630 SSL Configuration System Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 SSL Configuration System SysLog Servers Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 SSL Configuration System Host Interface Routes Menu . . 633 SSL Configuration System Time NTP servers Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 SSL Configuration System DNS settings Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 632 SSL Configuration System Menu . . 637 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Menu .0. . . 632 SSL Configuration System Host Port Menu. . . . . . 622 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Menu . . . . 628 SSL Configuration System Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Internal Setting Menu. . . . 626 SSL VPN Configuration SSL Client Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Domains Menu . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 LOG_ALERT . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 SSL Configuration System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Known Host keys Menu . . . . . . . . . . .657 LOG_ERR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 SSL Performance Menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Contents 320506-A. . . . 673 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 SSL Performance Maintenance Menu . . . . . .656 LOG_CRIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 LOG_NOTICE . . . 655 LOG_WARNING . . . . . . January 2006 19 . . . . . . . . . . 645 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Host keys Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 LOG_INFO . . . 644 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTPS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTP Menu . . . . . . . 649 SSL Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Command Reference SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Servers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 SSL Configuration Language Support Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 SSL Performance HSM Menu . . . . . . 667 Performing a Serial Download . . . . . . . . . . . .

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference 20 Contents 320506-A. January 2006 .

The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts. see the Hardware Installation Guide for your particular switch model. SNMP. “The Statistics Menu” describes how to view switch performance statistics. How This Book Is Organized “The Command Line Interface” describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus. 21 320506-A. the IEEE 802. Port Mirroring.2 Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Nortel Application Switch Operating System software with your Nortel Application Switch. ports. and SNMP configuration parameters. IP Routing.1d Spanning Tree Protocol. “The Configuration Menu” describes how to configure switch system parameters. and more. January 2006 . IP addressing. “First-Time Configuration” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords. VLANs. global commands. including a menu map. Who Should Use This Book This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network. For documentation on installing the switches physically.0.Preface The Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Spanning Tree Protocol. “Menu Basics” provides an overview of the menu system. and menu shortcuts. Port Trunking. “The Information Menu” describes how to view switch configuration parameters.

2 Browser-Based Interface (BBI) Quick Guide (Part Number 320508-A) Provides a description of the Switch BBI and how to configure and access it on the Switch. Appendix B. The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features. and more. Appendix C. Appendix A. and how to reset the software to factory defaults. how to install it.2 Command Reference “The SLB Configuration Menu” describes how to configure Server Load Balancing. how to load a new software image. 22 Preface 320506-A. Related Documentation Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. “Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages” presents a listing of syslog messages. “Glossary” defines the terminology used throughout the book. Nortel Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide (Part Number 315396-E) Provides a description of the Nortel Application Switch hardware. Filtering. “The Maintenance Menu” describes how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information. Global Server Load Balancing. “The Operations Menu” describes how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately. the physical features. “Performing a Serial Download” shows how to directly load a binary software image into the switch for upgrade or maintenance.0. and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database. and how to troubleshoot it.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. “The Boot Options Menu” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images.0. “Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book.2 Application Guide (Part Number 320507-A) Provides application explanations and configuration examples for the Switch. how to clear it. January 2006 . “Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP Agent” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) supported in the switch software. but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports). Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main# prompts. special terms.0.0. Read your User’s Guide thoroughly. enter: examples as a parameter placeholder.2 Release Notes (Part Number 320509A). Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. files. if any. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Do not type the brackets. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown.txt file.2 Command Reference Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. and directories used within the text. Table 1 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol AaBbCc123 Meaning This type is used for names of commands. Main# sys <AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session. in the software. January 2006 23 . Example View the readme. This document provides a description of new features and caveats and limitations. or words to be emphasized. Do not type the brackets. Replace host# telnet <IP address> the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. host# ls [-a] Preface 320506-A. This also shows book titles.

contact one of the following Nortel Technical Solutions Centers: Technical Solutions Center Europe. your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.nortelnetworks. To locate an ERC for your product or service. Middle East. refer to the following URL: http://www. contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance. When you use an ERC. January 2006 .com/help/contact/erc/index.2 Command Reference How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller. and Africa Telephone 00800 8008 9009 or +44 (0) 870 907 9009 (800) 4NORTEL or (800) 466-7835 (61) (2) 8870-8800 (800) 810-5000 North America Asia Pacific China Additional information about the Nortel Technical Solutions Centers is available at the following URL: http://www.nortelnetworks.0. If you purchased a Nortel service program.html 24 Preface 320506-A.com/help/contact/global An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel products and services.

Using a basic terminal. January 2006 .CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Your Nortel Application Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch. and to perform any necessary configuration. This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) of the switch. Some of the more advanced features. 25 320506-A. however. The extensive Nortel Application Switch Operating System switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: A built-in. text-based command line interface and menu system for access via local terminal or remote Telnet session A GUI-based Application Switch Element Manager (ASEM) for interactive network access SNMP support for access through network management software such as HP OpenView Nortel Application Switch Operating System Browser-Based Interface (BBI) The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration.

Procedure 1. Connect the terminal to the Console port using the serial cable. you will need the following: An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1-1 Console Configuration Parameters Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics). January 2006 . press <Enter> a few times on your terminal. Power on the terminal. To establish the connection. (For more information.2 Command Reference Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using an SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network Establishing a Console Connection Requirements To establish a console connection with the switch. see “Setting Passwords” on page 47). You will next be required to enter a password for access to the switch. 26 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 3. 2.0.

from a BOOTP server on your network Manually. you need to have a device with Telnet software located on the same network as the switch. run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command. The switch must have an IP address. Telnet access provides the same options for user access and administrator access as those available through the console port. when you configure the switch IP address (see “Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration” on page 36).Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. NOTE – If connecting to the management port. before you can use these methods of accessing the switch. The MAC address can also be found in the System Information menu (see “System Information” on page 63). the Nortel Application Switch Operating System software is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. To configure the switch for Telnet access. you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. followed by the switch IP address: telnet <IP address> You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 28. To establish a Telnet connection with the switch. The switch can get its IP address in one of two ways: Dynamically.2 Command Reference Establishing a Telnet Connection A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network. add the MAC address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. The port must be manually configured with the proper IP address.0. BOOTP is not supported. Refer to “Establishing a Telnet Connection” on page 27. using serial connection. Running Telnet Once the IP parameters on the Nortel Application Switch are configured. NOTE – You need to enable Telnet and SSH. If you have a BOOTP server on your network. The MAC address can be found on a small white label on the back panel of the switch. January 2006 27 . Using a BOOTP Server By default. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 320506-A.

) F-Secure SSH 1.2 Command Reference Establishing an SSH Connection Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of an Nortel Application Switch via Telnet. Inc. The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. January 2006 . Key Exchange: RSA Encryption: 3DES-CBC.2. The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Running SSH Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the Nortel Application Switch. run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command. To establish an SSH connection with the switch.2 and SecureCRT 3. Similarly. Thus.XX. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) will not be supported.2.0. a SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. DES User Authentication: Local password authentication. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely. Radius The following SSH clients have been tested: SSH 1. this method does not provide a secure connection. Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection.5-1. followed by the switch IP address: >> # ssh <switch IP address> 28 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 320506-A.X.27 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT 3.1 for Windows (Data Fellows) NOTE – The Nortel Application Switch Operating System implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1.5 and supports SSH-1.23 and SSH 1.3 (Van Dyke Technologies.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time. SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure.0. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration.0.

operators cannot severely impact switch operation. Web management functions. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 320506-A. Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. see “Setting Passwords” on page 47. they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes.2 Command Reference or. Once you are connected to the switch via local console. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table. Levels of access to CLI. Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. seven levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the Nortel Application Switch. NOTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch. Conceptually. use the following command: >> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address> You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password. you are prompted to enter a password. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the Nortel Application Switch. such as switch statistics and current operational state information. Accessing the Switch To enable better switch management and user accountability.0. Telnet. if SecurID authentication is required. or SSH. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. For more information. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well. and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the Nortel Application Switch. January 2006 29 . access classes are defined as follows: User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the Nortel Application Switch.

the Operator can reset ports or the entire switch. 30 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 320506-A. This prevents inadvertently leaving the switch open to unauthorized users. and configuration commands on the Nortel Application Switch. access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. and the access level is reserved for future use. In addition to being able to view all switch information and statistics. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus.0. the SLB Administrator can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus.2 Command Reference Table 1-2 User Access Levels User Account User Description and Tasks Performed The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. All user levels below “admin” will by default be initially disabled (empty password) until they are enabled by the “admin” user. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. The Layer 4 Operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the l4oper shared Internet services. information. In addition to SLB Administrator functions. The SLB Administrator configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads.slboper vices and their loads. including filters and bandwidth management. to provide access to operational commands for operators managing traffic on the line leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch status information and statistics. The Layer 4 Administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. In addition to SLB Operator functions.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The Operator manages all functions of the switch. the SLB Operator can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing operation menu. This user currently has the same access level as the SLB operator. the Layer 4 Administrator can configure all parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus. with the exception of not being able to configure filters or bandwidth management. January 2006 . Password user SLB Operator The SLB Operator manages Web servers and other Internet ser. In addition to oper SLB Operator functions. slbadmin Layer 4 Operator Operator SLB Administrator Layer 4 Administrator l4admin Administrator admin NOTE – With the exception of the “admin” user.

[Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. “First-Time Configuration”). the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead. a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. the switch will disconnect your console or Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. Command Line History and Editing For a description of global commands.0. see “Menu Basics” on page 53. the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2. always available] NOTE – If you are accessing a user account or Layer 4 administrator account. and command line editing functions. you are given complete access to the switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference CLI Versus Setup Once the administrator password is verified. shortcuts. For information on changing this parameter. The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges. January 2006 31 . This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter. some menu options will not be available. see “System Configuration” on page 261. which can be set from 1 to 10080 minutes. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration. If the switch has already been configured. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 320506-A.” Idle Timeout By default.

January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference 32 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 320506-A.0.

you can use the Switch Setup Utility in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000-SSL Series Quick Setup Guide (part number 215102-A) instead for setting up the Switch and the SSL Processor. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. Information Needed For Setup Setup requests the following information: Basic system information Date & time Whether to use BOOTP or not Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not Management port configuration Optional configuration for each port Speed. January 2006 .CHAPTER 2 First-Time Configuration To help with the initial process of configuring your switch. flow control. and negotiation mode (as appropriate) Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate) 33 320506-A. the Nortel Application Switch Operating System software includes a Setup utility. duplex. Then return to this guide for configuration and management information on your Switch. NOTE – If you are configuring a 2000-SSL Series Switch. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch. you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. Using the Setup Utility Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration.

the login prompt will appear as shown below. Connect to the switch console. a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided. and gateway IP address for each IP static route Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not Starting Setup When You Log In The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. Enter Password: 2. To ease the configuration of the switch. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 515. January 2006 . Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]: NOTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful. 2004 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. and VLAN for each IP interface IP addresses for up to four default gateways Destination.2 Command Reference Optional configuration for each VLAN Name of VLAN Which ports are included in the VLAN Optional configuration of IP parameters IP address. subnet mask. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings. and broadcast address. subnet mask.0. the system prompts: Connected to Nortel Application Switch 2424 18:44:05 Mon April 12. 1. 34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. Enter admin as the default administrator password.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. After connecting. If the factory default configuration is detected. or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead. the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings.

Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. or n to bypass the Setup facility.0. January 2006 35 .2 Command Reference 3.

Otherwise enter n. Restarting Setup You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt: # /cfg/setup Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration When Setup is started. press <Enter>. the system prompts: "Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time.2 Application Guide. and IP interfaces. see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System23. Next. For more information on configuring VLANs. Enter the year of the current date at the prompt: System Date: Enter year [2004]: Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning. Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. the system will prompt: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter n to abort Setup.0. January 2006 . the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information. BOOTP.0. press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] -----------------------------------------------------------Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n] 1. When you abort Setup. To keep the current year. Management port. Spanning Tree. VLANs. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session. “00” is considered 2000.2 Command Reference Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually Stopping Setup To abort the Setup utility. Port Speed/Mode.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. or by restarting the Setup facility. 2. you can configure them later using the configuration menus. 36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A.

press <Enter>. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt: System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]: Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23.0. press <Enter>. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt: Enter minutes [55]: Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second. The system displays the date and time settings: System clock set to 18:55:36 Mon April 12. Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt: System Date: Enter month [4]: Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. press <Enter>.2 Command Reference 3. 6. January 2006 37 . 4. press <Enter>. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt: Enter day [12]: Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. Enable or disable the use of BOOTP at the prompt: BootP Option: Current BOOTP usage: Enter new BOOTP usage [d/e]: disabled Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. To keep the current minute. To keep the current hour. 2004. To keep the current month. 7. To keep the current day.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 8. 5. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt: Enter seconds [37]: Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. press <Enter>.

subnet mask. press <Enter>. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt: Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree OFF? [y/n] Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree. or enter e to enable the use of BOOTP. some of the prompts and options may be different.2 Command Reference If available on your network. If desired. Setup Part 2: Port Configuration NOTE – The port configuration options shown in these steps are for the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2424. 9. press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 41. BOOTP must be disabled however. To skip port configuration. 38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. January 2006 . enter the number of the port you wish to configure. Enter d to disable the use of BOOTP. 1. or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on. Select the port to configure. or skip port configuration at the prompt: Port Config: Enter port number: (1-28) If you wish to change settings for individual ports. broadcast address. you will be prompted for IP address. and other management port options. a BOOTP server can supply the switch with IP parameters so that you do not have to enter them manually. When configuring port options for other switches. set up the management port: Management Port Config: Configure management port? [y/n] y If you answer y to configure the management port. before the system will prompt for IP parameters. To keep the current setting. default gateway.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 2.0.

6. If appropriate. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. If appropriate. To keep the current setting. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port flow control. off to disable it. or enter any to have the switch auto-sense the port speed. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. or none to turn flow control off for the port. To keep the current setting. press <Enter>. the system prompts: Port Mode: Current port 1 mode setting: any Enter new speed ["full"/"half"/"any"] Enter full for full-duplex. If appropriate. January 2006 39 .0. press <Enter>. both to enable both. press <Enter>.2 Command Reference 3. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. half for half-duplex. the system prompts: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. tx for transmit flow control. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port duplex mode.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable autonegotiation. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. or any to have the switch auto-negotiate. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. the system prompts: Fast Link Configuration: Port Speed: Current Port 1 speed setting: 10/100 Enter new speed ["10"/"100"/"any"]: Enter the port speed from the options available. 4. 5. To keep the current setting. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. If appropriate. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port speed.

January 2006 . configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. the system prompts: Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current TAG flag: disabled Enter new TAG status [d/e]: Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port. the system prompts: Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. press <Enter> without specifying any port. press <Enter>. If configuring VLANs. Otherwise. The system prompts you to configure the next port: Enter port number: When you are through configuring ports. 9. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. tx for transmit flow control. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector.2 Command Reference 7.0. If appropriate. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable port autonegotiation. To keep the current setting. off to disable it. 10. or none to turn flow control off for the port. 8. repeat the steps in this section. both to enable both. 40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. If appropriate.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1. configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters. To keep the current setting. press <Enter>. enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector.

NULL at end: Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 42.2 Command Reference Setup Part 3: VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1. The right angle prompt appears: > For each additional port in the VLAN. Pending new VLAN name: "VLAN 2" Enter new VLAN name. 1. 4. NULL at end: If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt: VLAN is newly created. press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 42. or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. without quotes: Entering a new VLAN name is optional. Repeat this until all ports for the VLAN being configured are entered. The system prompts you to define the first port in the VLAN: Define ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter port numbers one per line. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN. To use the pending new VLAN name. type the port number and press <Enter> to move to the next line. 2.0. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. press <Enter>. 3. January 2006 41 . Select the VLAN to configure.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Enter the VLAN port numbers. press <Enter> without specifying any port. NULL at end: Type the first port number to add to the current VLAN and press <Enter>. To skip VLAN configuration.

2 Command Reference Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used). At the prompt.0 To keep the current setting. For the specified IP interface. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provides the switch with an IP presence on your network. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the Nortel Application Switch. January 2006 .0. skip to Setup Part 5: Final Steps. enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0.0 42 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. or skip interface configuration at the prompt: IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256) NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Nortel Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255. enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation: Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0.0. 2. 1. Select the IP interface to configure.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Otherwise.0. To skip IP interface configuration. press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 43. When all VLANs have been configured. If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces. press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN. press <Enter>. enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure. the system prompts for IP parameters.0. 3. Setup Part 4: IP Configuration If BOOTP was enabled back in Part 1.0. if you disabled BOOTP. IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs.

0.0.0 To keep the current setting. This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1: Current VLAN: Enter new VLAN: 1 Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs. enter y to enable the IP interface. 5. If configuring VLANs. select a default gateway for configuration. The system prompts you to configure another interface: Enter interface number: (1-256) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. To skip default gateway configuration. Default Gateways 1. At the prompt. press <Enter>. enter the broadcast IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current broadcast address: Enter new broadcast address: 0. or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting. When all interfaces have been configured.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. or n to leave it disabled: Enable IP interface? [y/n] 7. specify a VLAN for the interface. press <Enter>. or skip default gateway configuration: IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. press <Enter> without specifying any interface number. press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 44. 6. At the prompt.2 Command Reference To keep the current setting. At the prompt. 4.0. January 2006 43 .

January 2006 . enter n and proceed to Step 2. IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch. 2. 1. enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing: Enable IP forwarding? [y/n] Enter y to enable IP forwarding. At the prompt. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters. can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically.0. IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch.To keep the current setting.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting. At the prompt. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. When all default gateways have been configured.0.2 Command Reference 2. Routing on more complex networks. This eliminates the need to bounce inter-subnet communication off an external router device. At the prompt.0 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. where subnets may not have a direct presence on the Nortel Application Switch.0. 3. enable or disable the RIP supply: Enable RIP supply? [y/n] 44 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. At the prompt. or n to leave it disabled: Enable default gateway? [y/n] 4. To disable IP forwarding. press <Enter> without specifying any number. press <Enter>. enter the IP address for the selected default gateway: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. enter y to enable the default gateway.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 47. Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes. decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes: Review the changes made? [y/n] Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. 4. or n to continue. 5. decide whether to restart Setup or continue: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning. We recommend that you review the changes.2 Command Reference Setup Part 5: Final Steps 1. If you do not apply or save the changes.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the system prompts whether to abort them: Abort all changes? [y/n] Enter y to discard the changes. January 2006 45 . Enter n to continue without saving the changes. When prompted. Changes are normally applied. 2. NOTE – After initial configuration is complete. When prompted. 3. Enter n to return to the Apply the changes? prompt. decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt: Apply the changes? [y/n] Enter y to apply the changes. decide whether to make the changes permanent: Save changes to flash? [y/n] Enter y to save the changes to flash. Changes are normally saved at this point. Next. or n to continue without applying. At the prompt.0.

Otherwise apply and save after “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” on page 46. Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 1.0. >> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet ena 2. >> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm 3. such as Nortel ASEM. >> System# apply >> System# save 46 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. Set SNMP read or write community string. Enable telnet. refer to “SNMPv3 Configuration Menu” on page 276 of this manual. they are public and private respectively. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through any telnet application. >> System# apply >> System# save Optional Setup for Telnet Support NOTE – This step is optional. January 2006 . 1. Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s). By default. Enable SNMP and select one of the options. NOTE – If you need to configure SNMPv3.2 Command Reference Optional Setup for SNMP Support NOTE – This step is optional. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on using SNMPbased tools. >> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp (disabled/read-only/read-write) [d/r/w]: 2.

enter n to disable it.2 Command Reference If your network uses Routing Interface Protocol (RIP). and configuration commands. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. information. Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. follow this procedure: 1. When RIP is enabled. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. Passwords cannot be modified from the user command mode. NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. To change both the user password and the administrator password. you must login using the administrator password. To change the default password. RIP listen is set by default. Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus.0. January 2006 47 . 2. enter y to enable the RIP supply. The default password for the administrator account is admin. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. From the Main Menu. Otherwise. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.

Port Menu pmirr .Step by step configuration set up dump .Security Menu setup . use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys The System Menu is displayed. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 . [Configuration Menu] sys .Port Mirroring Menu bwm .Layer 3 Menu slb . [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur - Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters 48 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A.Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg .Restore current configuration from tftp server 3. From the Configuration Menu.0.System-wide Parameter Menu port .2 Command Reference The Configuration Menu is displayed.Layer 2 Menu l3 .Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .

7. The default password for the user account is user.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt: Enter new administrator password: 8.2 Command Reference 4. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt: Changing ADMINISTRATOR password. you can view switch information and statistics. January 2006 49 . again. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch. at the prompt: Re-enter new administrator password: 9. Enter the new administrator password. use the following path to select the User menu: System# access/user 5. From the System menu. as shown in the following procedure. but you can’t make configuration changes.0. Select the administrator password. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. validation required. System# user/admpw 6.. This password cannot be changed from the user account. Through a user account.. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A.

Enter the new user password at the prompt: Enter new user password: 7. 2. at the prompt: Re-enter new user password: 8.0. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save 50 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. From the Configuration Menu.. Enter the new user password. From the Main Menu. Select the user password. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg 3. Only the administrator can change the user password. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. Changing USER password. validation required..Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority. System# access/user/usrpw 5. Enter current administrator password: 6. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt. January 2006 .2 Command Reference 1. again.

Select the Layer 4 administrator password: System# l4apw 4. To change the default password. Connect to the switch and log in using the administrator account.0. again. January 2006 51 . The default password for the Layer 4 administrator account is l4admin. To change any switch password. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. Enter the new administrator password. Through a Layer 4 administrator account. at the prompt: Re-enter new L4 administrator password: Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A. use the following path to access the user command: Main# /cfg/sys/access/user 3. Passwords cannot be modified from the Layer 4 administrator account or the user account. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. validation required. you can view all switch information and statistics. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. From the Main Menu. follow this procedure: 1. 5.. Enter the new Layer 4 administrator password at the prompt: Enter new L4 administrator password: 6.2 Command Reference Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password The Layer 4 administrator has limited control of the switch. Enter the current administrator password (not the Layer 4 administrator password) at the prompt: Changing L4 ADMINISTRATOR password.. 2. you must login using the administrator password.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save 52 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 320506-A.2 Command Reference 7.0.

In addition. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available. the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI.CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The Nortel Application Switch’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. along with a summary of what each command will do. the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands. 53 320506-A. Some features are not available under the user login. The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login. To make the CLI easy to use. January 2006 . Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu.

VRRP. and more. IF. ARP. DNS. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint ssl diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu SSl Accelerator Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. 54 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 320506-A. TCP. Included are port. and for resetting the switch when necessary. performing port mirroring. Layer 4 settings. Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service.2 Command Reference NOTE – The ssl option is only visible on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000-SSL Series. IP. SNMP. UDP. Operations Command Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory. and Layer 4 statistics. ICMP. and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. January 2006 . Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. selecting configuration blocks. routing. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login.0. always available] Menu Summary Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs.

January 2006 55 . SSL Accelerator Menu This menu is used for Chapter 3: Menu Basics 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch.2 Command Reference Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes. and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables.

When used without a value.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The default is 24 lines. Show any pending configuration changes. Print current menu . or print . Apply pending configuration changes. exit or quit 56 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 320506-A. Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last “apply” command.0. For help on a specific command. Otherwise. or up / lines diff apply save revert Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu. Go up one level in the menu structure. go to the Main Menu. January 2006 . or command separator ! Execute command from history Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ? command or help . Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. a summary of the global commands is displayed. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory. and for applying and saving configuration changes. Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. Display the current menu. If placed at the beginning of a command.. These commands are useful for obtaining online help. type help. You will see the following screen: Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save ping ping6 traceroute history pushd popd pwd quit revert telnet who The following are used to navigate the menu structure: .. the current setting is displayed. Move up one menu level / Top menu if first. Exit from the command line interface and log out.2 Command Reference Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. navigating through menus. When used without the command parameter. this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line.

1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown. msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts.for ping6 global unicast address ping6 fe80::201:2ff:feb1:10e2 20 . the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response.0. If the management port is used. specify the -m or -mgmt option. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station. The format is as follows: <hostname>|<IP address> [port] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data]. specify the -m or -mgmt option. the current setting is displayed. The format is as follows: ping6 <IP6 address> <Interface number> For example: ping6 3001::1234 . By default.2 Command Reference Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ping Action Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. This command is used to telnet out of the switch. maxhops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices). the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. but no menus. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 379). This command brings up the history of the last 10 commands. By default. ping6 traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history Chapter 3: Menu Basics 320506-A. When used without a value. Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries <(1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m| -mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. Display the command path used to reach the current menu. By default. specify the -m or -mgmt option. January 2006 57 . As with ping. Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. If the management port is used.for ping6 link-local address Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32). If the management port is used. Use this command to verify an IP address and interface connectivity across the network. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect.

0.2 Command Reference Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command pushd Action This command stores the current location of the menu tree. Optionally.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. a new path to change to can be specified. popd who 58 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 320506-A. January 2006 . The format is as follows: pushd [<new_path>] This command takes the user one level back to the menu location stored by the last pushd command. This command displays the currently logged user’s session information.

Move cursor to the end of the command line. The recalled command can be entered as is. (Also the up arrow key.) Recall the previous command from the history list. (Also the left arrow key. or edited using the options below.) Recall the next command from the history list. This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 10 commands. Move the cursor to the beginning of command line. or edited using the options below.2 Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface. The recalled command can be entered as is. Insert new characters at the cursor position. (Also the down arrow key.) Move the cursor back one position to the left. Repeat the last entered command. Delete one character at the cursor position. <Ctrl-n> <Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> <Ctrl-f> <Backspace> <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys Chapter 3: Menu Basics 320506-A. This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 10 commands. Redraw the screen.0. January 2006 59 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options Option history !! !n <Ctrl-p> Description Display a numbered list of the last 10 previously entered commands. (Also the right arrow key. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list. (Also the Delete key.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position. Clear the entire line.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line. you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes.

Configuration ranges allow the user to set common parameters on a range of similar items on the switch like ports or VLANs. the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. For example. You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want. the command shown below would set the PVID of ports 1 through 10 to 5. January 2006 . that command will be supplied on the command line. For example. waiting to be entered.0. For example. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line. the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows: Main# cfg/l2/stg/port Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. separated by forward slashes (/). Configuration Ranges Most commands now support the use of configuration ranges.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts Command Stacking As a shortcut. you can type multiple commands on a single line. Main# /cfg/port 1-10/pvid 5 60 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 320506-A. the command shown above could also be entered as follows: Main# c/l2/st/p Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>. Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed. the currently active menu will be displayed.

Layer 3 Information Menu slb . 61 320506-A. /info Information Menu [Information Menu] sys .Show Security status link . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor- mation.System Information Menu l2 . see page 63. For details.Layer 4-7 Information Menu bwm .Bandwidth Management Information Menu security .Layer 2 Information Menu l3 .Show port information swkey . see page 89. Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays system menu information. January 2006 . see page 106. To view menu options. l3 Displays the Layer 3 information menu.Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1 on page 61.Show enabled software features dump .Show link status port .CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu. with pointers to where detailed information can be found. For details.

see page 147. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. To view a sample. see page 132. including: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership For details.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. including: Port number Port speed (10. see page 141. To view menu options. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. 10/100. For details. link Displays configuration information about each port. If you want to capture dump data to a file.2 Command Reference Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Layer 4 Information Menu. For details see page 150. swkey Displays a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. see page 146. 62 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. yes. January 2006 . security Displays current UDP blast settings and the security status of the port. port Displays port status information. or 1000) Duplex mode (half. full. For details. see page 150. bwm Displays Bandwidth Management information. depending on your configuration). 100. or auto) Link status (up or down) For details. see page 149.

see page 65. if one is configured See page 74 for a sample output. See page 76 for a sample output and detailed information.2 Command Reference /info/sys System Information Menu [System Menu] snmpv3 general time log slog mgmt sonmp capacity fan temp encrypt user dump SNMPv3 Information Menu Show general system information Show date and time Show last 64 syslog messages Show last 64 syslog messages saved in FLASH Show management port information Show SONMP topology table information Show switch capacity information Show switch fan status Show switch temperature sensor status Show switch encryption licenses Show current user status Dump all system information Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu.0. and date. log Displays last 64 syslog messages.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Management Processor Board Hardware. general Displays general system information including: System information like time. time Displays the current time. January 2006 63 . and Fast Ethernet Board Hardware Software image file and version number Configuration name Log-in banner. day. Switch model name and number How long the switch has been up Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor Internal SSL Processor MAC Address if the switch is 2424-SSL IP address of IP interface #1 Hardware order number and part numbers of the Mainboard Hardware. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. To view the menu options.

January 2006 . Filters.0. Layer 4-7. user Displays the current user names. See page 77 for a sample output. encrypt Displays the current encryption licenses. 64 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. dump Displays all system information. This output displays the maximum switch capacity for the various applications and services that the switch supports. capacity gen|bwm|l2|l3|slb|port Displays the switch capacity information. BGP. General switch information. GSLB. Route Maps. Layer 3. The output contains capacity information about Layer 2. Health Checks. Bandwidth Management. mgmt Displays Management port information. Network Filters. VRRP. See page 78 for detailed information. which includes Server Load Balancing.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. OSPF.2 Command Reference Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage slog Displays the last 64 syslog messages that are saved in flash. See page 79 for detailed information. sonmp Displays SONMP topology table information. RIP. and SNMPv3. See page 80 for a sample output. fan Displays the fan status of the switch. temp Displays the temperature status of the switch sensors. See page 84 for a sample output.

view Displays information about view. comm Displays information about the community table information.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.Show targetParams table information notify . group Displays information about the group that includes.Show community table information taddr . mask and type of view. see page 68.Show notify table information dump .Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information access .Show targetAddr table information tparam . To view a sample.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. To view the table. see page 69.Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information comm . To view a sample.Show all SNMPv3 information Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm Displays User Security Model (USM) table information. To view a sample. the security model. sub tress. To view a sample. see page 70. taddr Displays the Target Address table information. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. see page 66.Show usmUser table information view . January 2006 65 . and group name. see page 67.Show vacmAccess table information group . see page 69. user name. access Displays View-based Access Control information. To view a sample. [SNMPv3 Information Menu] usm .

DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA. which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated the privacy protocol. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5.2 Command Reference Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage tparam Displays the Target parameters table information. dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information. January 2006 . To view a sample. NO PRIVACY 66 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. see page 71. /info/sys/snmpv3/usm SNMPv3 USM User Table Information The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of messages. To view a sample. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH. To view a sample. see page 72. The USM user table contains information like: the user name a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model an authentication protocol.0. notify Displays the Notify table information. usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH. see page 73.

3. January 2006 67 .6. View Name ----------------org v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only Subtree -----------------1.1.18 Mask -------------Type -------included included excluded excluded excluded Table 4-5 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view) Field View Name Subtree Description Displays the name of the view. Mask Type Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.0. This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol.2 Command Reference Table 4-4 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm) Field User Name Protocol Description This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch.3 1.16 1. /info/sys/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Table Information The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.6. The software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA.1.6.3.6.6.0.3.6. Nortel Application Switch Operating System23.3 1.3. Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string.2 supports DES algorithm for privacy. Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view. Displays the bit mask.15 1.3.3. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names.1.

The options are: exact and prefix. authNoPriv. Displays the prefix that is configured to match the values. a context. For example. or SNMPv2 or USM. Displays the security model used. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.---------admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org Table 4-6 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access) Field Group Name Prefix Model Level Description Displays the name of group. January 2006 .-----. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access. or authPriv. The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects. and a message type.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/access SNMPv3 Access Table Information The access control sub system provides authorization services. Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV 68 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group. a write-view and a notify-view. which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view. Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. noAuthNoPriv.0. Displays the match for the contextName. This group's access rights are determined by a read-view. security information. The vacmAccessTable maps a group name. SNMPv1. Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects. for example.-----. Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access.----------.------.

and SNMPv3. /info/sys/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Information This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine.-------------------.---------.---------trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Index Name User Name Tag ---------. Displays the access name of the group.0. The group is identified by a group name. which is any one of: USM. Sec Model ---------snmpv1 usm usm usm User Name ------------------------------v1v2only admin adminmd5 adminsha Group Name -------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp admingrp Table 4-7 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group) Field Sec Model User Name Group Name Description Displays the security model used.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Table Information A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. January 2006 69 . SNMPv1. SNMPv2. Displays the name for the group.

This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.--------------.2 Command Reference Table 4-8 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm) Field Index Name User Name Tag Description Displays the unique index value of a row in this table Displays the community string. which represents the configuration.25. Displays the SNMP UDP port number. /info/sys/snmpv3/taddr SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Displays the community tag.81. January 2006 . The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable.--------------trap1 47. Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name.0. which is stored in the SNMP engine.---------. Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------. but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry. This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param Table 4-9 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/ snmpv3/taddr) Field Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params Description Displays the locally arbitrary. Displays the transport addresses.---. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address. 70 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.

0. which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information Name MP Model --------------. Displays the securityName.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. January 2006 71 . Sec Level Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry. Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support. Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry.-------v1v2param snmpv2c User Name -------------v1v2only Sec Model --------snmpv1 Sec Level --------noAuthNoPriv Table 4-10 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/ tparam) Field Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Description Displays the locally arbitrary.

is selected.-------------------v1v2trap v1v2trap Table 4-11 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify) Field Name Tag Description The locally arbitrary.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Information Name Tag -------------------.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 . If this entry contains a value of zero length. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry. no entries are selected. 72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.0. but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry. This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable.

-------------------. NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5.3 v1v2only 1.3.---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------.--------.6.6.--------------.------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm admin usm adminsha Group Name ----------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------.---.---------. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH.3.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/dump SNMPv3 Dump Information usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH. NO PRIVACY vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------.------.3 v1v2only 1.16 v1v2only 1.-----.-----.1.3. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA.-------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.---------.------- Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.6.---------.3.0.6.6.18 Mask ------------ Type -------------included included excluded excluded excluded vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------.1. January 2006 73 .3.--------------org 1.-----------------.--------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------.6.1.15 v1v2only 1.-----admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------.-------.3.------.-------.

2 Command Reference /info/sys/general General System Information On a Nortel Application Switch 2424: System Information at 6:56:53 Thu Sep 15.0.0. 2005 (reset from Telnet) Last apply: unknown Last save: 5 MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 IP (If 1) Address: 0.1 (FLASH image2).0 Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Serial No: ABCDE600MJ Rev: Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P314090-A Rev: Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 09 00 00 00 Note .0. active configuration.0. January 2006 . 74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. Last boot: 18:28:09 Sun Sep 11.When the measured temperature inside the switch EXCEEDs the high threshold at 62 degree Celsius a syslog message will be generated. 11 hours. 28 minutes and 34 seconds. Software Version 23.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 2005 (DST) Time zone: America/Canada/Atlantic-Nova-Scotia (GMT offset -4:00) Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 3 days.

Software Version 23.1 (FLASH image2).0.0 Internal SSL Processor MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:6f Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Serial No:ABCDE600MJ Rev: Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P314090-A Rev: Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 09 00 00 00 Note .0. 28 minutes and 34 seconds. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold.0. 2005 (DST) Time zone: America/Canada/Atlantic-Nova-Scotia (GMT offset -4:00) Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL Switch is up 3 days.When the measured temperature inside the switch EXCEEDs the high threshold at 62 degree Celsius a syslog message will be generated.0. 2005 (reset from Telnet) Last apply: unknown Last save: 5 MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 IP (If 1) Address: 0. active configuration.2 Command Reference On a Nortel Application Switch 2424-SSL: System Information at 6:56:53 Thu Sep 15.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats and the temperature gets to 100oC. 11 hours. Last boot: 18:28:09 Sun Sep 11. NOTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds 60oC. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. Information about fan failures will also be displayed if one or more fans are not functioning. January 2006 75 .

81.2 Command Reference /info/sys/time Show System Time >> Main# /info/sys/time 12:52:49 Fri Jul 8. depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of.27.25.1 Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.81.81.27.22.0.1 Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.22.4 Nov 19 16:54:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 17:20:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.27.4 Nov 19 14:44:02 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:15:06 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:15:20 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Nov 19 16:18:44 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:19:37 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Nov 19 16:19:57 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:34:35 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.80.22. January 2006 .1 operational Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47. new root bridge Nov 19 13:52:03 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.27.4 Nov 19 17:26:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.22. EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately 76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. as shown below.1 operational Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.81.80. included in text form as a prefix to the log message.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:21:27 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47. One of eight different prefixes is used. 2005 (DST) Time zone: America/Canada/Atlantic-Nova-Scotia DST on first Sunday of April at 02:00 DST off last Sunday of October at 02:00 /info/sys/log Show Last 64 Syslog Messages Date Time Criticality level Message Nov 19 12:16:51 ALERT stp: STG 1.22.4 Nov 19 16:39:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:39:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.49 Nov 19 17:31:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it.1 enabled Nov 19 14:38:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.80.80.80.81.

80.1 operational Aug 24 14:43:43 NOTICE Aug 24 14:49:50 NOTICE Aug 24 14:51:38 NOTICE Aug 24 14:57:30 NOTICE Aug 24 15:05:54 NOTICE Aug 24 15:11:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:52 NOTICE ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: admin login from host 47.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.80.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.25.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:57:53 ALERT gateway 47.81.22.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.1 Aug 20 13:58:33 NOTICE 47.1 operational Aug 20 13:58:23 ALERT gateway 47.81.80.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81. January 2006 77 .12 switch reset from CLI Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.25.22.22.0.22.81.80.25.25.1 Aug 20 13:57:57 NOTICE 47.80.2 Command Reference CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or error operations WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debut-level message /info/sys/slog Last 64 Saved Syslog Messages Aug 20 13:54:21 NOTICE 47.

22. full.255.23.2 Command Reference /info/sys/mgmt Management Port Information Speed ----100 Duplex -----full Link ---up MAC address: 00:01:81:2e:a4:8d Interface information: 47.80.0.255 Use this command to display Management port information on an Nortel Application Switch including: Port speed (10/100) Duplex mode (half. any.251 255.80. or auto) Link (Up or down) MAC Address of the system IP address of the Interface IP address of the gateway.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.23.80.0 Gateway information: 47. 78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.1 47.254. January 2006 .

--47. The current state of the sender of the topology message.25 259 47. devices on the network exchange multicast packets namely: flatnet hellos and segment hellos.23.When SONMP is enabled.25 260 47.----.23.----Alteon2224 true topChanged Passport1200 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat AlteonAD4 true topChanged Alteon184 true topChanged Chassis Type Table 4-12 SONMP Information Parameters Description Parameter Slot Port IP Address Seg ID Description Specifies the slot and port on which the topology message was received. Different devices may use different methods for representing the segment identifier. The MAC address of the sender of the topology message.22.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.241 257 50. This is the IP address of the sender of the topology message. As the network devices exchange information. The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message.80. January 2006 79 . the values are: topChanged—topology information has recently changed heartbeat—topology information unchanged. and is necessary so that a Nortel Application Switch can be discovered by the Nortel Enterprise Switch Manager.247 0 47. Mac Address Chassis Type Local Seg State Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. The “segment identifier” of the segment from which the remote agent send the topology message. Slot Port ----0 /0 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 Seg Id --------------. The IP address of the device is written into the hello packets. Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment (i.23. a topology table is built like the one shown below.23.1 770 47. new—sending agent is in new state.80.80.10.0. SONMP protocol is enabled on Nortel Application Switches using the /cfg/sys/ sonmp on command.1 263 IP address MAC address ----------------00:01:81:2e:a3:60 00:e0:16:7c:28:24 00:60:cf:81:54:28 00:60:cf:81:54:38 00:60:cf:43:a2:10 00:60:cf:46:d5:60 Local State Seg -----------------.e.2 Command Reference /info/sys/sonmp SONMP Information This command displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) topology table.80.80. not across a bridge) as the reporting agent.10.

80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A...2 Command Reference /info/sys/capacity System Capacity Information The following sample output from an Nortel Application Switch 2424 displays the maximum and currently enabled switch capacity for various services and applications from Layer 2-7. January 2006 .0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Maximum LAYER 2 FDB FDB per SP VLANs Static Trunk Groups LACP Trunk Groups Trunks per Trunk Group Spanning Tree Groups Port Teams Monitor Ports LAYER 3 IP Interfaces IP Gateways IP Routes Static Routes ARP Entries Static ARP Entries Local Nets DNS Servers BOOTP Servers RIP Interfaces OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF LSDB Interfaces Areas Summary Ranges Virtual Links Hosts Limit 16384 8192 1024 12 28 8 16 8 1 Current(Enabled) 54 1(1) 0(0) 16(1) 8(0) 256 4+255 4096 128 8192 128 5 2 2 256 256 3 16 3 128 12288 1(1) 1+0(1+0) 7 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) Continued.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference BGP Peers BGP Route Aggregators Route Maps Network Filters AS Filters VRRP Routers VRRP Router Groups VRRP Interfaces SLB (LAYER 4-7) Real Servers Server Groups Virtual Servers Virtual Services Real Services Real IDS Servers IDS Server Groups Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB Domains Services Local Servers Remote Servers Remote Sites Failovers per Remote Site Networks Geographical Regions Rules Metrics Per Rule DNS Persistence Cache Entries 16 16 32 256 8 1024 16 256 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0 1024 1024 1024 1024 8192 62 63 1024 8192 1024 1024 64 2 128 7 128 8 100000 0(0) 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 2(2) 0(0) 7(7) 0(1) 8(8) 100000(100000) Filters PIPs Scriptable Health Checks SNMP Health Checks Rules for URL Parsing SLB Sessions Number of Rports to Vport Domain Records Mapping Per Domain Record LAYER 4 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.PORTS Port # Client Server 2048 1024 64 5 1024 1048550 64 64 8 0(0) 0 0 0 1 0 0(0) Filter RTS Continued. January 2006 81 ...

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .2 Command Reference BWM Policies Contracts Groups Contracts per Group Time Policies per Contract Security Configuration source IP ACLs Bogon source IP ACLs Operations source IP ACLs Total source IP ACLs Configuration destination IP ACLs Operations destination IP ACLs Total destination IP ACLs IP DoS attacks prevention TCP DoS attacks prevention UDP DoS attacks prevention ICMP DoS attacks prevention IGMP DoS attacks prevention ARP DoS attacks prevention IPv6 DoS attacks prevention Total DoS attacks prevention UDP ports for UDP blast protection GENERAL Syslog hosts RADIUS servers NTP servers SMTP hosts Mnet/Mmask End Users Panic Dumps MP memory SP memory SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Users Views Access Groups Target Address Entries Target Params Entries 512 1024 32 8 2 0 1(1) 0 5120 8192 1024 14340 1024 1024 2052 17 18 6 5 3 5 2 56 5000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 1 1 5 10 2 128M 128M 16 128 32 16 16 0 0 0 1 0 3 5 2 0 0 82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.0.

0. /info/sys/encrypt Show encryption licenses AOS contains the following encryption licenses: BLOWFISH DES & 3DES MD5 RC4 SHA-1 /info/sys/user Show current user status Usernames: user slboper l4oper oper slbadmin l4admin admin enabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Always Enabled Note: there are pending config changes. /info/sys/temp Show switch temperature sensor status >> System# temp Temperature OK. Current User ID table: Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference /info/sys/fan Show switch fan status >> System# fan Fans OK. use "diff" to see them. January 2006 83 .

3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192. Software Version 23.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192.0. cannot contact reporting tcp open error.168. active configuration.0.0.0. cannot contact reporting tcp open error. 2005 (reset from Telnet) Last apply: unknown Last save: 5 MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 IP (If 1) Address: 0. Last 64 syslog messages: Sep 12 10:42:19 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 11:03:13 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 11:27:48 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 11:54:07 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 12:19:01 ERROR mgmt: Sep 12 13:57:54 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:02:58 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:07:27 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:10:03 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:19:44 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:59:20 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:08:06 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:09:43 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:15:08 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:15:32 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:58:30 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 16:00:02 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 17:56:01 ERROR mgmt: Sep 12 23:33:01 ERROR mgmt: Sep 13 5:10:01 ERROR mgmt: Sep 13 10:47:01 ERROR mgmt: Continued . cannot contact reporting tcp open error.168. cannot contact reporting server server server server server 84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.168.0.0.168.1 (FLASH image2). 33 minutes and 48 seconds.0.3 admin login from host 192. .3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH tcp open error.168. January 2006 .168.0.0.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH tcp open error. . cannot contact reporting admin login from host 192.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192. Last boot: 18:28:09 Sun Sep 11.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. 2005 (DST) Time zone: America/Canada/Atlantic-Nova-Scotia (GMT offset -4:00) Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL Switch is up 3 days.168.0. admin login from host 192.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192.When the measured temperature inside the switch EXCEEDs the high threshold at 62 degree Celsius a syslog message will be generated. 11 hours.168.0 Internal SSL Processor MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:6f Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Serial No: ABCDE600MJ Rev: Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P314090-A Rev: Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 09 00 00 00 Note .2 Command Reference /info/sys/dump System Information Dump System Information at 7:02:06 Thu Sep 15.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192.0.

cannot contact reporting server NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.0.168.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.0. January 2006 85 .3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.168.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.3 Continued .3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.168. cannot contact reporting server NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.0.0.168.168.0.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.168.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192. . cannot contact reporting server ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cannot contact reporting server ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.168. cannot contact reporting server NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.168.2 Command Reference Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep (5) Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep 13 16:24:00 13 22:01:00 14 3:38:00 14 9:15:00 14 10:23:04 14 10:23:05 needs to be 14 10:23:05 14 10:23:05 14 10:24:45 14 11:30:36 14 11:35:25 14 11:35:40 14 11:39:37 14 11:49:12 14 11:58:20 14 13:41:54 14 13:46:18 14 14:37:07 14 14:52:00 14 14:58:57 14 16:09:44 14 16:20:44 14 16:24:58 14 16:30:51 14 16:48:16 14 16:50:34 14 16:57:47 14 16:57:55 14 17:00:02 14 17:04:59 14 17:05:49 14 17:06:05 14 19:54:04 14 20:00:22 14 20:01:47 14 20:22:49 14 20:23:10 14 20:23:55 14 20:29:00 14 20:40:41 14 21:43:51 15 2:06:00 15 6:56:45 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error. cannot contact reporting server NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.0.168.168.168. the PVID for port 1 changed ERROR cli: Error: PVID 5 for port 1 is not created ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.0.0.0. .0.0.0. cannot contact reporting server ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.0.3 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.3 ERROR cli: Error: VLAN 5 doesn't exist.0.

3 Sep 9 9:23:27 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 9 10:32:10 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 9 13:37:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 9 13:38:07 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via BBI. January 2006 .168.3 Sep 8 10:57:42 ERROR cli: Error: IP interface 2 has no IP address configured Sep 8 10:57:42 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Sep 8 10:58:19 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Sep 8 10:58:20 INFO mgmt: Operational change made by Admin from Telnet:192.3 Sep 8 11:58:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 13:11:00 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.249. cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 0:25:00 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error. file 'AAS-23. cannot contact reporting server Sep 8 15:31:08 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.0.168. Sep 11 19:26:52 NOTICE mgmt: switch reset from CLI Continued .3 Sep 11 19:25:08 INFO mgmt: image2 downloaded from host 192.1.10. .3 Sep 8 15:31:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 18:48:00 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.3 Sep 8 10:48:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 10:49:32 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0. .img'.0.0.2 Command Reference Last 64 syslog messages saved in FLASH: Sep 8 10:44:06 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.0. cannot contact reporting server Sep 11 14:12:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error. cannot contact reporting server Sep 11 2:58:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error. cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 13:37:24 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.0. cannot contact reporting server Sep 10 4:30:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error. Sep 9 16:00:10 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168. cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 9:15:45 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192. cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 6:02:04 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error. cannot contact reporting server Sep 10 21:21:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.168. cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 22:53:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error. cannot contact reporting server Sep 11 19:21:27 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via TELNET from host 192.3 Sep 9 10:33:40 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 9 11:39:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.168.168.1 Sep 11 19:26:39 NOTICE mgmt: Next boot will use new image2.237 Sep 11 19:21:48 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192. software version 23.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.3 Sep 9 16:00:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 9 17:16:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.0. login since 10:56:59 Sep 8 10:58:33 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Sep 8 10:58:44 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 11:09:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.0-2000-AlteonOS.168.0.0.168.0.0.3.168. cannot contact reporting server Sep 10 15:44:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error. Sep 9 13:38:22 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via BBI. cannot contact reporting server Sep 10 10:07:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.3 Sep 8 10:50:18 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 10:57:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0. 86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.168. cannot contact reporting server Sep 11 8:35:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error.0.0.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.6.2 Command Reference Management port information: Speed ----100 Duplex -----half Link ---up MAC address: 00:03:24:6e:bd:3d Interface information: 192.3.0.6.3.1.13 255.0.6. January 2006 87 .168.1 192.1.1.15 v1v2only 1.3.3. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA.0.0 Gateway information: 192.6.255 Engine ID = 80:00:07:50:03:00:01:81:2E:BC:50 usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model ---------.18 vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------.------v1v2grp snmpv1 admingrp usm Protocol -------------------------------HMAC_MD5.255. Mask -------------- Type -----included included excluded excluded excluded Group Name ------------------------------v1v2grp admingrp admingrp Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm adminmd5 usm adminsha Continued .-----------------------------iso 1 v1v2only 1 v1v2only 1.6.0. .255.168.3.168. NO PRIVACY Level -----------noAuthNoPriv authPriv Match -----exact exact ReadV ---------iso iso WriteV ---------iso iso NotifyV -------v1v2only iso vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------. .3.6.16 v1v2only 1.-----. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH.

---.-------------------.0.-------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------.--------------.-------.-------------------.----.---------.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.----------------.--------------.------- 88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.----------------.--------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------.--------Slot IP address Seg MAC address Chassis Type Local State Port Id Seg ----.---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------.---------. January 2006 .2 Command Reference snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------.---.--------.

see page 93. see page 96. see page 102. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. stg <STG index to display or carriage return for all STGs> In addition to seeing if Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled. see page 90. cist Display the CIST information.0. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. For details.2 Command Reference /info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu [Layer 2 Menu] fdb lacp stg cist trunk vlan team dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Show STG information Show CIST information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Show port team information Dump all layer 2 information Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. For details. trunk When trunk groups are configured. you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State For details. January 2006 89 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For details.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Show all FDB entries 90 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.0. [Forwarding Database Menu] find .Show FDB entries referenced by a single SP dump . The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. January 2006 .2 Command Reference Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number to display or carriage return to display all VLANs> Displays VLAN configuration information. see page 103.Show FDB entries on a single port trunk . team Show port team information. dump Displays all Layer 2 information.Show FDB entries on a single VLAN refpt .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . including: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN For details.Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan . /info/l2/fdb Layer 2 FDB Information The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned.

For more information. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. 0 for "unknown"> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. trunk <trunk group number> Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk. You can also enter the MAC address using the format. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. port <port number. 08:00:20:12:34:56.0. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.2 Command Reference NOTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For example. Enter the MAC address using the format. Each SP supports up to 8K entries. see page 92. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. 080020123456. January 2006 91 . For example. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the FDB entries referenced by a single port. xxxxxxxxxxxx.

0. although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports.” If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF). 92 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. no outbound port is indicated. When in the trunking (TRK) state.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. When an address is in the unknown state. but has only been seen as a destination address. the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch.2 Command Reference /info/l2/fdb/dump Show All FDB Information MAC address VLAN Port State Referenced SPs Referenced ports ----------------. means that it has been learned by the switch.-------------. January 2006 .---. the port field represents the trunk group number. If the state is listed as a virtual server (VIP).----. refer to “Forwarding Database Options” on page 522.------------00:02:01:00:00:00 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:01 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:02 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:03 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:04 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:05 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:06 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:07 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:08 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:09 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0c 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state.---. Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB. the MAC address is for a virtual server router—a virtual router with the same IP address as a virtual server. the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK).

0.Show LACP aggregator information for the port .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. [LACP Menu] aggr port dump . January 2006 93 .Show LACP port information .Show all LACP ports information Table 4-15 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu Options (/info/ lacp) Command Syntax and Usage aggr <aggregator index 1 to max num ports> Displays information an LACP aggregator. dump Displays LACP information of all the ports. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. Use this command to verify the state of ports in an LACP trunk group.2 Command Reference /info/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu The following menu options display the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) information on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. To view a sample output. port <port index 1 to max num ports> Displays information of an LACP port. see page 96.

00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 Individual .1 ready .10 index 0 port 1 index 1 port 2 index 2 port 3 index 3 port 4 index 4 port 5 index 5 port 6 index 6 port 7 index 7 port 8 index 8 port 9 index 9 port 10 94 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.00:01:81:2e:a1:d1 Actor System Priority .300 Partner System Priority .32768 Partner System ID .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .2 Command Reference /info/lacp/aggr LACP Aggregator Information Aggregator Id 1 ---------------------------------------------MAC address .32768 Actor System ID .TRUE Number of Ports in aggr .FALSE Actor Admin Key .300 Actor Oper Key .00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 Partner Oper Key .0.

January 2006 95 .TRUE Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor System ID System Priority Admin Key Oper Key Port Number Port Priority Admin System Priority Oper System Priority Admin System ID Oper System ID Admin Key Oper Key Admin Port Number Admin Port Priority Oper Port Number Oper Port Priority 00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 32768 300 300 1 32768 0 32768 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 0 1 0 0 4 32768 Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Actor Admin Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:FALSE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Actor Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:TRUE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Partner Admin Port state Partner Oper Port state .0x0 Long FALSE FALSE Aggregation: Distributing: TRUE FALSE Long Aggregation: TRUE Distributing: FALSE TRUE TRUE Continued Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /info/lacp/port LACP Port Information port 1 ---------------------------------------------lacp_enabled .TRUE lacp_admin_enabled .0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

FALSE Collection and Distribution state turned ON! Rx machine state Mux machine state Periodic machine state .LACP_PERIODIC_NO_STATE 96 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. January 2006 .0 ready_n .0 Attached Aggregator ID .FALSE ntt .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.LACP_MUX_DETACHED_STATE .FALSE selected .TRUE Selected Aggregator ID .0.2 Command Reference Individual .LACP_RX_INIT_STATE .Unselcted port_moved .

January 2006 97 .2 Command Reference /info/lacp/dump LACP Dump Information port attached trunk aggr ------------------------------------------------------------------1 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 2 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 3 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 4 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 5 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 6 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 7 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 8 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 9 active 300 300 n 32768 --10 active 300 300 n 32768 --11 active 300 300 n 32768 --12 active 300 300 n 32768 --13 active 300 300 n 32768 --14 off 14 14 n 32768 --15 off 15 15 n 32768 --16 off 16 16 n 32768 --17 off 17 17 n 32768 --18 off 18 18 n 32768 --19 off 19 19 n 32768 --20 off 20 20 n 32768 --21 off 21 21 n 32768 --22 off 22 22 n 32768 --23 off 23 23 n 32768 --24 off 24 24 n 32768 --25 off 25 25 n 32768 --26 off 26 26 n 32768 --27 off 27 27 n 32768 --28 off 28 28 n 32768 --lacp adminkey operkey selected prio Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.0. you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time 98 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled.2 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). NOTE – Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.------- 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 The switch software uses the IEEE 802. January 2006 .2 Command Reference /info/l2/stg Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information When multiple paths exist on a network. Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.

The hello time parameter specifies. The state field shows the current state of the port. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. January 2006 99 . The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. FORWARDING. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The forward delay parameter specifies. Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Priority (bridge) Hello Description The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. LEARNING. in seconds. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. The aging time parameter specifies. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The maximum age parameter specifies. MaxAge FwdDel Aging priority (port) Cost State Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. in seconds. Generally speaking.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. or DISABLED. the lower the path cost. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. in seconds. LISTENING. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). in seconds. The state field can be either BLOCKING. the faster the port.2 Command Reference You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State Designated Bridge Designated Port The following table describes the STP parameters.

Designated port 100 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. a physical port number four with bridge priority 32768 will be displayed as 32678+4=32772. This bridge is displayed as character string starting with the bridge priority (1-65535) followed by a hyphen and six byte MAC address of that switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The designated port identifies a physical port.2 Command Reference Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued) Parameter Designated Bridge Description The designated bridge resides closest to the root bridge and is responsible for forwarding packets from LAN towards the root bridge. January 2006 .0. For example. This is a number that is the numerical sum of bridge priority and the actual physical port number.

2 Command Reference /info/l2/cist Show common internal spanning tree (CIST) information NOTE – Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. -----------------------------------------------------------------Common Internal Spanning Tree: VLANs: 1 4-4094 Path-Cost 0 Path-Cost 0 Port MaxAge FwdDel 0 20 15 Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 Cist Regional Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 Parameters: Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops 32768 20 15 20 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Hello Type ----. January 2006 101 .0. 18 128 20000 DSB 19 128 20000 DSB 20 128 20000 DSB 21 128 20000 DSB 22 128 20000 DSB 23 128 20000 DSB 24 128 20000 DSB 25 128 20000 DSB 26 128 20000 DSB 27 128 20000 DSB 28 128 20000 DSB sslpro 128 20000 DISC DESG 8000-00:01:81:2e:bc:50 801d 2 Shared Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.---1 128 20000 DSB 2 128 20000 DSB 3 128 20000 DSB 4 128 20000 DSB 5 128 20000 DSB 6 128 20000 DSB 7 128 20000 DSB .-------.---------------------.---.--------.---.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups. .0.----.----. .

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. January 2006 . port state: 1: STG 1 forwarding 2: STG 1 forwarding NOTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding. combining their bandwidth to create a single. Trunk group 1. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together.0. 102 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. multi-link connections between Nortel Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices. When trunk groups are configured. larger virtual link.2 Command Reference /info/l2/trunk Trunk Group Information Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth. bw contract 1024.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. VLAN information includes: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Jumbo Frames Bandwidth Contract if BWM is enabled Source MAC Address Learning Port membership of the VLAN Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.----.-----. January 2006 103 .----Default VLAN ena n 1024 ena 1-28 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state. Port membership is represented in slot/port format.---.----.2 Command Reference /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------.

-----. January 2006 .0.----Default VLAN ena n 1024 ena 1-28 104 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.----.---.2 Command Reference /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.----.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.------ 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. /info/l2/dump Layer2 Dump Information Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.2 Command Reference /info/l2/team Status of port teams >> Layer 2# team All port teams are disabled. January 2006 105 .

see page 107.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. or 16 for infinite hops) The IP interface that the route uses For details. see page 112. and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes. For details.2 Command Reference /info/l3 Layer3 Information Menu [Layer 3 Menu] route route6 arp nbrcache bgp ospf ip vrrp dump IP Routing Information Menu IP6 Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu IP6 Neighbor Cache Information Menu BGP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Dump all layer 3 information Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu. nbrcache IP6 Neighbor Cache Menu. subnet mask. ospf Displays OSPF routing information menu. 106 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. see page 115. To view menu options. Using the options of this menu. bgp Displays BGP Information Menu. To view menu options. the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: Route destination IP address. For details. route6 IP6 Routing Information Menu. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops.0. January 2006 . see page 110. see page 117. To view menu options. see page 119.

IP address.4.Show dump .44)> Displays routes to a single gateway. and operational status. you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch.4.Show gw . Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. subnet mask. gateway number. IP information. /info/l3/route IP Routing Information [IP Routing Menu] find . 192.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.17. and health status IP forwarding information: Enable status. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use. For a description of IP routing types.2 Command Reference Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ip Displays IP Information. IP address. lnet and lmask Port status vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu. see page 127.17. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type. dump Displays all Layer 3 information. 192. includes: IP interface information: Interface number.101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address. January 2006 107 . gw <default gateway address (such as.Show if . VLAN number. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.Show tag . For details.Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes Using the commands listed below. see Table 4-19 on page 109.Show type . broadcast address. For details.0. see page 126.

0 47.0.255.255.23.0.80.0.255.255.0.0.255.0 multicast addr * 224.255. January 2006 .0 47.--------------.255 broadcast broadcast 108 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.23. NOTE – The total number of interfaces on a Nortel Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255.0.249 direct fixed 1 * 47.0.23.255. /info/l3/route/dump Show All IP Route Information Status code: * .80. dump Displays all routes configured in the switch.255 0.255.0.-* 0.0.80.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.0.0.6 255.80.255.0.0 multicast addr * 255.----.0.23.255 255.------------.255.22.0 0. see Table 4-20 on page 109.255 255.0.2 Command Reference Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Displays routes of a single tag.0.255.0 224.255.0.254.0 0.0.0.0.--------.80.0 0.255.255 255.0 255.0.249 255.0.1 indirect static 1 * 47.0.255 47. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays routes on a single interface.5 255.0 martian martian * 224.0. see page 108.255 47.255 0. For a description of IP routing types.22.0 martian martian * 224.0.255.80.0 255.0.255.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.80.249 local addr 1 * 47.23.255 broadcast broadcast 1 * 127. For more information.

The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). Table 4-19 IP Routing Type Parameters (/info/l3/route/dump/type) Parameter indirect direct local broadcast martian multicast Description The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.0. Indicates a multicast route. The address is a static route which has been configured on the Nortel Application Switch.2 Command Reference Type Parameters The following table describes the Type parameters. Tag Parameters The following table describes the Tag parameters. The address belongs to a filtered group. The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Indicates a broadcast address. Packets to this destination are discarded. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. January 2006 109 . Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out. Indicates a route destination that is a virtual server IP address. Table 4-20 IP Routing Tag Parameters (info/l3/route/tag) Parameter fixed static addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian vip Description The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch. VIP routes are needed to advertise virtual server IP addresses via BGP. The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Indicates a broadcast route.

is not shown for each interface to avoid too many network entries in the table. The IPv6 routing table stores routes it learns from network traffic and pre-configured. January 2006 .0. static routes. Since each link-local interface is shown with an entry prefix of /128.2 Command Reference /info/l3/route6 IPv6 Routing Information Menu This menu provides a mechanism for viewing IPv6 routing information.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the link-local network. NOTE – Presently there is no mechanism for clearing this IPv6 routing table.. 110 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.Show all routes Table 4-21provides a description of this menu. [IP6 Routing Menu] dump . Table 4-21 IPv6 Routing Information Menu Options (/info/l3/route6) Command Syntax and Usage dump The /info/l3/route6/dump command shows all the IPv6 routes maintained. such as FE80::/ 10.

2 Command Reference The following is an example of output from the /info/l3/route6/dump command.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 111 .0. >> Main# /info/l3/route6/dump IPv6 Forwarding Table: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0/0 2005:0:0:0:0:0:0:16 2005:0:0:0:0:0:0:0/64 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 2005:0:0:0:0:0:0:1/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 2005:0:0:0:0:0:0:16/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 fe80:0:0:0:201:81ff:fe2e:a100/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:1:ff00:0/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:1:ff00:1/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:1:ff2e:a100/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: STATIC LOCAL LOCAL STATIC LOCAL STATIC STATIC STATIC STATIC STATIC Total number of route6 entries: 10 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.

Show a single ARP entry by IP address port .101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address. and port referencing information. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory.17. VLAN and port for the address. see page 113. 112 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan . 192. Table 4-22 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.4. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses.0. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .Show ARP address list The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the router is present in the ARP cache. port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port.Show all ARP entries help . For details.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp ARP Information Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer.Show help on the fields of ARP entries addr . January 2006 . ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the ARP entries referenced by a single SP.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . address status flags (see Table 4-23 on page 114). In any IP communication.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN.

g.0.80. see page 114. e. help Displays help on the ARP field entries. The MAC address has not been learned. VIP.----47. including: IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information.2 Command Reference Table 4-22 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all ARP entries. For example: IP address: Flags: IP address of ARP entry J .23.Indirect ARP (cache) entry for IP address reachable via indirect routes (static/dynamic) 4 . etc.Permanent ARP entry (not obtained via ARP request).----00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 1 Referenced SPs -----------1-4 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. and VLAN flags.Layer 4 IP address (VIP) u . IP mask. MAC address: VLAN: Port: Referenced SPs: MAC address of ARP entry VLAN of this ARP entry Physical port where this IP address owner is connected SPs on which this ARP entry is present addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address. IP interface.ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN P .Unresolved ARP entry.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.249 P MAC address VLAN Port ----------------. /info/l3/arp/refpt Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP IP address Flags ------------. January 2006 113 .---. MAC address. R .

this traffic needs to be forwarded to the egress port (port 6 in the above example). From the ARP entry (the referenced ports).31.11 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 Referenced SPs ------------1-4 1-4 empty 1-4 1-4 empty empty Referenced ports are the ports that request the ARP entry.10 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 172.22.10.81 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.----------------. Permanent entry created for Layer 4 proxy IP address or virtual server IP address.11.3.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.3.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:86 1 23 47. the designated port will be the normal ingress port. January 2006 . ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN 114 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.1 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 10.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port --------------.10 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 47.1. So the traffic coming into the referenced ports has the destination IP address. The MAC address has not been learned.31.----.31. NOTE – If you have VMA turned on. Indirect route entry.23.1 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.80.10.3. the referenced port will be the designated port.---1. Unresolved ARP entry. The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 4-23 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag P P 4 R U J Description Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.---.80. If you have VMA turned off.

1 47. IPv6 uses the Neighbor Discovery (ND) protocol to discover its neighbors link-layer addresses and neighbor reachabilty.255 255.255.255 255.255.255.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/addr ARP Address List Information IP address --------------10.10. ND enables routers to advertise their presence and address prefixes and to inform hosts of a better next-hop address to forward packets.255.23.255. A switch sends ND packets to resolve a link-layer address that it wishes to send packets to.4.255.255.255 MAC address ----------------00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:0e 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 VLAN ---Flags ----- D 1 1 1 /info/l3/nbrcache IPv6 Neighbor Cache Information This menu provides a mechanism for viewing IPv6 Neighbor Cache information.31.255 255.200 172.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.255.1. ND can also auto-configure addresses and detect duplicate addresses. The Neighbor Cache maintains information about each neighbor such as: MAC Address Reachability State Neighbor Type VLAN Ingress Port Neighbor Cache entries are added in a number of situations: 1. January 2006 115 . Entries are added when an IPv6 Interface or Virtual IP is operational. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.31. 3.0.10 1.1 172.11. The information collected from ND is stored in the Neighbor Cache.31.10. 2.255.1 172.255.255 255.80.255.255 255.81 IP mask --------------255.4. Reception of ND messages from neighbor.255.3.

116 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. REACHABLE The neighbor is known to have been reachable recently. no attempt should be made to verify its reachability. January 2006 . STALE The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable but until traffic is sent to the neighbor. PROBE The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable. During this 2000 full entries period. and ND messages are sent to the neighbor to verify reachability.2 Command Reference There are 5 reachability states: INCOMPLETE The link-layer address of the neighbor has not yet been determined. The neighbor types are LOCAL and DYNAMIC. Table entries are kept until the entry is replaced by a new one. no new entries will be used to sort for display.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. NOTE – Once the Neighbor Cache table reaches 2000 entries.0. DELAY The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable and traffic has recently been sent to the neighbor. [IP6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol Menu] dump .Show all IP6 neighbor cache entries Table 4-24 provides a description of this menu. table entries are replaced by adding the new entry and dropping the 2000th entry off the list. The LOCAL neighbor type is for switch pre-configured addresses and DYNAMIC is for neighbor addresses learnt from ND. Table 4-24 IPv6 Neighbor Cache Information Menu (/info/l3/nbrcache) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all IPv6 neighbor cache entries.

For more information.----------------.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 117 .Show all BGP peers summary . summary Displays peer summary information such as AS.----2000:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 REACH 2000:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 STALE 2000:0:0:0:0:0:0:100 REACH 2000:0:0:0:0:0:0:200 REACH fe80:0:0:0:20e:62ff:fef6:b200 REACH fe80:0:0:0:211:11ff:fee3:32b9 STALE fe80:0:0:0:250:daff:fe16:f727 STALE dump Type MAC address VLAN Port --. See page 118 for a sample output.2 Command Reference The following is an example of output from the /info/l3/nbrcache/dump command. dump Displays the BGP routing table.---. See page 119 for a sample output.0. up/down. [BGP Menu] peer .Show BGP routing table Table 4-25 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer Displays BGP peer information. See page 119 for a sample output.Show all BGP peers in summary dump . >> IP6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol# IP address State ----------------------------. refer to BGP section in chapter: “The Configuration Menu” on page 257 and the Application Guide. message sent. message received. state. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.---LOC 00:0e:62:f6:b2:00 1 DYN 00:50:da:16:f7:27 1 1 LOC 00:0e:62:f6:b2:00 1 LOC 00:0e:62:f6:b2:0e 1 LOC 00:0e:62:f6:b2:00 1 DYN 00:11:11:e3:32:b9 1 9 DYN 00:50:da:16:f7:27 1 1 Total dynamic neighbor cache entries: 3 Total local neighbor cache entries: 4 Other neighbor cache entries: 0 /info/l3/bgp BGP Information Menu Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks.

0. Local AS: 0.5 BGP status: idle.0. Local router ID: 1.201.1. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0. version 0.201.0. January 2006 .1. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0). LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 118 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.1 . Old status: idle Total received packets: 0. version 0.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Local AS: 0.1. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0. Holdtime: 0. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0. BGP Peer Information: 3: 2. Holdtime: 0. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0.1.0.1. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 4: 2.0.2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/peer BGP Peer information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peer provides.1. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0). Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.0.5 BGP status: idle. Local router ID: 1.4 .

--------------.0 * 205.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.148 0 148 0 0 never connect /info/l3/bgp/dump Dump BGP Information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dump provides.-------. >> BGP# dump Status codes: * valid.0.internal Origin codes: i .0 205.147 1 128 13.2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/summary BGP Summary information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summary provides.0 205.0. The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.0.178.0.178.178. e . > best. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone.21. January 2006 119 .15.178.147 1 256 Path -------------147 148 i 0 i 147 i 147 i 147 {35} ? /info/l3/ospf OSPF Information Menu Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.0 0. ? . one area must be designated as area 0.147 1 128 *> 205.EGP.-------.-------. known as the backbone. For more Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.21.178.---------1: 205.142 4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established 2: 205. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area.IGP.----*> 10.17. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS).23.----. BGP Peer Summary Information: Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State --------------.-------.21. In any AS with multiple areas.178.0.0.15.178.21.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght --------------.---. which then distributes it to other areas as needed.147 1 256 *>i205. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone.0. i ..178.0 205.

Database Menu sumaddr .Show OSPF information Table 4-26 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information.D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID.Show neighbor(s) information dbase . it displays information for all the interfaces.0. routes Displays OSPF routing table.Show summary address list nsumadd .2 Command Reference information on how to configure OSPF on the switch. [OSPF Information Menu] general .Show interface(s) information virtual . 120 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. dbase Displays OSPF database menu. If no parameter is supplied. See page 124 for a sample output. To view menu options.Show NSSA summary address list routes . See page 122 for a sample output. nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas. see page 122. it displays area information for all the areas. sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas. If no router ID is supplied. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links.Show details of virtual links nbr . refer to the OSPF section in chapter “The Configuration Menu” on page 257 and your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide. nbr <nbr router-id (A. If no parameter is supplied.Show OSPF routes dump . See page 121 for a sample output. it displays the information about all the current neighbors.B.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Show area(s) information if . if <interface number [1-256]> Displays interface information for a particular interface.C. January 2006 . aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays area information for a particular area index.Show general information aindex .

0. 2 are >=EXCH state. of which 2 are >=INIT state.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. /info/l3/ospf/general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 47. 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2.23. AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1.2 Command Reference Table 4-26 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage dump Display all the OSPF information.247 Started at 95 and the process uptime is 352315 Area Border Router: yes.0.80. of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. See for a sample output. January 2006 121 .

C.ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm . Ip Address 10.B.C.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10. d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum .1. for example: 20.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.1.1.LS Database summary ext . 122 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. Admin Status UP Router ID 10.1.1. January 2006 .0.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10. Authentication type none /info/l3/ospf/dbase OSPF Database Information [OSPF Database Menu] advrtr .C.10.NSSA External LS Database info rtr .10.12.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID.10.Router LS Database info self .1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.10. c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs. Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10. State DR.10.Network-Summary LS Database info all . Area 0. The usage of this command is as follows: a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.Self Originated LS Database info summ . Hello 10. Ip Address 10.12. Wait 1663. b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.Network LS Database info nssa .D)>|<self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs. Retransmit 5.1.1.1.D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter.10. Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4.1.1.B.1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.0.0.10.1.2 Timer intervals.All Table 4-27 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A.1.1.14.1. Dead 40.12.External LS Database info nw .1.1. asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.10. Poll interval 0.

B.D)>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.D)>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.D)>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA. January 2006 123 .C.B.D)>|<link_state_id (A.D)>|<link_state_id (A. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.C. all Displays all the LSAs.C. summ <adv-rtr (A. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.B.D)>|<link_state_id (A.C.B.B.C. nw <adv-rtr (A. self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs.D)>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. ext <adv-rtr (A.B. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. No parameters are required. nssa <adv-rtr (A.B. d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.D)>|<link_state_id (A. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.0.C.B.network LS database.C.D)>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.C. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.B.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.B. No parameters are required. rtr <adv-rtr (A. c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. b) the total number of LSAs for each area.C.2 Command Reference Table 4-27 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.

18.0/16 via 200.1.18.2 IA 140.18. N2 .10.2 124 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0/28 via 200.3/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.1.1.1.1.2 IA 100.OSPF external type 2 IA 10.2 E2 172.1.5/32 via 30.1.1.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/routes OSPF Information Route Codes Codes: IA .18. E2 .7/32 via 30.18.1.OSPF NSSA external type 1.1.1.2 E2 172.1.1.0/24 via 20.18.1.2 E2 172.1.1.0.2 E2 172.1.6/32 via 30.2 E2 172.0/28 via 20.8/32 via 30.1.1.2 IA 80.2 IA 40.0/24 via 200.1.OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 .1.1.18.2 E2 172.1/32 via 30.1.1.1. January 2006 .1.1.0/27 via 20.1.1.2 IA 150.1.1.1.1. N1 .0.1.1.OSPF inter area.2 E2 172.1.1.2/32 via 30.1.1.1.OSPF external type 1.1.4/32 via 30.1.1.1.18.

1.1) No areas enabled.2 Command Reference /info/ospf/dump OSPF Dump Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 1. of which 0 are >=INIT state.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.1. AS Boundary Router: no External LSA count 0 Number of interfaces in this router is 0 Number of virtual links in this router is 0 0 new lsa received and 0 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 0 Total neighbors are 0. 0 are =FULL state Number of areas is 0. 0 are >=EXCH state. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.1.---------- Prio ---- State ----- Address ------- OSPF LS Database: OSPF LSDB breakdown for router with ID (1.1. January 2006 125 .1 Started at 42 and the process uptime is 1197051 Area Border Router: no. of which 0-transit 0-nssa OSPF Neighbors: Intf NeighborID ---.

1 lsdb limit 0 126 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.0 3: 172. up Current IP forwarding settings: ON. up vlan 1. 172.3.31.255.0 2: 172. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current OSPF settings: ON Default route none Router ID: 1.23.255.255.80.255. vlan any.1.3.23. up vlan 1.4.255.1 255. January 2006 . vlan 1.1 255. up Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47.31.255.254.1.80. 172.0 47.31.1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.31.0.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ip IP Information Interface information: 1: 47.4.80.22.255.255.81 255.

2. master 28. backup 20. 172.200.2. if if if if if if if if if if 10.200.2.1.2 Command Reference /info/l3/vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Nortel Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. prio 102.0.2. renter.178. 10.1.100. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. master.2.2.2. 100: vrid 100. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. renter.1. 28. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. 28. 14: vrid 14. 27. prio 100. 11. renter.18. 14.202.2.100.8. 20.100.200.200.178.2. 205. 205. prio 118. renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device. master. January 2006 127 . backup 13. prio 110.1. prio 102.210. if 2: vrid 1. 28: vrid 28. renter. 13: vrid 13. server 172: vrid 172.1. backup 1. server VRRP information: 1: vrid 2.2. 11: vrid 11.178. 27: vrid 27. master 14. master. 205. prio 102.200. renter. renter. if 3: vrid 3.200. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same. prio 102. prio 110.200. renter. backup. renter. 12: vrid 12. VRRP information includes: Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. If the master fails. VRRP information: 10: vrid 10. prio 118. renter. renter. server 1. 254: vrid 254. 1.200.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.18.21. 27. prio 100.200. renter. renter. 12.1. master 27. if 28. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. 13. based on a number of priority criteria. backup 172. prio 110. prio 118. prio 110.204. prio 118.21. proxy When virtual routers are configured. master if 27. if 172. renter.8. Refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for more information on VRRP. renter.1. you can view the status of each virtual router using this command. master 11. prio 100. server 255: vrid 255. 20: vrid 20.1.18. master 12.1. master. renter.1. 172.

These are known as virtual server routers: any virtual router whose IP address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address. 128 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers. The server state identifies virtual routers that support Layer 4 services.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured. the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master. January 2006 . Activity status master identifies the elected master virtual router.2 Command Reference Priority value. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address. During the election process. Server status. backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode. Proxy status.

255 .254 255. IP information: IP information: Router ID: 45. orig 15. default none. alive 60.255 . vlan 1.201 255.0 3: 205.1.0. static disabled. up Default gateway information: metric strict Current IP forwarding settings: ON. ras 300.203. AS number 100 Interface information: 2: 45. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current BGP settings: ON.1. January 2006 129 .1. ttl 1. adv 60 retry 120. pref 100.1. 172.1.0 45.0. This dump is a collection of all the individual commands described in the sections above.255 . up vlan 1.1. rip disabled. 205.255.255. up vlan 1.1.255.21.21.1.0 4: 172.201.1.255.1.255. AS number 100 Current BGP peer settings: 1: 45. ospf disabled fixed disabled.1. vip disabled in-rmap: empty out-rmap: empty Current BGP aggr settings: Continued Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. hold 180.2 Command Reference /info/l3/dump Layer3 Dump Information This command dumps all the information about Layer 3 parameters.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. enabled metric none.255.1.201 255.

21.255.255 MAC address VLAN Flags ----------------.2 Command Reference Virtual Router Redundancy is globally turned OFF.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 45.255 45.1.201 255.1.254 direct fixed 4 * 172.21.1.1.0.2 00:09:6b:b5:08:48 1 24 empty 205.1.1.1.75 00:0f:06:ec:8a:00 1 24 empty 45.255.100 P 4 00:01:81:2e:a2:2e 1-4 205.255 255.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 ARP address information: IP address IP mask --------------.202 00:09:97:5e:69:00 1 24 empty 172.1.1.201 255.0.254 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 205.6 00:09:6b:00:71:bb 1 24 empty 205.0 45.1.0 255.21.4 00:09:6b:00:76:1b 1 24 empty 205.1.1.------------.100 255.0 172.255.---------------45.0 255.201 255.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.1.-* 45.255 255.255.1.0.254 255. January 2006 .0.1.255.254 local addr 4 * 172.----. ARP cache information: IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.255.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.1.255.201 local addr 2 * 45.0.---.21.1.255.0.1.----.1.1.1.----------------.255 172.255 205.255.255.255 172.21.1.--------------205.255 45.255 172.1.0.255.255.1.1 00:09:6b:b5:0b:d6 1 24 empty 205.1.0.21.0 0.----00:01:81:2e:a2:2e D 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 Route table information: Status code: * .255broadcast broadcast 2 * 127.0.-----------.255 broadcast broadcast 4 Continued 130 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.255.255.1.1.1.21.255.255.1.201 direct fixed 2 * 45.0 martian martian * 172.21.1.---.255.------------.255.255.1.1.0 255.1.255 45.0.1.1.1.1.1.5 00:09:6b:00:74:97 1 24 empty 205.3 00:09:6b:00:6f:b7 1 24 empty 205.1.0.255.1.1.254 255.255.255.1.

1.201 local addr 3 * 205.0.255 255. January 2006 131 .0.255.1.0.0.----.0.0.1.1.255.255.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0 0.1.1.255.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght Path --------------. i .255.0. ? .255.100 direct vip * 205.255.1.255.0 martian martian * 255.255.1.0.0 0 ? *> 172.201 255.100 255.1.255 205.1.0 0.255.0.1.1.1.0 255.1.255 255.0.1.255 broadcast broadcast OSPF is disabled.0 0 ? Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.255 255. e .201 direct fixed 3 * 205.0 0.1.255.255.255 205.255 broadcast broadcast 3 * 224.0.0.internal Origin codes: i .1.0 224.0.255.255.--------------.EGP.0.0 0 ? *> 205.--------------*> 45. Status codes: * valid.----.0 205.1.----.255 205.IGP.0.0 0.2 Command Reference * 205.1. > best.21.

real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays Real server number.: [Server Load Balancing Information Menu] sess .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Session Table Information Menu gslb . To view menu options.Show SYN attack detection information dump . the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server.Show all layer 4 information Table 4-28 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sess Displays the Session Table Information Menu. VLAN.Show virtual server information filt . based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. With this software feature. and health check result.Show IDS server selected by hash or minmisses metric bind . see page 134.Decode the HEX value to get VIP. each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. January 2006 . 132 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand. layer where health check is performed. RIP and Rport synatk .Show filter information port . Refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for detailed information on this feature. physical switch port. it can become overutilized.2 Command Reference /info/slb Layer 4 Information Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Nortel Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. phash. or minmisses metric cookie . Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations.Show real server information group .0. real IP address.Show real server selected by hash.Global SLB Information Menu real .Show real server group information virt . see page 139. gslb Displays the Global SLB Information Menu. MAC address. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing.Show Workload Manager information idshash .Show port information wlm . To view menu options.

and status. cookie <16 or 20 bytes cookie value in HEX as 0xXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX> Decodes the hexadecimal value to get the virtual server IP address. backup server. port <port number> Displays the physical port number. and client and/or server Layer 4 activity. synatk Displays SYN attack detection information. idshash <IP address 1> <IP address 2> Displays the Intrusion Detection System server selected by hash or minmisses metric. and real server port. or minmisses metric. This feature requires dbind to be enabled. for example. filter status. 1-1024> Real server group information virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays Virtual Server State: Virtual server number. health check layer. bind <IP address> <mask> <group number> Displays the real server selected by hash. URL for health checks. destination port. dump Displays all Layer 4 information for the switch. virtual MAC address Virtual Port State: Virtual service or port. group backup server. IP address. every two seconds. real server group. real server port. IP address.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. server port mapping. phash. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. the number of new half open sessions is examined within a set period of time. a list of applied filters. January 2006 133 . and real server group. real server group. wlm <work_load_manager_number. 1 to 16> Show workload manager information. group backup server.0. see page 140. real server IP address. proxy IP address. To identify whether or not the server is under SYN attack. For details. filt <filter ID (1-2048)>|list|allow|deny|redir|nat Displays the filter number.2 Command Reference Table 4-28 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number.

Show all session entries on sp dump . cport <real port> Displays all session entries with source (client) port. pip <Proxy IP address> Displays all session entries with proxy IP address.Session entry description Table 4-29 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage cip <IP address> Displays all session entries with client’s source IP address.Show all session entries with proxy IP address pport . dport <Destination real port> Displays all session entries with destination port. dip <Destination IP address> Displays all session entries with the destination IP address.Show all session entries with source IP6 address dport .Show all session entries with matching flag port .Show all session entries with source IP address cip6 . pport <proxy port> Displays all session entries with proxy port.Show all session entries with destination port pip .Show all session entries with source port dip . cip6 <IP6_address> Display session entries with the specified IP6 address.Show all session entries with destination IP address dip6 .Show all session entries with matching filter flag .Show all session entries help . dip6 <IP6_address> Display session entries with the specified IP6 address.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 134 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.0.Show all session entries with real IP address sp .Show all session entries with ingress port real .Show all session entries with source IP6 address cport .Show all session entries with proxy port filter . January 2006 .2 Command Reference /info/slb/sess Session Table Information [Session Table Information Menu] cip .

2. 39.01: 172.2 3567 3.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. port <port number> Displays all session entries on the ingress port.1 http -> 47.19 1040. See “Session dump information in Nortel Application Switch Operating System” on page 137 for a description of these options.2.1 http -> 1.79 urlwcr age 6 f:123 E RTSP L4-L7 RTSP Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.12.1 4586. 39.2. real <IP address> Displays all session entries with real server IP address.2 Command Reference Table 4-29 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage filter <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays all session entries with matching filter.2.21.1.1.51 http -> 192.12.21. Specify v4 to dump IPv4 information.3.19 1040.01: 172.21.1. 172.16: 172.79 http age 4 L4-L7 WCR HTTP 2.168.24. Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications L4 HTTP 3. 1 to 13 associated with a session as identified in the above example.24.1. help Displays the description of the session entry. sp <port number (1-4)> Displays all session entries on switch processor.81.0. dump <v4 | v6> Displays all session entries. v6 to dump IPv6 information or no parameter to display all information. Information similar to the following may appear in a session entry dump: 3.1 http -> 47.8.81.1 http age 6 f:10 EUSPT c (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7a) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Note: The fields.1.2.2.21.3.2. January 2006 135 . flag <E|L|N|P|S|Rt|Ru|Ri|Vi|Vr|Vs|Vm|Vd|U|W> Displays all session entries with matching flag. 01: 1.8.200 44687.11 wcr age 4 f:12 E 3. are described in “Session dump information in Nortel Application Switch Operating System” on page 137.

12. 205. The second session is RTSP UDP data connection.4.13 21220 age 10 P The first session is RTSP TCP control connection.01: 172.20.1.3.8.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2.4.0.81.3.168.4.20 ftp age 10 EU 1.12.1 rtsp -> 47.31.3.01: 172.144.00: 237.13 21220 age 10 P Filtering LinkLB 2.81.2.162.01: 172.2.09: 172.2.144.2.81.19 4586.21.14.21. 10.19 6970.200 0 172.215 4098.31.81.1 21220 -> 47.2. 172.144.1 rtsp -> 47. 39.200 ftp ->172.11 age 8 EP c:1 1.4. 172.2.19 4586.12.52.20 ftp-data age 10 E NAT 2.0.144.4.12.2.215 4102.4.13 rtsp age 10 EU 3.123 160.81. real server IP and server port are not shown for persistent session.13 0 age 10 P During client-server port negotiation.2 Command Reference 3.84 http -> 192.16 2559.13 urlwcr age 10 f:100 EU 3.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E FTP 1.10. 39.31. 172. 136 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.30 age 4 EPS C:3 The destination port. the destination port shows “rtsp” and server port shows “0” L7 WCR RTSP 3.12.31.21.31.144.00: 172. 39.21.2. 3.21.2.31. 39.31.05: 172.200 ftp-data ->172.01: 172.178. January 2006 .31.01: 172.215 80.09: 172.19 6970.1 rtsp -> 47.07: 10.1 21220 -> 47.19 6970.0.26 http NAT age 2 f:24 E Persistent session 3. 39.31.1.21.4.26 1706.

No address is shown if the filter action is Allow. this field contains the IP address of the real server that the switch selects to forward client packet to.1.1. This field contains the source IP address from the client’s IP packet in IPv4 or IPv6. “DENY” or “NAT” instead.1.1.2. 2.1 21220 age 10 P For filtering. For example: 3.1.2.3.07: 1.1 6970. This field identifies the destination port from client’s TCP/UDP packet.2. this field also shows the real server IP address.1.2. January 2006 137 .1 http age 10 3. If the switch does not find live server.3.2.2. DENY or NAT instead.4. For example: 3.1 http -> 3. Deny or NAT. This field also shows the real server IP address for filtering.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. It will show ALLOW. This field identifies the destination IP address from the client’s TCP/UDP packet.3.1.1 http age 10 f:11 2.2.01: 1. 2.1 http-> 192.1 1040.2. for load balancing.1 1040. This field contains the real server IP address of the corresponding server that the switch selects to forward the client packet to. (7) Proxy Port (8) Real Server IP Address This field identifies the TCP/UDP source port substituted by the switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2.1 1706. this field contains the same information as the destination IP address mentioned in field (5).1.01: 1.1 rtsp -> 2.0. this field is the same as destination IP address (as in row 5). If the switch does not find a live server. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow.3.01: 1. Deny or NAT.2 Command Reference Session dump information in Nortel Application Switch Field (1) SP number (2) Ingress port (3) Source IP address (4) Source port (5) Destination IP address (6) Destination port (7a) Proxy IP address Description This field indicates the Switch Processor number that created the session. This field shows the physical port through which the client traffic enters the switch.2. It will show “ALLOW”. 2. 2.1 http -> 3. This field contains the Proxy IP address substituted by the switch.168. For load balancing. This field identifies the source port from the client’s TCP/UDP packet.

“Ri”: Indicates the session is ICMP rate limiting per-client entry. Fields (6). this server port is obtained from the client-server negotiation.The session is aged out in 160 minutes. idslb. Operating System 138 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. (7) and (8) cannot have persistent session. which means the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding client traffic to the real server. if: age 10 . For RTSP UDP session. “Vm”: Indicates the session is a SIP MESSAGE session. (13) Persistent session user count This counter indicates the number of client sessions created to associate with this persistent session. “S”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and the application is SSL session ID. “Vd”: Indicates the session is a SIP NAT data session. the session is freed.0. “Vr”: Indicates the session is a SIP REGISTER session. “E”: Indicates the session is established and will be aged out if no traffic is received within session timeout value. (10) Age This is the session timeout value. “W”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding Layer 7 WCR traffic to the real server. or Cookie Pbind. “P”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and is not to be aged out. (11) Filter number (12) Flag This field indicates the session created by filtering code as a result of the IP header keys matching the filtering criteria. “Vs”: Indicates the session is a SIP SUBSCRIBE session. “Vi”: Indicates the session is a SIP INVITE session. “Ru”: Indicates UDP rate limiting for every client entry. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. linkslb or nonat. “Rt”: Indicates the session is TCP rate limiting for every client entry. The user can configure slowage by using the command: /cfg/slb/adv/slowage. age < 160 . It is for internal use only. If no packet is received within the value specified. This indicates that slowage is used. wcr.2 Command Reference Field (9) Server port Description This field is the same as the destination port (field 6) for load balancing except for the RTSP UDP session. “N”: Indicates no NAT.The session is aged out in 10 minutes. This field can be urlwcr. This field is the filtering application port for filtering. “L”: Indicates the session is a link load balance session. “U”: Indicates the session is Layer 7 delayed binding and the switch is trying to open TCP connection to the real server. For example.

the number of virtual services on those virtual servers.0. site Displays the Global SLB remote site information. geo Displays the Global SLB geographical preference information.Show Global SLB geo . dump Displays all Global SLB information.Show Global SLB rule .Show all Global virtual server information remote site information rule information geographical preference information DNS persistence cache information SLB information Table 4-30 Global SLB Information Menu Options (/info/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the Global SLB virtual server information such as the domain name of the virtual server. pers <IP_Address> Display the Global SLB DNS persistence cache information. and the group of real servers associated with the local and remote virtual servers. the number of the local and remote virtual servers.2 Command Reference /info/slb/gslb Global SLB Information Menu An Nortel Application Switch Operating System running Global SLB selects the most appropriate site to direct the client traffic for a given domain during the initial client connection. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.Show Global SLB site .Show Global SLB dump .Show Global SLB pers .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 139 . The menu for this feature displays the following information: [Global SLB Information Menu] virt .

102. up 210.20. backup none.20. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 3: urltwo 4: urlthree Redirect filter state: Action redir dport http. group 88. 00:60:cf:47:5c:1e virtual ports: http: rport http. 00:03:47:07:a4:9e. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 1: any 2: urlone 27: 20.200. up Port 1: 2: 3: 4: state: filt disabled. backup none.20. health 3.1.0.20. 00:01:02:70:4d:4a. health 3. radius snoop disabled real servers: 1: 210. health 3.2.20.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.20. 1 ms.1. 00:01:02:71:9c:a6.1.2 Command Reference /info/slb/dump Show All Layer 4 Information Real 1: 2: 26: 27: server state: 210. vlan 1.20.101.1. dbind HTTP Application: urlslb real servers: 26: 20. filters: 50 200 140 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. vlan 1. vlan 1.2. up 2: 210. backup none proxy enabled.20.1. backup none. port 1.102. port 8. backup none.2. 00:01:02:c1:4b:48. up Virtual server state: 1: 20. up 20. filters: 200 filt disabled.200. rport 3128. January 2006 .1. 3 ms. 2 ms. vlan 1.101. backup none. vlan any 200: group 1. up 20. port 6. port 7. health 3. filters: 200 idslb filt enabled.2. health 3.200. 2 ms.20.20. filters: 80 idslb filt enabled.

Show Bandwidth Management Contract information Table 4-31 Bandwidth Management Information Command Syntax and Usage ipuser Displays the IP user entries with their IP addresses.BWM IP User Entries Information Menu cont .2 Command Reference /info/bwm Bandwidth Management Information Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications.0. receive higher priority versus non-criticaltraffic. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cont Displays the BWM contract information configured on this switch. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic. See page 142 for sample output. You can see the following information on your switch when you execute this command: [Bandwidth Management Information Menu] ipuser . BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. January 2006 141 . such as e-commerce transactions.

Show all IP user entries Table 4-32 BWM IP User Information Menu (/info/bwm/ipuser) Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP address> Displays the IP user entries for a specific IP address. January 2006 . sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the IP user entries on the Switch Processor.2 Command Reference /info/bwm/ipuser BWM IP User Information Menu [BWM IP User Entries Information Menu] ip . 142 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. cont <BW Contract number. The same fields as described in cont above are displayed.Show all IP user entries for a contract sp .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. dump Displays all the IP user entries. but only for the specified sp number. 1-1024> Displays the IP user entries for a specific BWM contract.Show all IP user entries with IP address cont .0.Show all IP user entries on sp dump .

1.2 Command Reference The format of the output of the above commands: SP Contract IP Address Age Octets Discards Allowed Offered Rate Rate -.0.0. Octets: the number of octets processed on this ipuser entry Discards: the number of octets discarded on this ipuser entry Allowed Rate: the rate of traffic allowed for this IP address Offered Rate: the rate including the discards for this IP address Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.1.100 86 1076600 0 97 97 2 10 11.102 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.1.--.-------.106 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.1.105 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.1.1.1.0.108 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.104 16 204554 0 99 99 2 10 11. Contract Rate: the BWM contract number of the ipuser entry.100 86 21500000 301001440 1953 29297 2 10 11.1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.0.0.0.1.107 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.1.0.---------.---------.0.0.109 16 203016 0 99 99 SP Rate: the switch processor number (1-4) of the ipuser entry.1.103 16 196864 0 96 96 2 10 11.101 16 201478 0 98 98 2 10 11.----2 11 11. IP address: the IP address of the ipuser entry. January 2006 143 . Age: the age of the entry in seconds.---------------.0.

Displays specific information about a policy applied to a contract. Table 4-33 BWM Contract Information Field Contract Policy Description Displays the BWM contract number.2 Command Reference /info/bwm/cont BWM Contract Information Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement:enabled BWM history will be mailed in a minute to 'abcd' at host '100.0. Includes the following: The policy number applied to the contract Prec: the precedence applied to the policy Hard: the hard limit applied to the policy Soft: the soft limit applied to the policy Resv: the reserve limit applied to the policy 144 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.138.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.26' BWM IP user table entries 64k Contract Policy Per User Traffic Num Name Prec Hard Soft Resv Limit Key State Shaping 1 123456789012345 2 1 50M 1M 500K E D 2 vlan 4 1 60M 2M 500K E D 3 filter 7 20 2M 1M 500K E D 4 5 1 2M 1M 500K D D 5 512 1 2M 1M 500K E D 10 10 1 1M 0K 0K 500K sip E D 11 11 1 100M 80M 500K 2M sip E D 12 12 1 2M 1M 500K E D 13 13 1 3M 1M 500K E D 14 14 1 4M 400K 100K E D 15 15 1 2M 1M 500K E D This command displays information about any configured contracts and the BWM policies applied to the contracts. January 2006 .81.

0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. this field displays whether the user limit is enforced on a source IP address (sip) or a destination IP address (dip). Key: If an ipuser rate limit is enforced. January 2006 145 . Includes the following: Limit: the user rate limit applied to the ipuser. Displays whether the BWM contract is enabled (E) or disabled (D).2 Command Reference Table 4-33 BWM Contract Information Field Per User Description These two columns display information for an ipuser limit. if applied to the contract. State Traffic Shaping Displays whether Traffic Shaping is enabled (E) or disabled (D) for this contract.

2 Command Reference /info/security Security Information [Security Information Menu] port .Show UDP blast protection information dos . ipacl This menu displays the current IP ACL settings.Show protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention information dump . 146 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. dump This menu displays all security settings.0. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Show all security information The information provided by each menu option is described in Table 4-34. udpblast This menu displays UDP blast protection settings.Show port security information ipacl .Show IP ACL information udpblast . Table 4-34 Security Information Menu (/info/security) Command Syntax and Usage port This menu displays the current port security settings. dos This menu displays DoS protection settings.

or auto) Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. or 1000) Duplex mode (half. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. full. 10/100. January 2006 147 . yes. any. including: Port Alias Port number Port speed (10.0. 100.2 Command Reference /info/link Link Status Information Alias -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Speed ----10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 1000 1000 1000 1000 Duplex -------any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any full full full full Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down Use this command to display link status information about each port on an Nortel Application Switch slot.

2 Command Reference Link status (up or down) 148 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. January 2006 .0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

January 2006 149 .2 Command Reference /info/port Port Information Alias -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Tag --y n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n RMON ---d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d PVID ---1 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BWC ----1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 5 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 6 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 NAME -------------VLAN(s) -------------1 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Port information includes: Port alias Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Whether Remote Monitor is enabled or disabled Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

For information on ordering optional software license keys. 150 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 320506-A. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. see “How to Get Help” on page 24. depending on your configuration). /info/dump Information Dump Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more.2 Command Reference Whether RMON is enabled or disabled on the port /info/swkey Software Enabled Keys For optional Layer 4 switching software. the information would be displayed as follows: Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Bandwidth Management Security Pack Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Inbound Linklb Intelligent Traffic Management Software key information includes a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance.0. If you want to capture dump data to a file. January 2006 .

Security Stats Menu mp .Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Stats Menu bwm . /stats Statistics Menu [Statistics Menu] sys .Dump all stats 151 320506-A.System Stats Menu port . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 . January 2006 .Port Mirroring Stats Menu l2 .Bandwidth Management Stats Menu security .CHAPTER 5 The Statistics Menu You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes.MP-specific Stats Menu sp .Port Stats Menu pmirr .SP-specific Stats Menu dump .Layer 3 Stats Menu slb .

To view menu options. l2 Displays Layer 2 Statistics Menu. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing (SLB) Menu. ntp <clear> Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. To view menu options.2 Command Reference Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats) Command Syntax and Usage sys System statistics menu port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. pm Displays Port Mirroring Statistics Menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see page 170. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Menu. To view menu options. see page 154. To view menu options. see page 255. To view menu options. security Displays Security Statistics Menu. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. To view menu options. see page 253. see page 174. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics. see page 239.0. To view menu options. see page 232. l3 Displays Layer3 Statistics Menu. snmp Displays SNMP Statistics. mgmt Displays interface statistics for the Management Port. 152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. See page 255 for sample output. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays Switch Processor-Specific Menu. see page 248. To view menu options. January 2006 . see page 199. To view menu options.

January 2006 153 . set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. see page 256. For details.0.2 Command Reference Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats) Command Syntax and Usage dump Dumps all switch statistics. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

Show SNMP stats dump .System Access Menu mgmt . 154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. mgmt Management port interface statistics. snmp Show SNMP statistics.Dump system stats Table 5-2 System Statistics Menu Options (/stats/sys) Command Syntax and Usage access Go to the System Access menu.Show management port stats ntp . ntp Show NTP server statistics.Show NTP server stats snmp . [System Statistics Menu] access .0. January 2006 . dump Dump system statistics.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference /stats/sys System statistics menu This menu displays traffic statistics on a system basis.

rmon Displays Remote Monitor (RMON) statistics for the port.Show link stats rmon .Clear all port stats Table 5-3 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. ip Displays IP statistics for the port.Dump port stats clear .Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether .2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis.0. See page 161 for a sample output and the description of statistics. dump Displays all the port statistics. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. See page 156 for a sample output and the description of statistics. See page 163 for a sample output and the description of statistics.Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if . January 2006 155 .Show interface ("if") stats ip . See page 162 for a sample output and the description of statistics. link Displays link statistics for the port. See page 164 for a sample output and the description of statistics.Show RMON stats dump . ether Displays Ethernet (“dot1”) statistics for the port. [Port Statistics Menu] brg .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link . if Displays interface statistics for the port. See page 157 for a sample output and the description of statistics.

The total number of Forwarding Database entries. /stats/port <port number>/brg Bridging Statistics This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port. Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 63242584 63277826 0 0 NA NA 0 Table 5-4 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics dot1PortInFrames Description The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. dot1PortOutFrames dot1PortInDiscards dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards 156 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. which have been or would have been learnt. including bridge management frames. including bridge management frames. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. January 2006 . A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function. it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent. it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). filtered) by the Forwarding Process. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is. If this counter is increasing.0. If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 5-3 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage clear This command clears all the statistics on this port.

January 2006 157 .0. The number of frames discarded by this port due to an excessive size. /stats/port <port number>/ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsSQETestErrors: dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics dot1BasePortDelay ExceededDiscards dot1BasePortMtu ExceededDiscards dot1StpPortForward Transitions Description The number of frames discarded by this port due to excessive transit delay through the bridge. The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges.

Note: Coding errors detected by the physical layer for speeds above 10 Mb/s will cause the frame to fail FCS check. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsAlignment Errors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts.3 Layer Management. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.0. according to the conventions of IEEE 802.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 . Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames 158 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. This count does not include frames received with frametoo-long or frame-too-short errors. or ifOutBroadcastPkts.3 Layer Management. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. ifOutMulticastPkts. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. ifOutMulticastPkts. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.

A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object.0. an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions.802. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions dot3StatsLateCollisions dot3StatsExcessive Collisions dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. In particular. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.2. The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet. January 2006 159 .31998 Edition. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics.2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsSQETestErrors Description A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sub layer for a particular interface.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.4. section 7. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. The SQE TEST ERROR is set in accordance with the rules for the verification of the SQE detection mechanism in the PLS Carrier Sense Function as described in IEEE Std. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51.6. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt.2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors Description The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface. a frame which is transmitted after experiencing exactly 4 collisions would be indicated by incrementing only dot3CollFrequencies [4]. A count of individual MAC frames for which the transmission (successful or otherwise) on a particular interface occurs after the frame has experienced exactly the number of collisions specified by the index. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).3 Layer Management. In particular. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt. January 2006 . No other instance of dot3CollFrequencies would be incremented in this example. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. dot3StatsFrameTooLongs dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors dot3CollFrequencies 160 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object. For example. A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object.0. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.

dot3StatsFCSErrors. This does include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames received on this interface. The number of packets. including the MAC header and FCS. The number of packets. dot3StatsFrameTooLongs. The number of packets delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub) layer. Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0 ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0 Table 5-6 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCInOctets Description The number of octets in valid MAC frames received on the interface. which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. including the MAC header and FCS.layer. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub.2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors and dot3StatsSymbolErrors. For a MAC layer protocol. This does not include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. The number of octets transmitted in valid MAC frames on this interface. January 2006 161 . ifHCInUcastPkts ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCInMulticastPkts ifHCInDiscards ifHCInErrors ifHCOutOctets Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.layer. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The sum for this interface of dot3statsAlignmentErrors.0.

The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.2 Command Reference Table 5-6 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCOutUcastPkts Description The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. The sum for this interface of: dot3statsSQETestErrors. and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer. 162 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipTtlExceeds: ipLANDattacks: 0 0 0 0 0 0 ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: 0 0 Table 5-7 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. including those received in error. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions. dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors and dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors. ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutDiscards ifHCOutErrors /stats/port <port number>/ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. For a MAC layer protocol. including those that were discarded or not sent. January 2006 .0. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer. dot3StatsLateCollisions. including those that were discarded or not sent. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. including those that were discarded or not sent.

Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 4 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.0. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). 0. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing.2 Command Reference Table 5-7 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInAddrErrors Description The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). The number of IP datagram for which an ICMP TTL exceeded message was sent. January 2006 163 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. but which were discarded (for example.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. Class E).0. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. The number of packets that have the same source and destination IP address. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. and the Source.Route option processing was successful. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos ipInDiscards ipInDelivers ipTtlExceeds ipLANDattacks /stats/port <port number>/link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.0. for lack of buffer space).

0. January 2006 . Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped. /stats/port <port number>/rmon RMON Statistics This menu option enables you to display the remote monitor statistics of the selected port. RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 129677 1485 734 712 0 0 0 0 0 0 954 578 35 26 16 8 Table 5-9 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsDrop Events Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources. 164 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. it is just the number of times this condition has been detected.2 Command Reference Table 5-8 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link) Statistics linkStateChange Description The total number of link state changes.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of utilization (which is the percent utilization of the ethernet segment). 000 The result of this equation is the percent value of utilization. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits. the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval. respectively.4 ) + ( Octets × 0. The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.2 Command Reference Table 5-9 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsOctets Description The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). and the number of seconds in the interval is Interval. The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. Note that this does not include multicast packets.8 ) Utilization = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interval × 10. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. January 2006 165 . The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. The differences in the sampled values are Pkts and Octets. but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address. etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).0. etherStatsPkts etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts etherStatsCRCAlign Errors The total number of packets (including bad packets. inclusive. The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits. broadcast packets. These values are used to calculate the utilization as follows: Pkts × ( 9. and multicast packets) received. If greater precision is desired.6 + 6.

Section 8. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.1.1.1.2 Command Reference Table 5-9 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsFragments Description The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits. Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. should report the same number of collisions.4 (10Base-2).1. in the receive mode. 14.3 defines a collision as the simultaneous presence of signals on the DO and RD circuits (transmitting and receiving at the same time).2. Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE802. January 2006 .) The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. Thus probes placed on a station and a repeater. (A runt is a packet that is less than 64 bytes. Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10Base-T.4 (10Base-T) of IEEE standard 802.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. A 10Base-T station can only detect collisions when it is transmitting. Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment would. but including FCS octets). A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously.3k) plus receiver collisions observed on any coax segments to which the repeater is connected. The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe.3 (10Base-2) of IEEE standard 802.2. and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).3 section 8.3.0. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 milliseconds and 150 milliseconds.3. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets). etherStatsJabbers etherStatsCollisions etherStatsPkts64Octets 166 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. Note also that an RMON probe inside a repeater should ideally report collisions between the repeater and one or more other hosts (transmit collisions as defined by IEEE 802.3 (10Base-5) and section 10.1. if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously.3 states that a station must detect a collision.5 (10Base-5) and section 10.2. These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).0. January 2006 167 . The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets). Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 5-9 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to511Octets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Description The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/dump Port Dump Statistics Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: 1284 dot1PortOutFrames: 142 dot1PortInDiscards: 130 dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: 0 dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: NA dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: NA dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: 0 dot3StatsFCSErrors: 0 dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsSQETestErrors: NA dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: 0 dot3StatsLateCollisions: 0 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: NA dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: 1 dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0 dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: NA -----------------------------------------------------------------Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters ifHCOut Counters Octets: 124166 19560 UcastPkts: 39 27 BroadcastPkts: 631 14 MulticastPkts: 614 101 Discards: 130 0 Errors: 1 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: 0 ipInAddrErrors: 0 ipForwDatagrams: 0 ipInUnknownProtos: 0 ipInDiscards: 0 ipInDelivers: 0 ipTtlExceeds: 0 ipLANDattacks: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------ 168 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 169 .0.2 Command Reference RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 123840 1406 698 669 0 0 0 0 0 0 906 548 35 25 16 8 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.

see page 172. January 2006 . clear Clears the port statistics. To view statistics and their description.Show LACP stats stg .Show port mirroring stats clear . see page 171. /stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu [Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb . [Port Mirroring Statistics Menu] dump . To view statistics and their description.0. 170 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. stg Displays Spanning Tree Group statistics. see page 173.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Show FDB stats lacp . To view statistics and their description.Show STG stats dump . lacp <port number (1 to max num ports)> Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol statistics.2 Command Reference /stats/pmirr Port mirroring statistics menu This menu displays port mirroring statistics on an all ports basis.Dump layer 2 stats Table 5-11 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays Forwarding Database statistics.Clear all port mirroring stats Table 5-10 PMIRR Statistics Menu Options (/stats/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all mirrored port statistics.

January 2006 171 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Number of search failures in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries found or created in the Forwarding Database. FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 5-12 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb) Statistic creates current lookups finds find_or_c’s deletes hiwat lookup fails find fails overflows Description Number of entries created in the Forwarding Database. Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. including the number of new entries. Number of entries deleted from the Forwarding Database. Number of entry lookups in the Forwarding Database. /stats/l2/fdb FDB Statistics FDB statistics: creates: current: lookups: finds: find_or_c's: max: 9611 58 850254 5832 11874 16384 deletes: hiwat: lookup fails: find fails: overflows: 9553 65 151373 0 0 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database. Number of unsuccessful searches made in the Forwarding Database. finds.0. Number of entries overflowing the Forwarding Database.2 Command Reference Table 5-11 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage dump Dump the Layer 2 statistics. Number of successful searches in the Forwarding Database. and unsuccessful searches.

/stats/l2/lacp LACP Statistics >> Layer 2 Statistics# lacp 1 port 1 Valid LACPDUs received Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted - 9394 0 0 0 0 8516 0 0 Table 5-13 LACP Statistics Parameters (/stats?l2/lacp) Field Description Valid LACPDUs received The number of LACPDUs that the switch received on this port. The number of illegal LACP subtype received on this port.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Marker Rsp PDUs trans. The number of unknown version or TLV type that the switch received on this port.2 Command Reference Table 5-12 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb) Statistic max Description Number of maximum Forwarding Database entries supported by the switch.The number of Marker Responses transmitted out of this port. The number of Marker PDUs transmitted out of this port. The number of valid Marker Responses that the switch received on this port. January 2006 .0. mitted 172 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted The number of valid Marker PDUs that the switch received on this port. The number of LACPDUs transmitted out of this port.

Displays the number of configuration BPDUs received Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages received.------------------1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 139046 176 10 0 0 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 20 0 0 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 27 0 0 28 0 0 Xmt Cfg ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xmt TCN ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-14 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Port Rcv cfg Rcv TCN Xmt Cfg Description Displays the port number. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs transmitted.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 173 .2 Command Reference /stats/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Statistics Spanning Tree Group 1: Port Rcv Cfg Rcv TCN ----. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.

See page 189 for sample output. See page 190 for sample output.Show route stats arp . ip6 Displays IP6 statistics.0.Show VRRP stats dns .Dump layer 3 stats Table 5-15 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays OSPF statistics Menu. ip Displays IP statistics.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Show ICMP stats if . See page 181 for sample output. See page 176 for sample output. January 2006 .Show ARP stats vrrp . 174 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.Show TCP stats udp .Show UDP stats ifclear . route Displays route statistics.Show IP6 stats route .Show IP stats ip6 .Show DNS stats icmp .OSPF Statistics Menu ip .See page 184 for sample output.Show IP interface ("if") stats tcp . arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics.Clear IP stats dump .2 Command Reference Table 5-14 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Xmt TCN Description Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages transmitted /stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu [Layer 3 Statistics Menu] ospf .Clear IP interface ("if") stats ipclear .

Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP interface statistics. See page 197 for sample output. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging Layer 3 switch performance. ipclear Clears IP statistics. See page 192 for sample output. dns Displays Domain Name Server/System (DNS) statistics. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) See page 191 for sample output. See page 193 for sample output. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage vrrp When virtual routers are configured. January 2006 175 . See page 195 for sample output. dump Dumps all Layer 3 switch statistics. ifclear Clears IP interface statistics. icmp Displays ICMP statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics. See page 199 for sample output. tcp Displays TCP statistics. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. udp Displays UDP statistics. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays IP interface statistics for the management processors. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.

aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area index statistics. See page 177 for sample output and details.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf OSPF Statistics Menu [OSPF stats Menu] general .Show area(s) stats if .0. January 2006 .Show interface(s) stats Table 5-16 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics. 176 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays interface statistics.Show global stats aindex .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9 Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 4 2 0 0 2 0 5 514 1028 0 0 0 0 0 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. January 2006 177 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf/general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description 178 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.0. The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 5-17 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) Statistics Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is.2 Command Reference Table 5-17 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Nbr Change Stats: hello Start The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces. in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces.0. January 2006 179 . The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors. The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet. Description n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. in an adjacency's final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. and sequence numbers have been exchanged.

The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. January 2006 . connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. Description The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is. in the initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired.2 Command Reference Table 5-17 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics down Intf Change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired. The sum total number of interfaces. backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. 180 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired. indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces.

0. and the Source. ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch).2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip IP Statistics IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255 Table 5-18 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInReceives ipInHdrErrors Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). version number mismatch. this counter will include only those packets. January 2006 181 . For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. and so forth. time-to-live exceeded. The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers. 0. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. including bad checksums. The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination.0. errors discovered in processing their IP options.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. Class E).0.Route option processing was successful. other format errors. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. including those received in error.

Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. for example. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates 182 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. because their Don't Fragment flag was set. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of IP datagrams successfully re. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. errors.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch). and so forth). The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch). for lack of buffer space). The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams. Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.assembled. January 2006 . The number of failures detected by the IP re. for lack of buffer space). The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be. The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch). but which were discarded (for example. but which were discarded (for example.2 Command Reference Table 5-18 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing.0. which meet this no-route criterion.assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out.

0. which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid. The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch). whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.2 Command Reference Table 5-18 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipRoutingDiscards Description The number of routing entries. The maximum number of seconds. which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch). One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries. January 2006 183 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. ipDefaultTTL ipReasmTimeout Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.

January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip6 IP6 Statistics Menu >> Layer 3 Statistics# /stat/l3/ip6 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP6 statistics: InReceives: 20519 InDiscards: 2 InDelivers: 24793 ForwDatagrams: 0 UnknownProtos: 0 InAddrErrors: 0 OutRequests: 34548 OutNoRoutes: 0 ReasmOKs: 0 ReasmFails: 0 IcmpInMsgs: 24793 IcmpInErrors: 4268 IcmpOutMsgs: 12829 IcmpOutErrors: 4271 InEchos: 0 OutEchos: 8538 InEchoReplies: 8536 OutEchoReplies: 0 InDestUnreachs: 4268 OutDestUnreachs: 4271 InPktTooBigs: 0 OutPktTooBigs: 0 InTimeExcds: 0 OutTimeExcds: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------ICMP6 statistics: Interface: 1 InMsgs: 18929 InErrors: 0 InEchos: 0 InEchoReplies: 4268 InNeighborSolicits: 4513 InNeighborAdvertisements:4271 InRouterSolicits: 0 InRouterAdvertisements: 5877 InDestUnreachs: 0 InTimeExcds: 0 InPktTooBigs: 0 InParmProblems: 0 InRedirects: 0 OutMsgs: 4280 OutErrors: 0 OutEchos: 4269 OutEchoReplies: 0 OutNeighborSolicits: 3 OutNeighborAdvertisements:4516 OutRouterSolicits: 0 OutRouterAdvertisements: 1 OutRedirects: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Interface: 7 InMsgs: 5864 InErrors: 4268 InEchos: 0 InEchoReplies: 4268 InNeighborSolicits: 122 InNeighborAdvertisements: 3 InRouterSolicits: 0 InRouterAdvertisements: 1471 InDestUnreachs: 4268 InTimeExcds: 0 InPktTooBigs: 0 InParmProblems: 0 InRedirects: 0 OutMsgs: 8549 OutErrors: 4271 OutEchos: 4269 OutEchoReplies: 0 OutNeighborSolicits: 2 OutNeighborAdvertisements:124 OutRouterSolicits: 0 OutRouterAdvertisements: 1 OutRedirects: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP6 gateway health check statistics: gateway 5 echo-req 4269 echo-resp gateway 7 echo-req 4269 echo-resp 4268 fails 0 fails 0 4268 184 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.

The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. but which were discarded (e. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams. January 2006 185 . This count includes invalid addresses (e.g.g. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.0... For entities which are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. In entities which do not act as IPv6 routers. Note that for a successfully forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled.2 Command Reference Table 5-19 IPv6 Statistics (/stats/l3/ip6) Statistics IP6 Statistics Section InReceives InDelivers The total number of input datagrams received by the interface. The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 userprotocols (including ICMP). Note that this counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the datagrams. Description UnknownProtos OutRequests ReasmOKs InDiscards ForwDatagrams InAddrErrors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The total number of IPv6 datagrams which local IPv6 user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IPv6 in requests for transmission. including those received in error. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.. ::0) and unsupported addresses (e. and the Source-Route processing was successful. addresses with unallocated prefixes).g. for lack of buffer space). this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the datagrams. The number of output datagrams which this entity received and forwarded to their final destinations.

2 Command Reference Table 5-19 IPv6 Statistics (/stats/l3/ip6) (Continued) Statistics OutNoRoutes ReasmFails Description The number of locally generated IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. bad length. etc. Note that this interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed which may not be necessarily the input interface for the messages. Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments.). The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the interface.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Note that this interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed which may not be necessarily the input interface for the messages. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received by the interface. The number of failures detected by the IPv6 re-assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out. etc. The total number of ICMP messages which this interface attempted to send. January 2006 . The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface which includes all those counted by ipv6IfIcmpInErrors. errors. The number of ICMP messages which this interface did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages which the interface received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. InNeighborSolicits 186 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter's value.0.). IcmpInMsgs IcmpOutMsgs IcmpInErrors IcmpOutErrors IcmpInEchos ICMP6 Statistics Section InMsgs The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface which includes all those counted by ipv6IfIcmpInErrors.

The total number of ICMP messages which this interface attempted to send. The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the interface. The number of Redirect messages received by the interface.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by the interface.).0. The number of ICMP Router Solicitation messages sent by the interface. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP messages which the interface received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. InEchoReplies InNeighborAdvertisements InRouterAdvertisements InTimeExcds InParmProblems OutMsgs OutEchos OutNeighborSolicits OutRouterSolicits OutRedirects Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The number of Redirect messages sent. For a host. etc. bad length. since hosts do not send redirects. The number of ICMP Echo Request messages sent by the interface. The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface. January 2006 187 . The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by the interface. this object will always be zero.2 Command Reference Table 5-19 IPv6 Statistics (/stats/l3/ip6) (Continued) Statistics InRouterSolicits InDestUnreachs InPktTooBigs InRedirects InErrors Description The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface.

0. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the interface.2 Command Reference Table 5-19 IPv6 Statistics (/stats/l3/ip6) (Continued) Statistics OutErrors Description The number of ICMP messages which this interface did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. January 2006 . OutEchoReplies OutNeighborAdvertisements OutRouterAdvertistments 188 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter's value. The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages sent by the interface. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram.

The maximum number of supported routes. The total number of RIP advertisement packets received that were dropped. Description Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table.------------1 3 3 4096 2 3 3 4096 3 3 3 4096 4 3 3 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------RIP statistics: ripInPkts: ripDiscardPkts: BGP statistics: bgpInPkts: bgpBadPkts: bgpRoutesAdded: bgpRoutesCur: bgpRoutesIgnored: 0 ripOutPkts: 0 ripRoutesAgedOut: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 bgpOutPkts: bgpSessFailures: bgpRoutesRemoved: bgpRoutesFailed: bgpRoutesFiltered: 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-20 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics Route Statistics & SP Route Statistics: ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax RIP statistics: ripInPkts ripOutPkts ripDiscardPkts The total number of good RIP advertisement packets received.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/route Route Statistics Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: 3 ipRoutesHighWater: 3 ipRoutesMax: 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP Route statistics: SP ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax --.0. January 2006 189 .------------.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The total number of RIP advertisement packets sent.------------------. The total number of outstanding routes in the route table.

The total number of routes dropped by the filter. The total number of BGP packets dropped. /stats/l3/arp ARP statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics. The total number of BGP routes that failed to add in the routing table. The total number of routes that were removed from the routing table. MP ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: 2 arpEntriesHighWater: 2 arpEntriesMax: 8192 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP ARP statistics: SP arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax --. The total number of routes ignored because the peer was not connected locally or multihop was not configured. The total number of failed sessions.0. January 2006 .--------------.--------------------. Description The total number of routes learned via RIP that has aged out.2 Command Reference Table 5-20 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics ripRoutesAgedOut BGP statistics: bgpInPkts bgpOutPkts bgpBadPkts bgpSessFailures bgpRoutesAdded bgpRoutesRemoved bgpRoutesCur bgpRoutesFailed bgpRoutesIgnored bgpRoutesFiltered The total number of BGP packets received. The total number of routes that were added to the routing table.--------------1 1 1 8192 2 1 1 8192 3 1 1 8192 4 1 1 8192 190 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The total number of current BGP routes.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The total number of BGP packets sent.

2 Command Reference Table 5-21 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp) Statistics arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax Description The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed: VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: vrrpBadVersion: vrrpBadAddress: vrrpBadPassword: 0 0 0 0 0 vrrpBadAdvers: vrrpBadVrid: vrrpBadData: vrrpBadInterval: 0 0 0 0 Table 5-22 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics vrrpInAdvers vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrpBadVersion Description The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received. based on a number of priority criteria. January 2006 191 . When virtual routers are configured. /stats/l3/vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the Nortel Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. If the master fails.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received.

0. 192 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 Table 5-23 DNS Statistics (/stats/l3/dns) Statistics dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests Description The total number of DNS request packets that have been received.2 Command Reference Table 5-22 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics vrrpBadVrid vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadData vrrpBadPassword vrrpBadInterval Description /stats/l3/dns DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics. The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. January 2006 .

The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/icmp ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0 Table 5-24 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInMsgs Description The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. and so forth). The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. icmpInErrors icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received. January 2006 193 . stop sending data) messages received. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. bad length.

The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps 194 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter's value. since hosts do not send redirects. stop sending data) messages sent. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.2 Command Reference Table 5-24 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs Description The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. this object will always be zero. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full.0. For a host. January 2006 . The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent.

January 2006 195 . including framing characters. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. For packet-oriented interfaces. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). ifInNUCastPkts ifInDiscards ifInErrors ifInUnknownProtos Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. For packet-oriented interfaces. The number of packets. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. This object is deprecated in favor of ifInMulticastPkts and ifInBroadcastPkts. The number of packets. this counter will always be 0.0.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/if <interface number> Interface Statistics IP interface 1 statistics: ifInOctets: 48948386 ifInNUCastPkts: 167895 ifInErrors: 0 ifOutOctets: 27100789 ifOutNUcastPkts: 218652 ifOutErrors: 0 ifInUcastPkts: ifInDiscards: ifInUnknownProtos: ifOutUcastPkts: ifOutDiscards: ifStateChanges 220553 0 0 441938 0 1 Table 5-25 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts Description The total number of octets received on the interface.

For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of times an interface has transitioned from either down to up or from up to down. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. For packet-oriented interfaces. including those that were discarded or not sent. January 2006 . which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. including framing characters. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors. This object is deprecated in favor of ifOutMulticastPkts and ifOutBroadcastPkts.0. including those that were discarded or not sent. the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.2 Command Reference Table 5-25 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts Description The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifStateChanges 196 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The number of outbound packets.

an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). In particular. this object should contain the value -1. measured in milliseconds.0. The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/tcp TCP Statistics TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpCurInConn: tcpCurLstnConn: tcpAllocTCBFails: 4 240000 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: tcpCurOutConn: tcpOutRsts: 0 1600 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 Table 5-26 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm tcpRtoMin Description The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. In particular. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). January 2006 197 . The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. measured in milliseconds.

The total number of segments received in error (for example. bad TCP checksums).Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. This count includes segments received on currently established connections. The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag. plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. The total number of segments sent. the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. January 2006 . including those received in error. The total number of remotely-initiated TCP connections. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSEWAIT state. including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets.2 Command Reference Table 5-26 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpAttemptFails Description The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state. The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. The total number of segments retransmitted . The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpCurInConn tcpCurOutConn tcpCurLstnConn tcpOutRsts tcpAllocTCBFails 198 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The total number of segments received.that is. The total number of TCP ports on which the switch is listening.0. The total number of switch-originated TCP connection requests.

January 2006 199 .Show SIP SLB stats wlm .Show filter stats layer7 . /stats/slb Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu] sp .Show SSL SLB stats ftp .Show real server stats group .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Show Workload Manager SASP stats mirror .0.SLB Switch SP Stats Menu gslb .Show DNS SLB stats wap .Global SLB Stats Menu real .Show Session mirroring stats clear .Show WAP SLB stats maint . The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.Show real server group stats virt .Show auxiliary session table stats dump . The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch).Dump all SLB statistics Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.Show FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats rtsp .Show Layer 7 stats ssl .2 Command Reference /stats/l3/udp UDP Statistics UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077 Table 5-27 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp) Statistics udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors udpNoPorts Description The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch.Show maintenance stats sip .Clear non-operational Server Load Balancing stats aux .Show virtual server stats filt . The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.Show RTSP SLB stats dns .

See page 214 for sample output. For more information. See page 220 for sample output.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 200 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. ftp Displays FTP SLB parsing and NAT statistics. See page 212 for sample output. see page 211. gslb Displays the Global SLB Statistics menu. layer7 Displays Layer 7 statistics. Real server transmit/receive octets. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the following virtual server statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the total number of times any filter has been used. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. January 2006 . see page 206.0. See page 213 for sample output. see page 202. For per-service octet counters. To view menu options. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the following real server statistics: Number of times the real server has failed its health checks Number of sessions currently open on the real server Total sessions the real server was assigned Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server Real server transmit/receive octets See page 211 for sample output. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the following real server group statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. For per-service octet counters. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. ssl Displays SSL server load balancing statistics. rtsp Displays RTSP SLB statistics. See page 213 for sample output. See page 223 for sample output. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. see page 211.2 Command Reference Table 5-28 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the server load balancing statistics menu. See page 219 for sample output. Real server transmit/receive octets.

See page 224 for sample output. refer to Table 5-51 on page 230. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. This command does not reset the switch and does not affect the following counters: Counters required for Layer 4 and Layer 7 operation (such as current real server sessions).0. All related SNMP counters. See page 231 for sample output.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. resetting them to zero. wap Displays WAP SLB statistics. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 5-28 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dns Displays DNS SLB statistics. See page 229 for sample output. aux Displays auxiliary session table statistics. maint Displays SLB maintenance statistics. clear [y|n] Clears all non-operating SLB statistics on the Nortel Application Switch. dump Dumps all switch SLB statistics. See page 230 for sample output. See page 225 for sample output. wlm <Workload Manager number. January 2006 201 . To view the statistics reset by this command. See page 227 for sample output. 1-16> <clear> Display Workload Manager SASP statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. mirror Display session mirroring statistics. sip Displays SIP SLB statistics. To save dump data to a file.

filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays statistics of the filter.Show maintenance stats aux .Show virtual server stats filt . See page 203 for a sample output.Show real server group stats virt .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. See page 204 for a sample output.Clear SP stats Table 5-29 SP Statistics Menu options (/stats/slb/sp) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays real server statistics of the switch port. clear Deletes all the SP statistics.0.Show real server stats group . /stats/slb/sp/real <real server number> SP Real Server Statistics Port 1 Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Octets: 3 3 24 202 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. See page 202 for a sample output.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing SP Statistics Menu] real . aux Displays the statistics of the auxiliary session table. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays real server group statistics of the switch port. See page 203 for a sample output. maint Displays the SP maintenance statistics. January 2006 .Show auxiliary session table stats clear . virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays statistics of the virtual server.Show filter stats maint . See page 203 for a sample output.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.100.100.--------------.-------1 200.---------.14 20 60 9 2 200.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/virt <virtual server number> SP Virtual Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.100.15 20 77 12 ---. January 2006 203 .10.10.100.-------.-------.-------.-------.-------1 200.--------------.15 20 77 12 ---.0.10.---------.14 20 60 9 2 200.---------.10.100.10.--------------.-------200.---------.100 40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/filt <filter number> SP Filter Statistics SP 1 Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 2 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.--------------.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/group <real group server number> SP Real Group Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/maint SP Maintenance Statistics SP 1 SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: Non TCP/IP frames: UDP datagrams: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: IP fragment sessions: IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 524276 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-30 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Terminated Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on. Allocation Failures UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs 204 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds). Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. January 2006 .0. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

0. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment ses.2 Command Reference Table 5-30 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. They matched an active filter with the deny action set.This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has sions processed so far. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards This represents the current number of fragment sessions.) 3. When there are no available session entries. There are no real servers (in the case of redirection filters. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because of one of the following reasons: 1. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header. IP fragment table full This counter indicates how many times session table is full. January 2006 205 . This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. 2. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had an invalid reset flag set. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the network. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the rule. see page 211. rule <rule. network <network. see page 207. see page 209.Show Global SLB remote real server stats virt .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Show Global SLB remote site stats network . under which the remote server is configured.Show all Global SLB stats Table 5-31 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Where the real server number represents the real server ID on this switch. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the remote site.Show Global SLB virtual server stats site .Clear all Global SLB stats dump . see page 208.Show Global SLB network preference stats rule .0. To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. clear Deletes all Global SLB statistics. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. maint To view an example and description of Global SLB maintenance statistics. January 2006 .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb Global SLB Statistics Menu [Global SLB Statistics Menu] real .Show Global SLB maintenance stats clear . 206 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. pers Displays Global SLB DNS persistence cache statistics.Show Global SLB DNS persistence cache stats maint . site <remote site.Show Global SLB geographical preference stats pers . To view an example.Show Global SLB rule stats geo . geo Displays Global SLB statistics for the geographical preference.

gslb.----------. v# represents a local virtual server number r# represents a remote site.2 Command Reference Table 5-31 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all Global SLB statistics. January 2006 207 .0.-------------v1 200.----------.com Server IP address Site DNS directs HTTP redirects -----.10 5 0 0 -----.--------------. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.-------------Totals 0 0 Table 5-32 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field Server Description Type of server configuration and server ID number. /stats/slb/gslb/real <real server number> Real Server Global SLB Statistics Real server 1 global stats: DNS directs: HTTP redirects: 3210 12 For any remote real server configured for Global Server Load Balancing. the number represents the real server ID on this switch.---.200.--------------.200.example.200. the following statistics can be viewed: Number of DNS responses directed to the remote real server Number of HTTP redirects to the remote real server /stats/slb/gslb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics Global SLB virtual server 1 http service stats: Domain: www.---.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. under which the remote server is configured.1 0 0 r2 200.200. Since each remote sites is configured on its peers as if it were a real server (with certain special properties).

The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 1. 208 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The number of DNS responses that return the IP address of the corresponding server.0. /stats/slb/gslb/site Global SLB Site Statistics Global SLB remote site 1 stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: 386 0 0 768 348 Table 5-33 Global SLB Site Statistics Parameters (/stats/slb/gslb/site) Field Bad remote site packets received DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received Description The number of bad packets received from remote site. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 1. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 2. January 2006 . The number of HTTP requests redirected to the corresponding server.2 Command Reference Table 5-32 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field IP Address Site DNS directs HTTP redirects Description IP address of the server.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The remote site number. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 2.

DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. If bad updates or dropped packets occur. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets sent to the remote sites.0.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/maint Global SLB Maintenance Statistics Global SLB maintenance stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: DNS queries received: Bad DNS queries received: DNS responses sent: HTTP requests received: Bad HTTP requests received: HTTP responses sent: Hostname domain hits: Network domain hits: Basic domain hits: No server selected for hostname domain: No server selected for network domain: No server selected for basic domain: No matching domain: Last no result domain: Last source IP: 0 0 0 127746 85164 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 Table 5-34 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field Bad remote site packets received Description The number of bad packets received from the remote site.0. Bad updates or dropped packets usually indicate that there is a configuration problem at local or remote GSLB switches. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets sent to the remote sites.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets received from the remote sites. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets received from the remote sites. January 2006 209 . check your syslog for configuration error messages.

domain name. The number of times no server was selected after matching the basic domain name. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the network domain name configured. January 2006 . Bad HTTP requests received The number of bad/dropped client HTTP requests. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the basic domain name configured. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the hostname configured.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The source IP address of the last DNS query or HTTP request received. HTTP requests received The number of HTTP requests received.0. The number of bad DNS queries received. Client HTTP GET request packets that do not contain the entire URL are considered bad and are dropped. The number of DNS responses sent by the switch that includes DNS directs and DNS error responses. or the network domain configured. The number of times no server was selected after matching the host name domain. The number of HTTP responses sent by the switch that includes HTTP redirects. HTTP responses sent Hostname domain hits Network domain hits Basic domain hits No server selected for hostname domain No server selected for network domain No server selected for basic domain No matching domain Last no result domain Last source IP 210 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 5-34 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field DNS queries received Bad DNS queries received DNS responses sent Description The number of DNS queries received. The domain in the last DNS query received that did not match the host name. or the network domain configured. The number of times no server was selected after matching the network domain name. The number of times the DNS queries received did not match the host name. domain name.

and 10. unless configured as described in “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 211.21 for FTP services on the same physical server. you can configure IP address 10. not per service.1. The total number of sessions that have been established to the particular real server. January 2006 211 .0.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/real <real server number> Real Server SLB Statistics Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Highest sessions: Octets 129 65478 4343 523824000 NOTE – Octets are provided per server. Table 5-35 Real Server SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/real) Statistics Current sessions Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Description The total number of outstanding sessions that are established to the particular real server. The highest number of sessions ever recorded for the particular real server. The octet counters are provided per server–not per service. Configure a separate IP address for each service on each server being load balanced. you can accomplish this through the following configuration: 1.1. the octet counters represent the combined number of transmit and receive bytes (octets). For instance.1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. These counters are then added to report the total octets for each virtual server. Per Service Octet Counters For each load-balanced real server.20 for HTTP services.1. The total number of octets sent by the particular real server. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. If you need octet counters on a perservice basis.

15 20 77 12 --------------. and group each appropriate real server IP address into the group that handles the specific service.-------200.---------. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. January 2006 .0. Real server transmit/receive octets. On the Nortel Application Switch. On the Nortel Application Switch. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. and five for the FTP services on each physical server.10.---------. 212 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. 10 real servers would have to be configured: five for the HTTP services on each physical server. two groups would be configured: one for handling HTTP and one for handling FTP. configure a real server with a real IP address for each service above.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. configure one real server group for each type of service.-------. two real servers would be configured for the physical server (representing each real service).-------40 137 21 Real ---1 2 ---- Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 Real server group statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group.-------. Thus.10.100. Configure a virtual server and add the appropriate services to that virtual server. Continuing the example above.100. 3. If there were five physical servers providing the two services (HTTP and FTP). For per-service octet counters. see the procedure on “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 211.14 20 60 9 200. /stats/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Total weight updates from WorkLoad Manager : 10 Current Total Highest IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions --------------. 4. in keeping with our example.2 Command Reference 2.

--------------.10. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. below the real server IP addresses.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.10.100. January 2006 213 .14 20 60 9 2 200.-------200.-------.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Statistics Virtual server 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.--------------.---------.15 20 77 12 ---. /stats/slb/filt <filter number> Filter SLB Statistics Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 1011 You can obtain the total number of times any filter has been matched.---------.100. see “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 211.100.20 40 309 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 NOTE – The virtual server IP address is shown on the last line.-------1 200. Virtual server statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server.-------.0. Real server transmit/receive octets.10. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. For per-service octet counters.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu [Layer 7 Statistics Menu] redir .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. See page 214 for a sample output. str Displays SLB string statistics. 214 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. See page 216 for a sample output.Show connection pooling stats Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/layer7) Command Syntax & Usage redir Displays URL Redirection statistics. January 2006 . Total origin server hits The total number of HTTP requests forwarded to the origin server. pooling Display the connection pooling statistics. See page 215 for a sample output.Show SLB String stats maint .Show Layer 7 Maintenance stats pooling .Show URL Redirection stats str . maint Displays Layer 7 maintenance statistics. /stats/slb/layer7/redir Layer7 Redirection Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total URL based web cache redirection stats: cache server hits: origin server hits: straight to origin server hits: none-GETs hits: 'Cookie: ' hits: no-cache hits: RTSP cache server hits: RTSP origin server hits: HTTP redirection hits: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-37 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Description Total cache server hits The total number of HTTP requests redirected to the cache server.See page 216 for a sample output.

org 7 www.0.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.com 6 www. The total number of RTSP requests forwarded to the origin server. The total number of requests containing no-cache header forwarded to the origin server.junk. The total number of HTTP requests that were redirected by redirection filter.com 4 www.com 5 www.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The total number of instances that are load-balanced due to matching of the particular URL ID. The total number of RTSP requests redirected to the cache server.com 3 www. Total none-GETs hits Total 'Cookie:' hits Total no-cache hits Total RTSP cache server hits Total RTSP origin server hits Total HTTP redirection hits The total number of none GET requests forwarded to the origin server.The total number of HTTP requests forwarded from straight to the gin server hits origin server.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 5-37 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Description Total straight to ori.[abcdefghijklm]*.org Hits 1527115 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-38 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/str) Statistics ID SLB String Hits Description The user-defined strings being used in URL matching. The total number of cookie requests forwarded to the origin server.abc.[abcdefjhijklm]*. /stats/slb/layer7/str Layer 7 SLB String Statistics SLB String stats: ID SLB String 1 any 2 www. January 2006 215 .

January 2006 .Ubufs: Max sessions per bucket: 0 Max frames per session: Max bytes buffered (sess): 0 1260 1260 1260 1260 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-39 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Clients reset by switch on client side Description The number of reset frames sent to the client by the switch during server connection termination.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7/maint Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics Layer 7 maintenance stats: Clients reset by switch on client side: 0 Clients reset by switch on server side: 0 Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1. the switch will send a reset frame to the client to terminate the connection. This means that when the switch could not connect to the real sever and the client’s retries exceeded the threshold due to delayed binding.0.1 216 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.1: 0 Invalid HTTP methods: 0 Aged delayed binding sessions: 0 Half open connections: 0 Switch retries: 0 Random early drops: 0 Requests exceeded 9000 bytes: 0 Invalid 3-way handshakes: 0 Exceeded max frame size: 0 Out of order packet drops: 0 Current SP[1] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[2] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[3] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[4] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP memory units: 5040 Current SEQ buffer entries: 0 Highest: Current Data buffer use: 0 Highest: Current SP buffer entries: 0 Highest: Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc: 0 Total SEQ Buffer Allocs: 0 Total SEQ Frees: Total Data Buffer Allocs: 0 Total Data Frees: Alloc Fails .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of reset frames sent to the server by the switch during server connection termination due to delayed binding.Seq buffers: 0 Alloc Fails . The total number of connection swapping between different real servers in supporting multiple HTTP/1.1 client requests.0 Clients reset by switch on server side Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.

The total number of GET requests that exceeded 4500 bytes.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 5-39 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Invalid HTTP methods Aged delayed binding sessions Half open connections Description The total number of HTTP requests that contain invalid methods sent by the client. Switch retries Random early drops Requests exceeded 4500 bytes Invalid 3-way handshakes Exceeded max frame size Out of order packet drops: Current SP memory units Current SEQ buffer entries Highest SEQ buffer entries Current Data buffer use Highest Data buffer use Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc Total SEQ Buffer Allocs Total SEQ Frees Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The total number of switch retries to connect to the real server. The highest number of data buffers ever used. The total number of sequence buffer allocated. The highest number of sequence buffers ever used. The total number of sequence buffer is freed. The total numbers of outstanding TCP connections that are half opened. The total number of switch-generated frames that exceeded the maximum allowed frame size.2 The total number of sequence buffer allocations. The total number of dropped frames because of invalid 3-way hand shakes. The total number of TCP packets dropped because they were received out of order. The currently available SP memory units. The total number of SYN frames dropped when the buffer is low. The number of outstanding data buffers used. The number of outstanding sequence buffers used. January 2006 217 . It is incremented when the switch responds to TCP SYN packet and decremented upon receiving TCP SYN ACK packet from the requester. The total number of aged delayed binding sessions caused by failed connection initialization between the switch and the server.

Max bytes buffered (sess) The maximum number of bytes to be buffered per session. The number of times the URL data buffer allocation failed.2 The total of number buffers freed. The number of times sequence buffer allocation failed. The maximum number of items (sessions) allowed in the session table hash bucket chain. /stats/slb/layer7/pooling Layer7 Pooling Statistics >> Layer 7 Statistics# pooling -----------------------------------------------------------------Connection pooling statistics: Current opened server connections: 0 Active server connections: 0 Available server connections: 0 Total number of aged out client connections: 0 Total number of aged out server connections: 0 218 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.Seq buffers Alloc Fails .0.2 Command Reference Table 5-39 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Total Data Buffer Allocs Total Data Frees Alloc Fails .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Max frames per session The maximum number of frames to be buffered per session.Ubufs Max sessions per bucket Description The total number of buffers allocated to store client request. January 2006 .

January 2006 219 .0. the total sessions seen on the switch since last reset and the high water mark of current sessions for the following: Unique SessionIds Many SSL sessions can use the same SessionId.---------. The number of different TCP connections using SSL service. SSL connections Persistent Port Sessions Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The number of SessionIds maintained to allow for persistence across different client ports.-------Unique SessionIds 0 0 0 SSL connections 0 0 0 Persistent Port Sessions 0 0 0 Table 5-40 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats SessionId allocation fails Total number of SSL ID reassignments The table shows the Current Sessions. Description Debug stats for SSL SessionId based persistence.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.-------. This number shows the number of unique SSL sessions seen on the switch. these should all bind to the same server.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ssl SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats: SessionId allocation fails: Total number of SSL ID reassignments: 0 0 Current Total Highest Sessions Sessions Sessions ------------------------. The number of times allocation of a session table entry failed when attempting to store a SessionId in the table.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. See page 222 for sample output. 220 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.Show parsing . January 2006 .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu [FTP SLB parsing and active . parsing Shows parsing statistics. See page 221 for sample output. See page 221 for sample output. maint Shows maintenance statistics.Dump Filter Statistics Menu] active FTP NAT filter stats FTP SLB parsing server stats FTP maintenance stats all FTP SLB/NAT stats Table 5-41 FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/ftp) Command Syntax and Usage active Shows active FTP SLB parsing and filter statistics. See page 222. dump Shows all FTP SLB/NAT statistics.Show dump .Show maint .0.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/active Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats(PORT): Total FTP: Total New Active FTP Index: Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-42 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active) Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats (PORT) Total FTP Total New Active FTP Index Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives the port command from the client. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the Switch needs for packet adjustment.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections. January 2006 221 .0. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs FTP SLB parsing. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. /stats/slb/ftp/parsing Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics Total FTP SLB Parsing Stats(PASV): Total FTP: Total New FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-43 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/parsing) Statistics Total FTP Total New FTP SLB parsing Index FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections. The number of times the switch creates a new index due to port command from the client. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client.

The total number of times the adjustment between ACK and SEQ occurred on the filter.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of times the switch could not switch mode from active to passive and vice versa.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/maint FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics FTP mode switch error: 0 Table 5-44 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/maint) Statistics FTP mode switch error Description The number of times the switch is not able to switch modes from active to passive and vice versa. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. /stats/slb/ftp/dump FTP SLB Statistics Dump Total FTP : Total FTP NAT Filtered: Total new active FTP NAT Index: Total new FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: FTP mode switch error: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-45 FTP SLB Statistics Dump (/stats/slb/ftp/dump) Statistics Total FTP Description The total number of FTP sessions that occurred. Total FTP NAT Filtered The total number of FTP NAT filter sessions that occurred. 222 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.0. Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff FTP mode switch error The total number of new data sessions created for FTP NAT filter in active mode. January 2006 . The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs for FTP SLB parsing.

---------. The total number of UDP connections for data channels.---------.---------.---------.0.-------0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-46 RTSP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/rtsp) Statistics ControlConnection UDP Streams Redirect ConnectionDenied BufferAllocs AllocFailures Description The total number of TCP connections for RTSP control connection. January 2006 223 .---------.---------.---------1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -. The total number of times the connections got denied due to shortage of resources or the real server being down.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The total number of times the connection got redirected.---------. The total number of times the buffer allocation failed.---------.---------. The number depends upon the type of media player being used.---------. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/rtsp RTSP SLB Statistics Control UDP Connection Buffer Alloc SP Connection Streams Redirect Denied Allocs Failures -. The total number of buffer allocations used.

The total number of DNS queries that contain more than one domain name to be resolved. January 2006 . The total number of malformed DNS queries received. Currently only one domain name resolution per request is supported.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The total number of DNS queries received through UDP requests.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/dns DNS SLB Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number number of of of of of of of TCP DNS queries: UDP DNS queries: invalid DNS queries: multiple DNS queries: domain name parse errors: failed real server name matches: DNS parsing internal errors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-47 DNS SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/dns) Statistics Total number of TCP DNS queries Total number of UDP DNS queries Total number of invalid DNS queries Total number of multiple DNS queries Total number of domain name parse errors Total number of failed real server name matches Total number of DNS parsing internal errors Description The total number of DNS queries that received through TCP connections. The total number of out of memory and other unexpected errors the user gets while processing the DNS query. The total number of times the user failed to find a real server which has the same layer 7 strings that match the domain name to be resolved. The total number of DNS queries that have short or invalid domain names to be resolved.0. 224 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.

no available real server requests to wrong SP The number of session add/delete requests sent to the wrong SP.DMA: 0 Table 5-48 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions allocation failures incorrect VIPs incorrect Vports The number of session bindings currently in use.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.SP dead: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs: 0 acct wrap reqs: 0 acct start reqs: 0 acct update reqs: 0 acct stop reqs: 0 acct bad reqs: 0 acct reqs(FIP): 0 acct reqs(no FIP): 0 add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails. WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions: 0 allocation failures: 0 incorrect VIPs: 0 incorrect Vports: 0 no available real server: 0 requests to wrong SP: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails.SP dead: 0 req fails. This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.0.SP dead: 0 req fails.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/wap WAP SLB Statistics This command displays all the Radius and WAP related counters. January 2006 225 . Indicates instances where the switch ran out of available bindings for a port.

The number of RADIUS Accounting Start frames received. The number of bad RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of add/delete request failures due to dead target SP. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The number of RADIUS Accounting Update frames. The number of RADIUS Accounting Stop frames received. 226 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The number of add-request failures due to dead target SP.2 Command Reference Table 5-48 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs req fails. RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs acct wrap reqs acct start reqs acct update reqs acct stop reqs acct bad reqs add session reqs del session reqs req fails.SP dead The number of WAP session add requests via TPCP. The number of wrapped RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of add/delete requests failed due to DMA write failure.DMA The number of RADIUS Accounting frames received.SP dead req fails. The number of WAP session add requests via RADIUS snooping. The number of WAP session delete requests via RADIUS snooping.0.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/maint SLB Maintenance Statistics SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: UDP datagrams: Non TCP/IP frames: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Backup server activations: Overflow server activations: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: Current IPF buffer sessions: Highest IPF buffer sessions: IPF buffer alloc fails: IPF SP buffer alloc fails: SP buffer too low: Exceeded 16 OOO packets: Free Service pool entries: Current IP6 sessions: Incorrect IP6 VIPs: Incorrect IP6 Vports: IP6 packets drops: 2097104 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8192 0 0 0 0 SLB Maintenance statistics are described in the following table. January 2006 227 . Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.0. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds). Table 5-49 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Terminated Sessions Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled.

228 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment sessions Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards IP fragment table full Free service pool entries The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had an invalid reset flag set. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs Incorrect Vports Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. January 2006 . This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports.2 Command Reference Table 5-49 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Description Allocation Failures Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. This counter indicates how many times session table is full. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because they matched an active filter with the deny action set. This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has processed so far. This represents the current number of fragment sessions. This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured.0. This counter indicates the number of free service pool entries.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. January 2006 229 .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sip SIP SLB Statistics SIP Stats: Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number of of of of of of SIP Client Parse Errors SIP Server Parse Errors SIP Unknown Method packets SIP Incomplete Messages SIP Filter Parse Errors packets with SIP SDP NAT : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-50 SIP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/sip) Statistics Total number of SIP Client Parse Errors Total number of SIP Server Parse Errors Description The total number of errors encountered during client processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet. Total number of packets received that have SIP SDP NAT information. The total number of errors encountered during server processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet. Total number of SIP Incomplete Messages Total number of SIP Filter Parse Errors Total number of packets with SIP SDP NAT Total number of packets received which do not have the complete SIP message in a single packet. Total number of errors encountered during filter processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet.0. Total number of SIP Total number of packets received with methods not known to the Unknown Method packets SIP parser on the switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

230 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.0.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/wlm <wlm number> Display Workload Manager SASP statistics Table 5-51 SLB WorkLoad Manager SASP (/stats/slb/wlm) >> Server Load Balancing Statistics# /st/sl/wlm 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------Workload Manager 1 Statistics: Registration Requests: 1 Registration Replies: 1 Registration Reply Errors: 0 Deregisteration Requests: Deregisteration Replies: Deregisteration Reply Errors: Set LB State Requests: Set LB State Replies: Set LB State Reply Errors: Set Member State Requests: Set Member State Replies: Set Member State Reply Errors: Send Weights Messages received: Send Weights Message Parse Errors: Total Messages with Invalid LB Name: Total Messages with Invalid Group Name: Total Messages with Invalid Real Server Name: Messages with Invalid SASP Header: Messages with parse errors: Messages with Unsuppored Message Type: 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 47 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /stats/slb/wlm <wlm number>/clear Clear Workload Manager SASP Statistics This command clears statistics for the specified Workload Manager. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/mirror Display Workload Manager SASP statistics Table 5-52 SLB Session Mirroring statistics (/stats/slb/mirror) >> Server Load Balancing Statistics# mirror -----------------------------------------------------------------Session Mirroring Stats: Rx Tx Total Create Session Messages 0 0 Total Update Session Messages 0 0 Total Delete Session Messages 0 0 Total Create Data Session Messages 0 0 Total Update Data Session Messages 0 0 Total Delete Data Session Messages 0 0 Total Sessions Created 0 Total Sessions Updated 0 Total Sessions Deleted 0 Total Data Sessions Created 0 Total Data Sessions Updated 0 Total Data Sessions Deleted 0 Session table full 0 Unvailable pport 0 Session already present 0 Session not found 0 Control session not found 0 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 231 .

ipusers Displays Bandwidth Management IP user stats for iplimit contracts.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm BWM Statistics Menu [Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu] port . To view menu options. See page 237 for sample output.Switch Port Contract Stats Menu cont . January 2006 . clear Clears all bandwidth management statistics.Clear BWM statistics Table 5-53 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Switch Port Contract Statistics Menu.Show BWM IP user stats for iplimit contracts dump .Dump all BWM statistics clear .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. See page 238 for sample output. maint Displays bandwidth management maintenance statistics. See page 235 for details. rcont <BW Contract number (1-1024)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics. dump Displays all bandwidth management statistics.BW Contract rate stats hist . See page 238 for sample output. Each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/contract on page 319. cont <BW Contract number (1-1024)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics.BW History stats maint . 232 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.0.Show BWM maint statistics ipusers . see page 233. hist Displays bandwidth management history statistics.BW Contract stats rcont . See page 234 for details.

rcont <BW Contract number (1-1024)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics.------------------. If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen.------.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. See page 233 for a sample output.---------.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 .BW Contract stats rcont .BW Contract rate stats Table 5-54 Management Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm/sp) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW Contract number (1-1024)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. /stats/bwm/port <port number>/cont BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu >> Bandwidth Management Port Statistics# cont -----------------------------------------------------------------BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards Total Pkts BufUsed BufMax -------.---------.---1024 Default 0 0 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/port <port number>/rcont BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen. You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>. zero for infinite Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300.0. the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/port <port number> BWM Switch Processor Statistics [Bandwidth Management Port Statistics Menu] cont . For example: >> AAS_2424 . January 2006 233 .

---------. NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.---------. The contract name.---------.---------.---------.----1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5230 682947936 1822133376 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 1024 Default 0 773974 0 0 16320 1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5238 684289056 1825753104 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 1024 Default 0 774114 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/cont <contract number> BWM Contract Statistics BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards Total Pkts BufUsed BufMax -------. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.------. 234 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.--------------. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.------1024 Default 0 0 0 0 16320 The following description of statistics applies on a specific switch port for all enabled contracts. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. The total number of packets classified for that contract. Table 5-55 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics Contract Name Octets Discards Total Pkts BufUsed Description The contract number.------. January 2006 .---------.---------.

You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>. For example: >> AAS_2424 . If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen. This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session. NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only. January 2006 235 .0.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 .2 Command Reference Table 5-55 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics BufMax Description Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted. /stats/bwm/rcont BWM Contract Rate Statistics Use this command to show the rate statistics of all the enabled contracts. zero for infinite Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300.

236 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted.---------. The contract name.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Rate at which the packets are going out of the switch on a particular contract.0.---------.---------. January 2006 .2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.----1 cont1 5222 285408288 735607152 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 285720864 735308784 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 1024 Default 4 517182 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5230 286747296 739228896 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5230 287059872 738930528 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 1024 Default 8 519400 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5222 288084192 742853160 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 288400992 742550760 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 1024 Default 8 521578 0 0 456960 Table 5-56 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont) Statistics Contract Name Rate (in Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax Description The contract number. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limits. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.--------------.------. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted.

80.80.23.---------------.23. Table 5-57 Bandwidth Management History Statistics (/stats/bwm/hist) Statistics Contract Octets Discards TimeStamp Description The contract number for which history is enabled.23.80.124 1024 Default 608 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 Switch IP Cont Name Octets You can dump the stats kept in the SMTP history buffer that get dumped periodically when an E-mail is sent. January 2006 237 .80. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.80.80. Use this command to show the history of all the contracts for which history command is enabled. This command is used to keep long term history only for the contracts that are enabled and have history command turned on.124 8 filter_number08 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 4 filter_number04 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. The number of octets sent out on a particular contract.23.23.---------.---.23.0.124 2 filter_number02 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 3 filter_number03 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23. NOTE – These statistics can only be viewed when the e-mail option is enabled.23.80.80.80.23.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.124 1 filter_number01 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 10 filter_number10 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/hist BWM History Statistics Discards TimeStamp YyyyMmDd:Hr:Mi/TmZone --------------.124 9 filter_number09 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23. The sampling is done at one-minute intervals.124 5 filter_number05 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80. The number of octets discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.124 7 filter_number07 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---------47.23.---------.124 6 filter_number06 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. Indicates the time the packets were received or discarded.

2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/maint BWM Maintenance Statistics BWM Maint statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for rate limiting contracts Discard pkts 0 Discard octets 0 Out pkts 0 Out octets 0 Transmit failed 0 User Limit entry allocation failures 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for traffic shaping contracts QFull Discard pkts 0 QFull Discard octets 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Transmit failed 0 TDT set when qfull 0 TDT set between soft and hard 0 TDT set at soft 0 /stats/bwm/ipusers BWM IP Users Statistics This command displays the number of BWM IP user entries for each BWM contract for each SP.---------0 20 0 0 20 238 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.---------.---------.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. January 2006 .---------. BWM IP users statistics Contract SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 Total -------.---------.---------.---------.---------10 0 10 0 0 10 11 0 10 0 0 10 ---------.---------.

To view a sample output and a description of the stats. see page 240.IP Address ACL Statistics Menu udpblast . see page 244. January 2006 239 . ipacl Displays the IP Address Access Control List statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.Show pattern match group statistics ratelim .Show rate limiting statistics dump . dump Displays all security statistics. see page 246.UDP Blast Statistics Menu dos .Dump all security statistics Command Syntax and Usage dos Displays the DOS Attack statistics menu. see page 246. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.DoS Attack Statistics Menu pgroup . see page 245. ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting statistics menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. udpblast Displays the UDP Blast statistics menu. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /stats/security Security Statistics [Security Statistics Menu] ipacl .0. pgroup Displays the Pattern Match Group statistics menu.

vecnascan. seqzero. igmplen. loopback. fullxmasscan. udplen. icmptype. xmasscan. rc8. arpnucast. blat. igmptype. fragmoredont. icmpoff. pepsi. igmpfrag. tcplen. ipttl. fragboundary. help Displays a description of each type of DOS attack by name and how it works. udpportzero. ip6version For a description of these different types of DOS attacks. garp. fragoff. arpspoof.2 Command Reference /stats/security/dos DOS Attack Statistics Menu [Protocol Anomaly and DoS Attack Prevention Statistics Menu] port . fraggle. see “Types of DOS Attacks” on page 241. flagabnormal. synfrag. ipversion. dnsport. clear Deletes all DOS attack statistics.0. fragoversize. ftpport. finscan. ackzero. ipoptlen. ipprot. arplen. smurf. ipreserved. fraglast. on the selected port only.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. fragdata. ip6len.Show port protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention stats dump . broadcast.Clear all protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention stats help . tcpportzero. tcpoptlen. synfinscan.Protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention description Table 5-58 DOS Attacks Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/dos) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the number of times the packets were dropped for each of the following types of DOS attacks. icmpdata. land. fragopt. nullscan. tcpreserved. snmpnull. icmplen.Dump all protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention stats clear . for each of the following types of DOS attacks: iplen. January 2006 . arpnbcast. dump Displays the number of times the packets were dropped on the switch. syndata. 240 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. fragdontoff.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. PortZero. You can use the help command to obtain a brief explanation of each type of DOS attack detected by the switch. Fraggle. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. Nullscan. and ScanSynFin. Xmascan. LandAttack.0.2 Command Reference Types of DOS Attacks Nortel Application Switch Operating System can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 241 .

0.0. fragdontoff : IPv4 packets with non-zero fragment offset and don't fragment bits are set. ipreserved : IPv4 packets with IP reserved bit is set. >> /stats/security/dos help iplen : IPv4 packets with bad IP header or payload length. land : IPv4 packets with same source and destination IP. fragdata : IPv4 packets with more fragments bit is set and small payload. ipttl : IPv4 packets with small IP TTL.0.255.255]. finscan : TCP packets with only FIN bit is set.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. ipversion : IPv4 packets with IP version not 4.0. tcplen : TCP packets with bad TCP header length.255. ipprot : IPv4 packets with IP protocol is unassigned or reserved. fragopt : IPv4 packets with non-zero fragment offset and IP options. fragoff : IPv4 packets with small non-zero fragment offset. broadcast : IPv4 packets with broadcast source or destination IP [0.0. blat : TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT.255. fullxmasscan: TCP packets with all control bits are set. 242 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A.0. fragoversize: IPv4 packets with non-zero fragment offset and oversize payload.2 Command Reference Refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for a detailed description of DOS attacks. fragboundary: IPv4 packets with more fragments bit is set and payload not at 8-byte boundary. ipoptlen : IPv4 packets with bad IP options length. tcpportzero : TCP packets with source or destination port is zero. vecnascan : TCP packets with only URG or PUSH or URG|FIN or PSH|FIN or URG|PSH bits are set. January 2006 . fragmoredont: IPv4 packets with more fragments and don't fragment bits are set. tcpreserved : TCP packets with TCP reserved bit is set. nullscan : TCP packets with all control bits are zero. fraglast : IPv4 packets last fragment without payload.0/8]. loopback : IPv4 packets with loopback source or destination IP [127.

syndata : TCP packets with SYN bit is set and with payload. fraggle : UDP packets to broadcast destination IP (x.x. smurf : ICMP ping requests to a broadcast destination IP (x. ackzero : TCP packets with acknowledgement number is zero and ACK bit is set.x. arplen : ARP request or reply packets with bad length. tcpoptlen : TCP packets with bad TCP options length. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 320506-A. DPORT=19. icmptype : ICMP packets with type is unassigned or reserved. udpportzero : UDP packets with source or destination port is zero. flagabnormal: TCP packets with abnormal control bits combination. ftpport : TCP packets with SPORT=20. garp : ARP request or reply packets with same source and destination IP. pepsi : UDP packets with SPORT=19.255). igmptype : IGMP packets with type is unassigned or reserved. icmpoff : ICMP packets with large fragment offset. seqzero : TCP packets with sequence number is zero. URG and PSH bits are set.x. arpnbcast : ARP request packets with non broadcast destination MAC.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. udplen : UDP packets with bad UDP header length. icmplen : ICMP packets with bad ICMP header length. January 2006 243 . DPORT<1024 and SYN bit is set. arpnucast : ARP reply packets with non unicast destination MAC. icmpdata : ICMP packets with zero fragment offset and large payload. rc8 : UDP packets with SPORT=7 and DPORT=7. igmpfrag : IGMP packets with more fragments bit is set or non-zero fragment offset. dnsport : TCP packets with SPORT=53. synfrag : TCP packets with SYN bit is set and more fragments bit is set. ip6version : IPv6 packets with IP version not 6. DPORT<1024 and SYN bit is set. DPORT=7 or SPORT=7. igmplen : IGMP packets with bad IGMP header length. snmpnull : UDP packets with DPORT=161 and without payload.x.255).2 Command Reference xmasscan : TCP packets with FIN.0. arpspoof : ARP request or reply packets with mismatch source with sender MACs or destination with target MACs. ip6len : IPv6 packets with bad header length. synfinscan : TCP packets with SYN and FIN bits are set.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security/ipacl
IP Access Control List Statistics
The following IP Access Control List statistics can be viewed with this command:
[IP ACL Statistics Menu] dump - IP address access control Stats clear - Clear all access control Stats

Table 5-59 IPACL Security Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/ipacl)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the accumulated blocked packets for each source or destination IP address and mask pair in the access control list. >> Main# /stats/security/ipacl/dump ----------------------------------------------------------------IP ACL stats: Source IP Addr Mask Type Blocked Packets --------------- --------------- ----- --------------No source IP ACL's created Dest IP Addr Mask Type Blocked Packets --------------- --------------- ----- --------------No destination IP ACL's created clear Deletes all the statistics of accumulated blocked packets.

244

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security/udpblast
UDP Blast Statistics
[UDP Blast Statistics Menu] dump - UDP Blast Stats clear - Clear all UDP Blast Stats

Table 5-60 UDP Blast Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/udpblast)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all the accumulated blocked packets for each port, and the current packet rate per second. See page 245 for a sample output and a description of the statistics. clear Deletes all the accumulated blocked packets.

/stats/security/udpblast/dump
UDP Blast Dump Statistics
UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets ------------------------Current Packet Rate/Second --------------------------

Table 5-61 UDP Blast Dump Statistics Parameters (/stats/security/udpblast/dump)
Field UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/ Second Description UDP ports that experienced UDP blast attacks. The number of blocked packets. Displays the current rate of packet to the UDP port.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

245

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security/pgroup
UDP Pattern Match Statistics
Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name 1 Hits 0

This menu displays how many times each configured pattern group has been matched and a subsequent filtering action performed. Pattern groups are configured in the “Pattern Matching Menu” on page 404.

/stats/security/ratelim
Rate Limiting Statistics
Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries:

0 0

0 0

0 0

Table 5-62 Rate Limiting Statistics (/stats/security/ratelim)
Field Total holds down triggered Current per-client state entries Description The total number of packets dropped after the hold-down period expired. The total number of per-client state entries for TCP/UDP/ICMP rate limiting.

246

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security/dump
Dump Statistics for Security
IP ACL stats: Address Blocked Packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/Second ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name Hits 1 0 100 0 101 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries:

0 0

0 0

0 0

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

247

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/mp Management Processor Statistics
[MP-specific Statistics Menu] pkt - Show Packet and TCP stats tcb - Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb - Show All UDP control blocks in use sfd - Show All Socket FD in use cpu - Show CPU utilization mem - Show memory stats

Table 5-63 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp)
Command Syntax and Usage pkt Displays packet statistics, to check for leads and load. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 249. tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 251. ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output, see page 251. sfd Displays all Socket File Descriptors that are in use. To view a sample output, see page 252. cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1, 4, and 64 seconds. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 252. mem Displays memory statistics.

248

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/mp/pkt
MP Packet Statistics
Packet counts: allocs: mediums: jumbos: smalls: alloc fails: TCP counts: allocs: current: alloc fails: 89262 0 0 0 0 4866 46 0 frees: mediums hi-watermark: jumbos hi-watermark: smalls hi-watermark: packet discards: frees: current hi-watermark: alloc discards: 89262 4 0 4 0 4827 146 0

Table 5-64 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt)
Statistics Packet counts: allocs frees mediums jumbos smalls alloc fails frees mediums hi-watermark Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packets freed from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Description

jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

249

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-64 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt)
Statistics packet discards Description The number of packets that are discarded by the MP. The packets are discarded because buffer resources are not available or the buffer threshold is reached and the low priority packets are discarded.

TCP counts: allocs current alloc fails frees current hi-watermark alloc discards Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of TCP packet allocation failures from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of times the TCP packet buffers are freed (released) to MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of TCP packet allocation from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The number of TCP packets that are discarded by the MP. The packets are discarded because MP memory resources are not available.

250

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/mp/tcb
TCP Statistics
All TCP allocated control blocks: 117f6d00: 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 0.0.0.0 117f81a8: 47.81.27.6 1331 <=> 47.80.16.59 80 23 listen established

Table 5-65 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb)
Statistics 117f6d00/117f81a8 0.0.0.0/47.81.27.6 0/1331 0.0.0.0/47.80.16.59 80/23 listen/established Description Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State

/stats/mp/ucb
UCB Statistics
All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen 1985: listen 3122: listen

Table 5-66 UCB Statistics on MP (/stats/mp/ucb)
Field 161/1985/3122 Listen Description UDP port number State

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

251

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/mp/sfd
MP-Specific SFD Statistics
All Socket FD allocated: 0 -1 16 1180b128: 0.0.0.0 server 1 -1 17 108c5bd8: 0.0.0.0 server 2 -1 18 108d5cfc: 0.0.0.0 server 3 -1 19 1180a258: 0.0.0.0 server 0 <=> 47.133.88.31 0 <=> 47.133.88.31 0 <=> 47.133.88.31 0 <=> 47.133.88.31 81 23 22 443 listen listen listen listen TCP TCP TCP TCP

/stats/mp/cpu
CPU Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on MP.
CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds:

100% 100% 100%

Table 5-67 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu)
Statistics cpuUtil1Second cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval.

252

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/sp <SP Number> SP Specific Statistics
[SP-specific Statistics Menu] maint - Show maintenance stats clear - Clear maintenance stats cpu - Show CPU utilization

Table 5-68 SP Specific Statistics (/stats/sp)
Statistics maint clear cpu Description Displays internal statistics, Layer 2 FDB maintenance statistics, and MP DOS shield statistics. See page 254 for a sample output. Deletes all the maintenance statistics. Displays what percentage of the CPU has been utilized. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 254.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

253

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/sp <SP number>/maint
SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics
Maintenance statistics for SP 1: Receive Letter success from MP: 158648 Receive Letter success from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 4: 0 Receive Letter errors from MP: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 4: 0 Send Letter success to MP: 125516 Send Letter success to SP 2: 0 Send Letter success to SP 3: 6799 Send Letter success to SP 4: 6791 Send Letter failures to MP: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 2: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 3: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 4: 0 learnErrNoddw: 0 resolveErrNoddw: ageMPNoddw: 0 deleteMiss: pfdbFreeEmpty: 0 arpDiscards: 0 icmpDiscards: tcpDiscards: 0 udpDiscards:

0 0 0 0

/stats/sp/cpu
CPU Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on the Switch Processor (SP).
CPU utilization for SP 1: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds:

6% 6% 6%

Table 5-69 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu)
Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval.

254

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-69 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu)
Statistics cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval.

/stats/pmirr Port Mirroring Statistics Menu
[Port Mirroring Statistics Menu] dump - Port Mirroring Stats clear - Clear all Port Mirroring Stats

Table 5-70 Port Mirroring
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the port number, and the statistics of the traffic on the ingress and egress ports. clear Deletes all the port mirroring statistics.

CAUTION—Use this command carefully as it will delete all statistics permanently.

/stats/mgmt Management Port Statistics
Management port interface RX bytes: RX packets: RX errors: RX dropped: RX overruns: RX frame errors: RX multicast: statistics: 0 TX bytes: 0 TX packets: 0 TX errors: 0 TX dropped: 0 TX overruns: 0 TX carrier errors: 0 TX collisions: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

255

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-71 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt)
Statistics RX bytes RX packets RX errors RX dropped RX overruns RX frame errors RX multicast TX bytes TX packets TX errors TX dropped TX overruns TX carrier errors TX collisions Description The total number of incoming bytes successfully transferred by the interface. The total number of incoming packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of bad packets received. The number of incoming packets that were dropped due to lack of receive buffers. The number of received packets that were dropped because their size exceeded that of the receive queue. The number of incoming packets dropped due to IP framing errors. The number of multicast packets received. The total number of outgoing bytes successfully transferred by the interface. The total number of outgoing packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of packets dropped due to transmission problems. The number of packets dropped due to lack of transmit buffers. The number of packets dropped because size exceeded that of the transmit queue. Not applicable. The number of collisions due to congestion on the medium. Collisions occur when two or more stations are transmitting signals at the same time.

/stats/dump Dump Statistics
Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more, depending on your configuration). This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
256 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Step by step configuration set up dump .SSL Processor Setup Menu setup .Layer 3 Menu slb .Layer 2 Menu l3 . /cfg Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] sys .CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making.System-wide Parameter Menu port . display more or different information than in the previous version.Port Menu pmirr . To make finding information easier. Important difference are called out in the text. January 2006 .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 .Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security . the menu options under the Server Load Balancing Menu (/cfg/slb) are in Chapter 7. Many of the commands.Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server gtcfg . viewing.Security Menu sslproc . although not new. and saving switch configuration changes.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .Port Mirroring Menu bwm .Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server 257 320506-A.

bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Configuration Menu. gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from TFTP server. To view menu options. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. see page 315. For details. see page 408. see page 403. To view menu options. l3 Displays Layer 3 Configuration Menu.2 Command Reference Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System-wide parameter Configuration Menu. “The SLB Configuration Menu”. ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. To view menu options. For details. see page 342. see page 407. security Displays the Security Menu. see page 301. To view menu options. sslproc Displays the SSL processor setup Menu. To view menu options. see page 403 setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. January 2006 . see Chapter 7. see page 261. l2 Displays Layer 2 Configuration Menu. To view menu options.0. see page 325. port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu. To view menu options. 258 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. For details. see page 397. pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view menu options. see page 408. For details. see page 316. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. To view menu options.

To apply configuration changes.2 Command Reference Viewing.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. you must apply them. you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI. Therefore. and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters. Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes. you must apply the changes. enter apply at any prompt in the CLI.0. To turn STP on or off. Therefore. Also. except for starting Spanning Tree Protocol. # apply NOTE – The apply command is a global command. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. and then reset the switch (see “Resetting the Switch” on page 517). NOTE – The diff command is a global command. you can do the following: View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt. January 2006 259 . the changes you make do not take effect immediately. save them (see below). NOTE – All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied. Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active. any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved. While configuration changes are in the pending state. you can save them to flash memory on the Nortel Application Switch. Applying.

enter the following command at any CLI prompt: # save When you save configuration changes. January 2006 . For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu. To save the new configuration.0. the changes are saved to the active configuration block. The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 515. Your options include: The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command.2 Command Reference NOTE – If you do not save the changes.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 260 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. enter the following instead: # save n You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch.

see page 268. Web-based management settings. To view menu options. To view menu options.0. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see page 271. radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. tacacs Displays TACACS+ authentication Menu. mmgmt Displays Management Port Menu. and management access list. Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu. see page 264. To view menu options. see page 263. ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 270. January 2006 261 .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys System Configuration [System Menu] syslog mmgmt radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time timezone idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur Syslog Menu Management Port Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set system timezone (daylight savings) Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords.

To view menu options.2 Command Reference Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage sonmp Displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) menu. smtp <SMTP host name or IP address> Sets the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. January 2006 . maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. If you enable BOOTP. from 1 to 10080 minutes. the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. The default is 5 minutes. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. health Displays system health check menu. 262 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. see page 287. see page 273. date Prompts the user for the system date. idle <idle timeout in minutes.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <'-' to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu. bannr <string. which is used for sending bandwidth management history information. This command is disabled by default. When a user or administrator logs into the switch. access Displays System Access Menu. see page 288. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command. see page 273. timezone Configures the system time zone. To view menu options. see page 300. To view an example. cur Displays the current system parameters. To view menu options. affects both console and Telnet> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions.0. To view menu options. hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI). the login banner is displayed.

facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed.0. which means log all the seven severity levels. January 2006 263 . see page 264.223)> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host. which means.4. disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/syslog System Host Log Configuration NOTE – Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. log all the seven severity levels. The default is 0. [Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur - Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address (such as. The default is 7. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.17. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. 192.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. see page 264. The default is 7. The default is 0. It is enabled by default. facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. When necessary.0 supports the RFC 3164 standard for Syslogs.223)> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host.17. 192. sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed.4.

This means that corrective action must be taken immediately. or enable/disable syslog on all available features. While the switch can be managed from any network port.0. and must be enabled before it can be used. 3: Error. 1: Alert. SNMP. This means the condition of the system is critical. Seven Levels of Severity Following is the description of the seven levels of severity: 0: Emergency. This means that the system is giving out debug-level messages. and default gateway. gslb. 2: Critical. filter). This means that the system is giving a warning. the network ports have to perform all switch management (other than the switch management 264 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. This means that the system is unusable.2 Command Reference Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. January 2006 . 6: Informational.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. You can choose to enable/ disable specific features (such as vlans. broadcast address. This means that the system has errors that should be corrected. 7. The Management port must be configured with a static IP address. This port is isolated from and does not participate in the networking protocols that run on the network ports. /cfg/sys/mmgmt Management Port Configuration Menu The Management port is a Fast Ethernet port that is used exclusively to manage the switch. If this port is disabled. 4: Warning. subnet mask. This port manages the switch using either telnet CLI. 5: Notice. the Management port saves consuming a port that could otherwise be used for processing data and traffic. This means that the condition of the system is normal but with significant conditions that need attention. cur Displays the current syslog settings. Debug. or HTTP. This means that the system is working but giving out information about certain unfavorable conditions.

Set default port for Workload Manager report .255.Set default port for SYSLOG sonmp .Set default gateway address intr .Set IP address mask . 255.1)> Sets the IP address for the default gateway. NOTE – The Management port does not support BOOTP. [Management Port Menu] port .Set default port for SNMP traps syslog . by using the operational commands to set these options on a one-time basis.Display current configuration Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage port Displays the management port link menu.60 seconds)> Sets the interval between gateway ping attempts.2 Command Reference using the console).Set subnet mask gw .17. If this port is enabled.17. see page 268.Set default port for DNS ntp .0. intr <interval (0 . To view the menu options.Set default port for RADIUS tacacs .4.Set default port for Reporting server ena .Set default IP for SONMP hello packets tftp . gw <gateway address (such as. January 2006 265 .Set default port for TACACS+ smtp . addr <IP address (such as. or in some cases.Disable management port cur . You can change the defaults by configuring these features to permanently use the management port.Set interval between gateway ping attempts retry .Enable management port dis .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0)> Sets the subnet mask.Management Port Phy Menu addr .Set default port for FTP/TFTP wlm . 192.4. the factory default settings for some of the management features remain with the network ports. mask <subnet mask (such as. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Set default port for SMTP snmp .255.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN dns .101)> Sets the IP address.Set default port for NTP radius . 192.

Default is data port. Default is data port. wlm ["mgmt"|"data"] Set the default port for the workload manager. tftp default port mgmt|data Sets TFTP over management or data port. tacacs mgmt|data Sets TACACS+ over management or data ports.2 Command Reference Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage retry <number of attempts (1-120> Sets the number of failed ping attempts before a gateway is declared DOWN. Default is data port. ntp default port mgmt|data Sets NTP over management or data ports. But if it is set to data.0. sonmp default port mgmt|data Sets default IP address for SONMP hello packets. January 2006 . report ["mgmt"|"data"] Set the default port for the reporting server. Default is data port. 266 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. smtp default port mgmt|data Sets SMTP over management or data ports. The default is data port. radius default port mgmt|data Sets RADIUS over management or data ports. When this option is set to mgmt then the Management Port IP address is used in the SONMP hello packets transmitted by the switch. snmp default port mgmt|data Sets SNMP trap host over management or data ports.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Default is data port. then the IP address of the data port interface specified by srcif (/cfg/sys/sonmp/srcif) command is used in the hello packets. dns default port mgmt|data Sets DNS over management or data port. ena Enables the Management port. Default is data port. Default is data port. syslog default port mgmt|data Sets syslog host access over management or data ports.

0. January 2006 267 . cur Displays the current configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables the Management port. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.

Set primary RADIUS server secret secret2 . January 2006 .Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. By default this command is turned on. cur Displays the current link configuration.Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet on .Set RADIUS server timeout telnet .Set RADIUS port retries . Default is any.Set RADIUS server retries timeout .Turn RADIUS authentication ON off .Display current link configuration Table 6-5 Management Port Link Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mgmt/port) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the speed of the link with the Management port.Set link speed mode . auto on|off Sets auto negotiation for the port. Default is any.Set full or half duplex mode auto . /cfg/sys/radius RADIUS Server Configuration [RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv . mode full|half|any Sets half or full duplex mode.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/mmgmt/port Management Port Link Menu [Management Port Link Menu] speed .Set autonegotiation cur .Set secondary RADIUS server address secret .Display current RADIUS configuration 268 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Set secondary RADIUS server secret port .0.Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur .

off Disables the RADIUS server. retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server. in seconds. The default is 3 requests. January 2006 269 . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. between 1500 .0. The default is 3 seconds. cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. default 1645> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured. timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time.2 Command Reference Table 6-6 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address.3000. The default is 1645. secret <1-128 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the primary RADIUS server(s). before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. secret2 <1-128 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the secondary RADIUS server(s). Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address. telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet. port <RADIUS port to configure.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. on Enables the RADIUS server.

Apart from that. TACACS+ protocol has been implemented on Nortel Application Switch Operating System to support the customers that have Cisco’s TACACS+ protocol as their network security feature.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. authorization.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/tacacs TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. Supports decoupled authentication.) TACACS+ protocol is seen as more reliable than RADIUS as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). [TACACS+ Server prisrv secsrv secret secret2 port retries timeout telnet on off cur - Menu] Set primary TACACS+ server address Set secondary TACACS+ server address Set primary TACACS+ server secret Set secondary TACACS+ server secret Set TACACS+ TCP port Set TACACS+ server retries Set TACACS+ server timeout (seconds) Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet Turn TACACS+ authentication ON Turn TACACS+ authentication OFF Display current TACACS+ configuration 270 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. and accounting. TACACS is an encryption protocol and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in RFC 1492. RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile.0. whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations. TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device: TACACS+ is TCP-based so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic. It supports full-packet encryption as against password-only in authentication requests. Also. January 2006 .

timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds. between 1500 . secret <1-128 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the primary TACACS+ server(s). telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for telnet. before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. 4 to 15> Sets the amount of time.3000.2 Command Reference Table 6-7 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary TACACS+ server address. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. default 1645> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured.0. off Disables the TACACS+ server. on Enables the TACACS+ server. The default is 1645. in seconds. /cfg/sys/ntp NTP Server Configuration Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. secret2 <1-128 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the secondary TACACS+ server(s). port <RADIUS port configure. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. The default is 3 requests. January 2006 271 . 1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server. The default is 3 seconds. cur Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters. retries <RADIUS server retries.

tzone <offset from GMT. on Enables the NTP synchronization service. [NTP Server Menu] prisrv . in hours and minutes.Turn NTP service ON off .2 Command Reference This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. intrval <resync interval in minutes> Specifies how often the switch will re-synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. By default. of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).Turn NTP service OFF cur . This interval of time will be specified in minutes (1-44640). January 2006 .Set NTP server resync interval tzone . cur Displays the current NTP service settings. in HH:MM> Prompts for the NTP time zone offset.Display current NTP configuration Table 6-8 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <primary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock.Set primary NTP server address secsrv . 272 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. The default value is 1440 minutes. off Disables the NTP synchronization service.Set secondary NTP server address intrval . secsrv <secondary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. this option is disabled.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.Set NTP timezone offset from GMT on .

January 2006 273 . In SNMP model of network management. /cfg/sys/ssnmp System SNMP Configuration Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports SNMP-based network management. off This command disables the SONMP protocol. The topology algorithm is executed by each Nortel Application Switch on which SONMP is enabled.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. and turns Ethernet Autotopology on. on This command enables the SONMP protocol. then the first interface which is up and running is used in the hello packets. Table 6-9 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp) Command Syntax and Usage srcif <interface number (1-256)> This command specifies the IP address to be used in the hello packets. cur This command displays the current SONMP configuration. If the interface specified by this command is not up. and turns Ethernet Autotopology off.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/sonmp SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration [SONMP Menu] srcif on off cur Set source interface to be used in hello packets Turn Ethernet Autotopology ON Turn Ethernet Autotopology OFF Display current SONMP configuration SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) is a proprietary network management protocol that is used by Nortel Networks Optivitiy Switch Manager (OSM) to discover Nortel Application Switches on the network. a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent). The following commands add support for the Ethernet Autotopology algorithm and the Bay Topology MIB. you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network.

cont <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system contact.0.Set SNMP write community string trsrc . SNMP parameters that can be modified include: System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap community strings [System SNMP Menu] snmpv3 .Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt . 274 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.SNMPv3 Menu name .Display current system SNMP configuration Table 6-10 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 menu.Set SNMP trap source interface timeout . locn <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system location.Set SNMP read community string wcomm . To view menu options. name <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name for the system.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters. Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify.2 Command Reference Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages.Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth .Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont .Set SNMP "sysName" locn . see page 276.Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap cur .Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm . The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters. January 2006 .

January 2006 275 . wcomm <new SNMP write community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP write community string. trsrc <interface number (1-256)> Defines the interface number for SNMP trap source interface. The timeout period determines when the resources/memory allocated for the output will be freed.2 Command Reference Table 6-10 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage rcomm <new SNMP read community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP read community string. When you use diff and apply. The default setting is disabled. NOTE – This command is applicable only to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 traps because only the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap packets contain the source IP address that can be set with this command. The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. This command enables the user to select one of the configured interfaces as the source interface using the interface number.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. linkt <port> <disable|enable> Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default setting is enabled. timeout <SNMP state machine timeout minutes. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. 1-30> Defines the timeout period for SNMP state machine.0. memory is allocated to store the output of the command. auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. The default write community string is private. The SNMPv3 packets do not contain this field. The default read community string is public.

2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]> This command allows you to create different MIB views. 276 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. You can also configure this entry through SNMP. see page 278.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view menu options. see page 280. January 2006 . You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. To view menu options. access <vacmAccess number [1-32]> This command allows you to specify access rights.0. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. To view menu options. see page 279. [SNMPv3 Menu] usm view access group comm taddr tparam notify v1v2 cur - usmUser Table menu vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu vacmAccess Table menu vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu community Table menu targetAddr Table menu targetParams Table menu notify Table menu Enable/disable V1/V2 access Display current SNMPv3 configuration Table 6-11 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm <usmUser number [1-16]> This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. security model. notify <notify index [1-16]> A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. and for selecting community strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. This is also termed as transport endpoint. taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]> This command allows you to configure destination information.0. comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]> The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent SNMP message parameters. cur Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration. consisting of message processing model. To view menu options. see page 285. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. To view menu options. see page 283. To view menu options. To view menu options.2 Command Reference Table 6-11 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]> A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. This command is enabled by default. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group. January 2006 277 . see page 284. and security name information. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests. tparam <target params index [1-16]> This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters. see page 286. or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. see page 282. security level. v1v2 disable|enable This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. consisting of a transport domain and a transport address. To view menu options. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters.

You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm User Security Model Configuration Menu You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. January 2006 . This command allows you to create or change your password for authentication. This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. If you specify des as the privacy protocol.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. privpw This command allows you to create or change the privacy password.0. 278 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. If you select none as the authentication protocol. you will get an error message. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch. The options are des (CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol) or none. otherwise you will get an error message during validation. An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user. The default algorithm is none. authpw If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command. you need to provide a password. [SNMPv3 usmUser name auth authpw priv privpw del cur 1 Menu] Set USM user name Set authentication protocol Set authentication password Set privacy protocol Set privacy password Delete usmUser entry Display current usmUser configuration Table 6-12 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command allows you to configure a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the user. priv des|none This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol on your switch. auth md5|sha|none This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96. then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96).

1. which is included in or excluded from the MIB view.2. max 32 characters> This command defines MIB tree. January 2006 279 . such as. type included|excluded This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees.0. which when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees.. 1. del Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry.Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration Table 6-13 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters. cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu] name .Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees mask . cur Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration.1.Set view type del .1.Set view mask type . a string of maximum 32 characters. tree <object identifier.0. max size 32 characters> This command defines the bit mask. mask <bitmask.1. which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees.6.Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry cur .3.2 Command Reference Table 6-12 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the USM user entries. cur Displays the USM user entries.Set view name tree . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

An SNMP entity has access to many contexts.Set security model level .Delete vacmAccess entry cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user.Set group name prefix .0.Set notify view index del . level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights.Set write view index nview . The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. An SNMP context is a collection of management information that an SNMP entity can access.Set prefix only or exact match rview . model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used. 280 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Set content prefix model .Set minimum level of security match . January 2006 .Set read view index wview .Display current vacmAccess configuration Table 6-14 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines the name of the group. The view-based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally available contexts by contextName. the SNMP Architecture document. For more information on naming the management information. [SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu] name . Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. see RFC2571. prefix <32 character name> Defines the name of the context.

then all the rows whose contextName exactly matches the prefix are selected. cur Displays the View-based Access Control configuration. wview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-14 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage match exact|prefix If the value is set to exact. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. rview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 281 . If the value is set to prefix then the all the rows where the starting octets of the contextName exactly match the prefix are selected. del Deletes the View-based Access Control entry. nview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view.

2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu] model . gname <32 character name> The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name on page 280.0.Set group gname del .Set USM user name gname . January 2006 . del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry.Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur . 282 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. uname <32 character name> Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 278.Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration Table 6-15 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group) Command Syntax and Usage model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Defines the security model.Set security model uname .

Display current communityTable configuration Table 6-16 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/comm) Command Syntax and Usage index <32 character name> Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table consisting of 32 characters maximum. name <32 character name> Defines the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 278.Set community tag del . max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of up to 255 characters maximum.Set USM user name tag . January 2006 283 . del Deletes the community table entry. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap. tag <list of tag string.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu This command is used for configuring the community table entry. [SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu] index . This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine. uname <32 character name> Defines a readable 32 character long string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model.Set community string uname .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the community table configuration. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine.Set community index name .0.Delete communityTable entry cur .

del Deletes the Target Address Table entry. max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation. taglist <list of tag string.Display current targetAddrTable configuration Table 6-17 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary. target address name associated with this entry. This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages.Set target transport address port taglist .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu This command is used to configure the target transport entry. The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine.Set target address name addr . but unique identifier.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration.Set target transport address IP port .Set targetParams name del .Delete targetAddrTable entry cur . January 2006 .0. 284 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. [SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu] name .Set tag list pname . pname <32 character name> Defines the name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name on page 285. addr <transport address ip> Allows you to configure a transport address IP that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. port <transport address port> Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps.

but unique identifier that is associated with this entry. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Set message processing model model . model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages. and the security level (noAuthnoPriv.0.Set USM user name level . level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry. authNoPriv. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the security name. uname <32 character name> Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 278) on whose behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry. SNMPv1). January 2006 285 . mpmodel snmpv3|snmpv1|snmpv2c Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages. the security model (for example: USM). or authPriv). SNMPv2c. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine.Set security model uname .Set minimum level of security del .Set target params name mpmodel . The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol.Display current targetParamsTable configuration Table 6-18 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary.Delete targetParamsTable entry cur . [SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu] name .

Set notify tag del . /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. is selected.2 Command Reference Table 6-18 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the targetParamsTable entry.Set notify name tag . [SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu] name . cur Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration.0. tag <list of tag string.Delete notifyTable entry cur .Display current notifyTable configuration Table 6-19 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry. A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. January 2006 . max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table. cur Displays the current notify table configuration. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. that matches the value of this tag.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 286 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable. del Deletes the notify table entry.

Remove TCP services from listening on . Specify a TCP service port number.Turn system TCP health services ON off . January 2006 287 . rem <TCP port (2-65534)> Removes TCP services that were added for listening to health checks.Add TCP services to listen for health check rem . such as 80 for HTTP. on Turns on the TCP health check services. Specify a TCP service port number.0.Display current TCP health services configuration Table 6-20 System Health Check Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/health) Command Syntax and Usage add <TCP port (2-65534)> Adds TCP services to listen to the health checks.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. cur Displays the current TCP health check services configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/health System Health Check Configuration Menu [System TCP Health Menu] add .Turn system TCP health services OFF cur . off Turns off the TCP health check services. such as 80 for HTTP.

TCP.Display current system access configuration Table 6-21 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu. see page 291.Set HTTP (Web) server port number snmp .Set max rate of ARP. read-only. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the browser-based interface.SSH Server Menu xml . This command is disabled by default. To view menu options.To view menu options. see page 289. wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. To view menu options.0. January 2006 .Management Network Access Menu port . tnet Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch. To view menu options. set this to a different port (such as 8080). see page 291. user Displays the User Access Control Menu. You will see this command only if you are connected to the switch through the console port.Port Management Access Menu user . ICMP. or read-write.HTTPS (Web) Server Access Menu sshd . 288 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.User Access Control Menu (passwords) https .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.XML Configuration Access Menu http . The default is HTTP port 80. If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used. port Dispal the port management access menu. https Displays HTTPS Server Access Menu. see page 295.Set SNMP access control tnport .Set Telnet server port number rlimit . or UDP packets to MP cur . It is disabled by default. snmp disable|read-only|read-write Sets the snmp user access level to either disabled.Enable/disable HTTP (Web) server access wport .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access System Access Control Configuration [System Access Menu] mgmt .

ICMP. Specify which protocol you wish to limit. which the maximum number of packets per second that is allowed to enter the switch.Remove mgmt network definition cur .Display current mgmt network definitions Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. /cfg/sys/access/mgmt Management Networks Menu This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes.2 Command Reference Table 6-21 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage tnport <TCP port number> The TCP port number that the telnet server listens for telnet sessions. [Management Networks Menu] add .Add mgmt network definition rem . or UDP protocols.0 supports up to 10 management networks. rlimit <arp|icmp|tcp|udp> <max rate. cur Displays the current configuration. NOTE – The add and rem commands below replace the /cfg/sys/mnet and /cfg/ sys/mmask commands found in earlier releases of Nortel Application Switch Operating System. January 2006 289 . 0-65535 (pkts/sec)> Sets switch-wide rate limiting on traffic entering the switch over ARP. TCP. Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port. Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Then specify the maximum rate.

2 Command Reference Table 6-22 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet. SNMP. rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network. or the Nortel Application Switch Operating System browser-based interface. NOTE – If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces. it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on the network.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the current configuration.0. January 2006 . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. 290 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. RIP. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation. which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address.

rem <port_number> Remove a port from management access. aadd Add all ports with management access.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/port Port Management Access Menu [Port Management Access Menu] add . cur Displays the port numbers that currently have management access.0.Remove all ports from management access cur .Add all ports with management access rem . arem Remove all ports from management access.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Add port with management access aadd . January 2006 291 .Remove port from management access arem . /cfg/sys/access/user User Access Control Menu uid usrpw sopw l4opw opw sapw l4apw admpw cur User ID Menu Set user password (user) Set SLB operator password (slboper) Set L4 operator password (l4oper) Set operator password (oper) Set Slb administrator password (slbadmin) Set L4 administrator password (l4admin) Set administrator password (admin) Display current user status Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Display current ports with management access Table 6-23 Port Management Access Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage add <port_number> Add a port with management access.

sopw Sets the SLB operator (slboper)password. 292 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. The Layer 4 administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services.2 Command Reference NOTE – Passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters. opw Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters. l4apw Sets the Layer 4 administrator (l4admin) password. sapw Sets the SLB administrator (slbadmin) password. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing configuration menus. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch. usrpw Sets the user (user) password.0. He or she can view switch status information and statistics. l4opw Sets the Layer 4 operator (l4oper)password. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. Administrator who configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. see page 294. To view menu options. Access includes “user” functions. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. Note that the Filter Menu options are not accessible to the SLB administrator. Access includes “slbadmin” functions. Access includes “l4oper” functions. but cannot make any configuration changes. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus. The SLB operator manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. January 2006 . Access includes “l4oper” functions. Access includes “slboper” functions. The operator manages all functions of the switch. Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage uid <User ID. 1-10> Displays the User ID Menu. The Layer 4 operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. with the exception of not being able to configure filters.

including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage admpw Sets the administrator (admin) password. cur Displays the current user status. The super user administrator has complete access to all menus. January 2006 293 . Access includes “oper” and “l4admin” functions. information.0. and configuration commands on the Nortel Application Switch. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.

Layer 4 Operator. 1-1023> Removes a real server access from this user. 1-1023> Assigns a real server access to this user. the real server name. [User ID 1 cos name pswd add rem ena dis del cur Menu] . and Administrator.Display current user configuration Table 6-25 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage cos <user|slboper|l4oper|oper|slbadmin|l4admin|admin> Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level. 294 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Delete user ID . Operator.Enable user ID . with User being the most restricted level.Disable user ID . add <real server number. ena Enables the user ID. name <8 char max> Defines the user name of maximum eight characters.Remove real server . Nortel Application Switch Operating System defines these levels as: User.0. pswd <15 char max> Sets the user password of up to 15 characters maximum. Using this command you can list the current status of the real server including the real server number. SLB Operator.Set user password . dis Disables the user ID. January 2006 . SLB Administrator. and the number of current sessions. You can enable or disable the real servers and change the password for accessing these real servers.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/user/uid System User ID Configuration Menu This feature allows the users to operate the real servers assigned to them.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Add real server .Set user name .Set class of service . rem <real server number. the operational state of the real server.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the current user ID configuration. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange.2 Command Reference Table 6-25 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the user ID. company) []: Nortel Networks Organizational Unit Name (for example. Then the switch will restart SSL agent. section) []: Alteon Common Name (for example. email address) []: info@nortelnetworks.0. /cfg/sys/access/https HTTPS Access Configuration Menu [https Menu] https port generate certSave cur Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access HTTPS WebServer port number Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate save HTTPS certificate Display current SSL Web Access configuration Table 6-26 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https) Command Syntax and Usage https Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. port <TCP port number> Defines the HTTPS Web server port number. user’s name) []: Mr Smith Email (for example.com You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. January 2006 295 . city) []: Ottawa Organization Name (for example. For example: Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: CA State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario Locality Name (for example.

2 Command Reference Table 6-26 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https) Command Syntax and Usage certSave Allows the client. cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration. to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted. January 2006 .0. 296 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. or the Web browser.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.0.Enable SCP apply and save on .Set SSH server port number ena .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. on Set the SSH server to on.Turn SSH server ON (SSHv1/SSHv2) cur .Display current SSH server configuration Table 6-27 SSH Server Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage sshport <TCP_port_number> Set the server port number.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/sshd SSH Server Menu [SSH Server Menu] sshport . cur Display the current SSH server configuration. ena Sets the SCP apply and save. January 2006 297 .

Current XML debug: enabled Enter new XML debug [d/e]: cur Display current XML configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.Import XML client certificate delcert .Enable/disable XML config access port . All responses to the commands will also be output to the Console. Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server: delcert Delete XML client certificate.Debug XML operations cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/xml XML Configuration Access Menu [XML Config Access Menu] xml . XML config access currently disabled on TCP port 443 XML debug is enabled Note: there are pending config changes.Delete XML client certificate dispcert . use "diff" to see them. debug Toggle Debug mode on or off. For an example. Enabling XML debugging causes all commands in the XML file to be echoed to the Console and prefaces each one with running XML cmd: or Invalid XML cmd:. 298 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 . gtcert Import an XML client certificate.Set XML server port number gtcert . Current XML client certificate has been deleted from FLASH dispcert Display the current XML certificate.Display current XML config access configuration Table 6-28 XML Configuration Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage xml Enable or disable XML access. see page 299 port <TCP_port_number> Set the XML server port number.Display XML client certificate debug .

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/xml/xml Example of enabling or disabling XML access Current XML access: disabled Pending new XML access: enabled Enter new XML access [d/e]: Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 299 .

1) Anguilla 18) Ecuador 35) Paraguay 2) Antigua & Barbuda 19) El Salvador 36) Peru 3) Argentina 20) French Guiana 37) Puerto Rico 4) Aruba 21) Greenland 38) St Kitts & Nevis 5) Bahamas 22) Grenada 39) St Lucia 6) Barbados 23) Guadeloupe 40) St Pierre & Miquelon 7) Belize 24) Guatemala 41) St Vincent 8) Bolivia 25) Guyana 42) Suriname 9) Brazil 26) Haiti 43) Trinidad & Tobago 10) Canada 27) Honduras 44) Turks & Caicos Is 11) Cayman Islands 28) Jamaica 45) United States 12) Chile 29) Martinique 46) Uruguay 13) Colombia 30) Mexico 47) Venezuela 14) Costa Rica 31) Montserrat 48) Virgin Islands (UK) 15) Cuba 32) Netherlands Antilles 49) Virgin Islands (US) 16) Dominica 33) Nicaragua 17) Dominican Republic 34) Panama Enter the number of your choice: 10 300 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.disable timezone setting Enter the number of your choice: 2 Please select a country.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/timezone Configure the Timezone >> Main# /cfg/sys/timezone Please identify a location so that time zone rules can be set correctly.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 . Please select a continent or ocean. 1) Africa 2) Americas 3) Antarctica 4) Arctic Ocean 5) Asia 6) Atlantic Ocean 7) Australia 8) Europe 9) Indian Ocean 10) Pacific Ocean 11) None .0.

Port configuration is different on Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 series and 3000 series.central Northwest Territories 16) Mountain Time .Dawson Creek & Fort Saint John.E Labrador 4) Eastern Time . January 2006 301 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.west Northwest Territories 17) Mountain Standard Time .Nova Scotia (most places).Manitoba & west Ontario 10) Central Time . E Quebec & PEI 3) Atlantic Time .east Nunavut 8) Eastern Standard Time .south Yukon 20) Pacific Time .most locations 13) Central Standard Time .west British Columbia 19) Pacific Time . Nunavut 7) Eastern Standard Time .Saskatchewan . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Saskatchewan .Thunder Bay.midwest 14) Mountain Time .north Yukon Enter the number of your choice: 2 /cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration The Port Menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports. 1) Newfoundland Island 2) Atlantic Time .0. This command is enabled by default.most locations 5) Eastern Time .2 Command Reference Please select one of the following time zone regions. east British Columbia & west Saskatchewan 15) Mountain Time . W Labrador.Rainy River & Fort Frances. NB. Ontario 6) Eastern Standard Time .Pangnirtung.Ontario & Quebec . Ontario 11) Central Time .Alberta. British Columbia 18) Pacific Time .west Nunavut 12) Central Standard Time .central Nunavut 9) Central Time .

please refer to the Hardware Installation Guide for Nortel Application Switch Operating System. 302 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. and support half or full-duplex operation. auto-negotiating. You may order the SFP modules from Nortel Networks. The SFP modules are not shipped with the product. The ports are auto-sensing. January 2006 . For more information on connectors. SFP GBIC Ports The LC jack is used for connecting Gigabit Ethernet fiber optic segments.2 Command Reference Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 Series The following table displays the number of Fast Ethernet ports and SFP GBIC ports with the numbering of the ports on Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 series: Table 6-29 Port Configuration and Numbering on Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 Series Model Nortel Application Switch 2208 (1U) Nortel Application Switch 2216 (1U) Nortel Application Switch 2224 (1U) Nortel Application Switch 2424 (1U) 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Port Numbers Numbers 1–8 1–16 1–24 1–24 9–10 17–18 25–26 25–28 Fast Ethernet Ports The RJ-45 jack is used for connecting 10/100 Mbps Ethernet segments to the port.

Fast Phy Menu gig .Set default port VLAN id alias .Set BW Contract for non-IP traffic egbw . see page 313. The default number is 1. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. alias <15 characters string> Set an alias for the port number. pvid <VLAN number.Set default port BW Contract nonip . see page 313. The default is set to none.Set port name cont . this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.Enable/Disable RMON for port tag . gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. 1-1024> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for non-IP traffic for this port. To view menu options.Gig Phy Menu pvid .Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port iponly .0. To view menu options.Set port alias name .Set port egress bandwidth Limit rmon .Display current port configuration Table 6-30 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage fast If a port is configured to support Fast Ethernet.Disable port cur . nonip <BW Contract number. 1-4090> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. January 2006 303 .2 Command Reference The commands on Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 series and their description are as follows: [Port <port_number> Menu] fast .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens.Enable port dis .Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames at ingress ena . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. this option displays the Fast Ethernet Physical Link Menu.

Set auto negotiation cur . ena Enables the port. /cfg/port <port number> fast|gig Port Link Configuration [Fast Link Menu] speed . dis Disables the port. January 2006 . Using this command.2 Command Reference Table 6-30 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage egbw <0k-5000k|1m-100m> Sets the egress bandwidth limit for the port to avoid overloading the receiving router or switch. It is disabled by default. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 314. It is disabled by default. This means that the port’s speed will be taken as the egress bandwidth. For example. you can configure the egress bandwidth limit of the port to match with the bandwidth link of the receiving router or the switch. 304 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. The default is 0.Set link speed mode .) cur Displays the current port parameters. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port.Set flow control auto .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port.0. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. the egress bandwidth for an FE port will be 100m. NOTE – You need Bandwidth Management license to use this command.Display current fast link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.Set full or half duplex mode fctl .

these options do not appear on the Gigabit Link Menu. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. flow control. Table 6-31 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the link speed. Not all options are valid on all ports. and negotiation mode for the port link.0. fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. January 2006 305 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. NOTE – Since the speed and mode parameters cannot be set for Gigabit Ethernet ports. Link menu options are described in Table 6-38 and appear on the fast and gig port configuration menus for the Nortel Application Switch. cur Displays the current port parameters. Using these configuration menus. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. the following message is displayed: >> Port 1# gig Current Port 1 does not have Gig Ethernet phy. mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. you can set port parameters such as speed.2 Command Reference NOTE – If the port does not have a Gig Ethernet physical link.

it is fixed at 1000 Mbps. autonegotiation must be turned on. See “Dual-Mode Ports” on page 311 for more details. These ports are designed to operate at 1000 Mbps and full duplex mode only. full-duplex with autonegotiation turned on. When the 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC port is selected as the preferred link. January 2006 . When the 10/100/1000Base-T copper port is selected as the preferred link.0. 7. if 1000 Mbps is selected. it can be configured at any speed. Four dual-mode ports (3. You can set either interface as the preferred or backup link. and 6).Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 306 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. However. 8 Dual-Mode Port Numbers 3–6 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Numbers 9–12 Port Configuration on Nortel Application Switch 3408 The Nortel Application Switch 3408 contains 12 ports. 7. 4. Their description is as follows: Four 1000BaseT ports (1. 2. These ports have two interfaces each: 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC and 10/100/1000Base-T Copper. NOTE – For more information on connectors.2 Command Reference Nortel Application Switch 3000 Series The following table displays the port configuration and numbering on Nortel Application Switch 3408: Table 6-32 Port configuration on Nortel Application Switch 3408 Model Nortel Application Switch 3408 (1U) 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Port Numbers 1. Four Small Form Pluggable (SFP) GBIC Fiber ports (9–12). refer to the Nortel Application Switch Operating System Hardware Installation Guide Part Number 315393-E. 2. The ports are autonegotiating and support half or full duplex operation. 5. and 8) with RJ-45 connectors.

The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. January 2006 307 . cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. It is disabled by default. The default is set to None. It is disabled by default.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. or 8). you see the menu below: [Port 1 Menu] fast gig pvid alias name cont nonip egbw rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Fast Phy Menu Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port alias Set port name Set default port BW Contract Set BW Contract for non-IP traffic Set port egress bandwidth Limit Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allow IP related frames at ingress Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-33 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. see page 308. 7. this option displays the Copper Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. 2.2 Command Reference Single-Mode ports 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Ports When you select a single-mode copper port (1. 2. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default. 7. The default number is 1. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. To view menu options. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet.0.

and negotiation mode for the port link.) cur Displays the current port parameters. 2. The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex 308 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. Not all options are valid on all ports. January 2006 . or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the port. /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . you can set port parameters such as speed. Table 6-34 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. Link menu options are described in Table 6-38 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Nortel Application Switch. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 314.Set auto negotiate cur . flow control.Set flow control auto .2 Command Reference Table 6-33 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. 7. 7.Set duplex mode fctl . (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. 2.Set link speed mode . Using these configuration menus.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. dis Disables the port.

you see a slightly different menu as below: [Port 9 Menu] gig pvid name cont egbw rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - SFP Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Set port egress bandwidth Limit Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-35 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet.2 Command Reference Table 6-34 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. see page 310. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. this option displays the SFP Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. 7. The default number is 1. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. 2. January 2006 309 .The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. To view menu options. 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Fiber SFP Ports When you select a single-mode SFP fiber port (9–12).

2 Command Reference Table 6-35 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. It is disabled by default. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes.) cur Displays the current port parameters. /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl auto cur Menu] . and negotiation mode for the port link. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. January 2006 . Link menu options are described in Table 6-38 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Nortel Application Switch. The default is set to None. Using these configuration menus. you can set port parameters such as flow control. 310 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.0. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 314. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default.Set flow control .Set auto negotiate . cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port.Display current SFP gig link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. ena Enables the port. It is disabled by default.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. dis Disables the port.

Dual-Mode Ports When you select any one of the dual-mode ports (3–6). see page 314. To view menu options. January 2006 311 . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. To view menu options. see page 313. sfp Displays SFP Gigabit Physical Link Menu.0. you see the menu below: [Port 3 Menu] cop sfp pref back pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu SFP Gig Phy Menu Set preferred link Set backup link Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-37 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage cop Displays Copper Gigabit Physical Link Menu.2 Command Reference Table 6-36 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9-12>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit Ethernet link port parameters.

dis Disables the port. ena Enables the port. January 2006 .) cur Displays the current port parameters. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 314. The default is set to None.2 Command Reference Table 6-37 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage pref copper|sfp Sets the port preference between copper or SFP mode.0. The selected port will be used as the preferred port if both the ports are available. the port will not switch automatically to the backup port if the preferred port goes down. It is disabled by default. cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. If you choose none. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. 312 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. It is disabled by default. You cannot set the preferred port as the backup port. back copper|sfp|none Sets the preference for the backup link if the preferred port is not available. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. The default number is 1. It is disabled by default.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Table 6-38 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>/cop) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. Link menu options are described in Table 6-38 and appear on the cop port configuration menus for the Nortel Application Switch. and negotiation mode for the port link. January 2006 313 .2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> cop Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration [GE Copper Link Menu] speed .Set auto negotiate cur .Set link speed mode . Not all options are valid on all ports.0.Set flow control auto . The choices include: Any for autonegotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. flow control. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. you can set port parameters such as speed.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. Using these configuration menus.Set duplex mode fctl .

2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> sfp Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl cur Menu] . The port state will revert to its original configuration when the Nortel Application Switch is reset. 314 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit link port configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 . Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes.Display current SFP gig link configuration Table 6-39 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3-6>/sfp) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. you do not need to use apply or save.0. enter the following command at any prompt: Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port.Set flow control . See the “Operations Menu” on page 499 for other operations-level commands.

January 2006 315 .2 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring Menu [Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Configure Monitor Port Display All Mirrored and Monitored Ports and VLANs Port mirroring is disabled by default. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port. /cfg/pmirr monport Port-Mirroring Menu >> Port Mirroring# monport Enter port (1-28): <port_number> -----------------------------------------------------------[Port 1 Menu] add .Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs cur . see page 315.Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. cur Displays the current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports. When enabled. network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs rem . enable. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure. To view menu options. Table 6-40 Port Mirroring menu options (/cfg/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <monitoring port (port to mirror to)> Displays port-mirroring menu options that help configure the port. you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage. and disable the monitored port.

vlans) 1 none /cfg/bwm Bandwidth Management Configuration Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications.0. such as e-commerce transactions. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port. rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Removes the mirrored port.2 Command Reference Table 6-41 Port-Based Port-Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport) Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in.direction. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic. BWM is turned off. NOTE – BWM is a software key-enabled feature that requires users to purchase a license and a key. the frame is sent to the mirrored port. out. It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress). VLAN-based port mirroring allows the user to monitor traffic based on VLANs associated with a port. 316 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both. By default. users need to enter the Bandwidth Management key using the /oper/swkey command. or both)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Adds the port to be mirrored. For example: >> Port 1# cur Monitoring port (Mirrored port. If you do not specify a VLAN. all traffic on that port will be mirrored. the frame is sent to the monitoring port. You can add specific VLAN(s) to a be monitored even if there are multiple VLANs associated with that port. In order to enable BWM. Refer to your Application Guide for more information.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. January 2006 . It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic.

2 Command Reference [Bandwidth Management Menu] cont .Set number of entries in the BWM IP user table frequen .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. By default. To view menu options. this option is disabled.Group Menu user . To manage bandwidth on an Nortel Application Switch. user <user name> Sets the SMTP user name to whom the history statistics will be mailed. specifying the guaranteed bandwidth rates. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 317 . A bandwidth policy is often based on a rate structure whereby a Web host could charge a customer for bandwidth utilization.Set SMTP server user name report . see page 319.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing OFF cur . To view menu options. report <IP4 address> | <IP6 address> Set the IP address of the Reporting Server.0.Contract Menu policy . Table 6-42 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW contract number (1-1024)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Contract Menu.Set IP address of Reporting server entries . see page 322. For further details. policy <BW policy number (1-512)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Policy Menu.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing ON off . see page 323.Enable/disable enforce policies on .2 Application Guide.Policy Menu group . To view menu options.Set the frequency of BWM statistics in minutes email .Display current Bandwidth Management configuration NOTE – Up to 1024 bandwidth management contracts can be configured on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. group <BW Group number (1-32)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Group Menu. The default is set to None. see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The switch uses these contracts to limit individual traffic flows. you must create one or more bandwidth management contracts.2 Application Guide.Enable/disable sending BWM statistics via email force . see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For further details. Bandwidth policies are bandwidth limita- tions defined for any set of frames.0.

force disable|enable Enables or disables the enforcement of bandwidth policy on the traffic. 318 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. email disable|enable Enable/disable sending BWM statistics using email. frequen <1-1440 minutes. January 2006 . When this option is disabled. The packets will exit in the order they came in. 0 for default behavior> Sets the frequency of Bandwidth Management email in minutes. these statistics are sent using a socket mechanism. When disabled. the reordering of the packets does not occur. This means that no bandwidth limit is applied on the queues. By default.0. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management configuration. The default is set to 0. on Globally enables Bandwidth Management on this switch. this option is enabled. off Globally disables Bandwidth Management on this switch.2 Command Reference Table 6-42 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage entries <64k|128k|256k|512k> Sets the number of entries in the Bandwidth Management IP user table.

whether the user (IP address) limiting is enforced by the source IP address (SIP) or the destination IP address (DIP).0. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.disable is rate limiting wtcpwin . >> BW Contract 1# name Current BW Contract name: Enter new BW Contract name: policy <Bandwidth policy number (1-512)> Sets the policy number for this Bandwidth Management contract.Enable/disable overwriting TCP Window for this Contract ena .Set Contract name policy .Enable/disable Saving Contract stats history wtos .Enable BW Contract dis . To view menu options. name <31 character name> Sets the name for this Bandwidth Management contract.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. This command is available in maintenance mode only.Enable/disable monitor-only mode for this Contract shaping .Enable/disable user (IP address) limiting for this contract history .Set monitoring port for packet mirroring iplimit . January 2006 319 .Set Contract Precedence iptype .Enable/disable traffic shaping . prec <Bandwidth precedence value (1-255)> Sets the precedence value for this Bandwidth Management contract. see page 320. pmirr <port | none> Defines a port to mirror contract packets to.Time policy Menu name .Delete BW Contract cur .Set Contract Policy prec . iptype <sip|dip> Defines the IP type for this contract.Enable/disable overwriting IP TOS for this Contract mononly .Display current BW Contract configuration Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage timepol <BW Contract time policy number (1-2)> Displays Time Policy Menu.2 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number> Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration [BW Contract <1 to 1024> Menu] timepol . Enter a valid port to enable this feature or none to disable it. The default policy number is 64. The default value is 1.Set user (IP address) limiting type for this contract pmirr .Disable BW Contract del .

The statistics are generated but no shaping or limiting will apply to this contract.0. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management contract configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. By default. For details. refer to the Application Guide. By default. Do not set the value to lower than 1500 bytes. history disable|enable Disables or enables saving statistics for this contract on the server. This may help reduce the traffic congestion. del Removes this contract from the switch. mononly disable|enable Enables or disables monitor-only mode for this Contract. wtos disable|enable Disables or enables overwriting the IP Type of Service (TOS) for this contract. shaping means buffering a packet and keeping it ready to be sent. it is enabled. the user can modify the TCP window size to a lower value so that when the packet arrives carrying the bytes within that window size. /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number>/timepol <Contract time policy number> BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu 320 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/policy on page 322. ena Enables this Bandwidth Management contract. it is disabled. In this context. wtcpwin disable|enable Enables or disables overwriting TCP Window for this Contract. shaping disable|enable Disables or enables shaping of the traffic for this contract. This command is used for design and auditing purposes only. dis Disables this Bandwidth Management contract. By overwriting the default window size.2 Command Reference Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage iplimit disable|enable Enables or disables user (IP address) limiting for this contract. January 2006 . If enabled. the receiver of that packet does not have to wait for acknowledgement.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

This feature enables the user to configure different policies based on the time of the day using the following menu and commands:
[BW Contract 1 Time Policy 1 Menu] day - Set Time Policy day from - Set Time Policy from hour to - Set Time Policy to hour policy - Set Time Policy enable - Enable Time Policy disable - Disable Time Policy delete - Delete Time Policy cur - Display current Time Policy configuration

Table 6-44 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol)
Command Syntax and Usage day <mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun|weekday|weekend|everyday> Defines the day(s) of the week, weekdays (Monday to Friday), weekend (Saturday and Sunday) or everyday. The default is everyday. from <1-12am/pm> Defines the time from where you need to start the time in hours. If am or pm is not specified, the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher. to <1-12am/pm> Sets the end limit of time in hours. If am or pm is not specified, the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher. policy <BW Policy number, 1-512> Defines the policy number for the contract. enable Enables the Time Policy command on the switch. disable Disables the Time Policy command on the switch. delete Deletes the current Time Policy. cur Displays the current Time Policy configuration on the switch. For example: Time Policy 1: Day everyday, From Hour 12am, To Hour 12am, Policy 512, disabled

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

321

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/bwm/policy <policy number>
Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration
[Policy 1 Menu] hard soft resv userlim utos otos buffer del cur Set hard Limit Set soft Limit Set Reservation Limit Set per user (IP address) Limit Set underlimit (soft limit) TOS Set overlimit (soft limit) TOS Set Buffer Limit Delete BW Policy Display current Policy configuration

Table 6-45 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol)
Command Syntax and Usage hard <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the hard bandwidth limit for this policy. This is the highest amount of bandwidth available to this policy. The default value is 2000 kbps. soft <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the soft bandwidth limit for this policy. The default value is 1000 kbps. resv <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the reserve limit for this policy. This is the amount of bandwidth always available to this policy. The default value is 500Kbytes. userlim <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the bandwidth limit for each IP address in the contract traffic. utos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new utos (underlimit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is under the soft limit. With this option set to the default value of “0,” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. otos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new otos (over the limit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is over the soft limit. With this option set to the default value of “0,” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. buffer <Maximum buffer space (bytes) (8192-128000)> Sets the buffer limit for this policy. The default value is 8192 bytes.

322

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-45 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol)
Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the bandwidth management policy. cur Displays the current value of the bandwidth policy configuration.

/cfg/bwm/group
Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu
[BW Group 1 Menu] add - Add Contract to this group rem - Remove Contract from this group del - Delete BW Group cur - Display current BW Group configuration

Table 6-46 Bandwidth Management Group Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/group)
Command Syntax and Usage add <BW Contract number, 1-1023 excluding default> Adds a contract to this group. rem <BW Contract number, 1-1023 excluding default> Removes a contract from this group. del Deletes this Bandwidth Management group. cur Displays all current Bandwidth Management Group configurations.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

323

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/bwm/cur
Bandwidth Management Current Configuration
Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement: enabled SMTP server user name: Contract Name Policy Prec Hist TOS State Shaping 1 cont_1 1 1 E E E E 2 cont_2 2 1 E D D D 1024 Default -0 E D E D *Default contract gets all the BW that is available on a port after the active contracts reserved BW is taken. Policy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Hard 25M 10M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M Soft 20M 8M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M Resv oTOS uTOS Buffer 500K 150 100 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320

324

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu
[Layer 2 Menu] mrst stg trunk lacp vlan team ntmstg cur Multiple Spanning Tree/Rapid Spanning Tree Menu Spanning Tree Menu Trunk Group Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu VLAN Menu Port Teaming Menu Enable/disable Nortel multiple STG mode Display current layer 2 parameters

Table 6-47 Layer 2 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage mrst Go to the Multiple/Rapid Spanning Tree menu. See page 326. stg <group number [1-16]> Displays Spanning Tree Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 329. trunk <trunk group number> Displays Trunk Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 333. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Menu. To view menu options, see page 335. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays VLAN Menu. To view menu options, see page 339. team Go to the port teaming menu. See page 341. ntmstg disable|enable Enables or disables Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree Group mode. When Nortel multiple STG mode is enabled, the Nortel implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. When Nortel multiple STG mode is disabled, the Cisco implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. The ntmstg enabled device will not work with the device configured for Cisco implementation of Spanning Tree BPDUs. The factory default value of this command is Nortel multiple STG mode disabled. You need to reset the switch with the command /boot/reset for the Spanning Tree Group configuration to change to ntmstg enabled. cur Displays the current Layer 2 parameters.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

325

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/mrst
Multiple Spanning Tree Menu
[Multiple Spanning Tree Menu] cist - Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu name - Set MST region name version - Set Version of this MST region maxhop - Set Maximum Hop Count for MST (4 - 60) mode - Spanning Tree Mode on - Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP) ON off - Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP) OFF cur - Display current MST parameters

Table 6-48 Multiple Spanning Tree Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage cist Go to the Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu. See page 327. name <1-32 character region name> Set the MST region name. version <version number 1-65535> Set the MST region version. maxhop <max hops 4-60> Set the maximum MST hop count. mode mstp|rstp Set the spanning tree mode. on Set the spanning tree on (Bridge MSTP/RSTP runs normally). off Set the spanning tree off (Bridge MSTP/RSTP does not run). cur Display the current MST parameters.

326

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/mrst/cist
Multiple Spanning Tree Menu
[Common Internal Spanning Tree Menu] brg - CIST Bridge parameter menu port - CIST Port parameter menu default - Default Common Internal Spanning Tree and Member parms cur - Display current CIST parameters

Table 6-49 Mupltiple Spanning Tree CIST Bridge Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage brg Go to the CIST Bridge parameter menu. See page 328. port <port_number> Set the port number. default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default. cur Displays current values of all objects settable from this menu.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

327

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg
CIST Bridge Menu
[CIST Bridge Menu] prior - Set CIST bridge mxage - Set CIST bridge fwd - Set CIST bridge cur - Display current Priority (0-65535) Max Age (6-40 secs) Forward Delay (4-30 secs) CIST bridge parameters

Table 6-50 Mupltiple Spanning Tree CIST Bridge Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge Priority, 0-65535> Set the bridge priority. mxage <new bridge Max Age, 6-40 secs> Set the port number. fwd <new bridge Forward Delay, 4-30 secs> Set the CIST bridge forward delay. cur Displays current values of all objects settable from the CIST bridge menu.

/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg cur
Current configuration for CIST Bridge
>> CIST Bridge# cur -----------------------------------------------------------------Current Common Internal Spanning Tree settings: Bridge params: Priority MaxAge FwdDel 32768 20 15

Table 6-51 CIST bridge configuration
Statistics Priority MaxAge FwdDel Description The current CIST Bridge priority setting. Priority is a value between 0 and 65535. The current CIST Bridge maximum aging setting. MaxAge is a value in seconds between 6 and 40. The current CIST Bridge forwarding delay setting. FwdDel is a value in seconds between 4 and 30.

328

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Configuration
When multiple paths exist on a network, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched network. STP forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. When multiple paths exist, Spanning Tree configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. If that path fails, Spanning Tree automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations. Thus, STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology. Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports the IEEE 802.1p Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports up to 16 instances of Spanning Trees or Spanning Tree groups. Each VLAN can be placed in only one Spanning Tree group per switch except for the default Spanning Tree group (STG 1). The default Spanning Tree group (1) can have more than one VLAN. All other Spanning Tree groups (2-16) can have only one VLAN associated with it. Spanning Tree can be enabled or disabled for each port. Multiple Spanning Trees can be enabled on tagged or untagged ports. See your Application Guide for a detailed description of this feature and how to configure Spanning Tree Groups on the switch. This command is turned on by default.
[Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg - Bridge parameter menu port - Port parameter menu add - Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove - Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear - Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on - Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off - Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default - Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur - Display current bridge parameters

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

329

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy, STP must be enabled. Table 6-52 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stp)
Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. To view menu options, see page 331. port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 332. add <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. remove <VLAN numbers, 1-4095 (802.1d & RSTP) / 2-4094 (MSTP)> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree. on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol. off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol. default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default. cur Displays the current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters.

330

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/stg/brg
Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration
[Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior - Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello - Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage - Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd - Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging - Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable) cur - Display current bridge parameters

Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STP operation of the switch. STP bridge parameters include: Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Bridge aging time Table 6-53 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg)
Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STP root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge priority. The range is 0 to 65535, and the default is 32768. hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The range is 1 to 10 seconds, and the default is 2 seconds. mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STP network. The range is 6 to 40 seconds, and the default is 20 seconds. fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds, and the default is 15 seconds.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

331

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-53 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg)
Command Syntax and Usage aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable)> Configures the forwarding database aging time. The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds, and the default is 300 seconds. To disable aging, set this parameter to 0. cur Displays the current bridge STP parameters.

When configuring STP bridge parameters, the following formulas must be used: 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage

/cfg/l2/stg <STG Group Index>/port <port #>
Spanning Tree Port Configuration
[Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior - Set port Priority (0-255) cost - Set port Path Cost link - Set port link type (auto,p2p,or shared; default: auto) edge - Enable/disable edge port on - Turn port's Spanning Tree ON off - Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF cur - Display current port Spanning Tree parameters

Spanning Tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis. STP port parameters include: Port priority Port path cost STP is turned on by default for the port.

332

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-54 Spanning Tree Port Menu (/cfg/l2/stp/port)
Command Syntax and Usage prior <new port Priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The range is 0 to 255, and the default is 128. cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535, 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. The range is 1 to 65535. The default is 10 for 100Mbps ports, and 1 for Gigabit ports. A value of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. link auto|p2p|shared Set port link type (auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto) edge disable|enable Enable/disable edge port on Enables STP on the port. off Disables STP on the port. cur Displays the current STP port parameters.

/cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration
Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth and multi-link connections between Nortel Application Switches or other trunk capable devices. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together, combining their bandwidth to create a single, larger virtual link. When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the Nortel Application Switch, with the following restrictions: Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group. Up to eight ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group. Best performance is achieved when all ports in a trunk are configured for the same speed.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

333

2 Command Reference Trunking from non-Nortel devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology. del Removes the current trunk group configuration. 334 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group. By default.Delete trunk group cur .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. dis Turns the current trunk group off. rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group.Remove port from trunk group ena .Set BW contract for this trunk group add . the trunk group is empty and disabled.Add port to trunk group rem . [Trunk group 1 Menu] cont .Disable trunk group del . January 2006 . By default. ena Enables the current trunk group.Enable trunk group dis . cur Displays the current trunk group parameters.0. the contract number is 1024 for AD3 and 1024 for AD4.Display current Trunk Group configuration Table 6-55 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this trunk group.

When the system initializes. all ports are in off mode by default. At the core of the 802. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.0. The maximum number of configurable trunk groups are 40: 12 user configurable trunks and 28 LACP trunks depending upon the maximum number of ports in the switch.3ad standard on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. LACP automatically determines which member links can be aggregated and then aggregates them. NOTE – Refer to IEEE 802. Each external port in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System can have one of the following LACP modes.3ad standard called the LACP trunks. This port initiates negotiation with the partner system port by sending LACPDU (Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Unit) packets.3ad-2000 for a detailed information about the standard. off (default) The user can configure this port to a regular static trunk group. Link aggregation is a method of grouping physical link segments of the same media type and speed in full duplex.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The 802. January 2006 335 .2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. and treating them as if they were part of a single.3ad standard (LACP). The maximum number of active physical ports in any trunk group is eight and the number of standby ports is also eight. If a link in a LACP trunk group fails.3ad standard is Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).0. traffic is reassigned dynamically to the remaining links of the LACP trunk group or is assigned to the standby LACP links. logical link segment. This protocol allows the user to group several physical ports into one logical port (LACP trunk group) with any switch that supports IEEE 802. It provides for the controlled addition and removal of physical links for the link aggregation. You can configure the trunk groups manually called the static trunks as well as you can configure dynamic trunk group using the IEEE 802.2 supports IEEE 802. active The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk.3ad standard allows two or more standard Ethernet links to form a single Layer 2 link using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).

[LACP Menu] sysprio .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. an operational key. Lower numbers provide higher priority. The default value is 32768. Please refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for a detailed information on this protocol. The system priority.Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info port . January 2006 . timeout <short|long> Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. The rest of the ports stay in standby mode to substitute for any failed ports. decides which eight ports should be combined to form a trunk group between two switches.0. Use the following commands to configure LACP on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. The default value is long. 336 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. Each LACP active or passive port needs an admin. in conjunction with port priority. NOTE – All ports are in LACP off mode by default. and an aggregator for LACP to start negotiation on these ports.Display current LACP configuration Table 6-56 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage sysprio <1-65535> Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. The link can generate Link Aggregation ID (LAG ID) based on the operational key. All the aggregatable ports must have the same LAG ID. System priority is used when there are more than eight ports configured with the same adminkey. You can choose between short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds) timeout periods.2 Command Reference passive The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. This port only responds to the negotiation requests sent from an LACP active port.Set LACP system priority timeout . You need to assign the same admin key to a group of ports to make them aggregatable.LACP port Menu cur . You can form an active LACP trunk group with all the ports that have the same LAG ID.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 6-56 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the LACP Port menu. To view menu options. January 2006 337 .0. see page 338. cur Displays the current LACP configuration.

2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp/port <port number> LACP Port Configuration Menu [LACP Port 1 Menu] mode .Set LACP port priority adminkey . Lower numbers provide higher priority. Table 6-57 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port #) Command Syntax and Usage mode <off for no LACP or active or passive> off: Using this option.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set LACP mode prio . you can turn LACP off for this port. but only respond to the negotiation requests from active ports. you can turn LACP on and set this port to passive mode.Set LACP port admin key cur . Passive ports do not initiate negotiation. prio <1-65535> Sets the priority value for the selected port.0. The default value is 128. January 2006 .Display current LACP port configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a selected port. 338 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. cur Displays the current LACP configuration for this port. Only active ports initiate negotiation with the partner system port by sending the LACPDU packets. All ports are in off mode by default. passive: Using this option. adminkey <1-65535> Sets the admin key for this port. you can turn LACP on and set this port to active. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form an LACP trunk group. active: Using this option. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk.

rem <port number> Removes port(s) or trunk group(s) from this VLAN.0. and to enforce security policies among logical segments. The default VLAN name is the first one. cont <BW Contract number. The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 41. and change the port membership of the VLAN. the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1. [VLAN 1 Menu] name stg cont add rem def jumbo learn ena dis del cur - Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Set BW contract Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable/disable Jumbo Frame support Enable/disable smac learning Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration Table 6-58 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. to create logical segmentation of workgroups. By default. stg <Spanning Tree Group index (1-16)> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group. which is enabled all the time. For more information on configuring VLANs. add <port number> Adds port(s) or trunk group(s) to the VLAN membership. The default contract number is 1024 on AD3 and AD4. delete the VLAN. (1-1024)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for this VLAN. change the status of the VLAN. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration VLANs are commonly used to split up groups of network users into manageable broadcast domains. January 2006 339 .

NOTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration. it defines ports between 1-28 for VLAN 1. learn disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address learning on this VLAN. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN. You cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. Also.2 Command Reference Table 6-58 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. jumbo disable|enable Enables or disables jumbo frame support on this VLAN. January 2006 .0. 340 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. By default. You need to reset the switch using /boot/reset command to enable jumbo frames on the switch. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN #1. you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 307).Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the current VLAN configuration. ena Enables this VLAN. del Deletes this VLAN.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Disable port team del .Add port to team remport .Delete port team cur . January 2006 341 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Table 6-59 Port Team Configuration Menu Command Syntax and Usage addport <port number> Adds the specified port to the current team.Add trunk group to team remtrunk . cur Displays the current port team configuration.Remove port from team addtrunk .Remove trunk group from team ena .0.Enable port team dis . ena Enables the port team. del Deletes the port team. remport <port number> Removes the specified port from the current team. remtrunk <trunk group number> Removes a trunk group from the current team. [Port team 1 Menu] addport . dis Disables the port team.Display current port team configuration Table 6-59 outlines the commands in this menu. addtrunk <trunk group number> Adds a trunk group to the current team.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/team <team number> Port Team Configuration Port teams are used to operationally link ports and interfaces together.

see page 348. To view menu options.0. rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu. see page 348. To view menu options see page 353. see page 346. see page 350. To view menu options. rip Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. 342 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. To view menu options. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol menu. see page 344. To view menu options.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu [Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip ospf bgp port dns bootp vrrp rtrid metrc cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu Border Gateway Protocol Menu IP Port Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Set router ID Set default gateway metric Display current IP configuration Table 6-60 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. To view menu options. nwf <Network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. route Displays the IP Static Route Menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view menu options. gw <default gateway number (1-259)> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. see page 357. To view menu options see page 352. January 2006 .

To view menu options. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 6-60 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. For more information on gateway metrics.101)> Defines the router ID.17. dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. see page 396. To view menu options. see page 380. 192. To view menu options. To view menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view menu options. see page 381. vrrp Displays Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu. bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. see page 379. cur Displays the current IP configuration. see page 378.0. port <port number> Displays the IP Port Menu. The default gateway metric is strict. rtrid <IP address (such as. see page 361. metrc strict|roundrobin Sets the default gateway metric for strict or roundrobin. see page 371.4. January 2006 343 . To view menu options. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu.

255. Each IP interface represents the Nortel Application Switch on an IP subnet on your network. For more information on this topic.0. though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it. relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface.101 for IPv4 or 3001::abcd:5678 for IPv6)> Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation for IPv4 and colon notation for IPv6. addr <IP address (such as 192. Table 6-61 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage ip6nd Opens the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery menu This menu is used to enable or disable the sending of IPv6 Router Advertisement packets from this interface. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Configures the VLAN number for this interface. The Interface option is disabled by default. refer to page 345. January 2006 . Each interface can belong to one VLAN.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. mask <IP subnet mask for IPv4 or prefix length for IPv6 (such as 255. 344 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.255.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/if <interface number> IP Interface Configuration [IP Interface ip6nd ipver addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] IP6 Neighbor Discovery Menu Set IP version Set IP address Set subnet mask/prefix len Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration The Nortel Application Switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces.4. ipver <IP version (v4 or v6)> Set the IP version.0 for IPv4 or 64 for IPv6)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation for IPv4 or prefix length for IPv6.17. It is enabled by default.

Enable/disable router advertisement This menu is used to configure the sending of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery router advertisements from this interface. dis Disables this IP interface. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. Table 6-62 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage rtradv disable | enable Enables or disables the sending of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery router advertisements from this interface. January 2006 345 .2 Command Reference Table 6-61 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables this IP interface. del Removes this IP interface. cur Displays the current interface settings. /cfg/l3/if/ip6nd IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Menu [IP6 Neighbor Discovery Menu] rtradv .

Set IP address intr .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. This option is disabled by default.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/gw <gateway number> Default IP Gateway Configuration [Default gateway 1 Menu] ipver . January 2006 .Enable default gateway dis . The default is 8 attempts.0.Disable default gateway del .Set VLAN number prio . The range is from 1 to 120 seconds.Display current default gateway configuration NOTE – The switch can be configured with up to 255 gateways.17.Delete default gateway cur . intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up.44 for IPv4 or 3001::abcd:1234 for IPv6)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation for IPv4 and colon notation for IPv6.Enable/disable ARP only health checks ena . Gateways one to four are reserved for default gateway load balancing.Set priority of default gateway route arp . 346 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. Table 6-63 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage ipver <IP version (v4 or v6)> Set the IP version.4.Set interval between ping attempts retry .Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN vlan . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway. 192. The default is 2 seconds.Set IP version addr . addr <default gateway address (such as. Gateways five to 259 are used for load-balancing of VLAN-based gateways. The intr option sets the time between health checks. retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative.

Default Gateway Metrics For information about configuring which gateway is selected when multiple default gateways are enabled. If you set the priority to high. arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. January 2006 347 . ena Enables the gateway for use. relative to learned default routes. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. dis Disables the gateway. or RIP protocols). NOTE – By default learned default route has higher priority than the configured default gateway route. del Deletes the gateway from the configuration. If you set the priority to low. This command is disabled by default. then learned default routes will always be preferred over the default gateway route. BGP.2 Command Reference Table 6-63 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage prio <high|low> Allows you to change the priority of the default gateway route to either high or low.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. see page 396. cur Displays the current gateway settings. then the default gateway route will always be preferred over learned default routes (such as from OSPF.

If a gateway address is 0. [ARP Menu] static rearp cur .Static ARP Menu .Display current ARP configuration 348 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set re-ARP period in minutes . You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. the route becomes a black hole route. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address.Add static route rem .0. where any packet routed to this destination will be dropped. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation. destination subnet mask. rem <destination> <mask> Removes a static route. Table 6-64 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> [interface number] Adds a static route.0.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/route IP Static Route Configuration [IP Static Route Menu] add .Remove static route cur . Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation.0. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. /cfg/l3/arp ARP Configuration Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer.. In any IP communication. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache. cur Displays the current IP static routes. January 2006 .Display current static routes Up to 128 static routes can be configured. and gateway address. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.

cur Displays the current ARP configurations.Display current static ARP configuration Table 6-66 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry.101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry. 192. NOTE – Nortel Application Switch Operating System 21. To view options. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. del <IP address (such as.4. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network. [Static ARP Menu] add . Nortel Application Switch Operating System 20. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Delete an ARP entry cur . /cfg/l3/arp/static ARP Static Configuration Menu Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically.Add a permanent ARP entry del . rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. January 2006 349 .0 and above allows the static ARP configuration to be retained over reboots.17.x and below allow the user to configure the ARP information but that information cannot be retained over a switch reboot. see page 349.2 Command Reference Table 6-65 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. cur Displays current static ARP configuration.

Display current local network definitions 350 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. This command is disabled by default. dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. see page 350. [IP Local Networks Menu] add .Remove local network definition cur . January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 6-67 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd) Command Syntax and Usage local Displays the menu used to define local network for route caching. To view menu options.Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur .0.Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off . Up to five local networks (lnets) can be configured. off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the Nortel Application Switch.Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts on . /cfg/l3/frwd/local Local Network Route Caching Definition This menu is used for adding local networks by setting the local network address and netmask for the route cache.Local network definition for route caching menu dirbr . on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the Nortel Application Switch. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. and to remove local networks. Forwarding is turned on by default.Add local network definition rem .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/frwd IP Forwarding Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Menu] local .

0.0.0 .255. To limit the route cache to your local hosts.0.0 128. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.255.255.0 Mask 128.0.255.255. rem <local network address> <local network mask> Removes a definition for a local network.32.255 128.0. by reducing the size of the ARP table on the Nortel Application Switch.0.0.2 Command Reference Table 2 IP Local Networks Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd/local) Command Syntax and Usage add <local network address> <local network mask> Adds a definition for a local network. the destination address is masked (bitwise and) with the local network mask and checked against the local network address.0.0.0. To determine if a route should be added to the memory cache.0.255.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.0.0. The local network address is used to define the base IP address in the range which will be cached. Table 6-68 Local Routing Cache Address Ranges Local Host Address Range 0. January 2006 351 . By default. The default gateways must be within range.255 205. and the local network mask is the mask which is applied to produce the range.0.255. cur Displays the current local network definitions.255.0 255. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache” on page 351.0 NOTE – All addresses that fall outside the defined range are forwarded to the default gateway.0.0. This produces a range that includes all Internet addresses for route caching: 0. Addresses to be cached are subnets that are directly connected and for which there is an interface configured on the Nortel Application Switch.205.0 through 255.255 Address 0. you could configure the parameters as shown in the examples in the following table.0 205.0 128. The /cfg/l3/frwd/local/add parameters define a range of addresses that will be cached on the Nortel Application Switch.0 .255.0. For details.127.32.0.0.0 . Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache The Local Route Cache lets you use switch resources more efficiently.255.0.32. the local network address and mask are both set to 0.

2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/nwf Network Filter Configuration [IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr .255. delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration.0.0.IP Subnet mask enable .0.0. For example: Current Network Filter 1: addr 0. disable Disables the Network Filter configuration.0.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Enable Network Filter disable . The default value is 0. then assign the route map to the peer.IP Address mask . disabled 352 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.0.0. mask 0.4. assign the network filter to a route map. mask <IP4 subnet mask (such as. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.Delete Network Filter cur . 255. enable Enables the Network Filter configuration. 192.Disable Network Filter delete .0.255.0.0.44)> Sets the starting IP address for this filter.0.Display current Network Filter configuration Table 6-69 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. 64)> Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled.0. For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).0)> | <IP6 mask prefix len (eg. January 2006 .17. The default address is 0.

NOTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure. ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. [IP Route Map alist aspath ap lp metric type prec weight enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Access List number AS Filter Menu Set as-path prepend of the matched route Set local-preference of the matched route Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Set weight of the matched route Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration Table 6-70 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) Command Syntax and Usage alist <number (1-8)> Displays the Access List menu. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. The path with the higher preference is preferred. metric <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric of the matched route. see page 355. One to three path preferences can be configured. January 2006 353 .0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> Route Map Configuration Menu Route maps control and modify routing information. For more information.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. which affects both inbound and outbound directions. aspath <number (1-8)> Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. lp <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the local preference of the matched route. For more information. see page 356.

cur Displays the current route configuration. enable Enables the route map. the higher the precedence. Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics. none—Removes the OSPF metric. The default is type 1. Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2. 354 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. disable Disables the route map. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. Default value is 10. The smaller the value. weight <value (0-65534)>|none Sets the weight of the route map.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. delete Deletes the route map.2 Command Reference Table 6-70 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map. January 2006 .0.

metric <(1-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies action for the access list. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list number> IP Access List Configuration Menu NOTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure. cur Displays the current Access List configuration. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 352 for details. [IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration Table 6-71 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist) Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number. January 2006 355 . disable Disables the access list. enable Enables the access list. delete Deletes the access list.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

Disable AS Filter delete . [AS Filter 1 Menu] as .Enable AS Filter disable .Display current AS Filter configuration Table 6-72 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath) Command Syntax and Usage as <AS number (1-65535)> Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number. delete Deletes the Autonomous System filter.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 356 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous system path> Autonomous System Filter Path NOTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to configure. cur Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration. enable Enables the Autonomous System filter. January 2006 . disable Disables the Autonomous System filter.Delete AS Filter cur .0.Set AS Filter action enable .AS number action .

RIP uses broadcast User Datagram protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information.Display current RIP configuration Table 6-73 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip) Command Syntax and Usage if <Interface Number (1-256)> Go to the RIP Interface menu.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip Routing Information Protocol Configuration The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP).Set update period in seconds vip . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.RIP Interface Menu update . The Routing Information Protocol is turned off by default. Upon expiration of the garbage-collection timer. The distance or hop count is used as the metric to determine the best path to a remote network or host where the hop count does not exceed 15 hops assuming a cost of one for each network. The timeout timer is set for 180 seconds and the garbage-collection timer is set for 120 seconds by default.Globally turn RIP OFF current .0. [Routing Information Protocol Menu] if . the route is finally removed from the routing table. For RIP2. The menu below is used for configuring globally Routing Information Protocol parameters. RIP sends routing information updates every 30 seconds. January 2006 357 . There are two timers associated with each route: a timeout and garbage-collection timer. the route is no longer valid but it is retained in the routing table for a short time so that neighbors can be notified that the route has been dropped. See page 359.Enable/disable static routes advertisement on .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Upon expiration of the timeout timer. It is set at 30 seconds by default. mask information is sent.Globally turn RIP ON off . RIP is one of a class of algorithms known as distance vector algorithms. For RIP1. the natural mask is always applied by the router receiving the update. This update contains known networks and the distances (hop count) associated with each one. no mask information is exchanged. update <update period (1-120 seconds)> Sets the RIP update period in seconds.Enable/disable vip advertisement statc .

and will not be advertised.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-73 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip) Command Syntax and Usage vip disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes. statc disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of static routes. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. on Globally turns RIP ON. and the switch will continue to advertise the route. If we disable all the real servers using operation command. If a VIP route exists in a routing table. cur Displays the current RIP configuration. 358 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. off Globally turns RIP OFF. the route gets removed from the routing table. it will always be advertised except when it is included in another network route that is already being advertised. Note: If all real servers behind a VIP go down. the VIP route does not get eliminated from the routing table.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Enable/disable supplying route updates listen .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip/if RIP Interface Menu [RIP Interface 1 Menu] version . poison disable|enable When enabled. The default action is none. the switch supplies routes to other routers. When enabled. key <key|none (to remove existing key value)> Set the authentication key. default none|listen|supply|both Set the default route action.0.Enable interface disable .Enable/disable poisoned reverse trigg . January 2006 359 . supply disable|enable Enables or disables supplying route updates. The default is disabled. This is enabled by default.Set authentication type key .Set RIP version supply .Enable/disable multicast updates default .Set default route action metric .Display current RIP interface configuration Table 6-74 RIP Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage version 1|2|both Set the RIP version. The default is enabled. metric <value [1-15]> Set metric value for this RIP interface. the switch uses split horizon only.Set authentication key enable . the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. auth none|password Set the type of authentication. When disabled.Disable interface current .Enable/disable listening to route updates poison .Set metric auth .Enable/disable triggered updates mcast . the switch stores routing information from other routers. The default value is none. mcast disable|enable Enable or disable triggered updates. The default value is 1. The default value is 2. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. listen disable|enable When enabled. The default is enabled. The default value is none.

0. current Displays current values of all objects settable from this menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 6-74 RIP Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage enable Enable the interface. disable Disable the interface. 360 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 .

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS).Set the LSDB limit for external LSA default .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf Open Shortest Path First Configuration Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol. if <interface number (1-255)> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch.Globally turn OSPF ON off .OSPF Host Entry Menu redist .Display current OSPF configuration Table 6-75 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu. range <range number (1-16)> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses. The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. See page 364 to view menu options. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. which then distributes it to other areas as needed.Export default route information on .OSPF Route Redistribute Menu lsdb . [Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex . This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number. See page 365 to view menu options. refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide.OSPF Interface Menu virt .Globally turn OSPF OFF cur . The Nortel Application Switch Operating System implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.OSPF Area (index) Menu range . Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone.0. In any AS with multiple areas. one area must be designated as area 0. known as the backbone. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. See page 363 to view menu options.OSPF Virtual Links Menu md5key . January 2006 361 .OSPF MD5 Key Menu host . See page 367 to view menu options.OSPF Summary Range Menu if . virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link.

default <metric (1-16777215)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. January 2006 . 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit. See host <host entry number (1-128)> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes.2 Command Reference Table 6-75 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. See page 369 to view menu options. Up to 128 host routes can be configured.0. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings. 362 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 370 to view menu options. Use none for no default. on Enables OSPF on the Nortel Application Switch. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. off Disables OSPF on the Nortel Application Switch. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF.

Display current OSPF area configuration Table 6-76 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as. 192. January 2006 363 . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes.Enable area disable .Set stub area metric auth .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex Area Index Configuration Menu [OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid . auth none|password|md5 None: No authentication required. For example. MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required.0. Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate.Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable . Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area.101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number.Disable area delete . the area type must be defined as transit.Set authentication type spf . a stub area is connected to only one other area.17. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas.4. NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities.Delete area cur .Set area ID type . Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone. For example. routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices. Typically. type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions.Set area type metric . Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration.Enable range .Set IP address . enable Enables the OSPF area. January 2006 . 192.Disable range .17.Set IP mask .Enable/disable hide range .Set area index . /cfg/l3/ospf/range OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu [OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] .2 Command Reference Table 6-76 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage spf <interval (0-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm.Delete range .101> Displays the IP address mask for the range.101)> Displays the base IP address for the range. 364 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. disable Disables the OSPF area. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index used by the Nortel Application Switch.4. mask <IP address (such as.Display current OSPF summary range configuration Table 6-77 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as. 192.4.17. delete Deletes the OSPF area.

cur Displays the current OSPF summary range. January 2006 365 . disable Disables the OSPF summary range. enable Enables the OSPF summary range. /cfg/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Configuration Menu [OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds Set dead interval in seconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. delete Deletes the OSPF summary range.2 Command Reference Table 6-77 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. (A priority value of 127 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface. enable Enables OSPF interface. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet. Low cost indicates high bandwidth. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). trans <value (0-3600)> Displays the transit delay in seconds. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the interfaces. delete Deletes OSPF interface. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. retra <value (0-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface. key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password. prio <priority value (0-255)> Displays the assigned priority value to the Nortel Application Switch’s OSPF interfaces. which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down. 366 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.0. disable Disables OSPF interface.2 Command Reference Table 6-78 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. January 2006 .) cost <cost value (1-65535)> Displays cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup.

Default is one seconds.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Disable interface . Default is 40 seconds.0.Set router ID of virtual neighbor . retra <value (1-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet.Enable interface .Delete interface .Set area index . Default is five seconds.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/virt OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu [OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] . Default is none. Default is none.Set authentication key . nbr <nbr router ID (IP address)> Displays the router ID of the virtual neighbor.Set dead interval in seconds .Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 6-79 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index.Set transit delay in seconds . key <key>|none Displays the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link.Set hello interval in seconds .0. trans <value (1-3600)> Displays the delay in transit in seconds.Set MD5 key ID . January 2006 367 . which is set to be in an interval of seconds. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the authentication parameters of a hello packet. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. Default is 0. which is set to be in an interval of seconds.Set retransmit interval in seconds .

368 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 .0. delete Deletes OSPF virtual link. up to 16 chars> Sets the authentication key up to 16 characters for this OSPF packet.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet. disable Disables OSPF virtual link.2 Command Reference Table 6-79 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage enable Enables OSPF virtual link. /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu [OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration Table 6-80 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key) Command Syntax and Usage key <key. cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings. cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration.

cur Displays the current OSPF host entries.17. disable Disables OSPF host entry. January 2006 369 .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/host OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu [OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr .4. 192. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Set cost of this host entry enable .Delete host entry cur . aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index of the host.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set host entry IP address aindex .101)> Displays the base IP address for the host entry.Disable host entry delete .0. enable Enables OSPF host entry.Set area index cost . cost <cost value [1-65535]> Displays the cost value of the host.Enable host entry disable . delete Deletes OSPF host entry.Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 6-81 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.

enter routing map numbers one per line. To remove all 32 route maps.Display current route-maps added Table 6-82 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)|all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list. NULL at the end. 370 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.. enter none. To add specific route maps. NULL at end. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.To add all the 32 route maps. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) . |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list. enter all. cur Displays the current route map settings.Export all routes of this protocol cur . January 2006 .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. [OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add .Add rmap into route redistribution list rem . This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol. Removes routing maps from the rmap list. export <metric (1-16777215)><metric type (1|2)> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified. enter routing map numbers one per line.Remove rmap from route redistribution list export . enter all.. To remove specific route maps.

January 2006 371 . fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. [Border Gateway peer aggr as maxpath pref on off cur Protocol Menu] Peer menu Aggregation menu Set Autonomous System (AS) number Set Max AS Path Length Set Local Preference Globally turn BGP ON Globally turn BGP OFF Display current BGP configuration NOTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes. aggr <aggregate number (1-16)> Displays the Aggregation Menu. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bgp Border Gateway Protocol Configuration Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. BGP is turned off by default. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. within an autonomous system.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. When run within an autonomous system. When run between different autonomous systems. You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems. it is called external BGP (eBGP). To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 377. Each border router. see page 373. Table 6-83 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer number (1-16)> Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. There is one fixed route per IP interface. The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes.0. rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s). it is called internal BGP (iBGP). BGP is defined in RFC 1771.

either a single network or a group of networks that is controlled by a common network administrator on behalf of an administrative entity (such as a university. 372 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. pref <preference (0-4294967294)> Sets the local preference. off Globally turns BGP off. or a business division). The default value is 50. a business enterprise. Paths greater than this value will be ignored.0. memory resources and routing table from BGP-based attacks. cur Displays the current BGP configuration. An autonomous system is assigned a globally unique number called an Autonomous System Number (ASN). BGP errors and probes designed to locate BGP speaking devices that do not limit the maximum AS Path. An autonomous system shares routing information with other autonomous systems using the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). on Globally turns BGP on. The command is designed to protect the MP CPU.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. When multiple peers advertise the same route. maxpath <max AS path length (1-127)> This command limits the maximum length of an accepted AS Path. The path with the higher value is preferred. An autonomous system (AS) is the unit of router policy. use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP.2 Command Reference Table 6-83 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage as <autonomous system number (1-65535)> Sets Autonomous System Number for this autonomous system. January 2006 . or use the local preference if you are using iBGP.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Add rmap into out-rmap list remi . that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. using dotted decimal notation.17. January 2006 373 .Enable peer disable . addr <IP address (such as. It is set at 90 seconds by default. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. ras <AS number (0-65535)> Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer. The peer option is disabled by default. hold <hold time (0.Set remote autonomous system number hold .Delete peer cur . To view the menu options.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number> BGP Peer Configuration Menu [BGP Peer 1 Menu] redist .Remove rmap from out-rmap list enable . 1-21845)> Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer in seconds.Set min time between route originations ttl . It is set at 0 by default.0. Table 6-84 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage redist Displays BGP Redistribution Menu.Display current peer configuration This menu is used to configure BGP peers.Set remote IP address ras .Set min time between advertisements retry .Set keep alive time advert .Set time-to-live of IP datagrams addi . in seconds.4.Disable peer delete .Set hold time alive .Redistribution menu addr . 192.101)> Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router). which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks.Add rmap into in-rmap list addo . alive <keepalive time (0.Remove rmap from in-rmap list remo . The default address is 0.0.Set connect retry interval orig .0.0. see page 375. 3-65535)> Sets the period of time.

0. It is also used to support multi-hops.2 Command Reference Table 6-84 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage advert <min adv time (1-65535)> Sets time in seconds between advertisements. addo <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into out-route map list. del Deletes this peer configuration. when exhausted. remi <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from in-route map list. The default number is set at 1. orig <min orig time (1-65535)> Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds. This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that. ena Enables this peer configuration. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the current BGP peer configuration. 374 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)> Sets connection retry interval in seconds. remo <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from out-route map list. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded. would cause the packet to be discarded. dis Disables this peer configuration. ttl <number of router hops (1-255)> Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. addi <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into in-route map list.

None: No routes are configured Import: Import these routes. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration. or none.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. default none|import|originate|redistribute Sets default route action. Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers even though it does not have any default routes in its routing table. Similarly. originate. static disable|enable Enables or disables advertising static routes.0. redistribute. Defaults routes can be configured as import.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu [Redistribution metric default rip ospf fixed static vip cur Menu] Set default-metric of advertised routes Set default route action Enable/disable advertising RIP routes Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes Enable/disable advertising fixed routes Enable/disable advertising static routes Enable/disable advertising VIP routes Display current redistribution configuration Table 6-85 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none Sets default metric of advertised routes. fixed disable|enable Enables or disables advertising fixed routes. you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu. you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. January 2006 375 . rip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising RIP routes ospf disable|enable Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-85 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist)
Command Syntax and Usage vip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising VIP routes. cur Displays the current redistribution configuration.

376

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/bgp/aggr <aggregate number>
BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu
NOTE – The aggregate number (1-16) represents the aggregation route you wish to configure.
[BGP Aggr 1 Menu] addr - Set aggregation IP address mask - Set aggregation network mask enable - Enable aggregation disable - Disable aggregation delete - Delete aggregation current - Display current aggregation configuration

This menu allows you to configure aggregate routing to condense the number of routes between internal and external peer routers. Table 6-86 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address, such as 192.4.17.101> Adds the IP address to the selected aggregate. mask <IP subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0> Sets the IP mask for the selected aggregate. enable Enables the selected aggregate. disable Disables the selected aggregate. delete Deletes the selected aggregate. current Displays the current aggregate configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

377

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/port <port number>
IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu
[IP Forwarding Port 1 Menu] on - Turn Forwarding ON off - Turn Forwarding OFF cur - Display current port configuration

The Layer 3 Port Menu allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off on a port-by-port basis. By default, the port forwarding option is turned on. Table 6-87 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/port)
Command Syntax and Usage on Enables IP forwarding for the current port. off Disables IP forwarding for the current port. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings.

378

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/dns
Domain Name System Configuration Menu
[Domain Name System Menu] prima - Set IP address of primary DNS server secon - Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname - Set default domain name cur - Display current DNS configuration

The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network, and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping, traceroute, and tftp commands. Table 6-88 Domain Name System Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns)
Command Syntax and Usage prima <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. Use dotted decimal notation. secon <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server. If the primary DNS server fails, the configured secondary will be used instead. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation. dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch. For example: mycompany.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

379

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/bootp
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu
[Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr - Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 - Set IP address of second BOOTP server on - Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off - Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur - Display current BOOTP relay configuration

The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the Nortel Application Switch. BOOTP relay menu is turned off by default. Table 6-89 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. addr2 <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server. on Globally turns on BOOTP relay. off Globally turns off BOOTP relay. cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.

380

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp
VRRP Configuration Menu
[Virtual Router vr vrgroup group if track hotstan on off holdoff cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router Menu VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup Menu VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu VRRP Interface Menu VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Globally VRRP hold off time Display current VRRP configuration

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Nortel Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. By default, VRRP is disabled. Nortel Application Switch Operating System has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well, allowing for full active/active redundancy between its Layer 4 switches.For more information on VRRP, see the “High Availability” chapter in your Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide. Table 6-90 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-1024)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. This menu is used for configuring up to 1024 virtual routers on this switch. To view menu options, see page 383. vrgroup <virtual router vrgroup number (1-16)> Displays VR Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 387. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu, used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. Group options must be configured when using two or more Nortel Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. To view menu options, see page 390.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

381

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-90 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-255)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. To view menu options, see page 394. track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process. To view menu options, see page 395. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing, in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other. By default, this option is disabled. on Globally enables VRRP on this switch. off Globally disables VRRP on this switch. holdoff <0-255 seconds> Globally suspends VRRP operation for the specified interval. cur Displays the current VRRP parameters.

382

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>
Virtual Router Configuration Menu
[VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] - Priority Tracking Menu - Set virtual router ID - Set IP address - Set interface number - Set renter priority - Set advertisement interval - Enable or disable preemption - Enable or disable sharing - Enable virtual router - Disable virtual router - Delete virtual router - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration

This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers for this switch. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. Virtual routers are disabled by default. Table 6-91 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. Tracking is Nortel’s proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. To view menu options, see page 385. vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)> Defines the virtual router ID. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other, each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. The default value is 1. The vrid of virtual server routers where the virtual router IP address is the same as the virtual server can be between 1 and 1024. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

383

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-91 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. The default address is 0.0.0.0. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above, this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router, even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. The default value is 1. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default value is 1. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preem is disabled, this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). By default, this option is enabled. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing, an Nortel proprietary extension to VRRP. When enabled, this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router, even when in backup mode. By default, this option is enabled. ena Enables this virtual router. dis Disables this virtual router. del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration.

384

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-91 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration
[VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] - Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers - Enable/disable tracking other interfaces - Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports - Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports - Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers - Enable/disable tracking HSRP - Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration

This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 395). Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-91 on page 383) is enabled, this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master. Some tracking criteria (vrs, ifs, and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers, otherwise called “virtual interface routers.” Other tracking criteria (l4pts, reals, and hsrp) apply to “virtual server routers,” which perform Layer 4 Server Load Balancing functions. A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

385

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-92 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track)
Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch, increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. ifs disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default. ports disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this switch. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master, increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. In networks where HSRP is used, enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master, optimizing routing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.

386

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup
Virtual Router Group Menu
This feature allows the failover of individual groups of VIRs and VSRs. When Web hosting is shared between two or more customers on a single VRRP switch, you can group VIRs and VSRs to serve the high availability of a specific customer. If failover occurs on a customer link, the group of VIRs and VSRs associated with that customer alone will fail over to the backup switch. The VIRs and VSRs configured for the other customers on the master switch are not affected. Up to 16 virtual router groups can be configured on the switch.
[VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup 1 Menu] track - Priority Tracking Menu name - Set virtual router group name add - Add virtual router to group rem - Remove virtual router from group prio - Set priority for virtual router group trackvr - Set track virtual router for group adver - Set advertisement interval for group preem - Enable/disable preemption for group share - Enable/disable sharing for group ena - Enable virtual router group dis - Disable virtual router group del - Delete virtual router group cur - Display current VRRP virtual router group configuration

Table 6-93 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup)
Command Syntax and Usage track Displays VRRP priority tracking menu for this virtual router group. Tracking is Nortel’s proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. To view menu options, see page 388. name Defines virtual router group name up to eight characters. add <virtual router number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual router to the group. Each virtual router group can have up to 64 virtual routers. rem <virtual router number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual router from the group.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

387

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-93 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup)
Command Syntax and Usage prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. trackvr <virtual router number (0-1024)> Set track virtual router for group adver <1-255 seconds> Set advertisement interval for group. preem disable|enable Enable/disable preemption for group. share disable|enable Enable/disable sharing for group. ena Enables the virtual router group. dis Disables the virtual router group. del Deletes the virtual router group. cur Displays the current VRRP virtual router group configuration.

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup <vrgroup number>/ track
Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu

388

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

0. ports disable|enable When enabled. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN.2 Command Reference This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Criteria are tracked dynamically. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. the priority will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this virtual router group. the priority will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this virtual router group. the priority will be increased for each active port on the VLAN on this virtual router group. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 395). This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. the priority will be increased for each IP interface active on this virtual router group. [VRRP Vrgroup ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur 1 Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP vrgroup tracking configuration Table 6-94 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled. January 2006 389 . This command is disabled by default.

Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router.Set advertisement interval .Set interface number . which forces all virtual routers on the Nortel Application Switch to either be master or backup as a group.Set virtual router ID . optimizing routing efficiency. In networks where HSRP is used.Enable or disable preemption .Enable virtual router . cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router group. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Delete virtual router . Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master.Disable virtual router . /cfg/l3/vrrp/group Virtual Router Group Configuration [VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] .0. This command is disabled by default.Enable or disable sharing . A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address.Priority Tracking Menu . enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router group for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements.Set renter priority . hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. 390 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 . a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.2 Command Reference Table 6-94 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance on the virtual router group that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default.

the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. When enabled. If there is a tie. Table 6-95 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). January 2006 391 . The default is 1. Nortel’s proprietary extension to VRRP. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. Tracking is Nortel’s proprietary extension to VRRP. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. During the master router election process. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256).2 Command Reference NOTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two Nortel Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration. even when in backup mode. The default value is 100. To view menu options. this option is enabled. When enabled. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. Note that even when preem is disabled. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)> Defines the virtual router ID for this group. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master.0. where only one switch is active at any time. By default. this option is enabled. adver <1-255 (seconds)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). The default switch IP interface number is 1. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. By default. see page 395. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same).

2 Command Reference Table 6-95 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the virtual router group. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored.0. then the tracking option will be available only under group option. del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration. cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group. January 2006 . /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration [Virtual Router ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration NOTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. dis Disables the virtual router group. 392 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.

This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. hsrp disable|enable Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for this virtual router group. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 393 . enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. This command is disabled by default. In networks where HSRP is used. This command is disabled by default.0. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. optimizing routing efficiency. This helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. HSRP is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. ports disable|enable When enabled.2 Command Reference Table 6-96 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled.

Table 6-97 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication).Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 394 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number> VRRP Interface Configuration NOTE – The interface-number (1 to 256) represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured. January 2006 . The IP interface itself is not deleted. cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.0. [VRRP Interface auth passw del cur 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above). or password (password authentication). del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface.

Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process.Set priority increment for HSRP by VLAN tracking cur .Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports . the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. January 2006 395 . ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN.Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/track VRRP Tracking Configuration [VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs . The default value is 10.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The default value is 2. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for L4 real server tracking hsrp . Table 6-98 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch. The default value is 2. The default value is 2. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 385).0. reals <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for healthy real servers behind the virtual server router.Set priority increment for L4 switch port tracking reals . ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch.Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking l4pts . l4pts <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for physical switch ports with active Layer 4 processing.Set priority increment for HSRP tracking hsrv . The default value is 2. hsrp <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for switch ports with Layer 4 client-only processing that receive HSRP broadcasts.

0. which are described in the table “Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)” on page 396.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. /cfg/l3/metrc <metric name> Default Gateway Metrics If multiple default gateways are configured and enabled. The switch sends each new gateway request to the next healthy. enabled gateway in line. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 385) are enabled. Gateway #1 acts as the preferred default IP gateway until it fails or is disabled. a metric can be set to determine which primary gateway is selected. at which point the next in line will take over as the default IP gateway. January 2006 . This provides basic gateway load balancing. roundrobin 396 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. Table 6-99 Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc) Option strict Description The gateway number determines its level of preference. The default value is 10. There are two metrics.2 Command Reference Table 6-98 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrv <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for vrrp instances that are on the same VLAN. These priority tracking options only define increment values. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. All gateway requests to the same destination IP address are resolved to the same gateway.

2 Command Reference /cfg/slb /cfg/slb displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. see page 400. seclog <rate threshold packets/sec. see Chapter 7. see page 404.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 397 . “The SLB Configuration Menu”. To view options. 0-1048576 (0.0. see page 399. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. To view menu options. see page 403. udpblast Displays UDP Blast Menu. /cfg/security Security Configuration Menu [Security Menu] port ipacl udpblast dos pgroup seclog pdepth cur Port Security Menu IP ACL Menu UDP Blast Protection Menu Protocol Anomaly and DoS Attack Prevention Menu Pattern Match Group Menu Set rate threshold for security logging Set packet depth for pattern matching Display current Security configuration Table 6-100 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Port Security Menu. pgroup <pattern group ID (1-128)> Displays Pattern Match Group Menu. To view menu options. To view menu options. dos Go to the Protocol Anomaly and DoS Attack Prevention Menu. Any packets above the current threshold will be logged. To view menu options. To view menu options. ipacl Displays IP address Access Control Menu. see page 402. no rate threshold)> Defines the rate threshold for security logging by the number of packets per second.

cur Displays the current security configuration. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 6-100 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security) Command Syntax and Usage pdepth <# of packets. 398 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.0. 1-255|none> Defines the search window for pattern matching beginning from the start of the packet stream. The window is in units of packets.

2 Command Reference /cfg/security/port Port Security Menu [Port <port_number> Menu] bogon . January 2006 399 .Enable/disable UDP blast protection dos . add iplen | ipversion | broadcast | loopback | land | ipreerved |ipttl | ipprot | ipoptlen | fragmoredont | fragdata | fragboundary | fraglast | fragdontoff | fragopt | fragoff | frag oversize | tcplen | tcportzero | blat | tcpreserved | nullscan | fullxmasscan | finscan | vecnascan | xmasscan | synfinscan | flagabnormal | syndata | synfrag | ftpport | dnsport | seqzero |ackzero | tcpoptlen | udplen | udpportzero | fraggle | pepsi | rc8 | snmpnull | icmplen | smurf | icmpdata | icmpoff | icmptype | igmplen | igmpfrag | igmptype | arplen | arpnbcast | arpncast | arpspoof | garp | ip6len | ip6version Add protocol anomaly/DoS attack to prevention.0. aadd Add all protocol anomaly/DoS attack to prevention for the port.Enable/disable protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention add . udpblast enable|disable Enable or disable UDP blast protection.Remove protocol anomaly/DoS attack from prevention arem . dos enable|disable Enable or disable protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention.Display current port configuration Table 6-101 Port Security Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage bogon enable|disable Enable or disable bogon IP ACL. ipacl enable|disable Enable or disable IP ACL.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Add all protocol anomaly/DoS attack to prevention rem .Add protocol anomaly/DoS attack to prevention aadd .Remove all protocol anomaly/DoS attack from prevention help .Enable/disable bogon IP ACL ipacl .Protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention description cur .Enable/disable IP ACL udpblast . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.

help Description of Protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention. the client source or destination IP address is checked against this pool of addresses. If a match is found. dos disabled /cfg/security/ipacl IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu Nortel Application Switch Operating System can be configured with IP access control lists (ACLs) composed of ranges of client IP addresses that are to be denied access to the switch. arem Remove all protocol anomaly/DoS attack from prevention for the port.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 6-101 Port Security Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage rem iplen | ipversion | broadcast | loopback | land | ipreerved |ipttl | ipprot | ipoptlen | fragmoredont | fragdata | fragboundary | fraglast | fragdontoff | fragopt | fragoff | frag oversize | tcplen | tcportzero | blat | tcpreserved | nullscan | fullxmasscan | finscan | vecnascan | xmasscan | synfinscan | flagabnormal | syndata | synfrag | ftpport | dnsport | seqzero |ackzero | tcpoptlen | udplen | udpportzero | fraggle | pepsi | rc8 | snmpnull | icmplen | smurf | icmpdata | icmpoff | icmptype | igmplen | igmpfrag | igmptype | arplen | arpnbcast | arpncast | arpspoof | garp | ip6len | ip6version Remove protocol anomaly/DoS attack from prevention. udpblast disabled.0. January 2006 . When traffic ingresses the switch. [IP ACL Menu] add rem arem dadd drem darem cfg bogon oper cur - Add configuration source IP Address/Mask Remove configuration source IP Address/Mask Remove all configuration source IP Address/Mask Add configuration destination IP Address/Mask Remove configuration destination IP Address/Mask Remove all configuration destination IP Address/Mask Display configuration IP Address/Mask Display bogon IP Address/Mask Display operations IP Address/Mask Display all IP Address/Mask 400 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. ipacl disabled. then the client traffic is blocked. For example: Current port 1: bogon disabled. cur Display current port configuration.

drem <IP address> <IP subnet mask> Remove configuration destination IP Address/Mask. cfg Display configuration IP Address/Mask. darem Remove all configuration destination IP Address/Mask.0. arem Remove all configuration source IP Address/Mask.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. oper Display operations IP Address/Mask. defined by the IP address/mask pair. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. dadd <IP address> <IP subnet mask> Add configuration destination IP Address/Mask. cur Displays current IP addresses ranges in Access Control List.2 Command Reference Table 6-102 IP Address ACL Menu Options (/cfg/sec/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP mask> Adds range of source IP addresses to be denied. January 2006 401 . defined by the IP address/mask pair index. bogon Display bogon IP Address/Mask. rem <IP address/mask pair index> Removes range of source IP addresses to be denied.

Add UDP port/range for UDP blast protection rem .Display all UDP blast protection Ports Table 6-103 UDP Blast Protection Menu Options (/cfg/sec/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage add <UDP port number or range (first-last)> [packet rate] Adds UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. If the number of packets on this port range exceeds the maximum packet rate per second. thus ensuring that backend servers are not flooded with data and disabled. the last number that can be used is 5300. January 2006 . When the maximum number of packets/second is reached. If the first port number is 300. You can specify a series of UDP port ranges and the allowed packet limit for that range. as well as the maximum packet rate per second. using any integer from 1 to 65535. the sum of ranges cannot exceed the maximum of 5000 ports.Default packet rate for UDP blast protection cur . rem <UDP port number or range (first-last)> Removes UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. cur Displays all UDP blast protection ports. [UDP Blast Protection Menu] add .0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. UDP traffic will be dropped.Remove UDP port/range for UDP blast protection default . The maximum port range is 5000. While you can configure multiple port ranges. Nortel Application Switch Operating System can be configured to restrict the amount of traffic allowed on any UDP port. default <packet rate> Defines the default packet rate for UDP blast protection. UDP traffic is shut down on those ports. 402 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports up to 5000 UDP port numbers.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/udpblast UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu Malicious attacks over UDP protocol ports are becoming a common way to bring down real servers.

fragoff <IPv4 fragment offset in multiples of 8 bytes. help Description of the Anomaly and DoS attack prevention.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/dos Anomaly and Denial of Service Attack Prevention Menu [Protocol Anomaly and DoS Attack Prevention Menu] ipttl . For example: Current protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention settings: ipttl 1. 1-9026> Set the largest allowable ICMP payload. January 2006 403 .Set the largest allowable TCP SYN payload for syndata icmpdata .Set the smallest allowable IP fragment offset for fragoff syndata .Protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention description cur . For example: Current highest allowable IPv4 protocol: 137 Enter new highest allowable IPv4 protocol [0-255]: fragdata <IPv4 fragment payload size in bytes. 1-255> Set the smallest allowable IP fragment offset.Set the largest allowable ICMP payload for icmpdata icmpoff . 1-8190> Set the largest allowable ICMP fragment offset. syndata <TCP packet payload size in bytes. ipprot <highest allowable IPv4 protocol [0-255]> Set the highest allowable IP protocol for IP protection. 0-255> Set the smallest allowable IP ttl for IPTTL.Set the largest allowable ICMP fragment offset for icmpoff help .0. ipprot 137. fragoff 4. icmpoff <ICMP fragment offset in multiples of 8 bytes. 16-248> Set the smallest allowable IP fragment payload.Set smallest allowable IP fragment payload for fragdata fragoff . icmpdata <ICMP packet payload size in bytes. cur Display current protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention settings. icmpdata 800. 0-255> Set the largest allowable IP SYN payload. syndata 0.Set the smallest allowable IP ttl for ipttl ipprot .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set the highest allowable IP protocol for ipprot fragdata . fragdata 32. icmpoff 101 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Display current protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention Table 6-104 Anomaly and DoS Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ipttl <IPv4 TTL.

[Pattern Match Group 1 Menu] name . use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add command described on page 475. and then apply the group to a filter. 404 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 .Remove SLB string from group del . it is useful to combine them into one group and give the group a name that is easy to remember. By applying the patterns and groups to a deny filter.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. To view existing strings and their ID numbers. del Deletes the pattern group. group them into a pattern group. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/cur command. When a pattern group is applied to a deny filter. rem <SLB string ID> Removes an SLB string from this pattern group.0 supports up to 1024 pattern matching groups. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. Configure the binary or ASCII pattern strings.Delete pattern group cur . To configure SLB strings. the switch will match any of the strings or patterns within that group before denying and dropping the packet. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group.Display current configuration Table 6-105 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage name <31 character name>|none Specifies a descriptive name for this pattern group. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Add SLB string to group rem . also on page 475. name the pattern group. the packet content can be detected and thus denied access to the network.Set pattern group name add . add <string ID> Adds a pre-configured SLB string to this pattern group by the string ID number. The filtering commands in Nortel Application Switch Operating System Advanced Denial of Service Pack allow the administrator to define groups of patterns.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/pgroup <pattern group number> Pattern Matching Menu When a virus or other attack contains multiple patterns or strings. Note: You can only add the binary or ASCII strings to a pattern matching group.

2 Command Reference Table 6-105 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration of this pattern group.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 405 .0.

port <SSL processor Web server port> Set SSL processor Web server port.Set SSL processor management IP port . January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 1-2048> Add a filter. add <filter ID.Set SSL processor Web server port rts . /cfg/setup Setup The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time. Spanning Tree. VLAN parameters.2 Command Reference /cfg/sslproc SSL Processor Menu [SSL Processor Menu] mip . port speed/mode. see Chapter 2.Remove filter cur .0.Enable/disable RTS processing filt . IP.” 406 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. For a complete description of how to use setup. rem <filter ID.Display current SSL processor configuration Table 6-106 SSL Processor Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage mip <SSL processor management IP> Set SSL processor management IP. “First-Time Configuration. cur Display current SSL processor configuration. 1-2048> Remove a filter. and IP interfaces.Add filter rem . BOOTP.Enable/disable filtering add . rts enable|disable Enable/disable RTS processing filt enable|disable Enable/disable filtering.

at the Configuration# prompt.2 Command Reference To start the setup program. BOOTP. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP. Spanning Tree. Management Port. as described on page 408. and IP interfaces. The screen display can be captured. edited. When using Telnet to configure a new switch. To start the dump program.0. which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. enter: Configuration# dump The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. at the Configuration# prompt. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] ------------------------------------------------------------------ /cfg/dump Dump The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. enter: >> Configuration# setup "Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time. January 2006 407 . and placed in a script file.VLANs. Port Speed/Mode. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. January 2006 . NOTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad). the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. To start the switch configuration download. enter: Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP/FTP server> <filename> {-tftp | ftp user name ftp password} [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] 408 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. enter: Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP/FTP server> <filename> {-tftp | ftp user name ftp password} [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP or FTP server IP address or hostname. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file.0. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command. the apply action will be performed automatically. To start the switch configuration upload.2 Command Reference /cfg/ptcfg Saving the Active Switch Configuration When the ptcfg command is used. the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP or FTP server. /cfg/gtcfg Restoring the Active Switch Configuration When the gtcfg command is used. the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data. at the Configuration# prompt. at the Configuration# prompt.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. and not locked by any application).

January 2006 409 .2 Command Reference where server is the TFTP or FTP server IP address or hostname.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file.0. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A.

2 Command Reference 410 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.

CHAPTER 7 The SLB Configuration Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Nortel Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. it can become overutilized. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server. 411 320506-A. each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. January 2006 . based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. Refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for detailed information on this feature. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. With this software feature. This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for configuring Server Load Balancing (SLB) on the Nortel Application Switch. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand.

group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for placing real servers into real server groups.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb SLB Configuration [Layer 4 Menu] real group virt filt port gslb layer7 wap sync adv linklb advhc pip peerpip wlm on off cur Real Server Menu Real Server Group Menu Virtual Server Menu Filtering Menu Layer 4 Port Menu Global SLB Menu Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu WAP Menu Config Synch Menu Layer 4 Advanced Menu Inbound Linklb Menu Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu Proxy IP Address Menu Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Workload Manager Menu Globally turn Layer 4 processing ON Globally turn Layer 4 processing OFF Display current Layer 4 configuration Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the menu for configuring real servers. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the menu for Filtering and Application Redirection. see page 445. see page 414. To view menu options. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for defining virtual servers. see page 463. port <port number> Displays the menu for setting physical switch port states for Layer 4 activity. 412 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. see page 423. see page 431.0. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options.

on Globally turns on Layer 4 software services for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. To view menu options. see page 497.To view options. To view menu options. linklb Displays Inbound Link Load Balancing Menu. deny. When this command is enabled. When the pip is defined. To view menu options. adv Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Menu. This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch.0. peerpip Displays Peer Proxy IP address Menu. see page 480. without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view menu options. January 2006 413 . To view menu options. This option can be performed only after the optional Layer 4 software is enabled (see “Activating Optional Software on page 509).2 Command Reference Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage gslb Displays the menu for configuring Global Server Load Balancing. advhc Displays Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu. To view menu options. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. wlm Displays the menu for workload management of servers. To view menu options. see page 465. layer7 Displays Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu. or NAT traffic. sync Displays the Synch Peer Switch Menu. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. using Layer 2. To view menu options. see page 486. pip This menu is used to set the switch proxy IP address using dotted decimal notation. see page 478. see page 498. see page 477. Enabling Layer 4 services is not necessary for using filters only to allow. see page 472. wap Displays WAP Menu. see page 484. the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch. To view menu options. see page 496.

/cfg/slb/real <server number> Real Server SLB Configuration [Real Server 1 Menu] adv .Delete real server cur . Application Redirection filters.Real Server Advanced Menu layer7 .Set backup real server inter .Layer 7 Command Menu ids .Set maximum number of connections tmout . Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) Filters configured to allow.Set weight for real server maxcon . Layer 4 processing must be turned on before redirection filters will work. require Layer 4 software services.Enable real server dis .0.Add real port to server remport .Remove real port from server ena .Display current real server configuration 414 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 . but the software processes will no longer be active in the switch cur Displays the current Server Load Balancing configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set IP addr of real server name . or perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on traffic do not require Layer 4 software to be activated.Set number of failed attempts to declare server DOWN restr . All configuration information will remain in place (if applied or saved). These filters are not affected by the Server Load Balancing on and off commands in this menu.Set real server name weight .Set number of successful attempts to declare server UP overflo .Enable/Disable backup on overflow addport .Set minutes inactive connection remains open backup .Set interval between health checks retry .IDS Command Menu rip .2 Command Reference Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage off Globally disables Layer 4 services. however.Disable real server del . deny.

see page 421. maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each real server.0. see page 421. see page 422. rip <real server IP address> Sets the IP address of the real server in dotted decimal format.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view menu options.2 Command Reference This menu is used for configuring information about real servers that participate in a server pool for Server Load Balancing or Application Redirection. When this command is used. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. avail <server weight (1-48)> Displays the currently available real server for Global server load balancing and allows the user to change to another real server for Global server load balancing. The required parameters are: Real server IP address Real server enabled (disabled by default) Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage adv Go to the Real Server Advanced menu. weight <real server weight (1-48)> Sets the weighting value (1 to 48) that this real server will be given in the load balancing algorithms. ids Displays Intrusion Detection Server/system menu. each real server is given a weight setting of 1. Higher weighting values force the server to receive more connections than the other servers configured in the same real server group. A setting of 10 would assign the server roughly 10 times the number of connections as a server with a weight of 1. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics (see “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 429). layer7 Displays the Layer 7 Menu. the address entered is PINGed to determine if the server is up. To view menu options. To view menu options. By default. name <string. and the administrator will be warned if the server does not respond. January 2006 415 . This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server by a natural language keyword value.

Settings must be specified in even numbered increments between 2 and 32768 minutes.000. The default setting is 10. the number of maximum connections is set at 200. To prevent loss of service if a particular real server fails. This option is also used with the Persistent option (see /cfg/slb/virt/pbind). such that new connections will not be issued to this server if the maxcon limit is reached. The same backup/overflow server may be assigned to more than one real server at the same time 416 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. If all servers in a real server group for a virtual server reach their maxcon limit at the same time. and the session table entry is then removed. When a client makes a request. By default. TCP/UDP connections will remain registered in the switch's binding table. January 2006 . The backup server is also used in overflow situations. these orphaned entries must be aged out of the binding table. In certain circumstances. this option sets how long an idle client is allowed to remain associated with a particular server. such as when a client application is abnormally terminated by the client's system. client requests will be dropped by the virtual server. client requests will be sent to the backup/overflow server or backup/overflow server group. The data is transferred until the client ends the session. Then.0. the session is recorded in the table.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage maxcon <maximum connections (0-200000)> Sets the maximum number of connections that this server should simultaneously support. Every client-to-server session being load balanced is recorded in the switch's Session Table. This option sets a threshold as an artificial barrier. New connections will be issued again to this server once the number of current connections has decreased below the maxcon setting. the switch will activate the backup real server until the original becomes operative again.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the backup comes online to provide additional processing power until the original server becomes desaturated. Using the tmout option. backup <real server number (1-1023)>|none Sets the real server used as the backup/overflow server for this real server. In order to prevent table overflow. If no backup servers/server group are configured. If the real server reaches its maxcon (maximum connections) limit. if the real server becomes inoperative. tmout <even number of minutes (2-32768)> Sets the number of minutes an inactive session remains open (in even numbered increments). use this option to assign a backup real server number. When persistent is activated. you can set the number of minutes to wait before removing orphan table entries.

remport <real server port (2–65534)> Remove multiple service ports from the server. this option is disabled. By default. This option should be enabled when the real IP address supplied above represents a remote server (real or virtual) that this switch will access as part of its Global Server Load Balancing network. January 2006 417 . The inter option lets you choose the time between health checks. When enabled. By default. For UDP services. the real server goes down operationally as soon as the physical port connected to the real server goes down. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. the switch verifies that real servers and their corresponding services are operational by opening a TCP connection to each service. The default is 8 attempts overflo enable|disable Enable or disable backup upon overflow. the switch pings servers to determine their status. Determining the health of each real server is a necessary function for Layer 4 switching. retry <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this real server inoperative. the real server will go down only after the configured health check interval.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. using the defined service ports configured as part of each virtual service. The default is 4 attempts restr <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of successful health check attempts required before declaring a UDP service operational. For TCP services. This command is enabled by default. remote disable|enable Enables or disables remote site operation for this server. An interval of “0” disables health checking for the server. fasthc disable|enable Enables or disables Fast Health Check operation.0. submac disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address substitution. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP address translation. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage inter <number of seconds between health checks (0-60)> Sets the interval between real server health verification attempts. a client request from any application can be proxied using a load-balancing Proxy IP address (PIP). The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. When disabled. this option is disabled. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. The default interval is 2 seconds. addport <real server port (2–65534)> Add multiple service ports to the server. With this option enabled (default).

enables this real server for operation until explicitly disabled. Use this command with caution. When enabled.0. when the apply and save commands are used. This option. This removes the real server from operation within its real server groups. See /oper/slb/ena on page 412 for an operations-level command. when the apply and save commands are used.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage ena You must perform this command to enable this real server for Layer 4 service. the real server can process virtual server requests associated with its real server group. See /oper/slb/dis on page 502 for an operations-level command that permits graceful server shutdown. This option. dis Disables this real server from Layer 4 service. as it will delete any configuration options that have been set for this real server. NOTE – This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. A disabled server will no longer process virtual server requests as part of the real server group to which it is assigned.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. disables this real server until it is explicitly re-enabled. 418 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. January 2006 . cur Displays the current configuration information for this real server. del Deletes this real server from the Layer 4 switching software configuration.

2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/real/adv Real Server Advanced Menu [Real Server 1 Advanced Menu] avail .Enable/disable source MAC address substitution subdmac . submac enable|disable Enable/disable source MAC address substitution. January 2006 419 .Buddy Server Menu fasthc .Display current real server advanced configuration Table 7-3 Real Server Advanced Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage avail <server weight. 1-48> Set Global SLB availability for real server. remote enable|disable Enable/disable Global SLB remote site operation proxy enable|disable Enable/disable client proxy operation.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set Global SLB availability for real server remote . subdmac enable|disable Enable/disable destination MAC address substitution.Enable/disable fast health check operation submac . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Enable/disable Global SLB remote site operation proxy . fasthc enable|disable Enable/disable fast health check operation.Enable/disable destination MAC address substitution cur . buddyhc Go to the Buddy Server Menu. cur enable|disable Display current real server advanced configuration.0.Enable/disable client proxy operation buddyhc .

Display current buddy server configuration Table 7-4 Buddy Server Health Check Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage addbd <real server number 1-1023> <real server group 1-1024> <service 9-65534> Adds a buddy server.Delete Buddy Server cur .Add Buddy Server delbd .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/real/adv/buddyhc Buddy Server Health Check Menu [Real server 1 Buddy Menu] addbd .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. delbd <real server number 1-1023> <real server group 1-1024> <service 9-65534> Deletes a previously added buddy server. January 2006 . 420 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. cur Displays the current buddy server configuration.

Add SLB string for content load balance remlb . LDAP servers are of two types: read servers and write servers. 1-1024> Adds the predefined URL loadbalance string ID to the real server.0.Enable/disable exclusionary string matching ldapwr . By default. January 2006 421 . ldapwr disable|enable Enables or disables LDAP write server. exclude disable|enable Enables or disables exclusionary string matching.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. This server gets the client request. and embeds the IP address of the real server that will handle the subsequent requests from the client. cur Displays the current real server configuration. You need to use the write servers when you want to modify the directory on the server. cookser disable|enable Enables or disables the real server to handle client requests that don’t contain a cookie. remlb <defined SLB string ID. This option is used if you want to designate a specific server to assign cookies only.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/real <server number>/layer7 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration [Real Server 1 Layer 7 Commands Menu] addlb . You need to use read servers when you only want to browse the directory. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. this option is disabled. Table 7-5 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage addlb <defined SLB string ID.Enable/disable LDAP Write server cur . The write server can conduct both read and write operations. By default.Enable/disable cookie assignment server exclude .Remove SLB string for content load balance cookser . assigns the cookie.Display current real server configuration This menu is used for entering commands and strings for Layer 7 processing. 1-1024> Removes the predefined URL loadbalance string ID from the real server. this option is disabled.

Refer to your Application Guide for more information.Override OID for SNMP HC comm .Set Vlan ID for ID Server idsport .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. idsport <port number> | none Defines port for Intrusion Detection Server. 422 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Display current real server configuration Table 7-6 IDS Configuration Menu options (/cfg/slb/real/ids) Command Syntax and Usage idsvlan <vlan number (1-4090> Defines VLAN ID for Intrusion Detection Server. Note: IDS can only be configured on real servers between one to maximum number of ports on the switch. oid <SNMP health check object identifier to override group OID> Specifies the object identifier (OID). [Real Server 1 IDS Menu] idsvlan .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/real <real server number>/ids Real server IDS Configuration Menu Intrusion Detection System (IDS) is a type of security management system for computers and networks. cur Displays the current real server configuration. This OID overrides the OID for SNMP health checks. An Intrusion Detection System gathers and analyzes information from various areas within a computer or a network to identify possible security breaches.Set Port for ID Server oid . comm <SNMP health check community string to override group community string> Overrides community string for SNMP health checks.Override community string for SNMP HC cur .0. which include both intrusions (attacks from outside the organization) and misuse (attacks from within the organization). January 2006 .

The default setting is leastconns.Set real server failure threshold idsrprt .Display current group configuration This menu is used for combining real servers into real server groups.Disable real server in this group add . Each real server can belong to more than one group.Set Intrusion Detection Port advhlth .Enable real server in this group dis .0. Real server groups are used both for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection.Set Workload Manager number viphlth .Enable/disable Intrusion Detection idsfld .Set health check type backup .Set health check content health . January 2006 423 .Set real server group name realthr .Delete real server group cur . Each real server group should consist of all the real servers which provide a specific service for load balancing.Set minmisses hash parameter wlm .Set metric used to select next server in group rmetric . rmetric Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which port in the real server will be the target of the next client request. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Enable/disable Intrusion Detection Group Flood oper .Remove real server del .Enable/disable VIP health checking in DSR mode ids .Add real server rem .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group SLB Configuration [Real Server Group 1 Menu] metric .Set backup real server or group name .Set an advance group health check formula mhash .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. See “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 429 for more information. Each group must consist of at least one real server.Set metric used to select next rport in server content .Enable/disable the access to this group for operator ena . Table 7-7 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage metric leastconns|roundrobin|minmisses|hash|response|bandwidth|phash Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which real server in the group will be the target of the next client request.

use GET method. name <maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each Real Server Group. The content depends on the type of health check specified in the health option (see below). If any time. the number reaches this minimum limit. 424 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. backup r<real server number (1-1023)>|g<group number (1-1024)>|none Sets the real server or real server group used as the backup/overflow server/server group for this real server group. realthr <real servers (1-15.use HEAD method Sets the type of health checking performed. which also means the option is disabled idsrprt <real server port (2-65534)>|any Sets real server port for the Intrusion Detection Server. Then. httphead .2 Command Reference Table 7-7 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage content <filename>|//<host>/<filename>|none This option defines the specific content which is examined during health checks.0. To prevent loss of service if the entire real server group fails. If all the servers in the real server group reach their maxcon (maximum connections) limit. the switch will activate the backup real server /server group until one of the original real servers becomes operative again. See “SLB Health Check Types” on page 426. use this option to assign a backup real server/real server group number. January 2006 . if the real server group becomes inoperative. The default threshold is 0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server group by a natural language keyword value. The backup server/server group is also used in overflow situations. health link|arp|icmp|tcp|http|httphead|dns|pop3|smtp|nntp|ftp|imap| sslh|radius-auth|radius-acc|script<n>|udpdns|wsp|wtp|wtls|ldap| snmp<n>|tftp|rtsp|sip|sipoptions|wts http . 0 for disabled)> Specifies a minimum number of real servers available. The same backup/overflow server/server group may be assigned to more than one real server group at the same time. the backup server/server group comes online to provide additional processing power until one of the original servers becomes desaturated. a SYSLOG ALERT message is sent to the configured SYSLOG servers stating that the real server threshold has been reached for the concerned server load balancing group. The default is tcp.

oper disable|enable Enables or disables the real server group operation. packets are copied to all IDS servers in the IDS group.).You can also select all 32-bits of the source IP address to hash to the real server. whether DSR is enabled or disabled. For example. if a real server is a member of more than one group. This command supports two boolean operators. By default the minmiss algorithm uses the upper 24-bits of the source IP address to calculate the real server that the traffic should be sent to when the minmiss metric is selected. viphlth disable|enable Enables or disables VIP health checking in a service. Using parenthesis with the boolean operators. wlm <1 . January 2006 425 . You will be prompted to enter the number of the real server to add to this group. dis <real server number. you can create a boolean expression to state the health of the server group. ena <real server number. When Intrusion Detection flood is enabled.16> | none Set Workload Manager number. This command also supports a string expression which is up to 128 characters long. idsfld disable|enable Enables or disables the Intrusion Detection flood. 1-1023> Enables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis. ids disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection Server (IDS) load balancing for the designated real server group.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the switch uses RIP to perform all health checks. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.0. AND or OR that are used to manipulate TRUE or FLALSE values. packets are only copied to the load balanced IDS server within the IDS group. or you can also set the formula expression as none. However. mhash 24|32 <number of sip bits used for minmisses hash> Defines the minmisses hash parameter for this real server as either 24 or 32 bits. you can configure this real server to accept requests from all the groups or any number of groups that this real server is member of.. When this is disabled. This feature can only be configured on real server groups between 1-63. When viphlth is disabled. 128>|none Defines an advanced health check formula expression for the real servers. This command allows you to create a boolean expression to health check the real server group based on the state of the virtual services. This feature is enabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 7-7 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage advhlth <(1&2|3. 1-1023> Disables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis. it works only when the service has DSR (Direct Server Return) feature enabled. add <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to this real server group.

>> Real Server Group 1# health Current health check type: Pending new health check type: Enter health check type: tcp sipoptions Table 7-8 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description link Checks status of port for each server for IDSLB group only.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. tcp Opens and closes a TCP/IP connection to the server for TCP service.0. pings the server. January 2006 . The health check options are described in the following table. 426 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. arp Sends an ARP request for Layer 2 health checking. SLB Health Check Types Using the health command.2 Command Reference Table 7-7 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage rem <real server number (1-1023)> Remove a real server from this real server group. This removes the group from operation under all virtual servers it is assigned to. icmp For Layer 3 health checking. the virtual server will become inoperative. Use this command with caution: if you remove the only group that is assigned to a virtual server. cur Displays the current configuration parameters for this real server group. Refer to your Application Guide for their detailed description. you can specify the type of health check for the group of real servers. del Deletes this real server group from the Layer 4 software configuration. You will be prompted for the ID number for the real server to remove from this group.

negotiate an encryption and compression method.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description http For HTTP service. check that the newsgroup name specified in content is accessible on the server. Note: If the content is not specified. Otherwise. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the serve sslh Enables the switch to query the health of the SSL servers by sending an SSL client “Hello” packet and then verify the contents of the server’s “Hello” response.0. check that the user specified in content is accessible on the server. smtp For mail-server services. nntp For newsgroup services.0 GET occurs. an HTTP/1. pop3 For user mail service. check that the user:password account specified in content exists on the server.1 GETS when a HOST: header is required to check that the URL content is specified in content command. ftp For FTP services. dns For Domain Name Service. use HTTP 1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. check that the filename specified in content is accessible on the server through anonymous login. imap For user mail service. You can use this command to test the validity and access to the hypertext links or to look for any recent modification to the URL. During the handshake. check that the domain name specified in content can be resolved by the server. the health check will revert back to TCP on the port that is being load balanced. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. the user and server exchange security certificates. and establish a session ID for each session. httphead Allows the switch to declare if the server is up or not just by locating the URL header and not wait until all the URL contents are received. January 2006 427 .

the network administrator must also configure the /cfg/slb/ secrt parameter. The LDAP health checks enable the switch to determine if the LDAP server is alive. The health check fails if the switch receives an error packet from the real server. and an unbind request. The secrt value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description radius-auth. The switch sends an anonymous bind request to the server. tftp Sets the health check type to TFTP. the switch transmits TFTP read requests (RRQ) to all servers in the group.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. January 2006 . wsp Enables connectionless WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. 428 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. The content under /cfg/slb/adv/waphc (see page 486) must also be configured wtls Provides Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) Hello-based health check for encrypted and connection-oriented WTLS traffic on port 9203. The health check is successful if the server responds to the RRQ.0. radius-acc For RADIUS remote access server authentication. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the Nortel Application Switch and the server. <n> denotes the health script number (1-5). This protocol enables the user to request a file from the server.2. If the server is up. script <n> Enables the use of script-based health checks in send/expect format to check for application and content availability. <n> denotes the health script number (1-64). ldap Sets the health check type to LDAP. snmp <n> Enables the use of SNMP-based health checks. The switch administrator can choose LDAP version 2 or 3 as both the versions are compatible with Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The content under /cfg/ slb/adv/waphc (see page 486) must also be configured. a bind result. This health check consists of three LDAP messages over one TCP connection: a bind request. udpdns Allows the user to perform health checking using UDP DNS queries. wtp Enables connection-oriented WTP + WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. The switch must send an unbind request so that the server does not hold resources indefinitely. At regular intervals. it will send the bind result message and the switch will mark the server as alive.0.

The RTSP health check can operate with or without content. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained on the server between sessions.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Server Load Balancing Metrics Using the metric command. you can set a number of metrics for selecting which real server in a group gets the next client request. helping to maximize successful cache hits. This is particularly useful in caching applications. If there is no content configured the switch will issue an RTSP OPTIONS method. If the response to either method is RTSP/200 then the health check passes. You can perform the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) health check by using SIP PING request. When specified for a real server group performing Server Load Balancing. January 2006 429 . sipoptions Sets the health check type to sipoptions. the health check will fail. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. Best statistical load balancing is achieved when the IP address destinations of load balanced frames are spread across a broad range of IP subnets. sip Sets the health check type to sip. >> Real Server Group 1# metric Current metric: leastconns Enter metric: The metrics are described in the following table: Table 7-9 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description minmisses Minimum misses. Minmisses can also be used for Server Load Balancing. If this is not the response. If content is supplied the switch will issue the RTSP DESCRIBE method.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description rtsp Sets the health check type to RTSP.0. When minmisses is specified for a real server group performing Application Redirection. Server load with this metric becomes most evenly balanced as the number of active clients increases. wts Sets the health check type to wts. This metric is optimized for Application Redirection. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. You must enable UDP to perform SIP load balancing.

consider using the hash metric. the smaller is the weight assigned to that server. the number of connections currently open on each real server is measured in real time. This is particularly useful for maximizing successful cache hits. and shut down connections faster than slower servers. The server with the fewest current connections is considered to be the best choice for the next client connection request. roundrobin Round robin. with the fastest servers typically getting the most connections over time. the real server weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to the number of octets that the real server processes during a given interval. The weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to a moving average of response time. and so on. The hash metric should be used if the statistical load balancing achieved using minmisses is not as optimal as desired. followed by the third real server. The response time is used to adjust the real server weights. new connections are issued to each server in turn: the first real server in this group gets the first connection. With this option.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. the switch monitors and records the amount of time that each real server takes to reply to a health check. due to their ability to accept. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. With this option. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. response Real server response time. the second real server gets the next connection. With this option. January 2006 . This is useful for applications where client information must be retained between sessions. This option is the most self-regulating. For Application Redirection. bandwidth Bandwidth Metric. 430 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. With this option. For Server Load Balancing.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description hash Like minmisses. When all the real servers in this group have received at least one connection. the issuing process starts over with the first real server. Although the hash metric can provide more even load balancing at any given instance. process. leastconns Least connections. it is not as effective as minmisses when servers leave and reenter service. The higher the bandwidth used. the hash metric uses IP address information in the client request to select a server. If the Load Balancing statistics indicate that one server is processing significantly more requests over time than other servers.

when real servers are configured with weights (see the weight option on page 415). Configuring a virtual server requires the following parameters: Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. If the first hash hits a dead server. Weights are not applied when using the minmisses metrics. With phash enabled. This can improve load balancing among servers of different performance levels.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description phash The phash metric utilizes the best features of the hash and minmiss metrics.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. NOTE – Under the leastconns. a higher proportion of connections are given to servers with higher weights. With the phash metric. hash. the switch supports an even load distribution (hash) and stable server assignment (minmiss) even when a server in the group goes down. This results in a request always being sent to a server that is up. it will rehash for that request based on the actual number of servers that are up. January 2006 431 . /cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Configuration [Virtual Server service ipver vip vname dname cont weight avail addrule remrule layr3 creset ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Virtual Service Menu Set IP version Set IP addr of virtual server Set name of virtual server Set domain name of virtual server Set BW Contract Set Global SLB weight for virtual server Set Global SLB availability for virtual server Add Global SLB rule to domain Remove Global SLB rule from domain Enable/disable layer 3 only balancing Enable/disable client connection reset invalid VPORT Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Delete virtual server Display current virtual configuration This menu is used for configuring the virtual servers which will be the target for client requests for Server Load Balancing. and phash metrics. roundrobin. the first hash will always be the same even if a real server is down.0.

com. the BW contract can be changed for a selected virtual server with /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <number>/cont. The virtual server created within the switch will respond to ARPs and PINGs from network ports as if it was a normal server.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. all services under this virtual server are assigned this BW contract. and so on. . The allowable port range is from 9 to 65534. . The response time of this site is divided by this weight before the best site is assigned to a client.0. such as http. see hname below. specify the name as none. To clear the dname. and so forth). cont <BWM contract (1-1024)> Enter a new Bandwidth Management Contract for this virtual service. and so forth). 432 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. ftp. Remote site response times are divided by the real server weight before selection occurs.gov. vname <32 character virtual server name>|none Set name of virtual server. The default is 1. However. The virtual port name can be a well-known port name. see page 434. January 2006 . To view the services menu options. To get more information about well-known ports. ipver <IP version (v4 or v6)> Set the IP version. Client requests directed to the virtual server’s IP address will be balanced among the real servers available to it through real server group assignments. All the frames that match this virtual server services are assigned this BW contract if the previously assigned contract for the frame has lower or equal precedence of the virtual server contract. ftp. and the Internet group code (. www2. see the sport command on page 447. The domain name typically includes the name of the company or organization. the more connections that will be directed to the local site.com. The higher the weight value. It does not include the hostname portion (www. The maximum number of characters that can be used in a domain name is 64. the service number.edu. weight Sets the Global server weight for the virtual server. To define the hostname. dname <64 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for this virtual server.org. The default number of contracts is set at 1024 for Nortel Application Switch Operating System. By default. . An example would be foocorp.2 Command Reference Creating a virtual server IP address Adding TCP/UDP port and real server group Enabling the virtual server (disabled by default) Table 7-10 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage service <virtual port or name> Displays the Virtual Services Menu. vip <virtual server IP address for IPv4 or IPv6> Sets the IP address of the virtual server using dotted-decimal notation.

When the layr3 option is enabled (disabled by default). the switch uses only the client IP address as the session identifier. dis This option disables the virtual server so that it no longer services client requests.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. creset enable|disable Enable/disable client connection reset invalid VPORT. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual server. ena Enables this virtual server. This option activates the virtual server within the switch so that it can service client requests sent to its defined IP address. addrule <rule. It associates all the connections from the same client with the same real server while any connection exists between them. January 2006 433 . Each domain has one or more rules. and also in applications where TCP fragments are generated. del This command removes this virtual server from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. 1-64> Adds Global SLB rule to domain. If the real server to which the client is assigned becomes unavailable. the client IP address is used with the client Layer 4 port number to produce a session identifier.0. Each rule has metric preference list.2 Command Reference Table 7-10 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage avail Sets the Global SLB availability for the virtual server. Use this command with caution. The default is rule 1. cur Displays the current configuration of the specified virtual server. the Layer 4 software will allow the client to connect to a different server. remrule <rule. The server selected for GSLB selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the preference list of the rule. layr3 disable|enable Normally. This option is necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is divided across different simultaneous connections. Rule allows the server selected for GSLB to use different metric preference based on time of the day. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. 1-64> Removes Global SLB rule from domain.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. [Virtual Server wts http sip rtsp group rport hname cont pbind thash tmout dbind udp frag nonat dnsslb direct mirror epip del cur 1 14 Service Menu] WTS Load Balancing Menu HTTP Load Balancing Menu SIP Load Balancing Menu RTSP Load Balancing Menu Set real server group number Set real port Set hostname Set BW contract for this virtual service Set persistent binding type Set hash parameter Set minutes inactive connection remains open Enable/disable delayed binding Enable/disable UDP balancing Enable/disable remapping UDP server fragments Enable/disable only substituting MAC addresses Enable/disable DNS query load balancing Enable/disable direct access mode Enable/disable session mirroring Enable/disable pip selection based egress port/vlan Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration 434 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.0. NOTE – Select virtual service port 554 to configure RTSP traffic. The following example shows a menu for http (port 80) services. See page 444 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 554 for RTSP.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name> Virtual Server Service Configuration This menu is used for configuring services assigned to a virtual server. January 2006 .

see page 440. You need to turn Direct Access Mode (DAM) on to perform SIP load balancing. If rport is configured to be different than the virtual port defined in /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <virtual port>. rport <real server port (0-65534)> Defines the real server TCP or UDP port assigned to this service. January 2006 435 . By default. To view the menu options. you can load balance Nortel’s MCS (Multimedia Communication Server) proxy servers. Using SIP on your switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view the menu options. When SIP is enabled. The SIP processing occurs at application level in order to parse out messages coming from client side as well as the server side. the switch will map the virtual port to this real port. you can scan and hash calls based on a SIP Call-ID header to an MCS server. http Enables or disables HTTP Redirection for Global server load balancing on a per VIP basis. this is the same as the virtual port (service virtual port). rtsp Go to the RTSP Load Balancing Menu. You will be prompted to enter the number (1 to 1024) of the real server group to add to this service. see page 441. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. see page 443. You can use only minmiss as the load balancing metric since the load balancing is performed based on the Call-ID. you can configure SIP service on the service port 5060 for a virtual server. see page 442. Nortel Networks’ MCS is a SIP enabled application Server. When enabled. Disabling HTTP Redirection causes GSLB to use proxy IP address for HTTP.0. modifying and terminating sessions with one or more participants (documented in RFC3261). sip Enables or disables Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server load balancing on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets a real server group for this service. To view the menu options. The default is set at 1. To view the menu options.2 Command Reference Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage wts Go to the WTS Load Balancing Menu. SIP is a UDP-based application-level control protocol for creating.

Note: If you enter 0 for the service contract.com” was defined (above). The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example. If a dname of “foocorp. to add a hostname for Web services. starting point of the cookie value. it will carry the value entered for the Virtual Server IP (vip) contract. To clear the hostname for a service. For example: httpslb <application> httpslb <application> and|or <application> cont <BWM Contract (0-1024). “www. number of bytes to be extracted. enable/disable checking for cookie in URI browser: Enable or disable SLB. The default number of contracts is set at 1024 for Nortel Application Switch Operating System. You will be prompted for the following: Cookie name. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple virtual services and each service requires a separate bandwidth.foocorp. urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract of a string specific to this virtual service. based on browser type urlhash: Enable or disable URL hashing based on URI headerhash: Hashes on any HTTP header value.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 436 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service.0. The default is set at 1024. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. use the command: # hname none httpslb urlslb|host|cookie|browser|urlhash|headerhash|others Load balances on the following applications: urlslb: Enable or disable URL SLB host: Enable or disable for virtual hosting cookie: Enable or disable cookie-based SLB for cookie-based preferential load balancing. January 2006 . 0 for VIP default> Sets a Bandwidth Management contract for this virtual service. you could specify www as the hostname.2 Command Reference Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. others: Requires inputs for a particular header field You may choose to combine or select applications to load balance using the commands and and/or or.

and minmisses SLB metrics. see the Persistence chapter in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The connection timeout value (set in the Real Server Menu) is used to control how long these inactive but persistent connections remain associated with their real servers. such as with SSL (Secure Socket Layer. if it has previously been enabled for a particular application. HTTPS).2. or both source IP address and source port. all subsequent SSL sessions which present the same session ID will be directed to the same real server. since the services are related. which is sip. with clientip command enabled. and security.0. which is a set of protocols built on top of TCP/IP that allow an application server and user to communicate over an encrypted HTTP session.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. SSL provides authentication. HTTP and HTTPs traffic from the same client will map to the same server irrespective of the load balancing metric used. The default number is 1. For detailed information on Cookie-Based Persistence. rcount <response count number (1–16)> Sets the maximum response counter for cookie-based persistence. or until the maximum count is reached. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash. non-repudiation. or multi-page Web forms. thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. For more information on cookie option. When the client resumes activity after their connection has been aged out. This may be necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is retained on the server over a series of sequential connections. January 2006 437 . The Nortel Application Switch will examine each server response until the cookie is found.0.2 Application Guide. By enabling the sslid option. phash. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. they will be connected to the most appropriate real server based on the load balancing metric. If the user does not select any. Web site search results. The sslid option is for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). the source IP address. The disable option allows you to disable presistent binding. Whereas. The session ID is a value comprising 32 random bytes chosen by the SSL server that gets stored in a session hash table. The cookie option uses a cookie defined in the HTTP header or placed in the URI for hashing. An alternative approach may be to use the real server group metrics minmisses or hash (see Server Load Balancing Metrics). In Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. The clientip option uses the client IP address as an identifier. different services from the same client may not map to the same server. and associates all connections from the same client with the same real server until the client becomes inactive and the connection is aged out of the binding table. the switch will use default hash parameter. For example. see “Cookie-Based Persistence” on page 444.2 Command Reference Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage pbind clientip|cookie<p|r|i>|sslid|disable Enables or disables persistent bindings for a real server (disabled by default).

Enabling this command protects the server from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. X-Forward-For is a special header that stores and identifies the client IP information. dnsslb disable|enable Enables or disables DNS-based Layer 7 content load balancing. direct disable|enable Enables or disables Direct Access Mode (DAM) on the selected virtual service. Since no session is created. This command takes precedence over the command to globally enable or disable Direct Access Mode on the switch. xforward disable|enable Enables or disables inserting the X-Forward-For header into the client HTTP request to preserve the client IP information. mirror disable|enable Enables or disables session mirroring on the selected virtual service. When stateless is enabled. January 2006 . This option is enabled by default. you have to bind to a new server every time. udp disable|enable|stateless Enables or disables UDP load balancing for a virtual port (disabled by default). so that frames returning from server to the client do not have to pass through the switch. This option is disabled by default. For example.2 Command Reference Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage dbind disable|enable Enables or disables Layer 4 Delayed Binding for TCP service and ports. This option is used for Direct Server Return (DSR) in an one-armed load balancing setup.0. Note: If applying a filter to the same virtual server IP address on which UDP load balancing is enabled. This option does not substitute IP addresses. You can configure this option if the service(s) to be load balanced include UDP and TCP. you must activate UDP balancing for the particular virtual servers that clients will communicate with using UDP. 438 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. nonat disable|enable Enables or disables substituting only the MAC address of the real server (disabled by default). no session table entry is created. see the cache command in Table 7-18 on page 452. This feature is applicable only on HTTP protocol. For more information.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. DNS uses UDP and TCP. In those environments. disable caching on that filter for optimal performance. frag disable|enable Enables or disables remapping server fragments for virtual port.

as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual service.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the current configuration of services on the specified virtual server. del This command removes this virtual service from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. Using the epip command. the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN.2 Command Reference Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN. By default. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 439 .0. you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN. Use this command with caution.

0.Enable userhash when there is no Session Dir. 440 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Display current WTS configuration Table 7-12 WTS Load Balancing Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage userhash Enables the userhash if there is no session director server in the server platform.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt/service/wts WTS Load Balancing Menu [WTS Load Balancing Menu] userhash . dis cur Display the current WTS configuration. [true|false] Disable WTS load balancing.Disable WTS loadbalancing and persistence cur . Server ena .Enable WTS loadbalancing and persistence dis . January 2006 . ena [true|false] Enable WTS load balancing.

xforward Enable/disable X-Forwarded-For for proxy mode. http Enable/disable HTTP redirects for Global SLB.Display current HTTP configuration Table 7-13 HTTP Load Balancing Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage httpslb Set HTTP SLB processing. urlcont Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt/service/http HTTP Load Balancing Menu [HTTP Load Balancing Menu] httpslb .Set multi response count http . rcount Set multi response count.Set HTTP SLB processing urlcont . pooling Enable/disable connection pooling for HTTP traffic.Enable/disable X-Forwarded-For for proxy mode pooling . cur Display current HTTP configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service rcount .Enable/disable HTTP redirects for Global SLB xforward . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 441 .Enable/disable connection pooling for HTTP traffic cur .0.

sdpnat Enable SIP SDP Media Portal NAT. January 2006 .Enable/disable SIP load balancing sdpnat . cur Display the current SIP configuration.0. 442 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt/service/sip SIP Load Balancing Menu [SIP Load Balancing Menu] sip .Display current SIP configuration Table 7-14 SIP Load Balancing Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage sip Enable SIP load balancing.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Enable/disable SIP SDP Media Portal NAT cur .

or both source IP address and source port. softgrid enable|disable Enable or disable softgrid load balancing. For example. thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. thereby enabling the service.Enable/disable SoftGrid load balancing del .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set RTSP URL load balancing type thash .Set real server group number hname . the switch will match the string or pattern within the URL to select a server based on the string configured on the real server. you could specify www as the hostname. To clear the hostname for a service.Set hostname rtspslb . which is sip.Delete virtual service cur . hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. and minmisses SLB metrics. the source IP address. RTSP will use Layer 4 metrics to select a server to load balance. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. RTSP will parse the URL and will hash the URL to select a server to load balance. patternMatch: If you select this option. the switch will use default hash parameter. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services.foocorp.Set hash parameter softgrid . Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash. l4hash: The l4hash option configures Server Load Balancing to be based on the Layer 4 hash metric. the destination IP address. hash: If you use hash. If the user does not select any. none: If set at none. “www. either hash or patternMatch. to add a hostname for Web services.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service.com” was defined (above). If a dname of “foocorp. use the command: # hname none rtspslb hash|patternMatch|l4hash|none This Layer 7 load balancing option sets the type of rtspslb. phash. January 2006 443 .0. The default is hash.Display current virtual service configuration Table 7-15 RTSP Load Balancing Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets real server group number.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt/service/rtsp RTSP Load Balancing Menu [RTSP Load Balancing Menu] group .

a date <MM/dd/yy[@hh:mm]> (e.g. The switch uses this cookie to bind to the appropriate server. 45:30:90) .. cur Displays the current virtual service configuration... To look for cookie in the HTTP header. In this mode. 12/31/01@23:59) . The switch intercepts this persistence cookie and rewrites the value to include server-specific information before sending it to the client. Cookie-Based Persistence The cookie option is used to establish cookie-based persistence. When a client sends a request without a cookie. and not the network administrator. a duration <days[:hours[:minutes]]> (e. enter e to enable this option. and has the following command syntax and usage: pbind cookie <mode> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Each parameter is explained in the following table. 444 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. For cookie rewrite. i: Insert mode. the server responds with the data. Look for cookie in the URI. Insert cookie mode expiration parameters are as follows: Enter insert-cookie expiration as either: . In active cookie mode (or cookie rewrite mode). enter d to disable this option. Enter the starting point of the cookie value (1-64) Enter number of bytes to extract (1-64).. Option <mode> Description Specify the mode for cookie-based persistence. the network administrator configures the Web server to embed a cookie in the server response that the switch looks for in subsequent requests from the same client.2 Command Reference Table 7-15 RTSP Load Balancing Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this virtual service. and the switch inserts a persistence cookie into the data packet. the switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.g. r: Rewrite mode. The following three modes are available: p: Passive mode. January 2006 .. or none <return> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Enter the name of the cookie.. generates the cookie value on behalf of the server. the extracting length must be 8 or 16. If you want to look for cookie name or value in the URI.0.

Set destination MAC address ipver . /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> SLB Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Menu] adv .Set destination IP address dmask .Set destination TCP/UDP port or range action . deny.2 Command Reference For more information on Cookie-Based Persistence.Set action group .Set Filter IP version sip .Set real server port for redirection nat .0.Set source MAC address dmac .Set destination subnet mask/prefix len proto .Enable/disable filter inversion ena . Each filter can be configured to allow.Set source IP address smask .Disable filter del . This command is disabled by default.Set filter name smac . see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. page 450) that can be used to provide more information through syslog.Delete filter cur .Set source subnet mask/prefix len dip .Set IP protocol sport .Display current filter configuration The switch supports up to 2048 traffic filters. and each physical switch port can be configured to use any combination of filters.Set real server group for redirection rport .Filter Advanced Menu name .Set which addresses are network address translated vlan . January 2006 445 .Set source TCP/UDP port or range dport .Set vlan id invert . redirect or perform Network Address Translation on traffic according to a variety of address and protocol specifications. The types of information include: IP protocol TCP/UDP ports Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Application Guide. There are several options available in the Filter Advanced Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Enable filter dis .

446 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.255. 64)> This IP address mask is used with the sip to select traffic which this filter will affect. see page 450. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 449. The default is any.0> | <IP6 prefix length (eg. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the destination MAC address. For more information. The default is any if the source MAC address is any.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. name <31 character name>|none Allows the user to assign a name to a filter.101)> | <IP6 address (eg. dmac any|<MAC address (such as. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation for IPv4 or colon notation for IPv6. or any. smac any|<MAC address (such as. The default is any. nat) Enable the filter Add the filter to a switch port Enable filtering on the Nortel Application Switch port Table 7-16 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage adv Displays the Filter Advanced Menu. and/or protocol that will be affected by the filter Set the filter action (allow.2 Command Reference TCP flags ICMP message type The following parameters are required for filtering: Set the address. redirect. To view menu options. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the smask below. 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:1234 or 3001::abcd:1234)> If defined. sip sip <IP4 address (eg. deny. smask <IP4 subnet mask (such as. masks. traffic with this source IP address will be affected by this filter.255. 255.4.17. ipver v4 | v6 Sets the IP version that the filter will use. January 2006 . See details below for more information on producing address ranges. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the source MAC address. 192.0. Filtering using IPv6 is only supported in bridge mode.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-16 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage dip <IP4 address (eg, 192.4.17.101)> | <IP6 address (eg, 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:1234 or 3001::abcd:1234)> If defined, traffic with this destination IP address will be affected by this filter. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation for IPv4 or colon notation for IPv6, or any. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the dmask below. The default is any if the destination MAC address is any. For more information, see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 449. dmask <IP4 subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0)> | <IP6 prefix length (eg, 64)> This IP address mask is used with the dip to select traffic which this filter will affect. proto any|<number>|<name> If defined, traffic from the specified protocol is affected by this filter. Specify the protocol number, name, or “any”. The default is any. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols. Number 1 2 6 17 58 89 112 Name icmp igmp tcp udp icmp6 ospf vrrp

sport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will be affected by this filter. Specify the port number, range, name, or “any”. The default is any. Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 109 110 Name ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http pop2 pop3

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

447

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-16 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage dport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined, traffic with the specified real server TCP or UDP destination port will be affected by this filter. Specify the port number, range, name, or “any”, just as with sport above. The default is set at any. action allow|deny|redir|nat|goto Specifies the action this filter takes: allow deny redir Allow the frame to pass (by default). Discard frames that fit this filter’s profile. This can be used for building basic security profiles. Redirect frames that fit this filter’s profile, such as for web cache redirection. In addition, Layer 4 processing must be activated (see the /cfg/slb/on command on page 412). Perform generic Network Address Translation (NAT). This can be used to map the source or destination IP address and port information of a private network scheme to/from the advertised network IP address and ports. This is used in conjunction with the nat option (mentioned in this table) and can also be combined with proxies. Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. The goto action causes filter processing to jump to a designated filter, effectively skipping over a block of filter IDs. Filter searching action will then continue from the designated filter ID. To specify the new filter to goto, use the /cfg.slb/filt/adv/goto command. group <real server group number (1-1024)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. Define a real server group (1 to 16) to which redirected traffic will be sent. The default is group 1 rport <real server port (0-65535)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. This defines the real server TCP or UDP port to which redirected traffic will be sent. For valid Layer 4 health checks, this must be configured whenever TCP protocol traffic is redirected. Also, if transparent proxies are used for Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Nortel Application Switch (see the pip option in Table 7-28 on page 463), rport must be configured for all Application Redirection filters. The default is set at 0. nat source|dest When nat is set as the filter action (see above), this command specifies whether Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed on the source or the destination information. Destination (dest) is set as the default filter. If source is specified, the frame’s source IP address (sip) and port number (sport) are replaced with the dip and dport values. If dest is specified, the frame’s destination IP address (dip) and port number (dport) are replaced with the sip and sport values.

nat

goto

448

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-16 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage vlan any|<VLAN ID (1 - 4090)> Sets the ID of the VLAN that is to be filtered. This option allows you to match the VLAN ID of the switch against the VLAN ID of the incoming packet. The default is any, which means the switch will match any VLAN ID of the incoming packet This command allows filters to be configured on per VLAN basis, and applies a filter to a VLAN that already has been configured. A VLAN has a set of member ports. But by applying this filter to a VLAN, the filter does not get applied to all the member ports of this VLAN. You have to manually add the filter to the port. invert disable|enable Inverts the filter logic. If the conditions of the filter are met, don’t act. If the conditions for the filter are not met, perform the assigned action. This option is disabled by default. When using filter inversion for IPv6, be aware the Neighbor Solicitations (NSol) are filtered out if no appropriate NSol filter was set up before inversion. ena Enables this filter. dis Disables this filter. del Deletes this filter. cur Displays the current configuration of the filter.

Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters
You can specify a range of IP address for filtering both the source and/or destination IP address for traffic. When a range of IP addresses is needed, the sip (source) or dip (destination) defines the base IP address in the desired range, and the smask (source) or dmask (destination) is the mask which is applied to produce the range. For example, to determine if a client request’s destination IP address should be redirected to the cache servers attached to a particular switch, the destination IP address is masked (bitwise AND) with the dmask and then compared to the dip.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

449

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

As another example, you could configure the switch with two filters so that each would handle traffic filtering for one half of the Internet. To do this, you could define the following parameters: Table 7-17 Filtering IP Address Ranges
Filter #1 #2 Internet Address Range dip dmask 128.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 - 127.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 128.0.0.0 255.255.255.255

128.0.0.0 128.0.0.0

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv
Advanced Filter Configuration
[itr1Avne Mn] Fle dacd eu 82p 01 -821 Avne Mn 0.p dacd eu tp c -TPAvne Mn C dacd eu -I Avne Mn P dacd eu i p lyr ae7 -Lyr7Avne Mn ae dacd eu poyd -PoyAvne Mn rxav rx dacd eu rdr ei -RdrcinAvne Mn eieto dacd eu scrt -Scrt Mn euiy euiy eu im cp -StIM msaetp e CP esg ye cn ot -StB cnrc e W otat rvot -StB cnrc frtervressin ecn e W otat o h ees eso -StNTo L lou ssintmot e A r 7 okp eso ieu tot mu isr dgp -StISsre gopfrituindtcinSB e D evr ru o nrso eeto L isah -Sths prmtrfrituindtcinSB dhs e ah aaee o nrso eeto L tah hs -Sths prmtrfrFle e ah aaee o itr gt oo -StGT fle I e OO itr D rvre -Eal/ial cetn ssinrvresd tafc ees nbedsbe raig eso ees ie rfi cce ah -Eal/ial ccigssin ta mthfle nbedsbe ahn esos ht ac itr lg o -Eal/ial lgig nbedsbe ogn mro irr -Eal/ial ssinmroig nbedsbe eso irrn cr u -Dslycretavne fle cniuain ipa urn dacd itr ofgrto

450

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-18 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays 8021p Advanced Menu. IEEE 802.1p is the specification for prioritizing the net-

work traffic at the Layer 2 level in your switch. Using this command you can preserve 802.1p bits in all the frames that pass through the switch.

To view menu options, see page 453. tcp Displays the TCP Flags advanced menu. To view menu options, see page 453. ip Sets IP advanced menu. To view menu options, see page 454. layer7 Displays Layer7 advanced menu. To view menu options, see page 457. proxyadv Displays the Proxy Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see page 460. icmp any|<number>|<type; "icmp list" for list> Sets the ICMP message type. The default is set at any. For a list of ICMP message types, see Table 7-22 on page 455. For a detailed description of filtering and ICMP, see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide. cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the Bandwidth Management Contract. By default, the contract number is set at 1024. revcont <BW Contract (1-1024)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for the reverse traffic session. This command helps you assign a different Bandwidth management contract from the one configured on the ingress filter. tmout <even number of minutes (4-32768)> Sets the session timeout in an even number of minutes. The default is set at 4 minutes. idsgrp <real server group number (1-1024)>|none Sets the IDS server group for intrusion detection server load balancing. When filtering is used for IDSLB, each filter added to an IDSLB-enabled port can be assigned a unique IDS real server group. idshash sip|dip|both Sets the hash metric parameter for Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing: source IP (sip), destination IP (dip), or both.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

451

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-18 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage thash auto|sip|dip|both|sip+sport Allows you to choose hash parameter to use for filter redirection. The Default is auto. The sip option allows you to perform tunable hash on source IP address for this filter. The option dip allows you to perform tunable hash on destination IP address for this filter. The option both allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and the destination IP address at the same time. The option sip+sport allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and source port at the same time. goto <filter ID> Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. Filter searching will then continue from the designated filter ID. Use this command to specify the new filter to go to. In order to use this feature, the action on this filter must be set to goto. reverse disable|enable Enables or disables the creation of a session for traffic coming from the reverse side. This command allows for the creation of a session entry for reverse traffic to avoid inspecting traffic in both directions. cache disable|enable Enables or disables caching sessions that match the filter. Exercise caution while applying cacheenabled and cache-disabled filters to the same switch port. A cache-enabled filter creates a session entry in the switch, so that the switch can bypass checking for subsequent frames that match the same criteria. Cache is enabled by default. Note: Cache should be disabled if applying a filter to virtual server IP address while performing UDP load balancing (see “udp disable|enable|stateless” on page 438). log disable|enable Enables or disables generating of syslog messages when a filter is hit. This option is disabled by default. mirror disable|enable Enables or disables session mirroring. cur Displays the current advanced filter configuration.

452

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/8021p
802.1p Advanced Menu
This feature provides the Nortel Application Switch Operating System the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802.1p bits in the packet's VLAN header. The 802.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value.
[802.1p Advanced Menu] value - Set 802.1p value match - Enable/disable 802.1p value matching cur - Display current 802.1p configuration

Table 7-19 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p)
Command Syntax and Usage value <0-7> Defines 802.1p value. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure. match disable|enable Enables or disables matching of 802.1p value. When the Management Processor needs to reuse the packet to send to the destination, the switch matches the original priority bits information with the priority bits information after the frame processing is complete. cur Displays current 802.1p configuration.

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/tcp
Advanced Filter TCP Configuration
[TCP Advanced urg ack psh rst syn fin ackrst cur Menu] - Enable/disable TCP URG matching - Enable/disable TCP ACK matching - Enable/disable TCP PSH matching - Enable/disable TCP RST matching - Enable/disable TCP SYN matching - Enable/disable TCP FIN matching - Enable/disable TCP ACK or RST matching - Display current TCP configuration

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

453

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

These commands can be used to configure packet filtering for specific TCP flags. Table 7-20 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp)
Command Syntax and Usage urg disable|enable Enables or disables TCP URG (urgent) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. ack disable|enable Enables or disables TCP ACK (acknowledgement) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. psh disable|enable Enables or disables TCP PSH (push) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. rst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP RST (reset) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. syn disable|enable Enables or disables TCP SYN (synchronize) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. fin disable|enable Enables or disables TCP FIN (finish) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. ackrst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP acknowledgement or reset flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. cur Displays the current Access Control List TCP filter configuration.

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/ip
IP Advanced Menu
[IP Advanced Menu] tos - Set IP Type of Service tmask - Set IP TOS mask newtos - Set new IP TOS length - Set IP maximum packet length option - Enable/disable IP option matching cur - Display current IP configuration

454

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-21 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip)
Command Syntax and Usage tos <0-255> Sets IP type of service (ToS) and the value of the type of service. For more information on ToS, refer to RFC 1340 and 1349. tmask <0-255> Sets IP type of service mask. newtos <0-255> Sets new IP type of service. length <IP packet length (in bytes), 64-65535>|any Defines the limit of the IP packet’s length, including the IPv4 or IPv6 IP header. Any packet equal or exceeding the specified length will not match the filter. This option supports both IPv4 and IPv6 packets. option disable|enable Enables or disables IP option matching. cur Displays the current advanced IP settings for the selected filter.

ICMP Message Types
The following ICMP message types are used with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp command. You can list all ICMP message types with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp list command. Table 7-22 ICMP Message Types
Type # Message Type 0 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 echorep destun quench redir echoreq rtradv rtrsol timex Description ICMP echo reply ICMP destination unreachable ICMP source quench ICMP redirect ICMP echo request ICMP router advertisement ICMP router solicitation ICMP time exceeded

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

455

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-22 ICMP Message Types
Type # Message Type 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 param timereq timerep inforeq inforep maskreq maskrep Description ICMP parameter problem ICMP timestamp request ICMP timestamp reply ICMP information request ICMP information reply ICMP address mask request ICMP address mask reply

456

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/layer7
Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu
[Layer 7 Advanced Menu] sip - Layer 7 SIP Menu urlcont - Set BW cont of an URL path specific to this filter addrd - Add HTTP redirection mapping remrd - Remove HTTP redirection mapping addstr - Add string for layer 7 filtering remstr - Remove string for layer 7 filtering rdsnp - Enable/disable WAP RADIUS Snooping rdswap - Enable/disable RADIUS/WAP Persistence ftpa - Enable/disable active FTP NAT l7lkup - Enable/disable layer 7 content lookup parseall - Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets cur - Display current layer 7 configuration

Table 7-23 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage sip Go to the Layer 7 SIP menu. To view the menu options, see page 459. urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the URL path BW contract for this filter. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple filters and each filter requires a separate bandwidth. addrd [1>2] Adds an HTTP redirection mapping. Strings are defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add. This command tells the filter that if it matches on the first string id, then send back an HTTP redirection message back to the client that contains information in the second string ID. remrd <string id to redirect from (1-1024)> <string id to redirect to (2-1024)> Removes an HTTP redirection mapping that was added using the addrd command described above. addstr <string id (1-1024)> Adds the string ID to this filter for L7 filtering. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/ layer7/slb/add. remstr <string id (1-1024)> Removes the string ID for Layer 7 filtering. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/ slb/add.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

457

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-23 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage rdsnp disable|enable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS snooping on this filter.

Radius snooping allows the Nortel Application Switch Operating System to examine RADIUS accounting packets for client information. This information is needed to add to or delete static session entries in the switch’s session table so that it can perform the required persistency for load balancing. For more details, please refer to your Application Guide.
rdswap enable|disable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS persistence on this filter. This feature allows for RADIUS and WAP persistence by binding both (RADIUS accounting and WAP) sessions to the same server. A WAP client is first authenticated by the RADIUS server on UDP port 1812. The server replies with a Radius Accept or Reject frame. The switch forwards this reply to the RAS. After the RAS receives the Radius accept packet, it sends a RADIUS accounting start packet on UDP port 1813 to the bound server. The application switch snoops on the RADIUS accounting start packet for the “framed IP address” attribute. The “framed IP address” attribute is used to rebind the RADIUS accounting session to a new server. For more details, please refer to your Application Guide. ftpa disable|enable Enables or disables active FTP Client Network Address Translation (NAT). When a client in active FTP mode sends a PORT command to a remote FTP server, the switch will look into the data part of the frame and replace the client 's private IP address with a proxy IP (PIP) address. The real server port (RPORT) will be replaced with a proxy port (PPORT), that is PIP:PPORT. By default, this option is disabled. l7lkup disable|enable Enables or disables layer 7 lookup on this filter. This command replaces the urlp and l7deny commands found in earlier releases of Nortel Application Switch Operating System. When enabled, the filter performs a lookup on layer 7 content such as HTTP strings or headers. When combined with a filter action (for example, deny, redir), this feature enables content-intelligent redirection or content-intelligent deny filtering. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables parsing of all packets in a session where layer 7 lookup is being performed. This command is enabled by default, and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. However, some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. Once this packet is found, subsequent packets can be ignored. When parseall is disabled, layer 7 lookup is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. cur Displays the current advanced Layer 7 configuration of the filter including the Radius/Wap persistence settings.

458

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/filt <num> /adv/layer7/sip
Layer 7 SIP Menu
[Layer 7 SIP Menu] rtpcont - Set BW contract for the SIP RTP sessions sipp - Enable/disable SIP parsing cur - Display current SIP configuration

Table 7-24 Layer 7 SIP Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7/sip)
Command Syntax and Usage rtpcont <BW contract> Set BW contract for the SIP RTP sessions. sipp enable|disable Enable or disable SIP parsing. cur Displays the current advanced SIP configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

459

Enable/disable pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets cur . /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu [Security Menu] ratelim .Remove pattern match group for layer 7 filtering pmatch .Enable/disable match-all criteria for layer 7 filtering parsechn .Display current Security configuration 460 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. epip enable|disable Enable or diable PIP selection based on the outgoing port or VLAN.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt/adv/proxyadv Proxy Advanced Menu [Proxy Advanced proxyip epip proxy cur Menu] Set client proxy IP address Enable/disable pip selection based egress port/vlan Enable/disable client proxy Display current proxy configuration Table 7-25 Proxy Advanced Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage proxyip <IP_address> Set the client proxy IP_address.Enable/disable pattern matching matchall . January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. proxy enable|disable Enable or disable client proxy.0.Enable/disable chained pgroup match criteria for l7 filtering parseall . cur Shows all Proxy statistics.Rate Limiting Menu addgrp .Add pattern match group for layer 7 filtering remgrp .

some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. This feature enables the switch to detect and block UDP or ICMP-based DOS attacks that slow down or decapitate the servers. pmatch disable|enable Enables or disables pattern matching on this filter. addgrp <pattern match group id> Adds a pattern group to this filter. To view menu options see page 462. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 7-26 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security) Command Syntax and Usage ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting Menu. matchall disable|enable Enables or disables matching of all configured patterns before the filter can perform the deny action. parsechn enable|disable Enable/disable chained pgroup match criteria for l7 filtering. Currently. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets in a session where pattern matching is being performed. the switch allows rate limiting to be enabled on TCP. subsequent packets can be ignored. This command is enabled by default.0. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. and ICMP protocols. However. UDP. pattern matching is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. remgrp <pattern match group id> Removes a pattern group from this filter. January 2006 461 . Once this packet is found. cur Displays the current configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The protocol-based rate limiting limits the traffic coming from specific clients based on the IP address of the client. When parseall is disabled. Pattern groups are added using the /cfg/security/ pgroup/add command.

Rate limiting is applied to the protocol configured on the filter. or ICMP rate limiting Display current rate limiting configuration Table 7-27 Rate Limiting Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security/ ratelim) Command Syntax and Usage maxconn <# of connections in units of 10 (0-255)> Defines maximum connections for rate limiting. When blocking occurs.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security/ ratelim Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu [Rate Limiting maxconn timewin holddur ena dis cur Menu] Set maximum connections for rate limiting Set time window for rate limiting Set hold down duration for rate limiting Enable TCP. after which new TCP connection requests or packets from the client are allowed once again to pass through. The time window can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. cur Displays the current rate limiting configuration. or ICMP rate limiting Disable TCP. The supported protocols are: TCP. January 2006 . UDP. The hold-down duration can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. timewin <seconds.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. dis Disables TCP. or ICMP rate limiting. and ICMP. any new TCP connection requests or UDP/ICMP packets from the client are blocked. UDP. the client is said to be held down. 1-65535> Defines time window for rate limiting. 462 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. ena Enables the protocol for rate limiting. UDP. The client is held down for a specified number of minutes. UDP. holddur <minutes. When the number of new connections or packets exceeds the configured limit. A time window is a configured period of time (in seconds) during which packets are allowed to be received.0. 2-65535> Defines hold down duration for rate limiting.

Enable/disable intrusion detection server load balancing cur .Remove filter from port idslb . Maximizing the number of these ports on the Layer 4 switch will improve the switch’s potential for effective Server Load Balancing.Enable/disable inter-switch processing proxy .Enable/disable server processing rts .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Table 7-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) Command Syntax and Usage client disable|enable For Server Load Balancing. router. clear the session binding table for the port (see the clear command in Table 8-3 on page 502). expanding your topology options.Enable/disable hot-standby processing intersw .Add filter to port rem .0. This option is disabled by default. the port can be enabled or disabled to process client Layer 4 traffic.Enable/disable use of PIP for ingress traffic filt . Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally. When server processing is enabled. Ports configured to process client request traffic bind servers to clients and provide address translation from the virtual server IP address to the real server IP address. it may take some time before the port session information is updated so that the filter changes take effect. January 2006 463 .Enable/disable filtering add . This option is disabled by default. To make port filter changes take effect immediately. re-mapping virtual server IP addresses and port values to real server IP addresses and ports.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/port <port number> Port SLB Configuration [SLB port 1 Menu] client . server disable|enable Ports configured to provide real server responses to client requests require real servers to be connected to the Layer 4 switch.Display current port configuration Nortel Application Switch Operating System switch software allows you to enable or disable processing independently for each type of Layer 4 traffic (client and server) on a per port basis. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally.Enable/disable RTS processing hotstan . NOTE – When changing the filters on a given port.Enable/disable client processing server . the switch port re-maps real server IP addresses and Layer 4 port values to virtual server IP addresses and Layer 4 ports. or another switch. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. directly or through a hub.

IDSLB is enabled on a port and a real server group is designated for IDSLB. For more information on using rts. January 2006 . For example. In Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Proxies are also useful for Application Redirection and Network Address Translation (NAT). Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. rather than around it.0. When pip is used with Application Redirection filters. For example. This option is used for firewall load balancing or VPN load balancing applications. idslb disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing on this port. see the “Firewall Load Balancing” and “VPN Load Balancing” chapters in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. When the PIP is defined. In Server Load Balancing applications.This option is disabled by default. cur Displays the current system parameters.0. 1-100. as is possible in complex routing environments. filt disable|enable Enables or disables filtering on this port. this forces response traffic to return through the switch. intersw disable|enable Enables or disables inter-switch processing. Enabling the filter sets up the Real Server to look into the VPN session table. each filter’s rport parameter must also be defined (see rport on page 446). This option is enabled for ports connected to a peer switch and is disabled by default. 464 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. This option is disabled by default. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. rem <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Removes a filter or a block of filters from use on this port.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. This option is disabled by default.2 Application Guide. In the case of client processing. Enable rts on all client-side ports to ensure that traffic ingresses and egresses through the same port. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. This option is disabled by default.2. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables a proxy for traffic that ingresses this port. IDSLB is done at the end of filter processing or at the end of client processing where filtering is not enabled.0. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot-standby processing. Use this option and the intersw option in conjunction with VRRP hot-standby failover. 1-100. add <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Adds a filter or a block of filters for use on this port. This option is disabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 7-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) rts disable|enable Enables or disables Return to Sender (RTS) load balancing on this port.

Set interval in seconds for remote site updates sesscap .Enable/disable virtual service hostname matching http . January 2006 465 .Globally turn Global SLB OFF cur . GSLB uses the health and response time to select the server in the GSLB selection engine.Set sessions available capacity threshold noresp . network <network (1-128)> Displays Network Preference Menu. DSSP is a proprietary protocol that resides above TCP.Network Preference Menu rule . In addition. GSLB sends the health and response time together with the local session and CPU utilization information that are collectively known as remote site updates. see page 469.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb Global SLB Configuration Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) at any given site performs periodic SLB health checks to determine the health and response time of the remote real server corresponding to the virtual server at the remote site. please refer to your Application Guide.Set timeout in minutes for DNS persistence cache mincon . For more information.Remote Site Menu network . To view menu options. To view menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set DNS response code when no server is returned dns .Enable/disable no remote real SLB encrypt .Globally turn Global SLB ON off .Enable/disable authoritative DNS direct based GSLB hostlk .Set DSSP version 1 or 2 to send out remote site updates port .s [Global SLB Menu] site .Display current Global SLB configuration Table 7-29 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage site <remote site (1-64)> Displays the menu for a remote site.Set source IP subnet mask for DNS persistence cache timeout .Enable/disable HTTP redirect based GSLB usern .Rule Menu version .Set CPU utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) smask .Enable/disable HTTP redirect to remote real server name norem .Set TCP port number for DSSPv2 remote site updates sinter . see page 467. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Enable/disable encrypting remote site updates on .0.Set sessions utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) cpucap . The switch performs this periodically on every remote site using Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP).

port <TCP port number> Sets the TCP port number for remote site updates for Global server load balancing. version <DSSP version 1 or 2> Defines the version of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) that is used to send out the remote site updates. the hostname specified in the Virtual Service configuration. 255. To view menu options. 64)> Set source IP subnet mask for DNS persistence cache. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP redirects to peer sites by this switch. When enabled. January 2006 . sinter <remote site updates interval in seconds. the switch will not perform HTTP Redirects. The default configuration is 90%. When enabled (default). 1-1440> Set timeout in minutes for DNS persistence cache. cpucap <CPU utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for the CPU utilization capacity. The default TCP port is 80. This option is enabled by default. When disabled. The range is between 10 and 7200 seconds. dns disable|enable Enables or disables DNS direct-based GSLB. only the domain name will be used to match. smask <set IP4 subnet mask (eg. If disabled. sesscap <Session utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for session utilization capacity. hostlk disable|enable Enables or disables lookups based on host or domain name in a GSLB configuration. 466 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. 10-7200> Sets the time interval in seconds for remote site updates. 0-65535> Defines the capacity threshold for the sessions available on the real server for GSLB. The default configuration is 90%. this switch will redirect client requests to peer sites if its own real servers fail or have reached their maximum connection limits.2 Command Reference Table 7-29 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage rule <rule (1-128)> Displays the Rule Menu. will be used to resolve the IP address for the domain. timeout <timeout in minutes.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see page 470. in addition to the domain name.255.0)> OR smask <set IP6 prefix len (eg.255. mincon <available sessions threshold. but will instead drop requests for new connections and cause the client’s browser to eventually issue a new DNS request.

/cfg/slb/gslb/site <site number> GSLB Remote Site Configuration The switch initiates a global server selection to direct client traffic to the best server for a given domain.2 Command Reference Table 7-29 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage usern disable|enable Enables or disables an HTTP redirect to a real server name. Any active remote sites will still perform GSLB services with each other. the switch will not do remote real server load balancing for non-http protocols. This option can be performed only once the optional GSLB software is activated (refer to “Activating Optional Software” on page 509). January 2006 467 . Each virtual server has a domain name.0. you need to disable the http parameter in the same menu. the client is redirected to the new site's IP address. the switch will not encrypt the DSSP messages going out of the switch. The combination of a virtual server and a virtual service is called a domain. By default. This option is disabled by default. Each virtual service has a host name. For HTTP protocols. If enabled. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. When a site redirects a client to another site using an HTTP redirect. Each site has a virtual server for the domain. Each virtual service has a group of real servers. off Turns GSLB off for this switch. GSLB is turned off. If usern is enabled. If disabled. if you want to do no-remote-real-server load balancing. Each virtual server has a number of virtual services. This option allows the GSLB feature to work with older versions of Web OS that do not encrypt DSSP messages on Activates Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) for this switch. the client will be redirected to the domain name specified by the remote real server name plus virtual server domain name: <remote real server name> <virtual server domain name> norem This command enables or disables no-remote real server load balancing. Each domain has one or more sites. but will not hand off requests to this switch.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. encrypt This command enables or disables encrypting of DSSP updates. cur Displays the current Global SLB configuration.

the Nortel Application Switch Operating System Webbased interface also uses port 80. If disabled. 468 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Display current remote site configuration Up to 64 remote sites can be configured. enter the IP address of the IP interface for the remote secondary switch here. name <31 character name>|none Sets the name of the remote site.0. Global Server Load Balancing uses service port 80 on the IP interface for DSSP updates. the local switch will address the remote site secondary switch instead. configure the Nortel Application Switch Operating System Browser-Based Interface (BBI) to use a different service port (see the /cfg/sys/access/wport option on page 288). Use dotted decimal notation. The remote real servers are the virtual servers at the remote sites. The local virtual server has a number of local virtual services Each local virtual service has a group of local or remote real servers.Set remote site name update . Note: When update is enabled.Set secondary switch IP address of remote site name . this switch will send regular Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates to its remote peers using HTTP port 80. If both are enabled. [Remote site 1 Menu] prima . ena Enables this remote site for use with Global Server Load Balancing. the switch will not send state updates. secon <server IP address> If the remote site is configured with a redundant switch. If enabled (default). If the remote site primary switch fails.2 Command Reference At a local site for a domain.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. By default.Disable remote site del .Enable/disable remote site updates ena . If your local firewall does not permit this traffic. Table 7-30 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage prima <server IP address> Defines the IP interface IP address of the primary switch at the remote site used for Global Server Load Balancing.Set primary switch IP address of remote site secon . disable the updates.Enable remote site dis .Delete remote site cur . The default is set at none. January 2006 . Both services cannot use the same port. update disable|enable Enables or disables remote site updates. there is a local virtual server but no remote virtual server.

Display current network configuration Table 7-31 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> Defines the source (client) IP address. The switch will no longer use this remote site for Global Server Load Balancing. Up to 128 network preference numbers can be set.0)> This IP address mask is used with the source IP (SIP) address to find a correct virtual server IP address to respond to a DNS request.255. del Removes this remote site from operation and deletes its configuration.Add virtual server to network remvirt .Disable network del . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mask option. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.Remove virtual server from network addreal .Add remote real server to network remreal . [Network 1 Menu] sip .Delete network cur .Set source IP and network netmask addvirt . mask <IP subnet mask (such as.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 255.Enable network dis . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.255.Remove remote real server from network ena .2 Command Reference Table 7-30 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this remote site.Set source IP address mask . The preferred network contains a subset of the servers for the domain. /cfg/slb/gslb/network <network number> GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu Network preference selects a server based on the preferred network of the source IP address for a given domain. cur Displays the current remote site configuration. January 2006 469 .0.

The GSLB selection selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the metric preference list of the rule.0. addreal <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to the network. del Deletes the network entry. remvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual server from the network. remreal <real server number (1-1023)> Removes a real server from the network.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 7-31 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage addvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual server to the network. ena Enables the network. cur Displays the current Internet network entry configuration. Each rule has a metric preference list. January 2006 . dis Disables the network. No virtual server is added by default. /cfg/slb/gslb/rule GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Rules allow the GSLB selection to use different metric preferences based on time-of-day. [Rule 1 Menu] metric start end ttl rr dname ena dis del cur 470 - Metric Menu Set start time for rule Set end time for rule Set Time To Live in seconds of DNS resource records Set DNS resource records in DNS response Set network preference domain name for rule Enable rule Disable rule Delete rule Display current rule configuration Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. You can configure one or more rules on each domain.

del Deletes the rule. January 2006 471 . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. start <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the start time for the rule. rr <rr (1-10)> Sets the DNS resource records that how many DNS resource records will be returned in the DNS response. Higher numbers may reduce the amount of DNS traffic.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the current rule configuration. end <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the end time for the rule. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Specifies the duration (from 0 to 65535 seconds. with default at 60) that the DNS response from the switch (indicating site of best service) will remain in the cache of DNS servers. A lower value may increase the ability of the GSLB system to adjust to sudden changes in traffic load. The maximum length for the domain name can be 34 characters.0. The default is 2 records. You can use wildcard “*” while creating the domain name.2 Command Reference Table 7-32 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-16)> Displays Metric Preference Menu. dis Disables the rule. The default is zero. To view menu options. but may slow GSLB’s response to sudden traffic changes. ena Enables the rule. dname <34 character (wildcard "*" allowed) domain name> | none Defines the domain name for the rule for network preference. Default is none. The default is zero. see page 472. but will generate more DNS traffic.

472 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Web Cache Redirection Menu slb .SIP SDP Menu dbindtm .0. /cfg/slb/layer7 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu [Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu] redir .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric Global SLB Rule Metric Menu [Rule 1 Metric 1 Menu] gmetric . remnet <1-128> Allows you to delete a network that was added to the selected metric. The default is none.Server Load Balancing Menu sdp .Remove network from gmetric=network cur . To view menu options.Add network to gmetric=network remnet .Display current metric configuration Table 7-33 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric) Command Syntax and Usage gmetric leastconns|roundrobin|response|geographical|network|random|availability|qos|minmisses|hash|local|always|remote|none Defines the metric to select the next real server for GSLB. cur Displays the current configuration of the metric.Set metric to use to select next server addnet .Set timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections cur . see page 473.Display current Layer 7 configuration Table 7-34 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage redir Displays the Web Cache Redirection Menu. addnet Allows you to add a network to the selected metric.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. This command applies only if you select network as the metric. January 2006 .

If this command is disabled. To view menu options.Display current WCR configuration Table 7-35 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage urlal disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the switch will redirect all non-GET requests to the origin server. see page 475. To view menu options. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. If this command is enabled.Enable/disable URL hashing based on URI header . This option is enabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 7-34 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Menu. see page 477. dbindtm <10-60 seconds> Sets the timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections.0. cur Displays the current Layer 7 configuration. January 2006 473 . sdp Displays the SIP SDP Menu. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether all non-GET requests should be redirected to a cache server or origin server.Enable/disable server loadbalance based on HTTP header cur .Enable/disable no-cache control header to origin servers hash .Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for Cookie to origin servers nocache .Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers cookie . /cfg/slb/layer7/redir Web Cache Redirection Configuration [Web Cache Redirection Menu] urlal .

nocache disable|enable Enables or disables no-cache control header to origin servers. If hashing is disabled. January 2006 . or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1.0.1 header. This option is disabled by default. If this command is disabled. If this command is enabled. you can set the length of URI that will be used to hash into the cache server by specifying a number from 1-255. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cache-Control: nocache in HTTP/1. This option is enabled by default. 474 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.0 header to a cache server or origin server.0 header to the origin server. This option is disabled by default. If this command is enabled. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the current URL expression table. This option is disabled by default. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect requests that contain Cache-Control: no-cache in HTTP/ 1. If hashing is enabled.1 header. If this command is disabled. the switch will only use the host header field to calculate the hash key. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to a cache server or origin server. hash disable|enable <number (1-255)> Enables or disables URL hashing based on the URI.2 Command Reference Table 7-35 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage cookie disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for cookie to origin servers. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to the origin server. header disable|enable host|useragent|others Enables or disables server load balancing based on HTTP header.

Display current configuration Table 7-36 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage message <64 byte error message> Sets the message that will be displayed when an error occurs.Remove HTTP method type case . January 2006 475 . The default message is “No available server to handle this request. 1-32> Allows you to add HTTP request methods of maximum 32 characters to your switch software. All other methods are optional. addmeth <Method. The software supports both HTTP 1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.1 to perform HTTP request methods. You can see a list of supported default methods by using the command cur in this menu.0. you can define a string for server load balancing or a string for Layer 7 lookup.Rename SLB string for load balance addmeth . A method is case-sensitive.Set HTTP error message addstr . The methods GET and HEAD must be supported by all general-purpose servers.Enable/disable case sensitive for string matching cont .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/layer7/slb Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu [Server Loadbalance Resource Menu] message . rename <SLB string ID> <SLB string> Renames the SLB string for load balancing.0 and HTTP 1. HTTP allows an open-ended set of methods to be used to indicate the purpose of a request.0.Remove SLB string for load balance rename . Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Add HTTP method type remmeth . If you choose pattern string. These strings will only be used for filtering string pattern matching. you will have the option to choose between ascii or binary strings on a specific offset of the IP frame.” addstr <l7lkup|pattern> Allows the user to define a string that can be used for server load balancing or filtering by selecting either a Layer 7 look up string or a pattern match. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 supports 22 request methods by default. If you choose l7lkup string. remstr <SLB string ID> Removes this SLB string from the real server.Add SLB string for load balance remstr .Set BW contract for the SLB string cur .

0. cont <SLB string ID [1-1024]> <BW contract number [1-1024]> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for a specified string for the SLB string ID.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 476 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 7-36 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage remmeth <Method ID> Allows you to remove HTTP methods from your switch software. Using this command you can do either case sensitive or case insensitive string comparison. cur Displays the currently configured SLB strings and their associated string IDs (index numbers) and the supported HTTP request methods. If you disable case sensitive. all load balancing strings and all the request strings arriving on the switch will have to be converted to lower case before doing any string comparison. case disable|enable Enables or disables case sensitivity for string matching. January 2006 .

/cfg/slb/wap WAP Configuration [WAP Options Menu] tpcp . January 2006 477 . The default is set at 0.Add SDP mapping rem .Remove SDP mapping cur .Display current WAP configuration Table 7-38 WAP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/wap) Command Syntax and Usage tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP external notification for Add/Delete session requests. cur Display current SDP mapping configuration. rem <private IP> Remove SDP mapping.0. cur Displays the current WAP configuration Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/layer7/sdp SDP Mapping Menu [SDP Mapping Menu] add .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. debug <wap debug level (0-10)> Sets the debug level for tracing the WAP related messages. This option is disabled by default.Display current SDP mapping configuration Table 7-37 SDP Mapping Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage add <private IP> <public IP> Add SDP mapping.WAP debug level cur .Enable/disable WAP TPCP external notification debug .

Enable/disable syncing port configuration prios . This option is enabled by default. see page 479.Enable/disable syncing peer proxy IP addresses bwm . prios disable|enable Enables or disables syncing VRRP priorities.0. Peers are sent SLB. and VRRP configuration updates using /oper/slb/ synch. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable syncing VRRP priorities pips . filt disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing filter configuration.Enable/disable syncing filter configuration ports . ports disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Layer 4 port configuration. peerpips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing the peer proxy IP addresses.Enable/disable syncing proxy IP addresses peerpips . a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch.Synch Peer Switch Menu filt . This option is enabled by default. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password.Enable/disable syncing persistent session state update . FILT.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/sync Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration [Config Synchronization Menu] peer .Set stateful failover update period cur .Display current Layer 4 sync configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches. 478 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. January 2006 . Peer proxy IP addresses are used in VRRP Active/Active configuration. pips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing proxy IP addresses. To view menu options. Table 7-39 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer switch number (1-2)> Displays the Sync Peer Switch Menu. This option is enabled by default. This option is disabled by default.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Enable/disable syncing BWM configuration state . This option is disabled by default.

this option is disabled. update <seconds. By default. The default is 0. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. The default value is 30 seconds. /cfg/slb/sync/peer <peer switch number> Peer Switch Configuration [Peer Switch 1 Menu] addr .2 Command Reference Table 7-39 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage bwm disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Bandwidth Management configuration between Master and backup switches.Delete peer switch cur . state disable|enable Enables or disables stateful failover for synchronizing the persistent session state. 1–60> Sets the stateful failover update interval. The active switch sends update packets of new persistent binding entries. This option is disabled by default. dis Disables the peer for this switch.0 ena Enables the peer for this switch.0. if any.Display current peer switch configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. cur Displays the current Layer 4 synchronization configuration. This option is enabled by default. a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch. to the backup switch at the specified update interval.Disable peer switch del .Enable peer switch dis . Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password.Set peer switch IP address ena . Table 7-40 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Sets the peer switch IP address. January 2006 479 .0.

Set management network mmask . To view menu options.Display current Layer 4 advanced configuration Table 7-41 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage synatk Displays SYN Attack Detection Menu.Enable/disable Virtual Matrix Architecture vmasport . see page 483.Enable/disable using VLAN info for real server lookup pvlantag .Service Mapping Table Real Port Menu imask .Enable/disable VMA with source port tpcp .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.Session table fast-age (1 sec) period bit shift slowage .Enable/disable preserving vlan tag during packet forwarding portbind .Set virtual and real IP address mask mnet .Enable/disable Direct Access Mode grace .Enable/disable Ingress Port For Session Table Binding fastage .Session table slow-age (2 min) period bit shift cur .Enable/disable graceful real server failure matrix .Set SLB session attack inspection interval allowlim .Enable/disable Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol vstat . /cfg/slb/adv Advanced Layer 4 Configuration [Layer 4 Advanced Menu] synatk .Enable/disable Virtual Service Statistics rtsvlan .SYN Attack Detection Menu smtport .Set SLB session attack alert allowable limit submac .Set management subnet mask pmask .2 Command Reference Table 7-40 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the peer for this switch cur Displays the current peer switch configuration. January 2006 .Set persistent mask intrval . 480 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Enable/disable Source MAC address substitution direct .

direct disable|enable Enable/disables Direct Access Mode to real servers/services.255. By default. You can set this limit by using the next command in this menu: allowlim. At the configured interval of time the switch will check if the number of sessions is within the configured limits.0)> This IP address mask is used with the mnet to select management traffic which is allowed direct access to real servers. submac disable|enable Enables or disables Source MAC address substitution. The default is 255. Typically. this option is disabled.0)> Configures the real and virtual server IP address mask using dotted decimal notation. The default is 255. But if you enable this command.255. management traffic with this source IP address will be allowed direct (non-Layer 4) access to the real servers. In other words. this service port’s client request will not be processed by the server processor.255. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.255.0)> Sets persistent mask. pmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.2 Command Reference Table 7-41 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage smtport Displays Service Mapping Table (SMT) Real Server Port Menu.255. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mmask option.255. mnet <IP address> If defined. If the number of sessions exceeds this limit. the source MAC is not modified for the packets going to the servers in an SLB environment. the switch will substitute the source MAC address (for the packets going to the server) with the MAC address of the switch.255.255. imask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. see page 483. January 2006 481 . To view menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.255.255. intrval <time window for collecting sessions (0-3600)> This command allows you to configure the time interval (from one second to one hour) to specify how frequently you want to check the SLB sessions (attacks) the switch received.0. allowlim <allowable limit (1-2097104)> This command allows you to specify the maximum number of sessions the switch can receive at any given period of time.255. This option also allows any virtual server to load balance any real server. mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. Using this command you can add or remove a number of real server service port(s) that will process client traffic by-passing the server.255.255. the switch will generate a syslog and an SNMP trap to alert the administrator that the switch is under SLB attack.255.255. The default is 255.

2 Application Guide). vstat disable|enable Enables or disables reporting of virtual service statistics. The slowage scan is used to remove idle or non-TCP sessions from the session at the specified intervals. this option is enabled. January 2006 . By default. The default interval is two seconds.2 Command Reference Table 7-41 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage grace disable|enable Enables or disables graceful real server failure.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Allows existing sessions to remain bound to a server after the server has been placed in the service failed state (for more information. portbind disable|enable Enables or disables the inclusion of the ingress port number in the session table look up. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. vmasport enable|disable Enable/disable VMA with source port. rtsvlan disable|enable Enables or disables the use of VLAN for Return to Sender information on the real server. this option is disabled. which causes the time to double per increment). This command is used for security reasons—the UDP port can be closed. tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol). By default. The default interval is two minutes. a session can remain in the session table for a few minutes.0. If a large value of fastage is used. If a large value of slowage is used. a session can remain in the session table for months. fastage <shift the fast-age (1sec) period 0-7 bits> Controls how frequently a fastage scan is performed. this option is disabled. see “Service Failure” in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. slowage <shift the slow-age (2min) period 0-14 bits> Controls how frequently a slowage scan is performed. matrix disable|enable Enables or disables the use of Virtual Matrix Architecture on the Nortel Application Switch. By default. (Value is set in bits rather than seconds. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval.0. 482 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. pvlantag Enable/disable preserving vlan tag during packet forwarding. The default is 0. The fastage scan is used to remove TCP sessions that have been closed with a FIN and sessions that have been identified by the slowage scan as idle for the maximum allowed period. The default is 0.

Remove real port cur .Set SYN attack detection interval thrshld .Display real port configuration Table 7-43 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/smtport) Command Syntax and Usage add <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to add a service port to the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor. cur Displays the current SYN attack detection configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Add real port remove .Set SYN attack alarm threshold cur .Display current SYN attack detection configuration Table 7-42 SYN Attack Detection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/synatk) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <SYN attack check interval in seconds (2-3600)> Sets the interval of SYN attack inspection. thrshld <SYN attack alarm threshold (new half-open sessions/second) (1-100000)> Sets the threshold of SYN attack alarm.0. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 7-41 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced configuration. /cfg/slb/adv/synatk SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu [SYN Attack Detection Menu] intrval . /cfg/slb/adv/smtport Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu [SMT Real Port Menu] add . January 2006 483 .

ena Enables inbound link load balancing. see page 485. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Sets the time-to-live for DNS resource records. cur Displays real port configuration. January 2006 .2 Command Reference Table 7-43 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/smtport) Command Syntax and Usage remove <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to remove a service port from the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor. /cfg/slb/linklb Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu [Inbound Linklb drecord group ttl ena dis cur Menu] Domain Record Menu Set real server group Set Time to Live of DNS resource records Enable Inbound Linklb Disable Inbound Linklb Display current Inbound Linklb configuration Table 7-44 Inbound Link Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb) Command Syntax and Usage drecord <domain record number (1-64)> Displays domain record menu. To view menu options. 484 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. dis Disables inbound link load balancing.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. cur Displays current inbound link load configuration. group <real server group number (1-1023)> Sets the real server ISP group number.

January 2006 485 .Delete Domain Record cur .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu [Domain Record <domain_number> Menu] entry . domain <64 character domain name>|none Allows you to configure the domain name.Display current Domain Record configuration Table 7-45 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb/drecord) Command Syntax and Usage entry <linklb entry number (1-8)> Displays the link load balancer’s mapping menu for the virtual and real servers. cur Displays the current domain records.0. Default is none.Disable Domain Record del .Set Domain Name ena . See page 452 to view menu options. del Deletes the domain records. ena Enables the domain records. dis Disables the domain records.Virt Real Mapping Menu domain . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Enable Domain Record dis .

Set Virtual Server Number real .Disable Entry del .WAP Health Check Menu aphttp . 1-1024> Defines the virtual server number for mapping.Set Real Server Number ena .0. cur Displays the current real and virtual server mappings for drecords entries.SNMP Health Check Menu waphc . del Deletes the entry for drecords.Display current Entry configuration Table 7-46 Command Syntax & Usage virt <virtual server number.LDAP version secret .Display current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration 486 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. ena Enables the entry for drecords.Enable/disable Allow HTTP Health Check on any port ldapver .Enable Entry dis . real Defines the real server number for mapping.Scriptable Health Check Menu snmphc .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord/entry Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu [Virt Real Mapping 1 Menu] virt .Delete Entry cur .Set RADIUS secret minter . January 2006 . dis Disables the entry for drecords.Set interval of response and bandwidth metric updates cur . /cfg/slb/advhc Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu [Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu] script .

like HTTPs. minter <number of seconds between updates (1-256)> This command sets the interval of response and bandwidth metric updates. January 2006 487 . see page 488. waphc Displays the WAP Health Check Menu. you can use HTTP health checks only for HTTP service. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. When disabled. see page 492.0. To view menu options. this option is disabled. secret <1-32 character secret> To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. ldapver <LDAP version> Sets the LDAP version to 2 or 3. aphttp disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP health checks on any port. To view menu options. Enabling it will allow you to use it on any port. The default is set at 10. the network administrator must configure two parameters in the switch: the /cfg/slb/secret value and the cntnt parameter with a username:password value. To view menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The secret value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. By default. snmphc <SNMP health check number (1-5)> Displays the SNMP Health Check Menu. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration. The default is 2. see page 490. The default is none.2 Command Reference Table 7-47 Advanced Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc) Command Syntax and Usage script <health script number (1-64)> Displays the Scriptable Health Check Menu.

bsend <hex string> Sends a binary request string in hexadecimal format for the request packet through an open TCP or UDP port to the server. You need to specify the protocol (TCP or UDP).Add send command to end of script bsend .Add additional expect binary string to end of script offset .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/script <health script number> Scriptable Health Checks Configuration Scriptable health checks provide a robust and extensible way to health check a group of real servers.Add wait command to end of script close .Add binary send command to end of script nsend .Delete script cur . January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Add depth command to end of script wait .Add close command to end of script (TCP only) rem .” The total number of characters cannot exceed 6144 bytes.Remove last command from script del . So both TCP and UDP services can be health-checked.Add additional send binary string to end of script expect . send <text string (TCP).Add expect command to end of script bexpect . The ASCII and binary-based scripts control how a group of real servers are healthchecked.Add open command to end of script send . [Health Script 1 Menu] open .Add offset command to end of script depth . and the port number. 488 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. Up to 64 scripts can be configured.0. The Health Script menu provides commands that can be used to define the health “script. With these health checks.Display current script configuration Table 7-48 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage open <real port or name (such as: http)> <tcp|udp> Opens a TCP connection or specifies a UDP port for the health check. the users can define their own health checks of varied complexity. hex string (UDP)> Sends an ASCII request string through an open TCP or UDP port to the server.Add binary expect command to end of script nexpect .

expect <text string (TCP).2 Command Reference Table 7-48 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage nsend <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the packet generated by the bsend command. The wait window starts when the request is sent from the switch. you must do it after executing the bexpect command. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 allows a maximum of 256 bytes to be entered. bexpect <hex string> Allows you to configure binary content request string (in hexadecimal format) that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. nexpect <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the original content of the response packet specified by the bexpect command. otherwise the health check fails. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the offset from the beginning of the UDP data area to start matching the content specified in the expect command. del Deletes the current script. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. offset <offset. January 2006 489 . hex string (UDP)> Allows you to configure an ASCII request string that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. rem Removes the last entered line from the script.0. If you do not see this string in any response packet before the health check interval or the configured wait window expires. The wait command should follow the offset and depth commands in the script.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. close Closes TCP connection. the health check passes.0. The wait window is set in the units of milli-seconds. Using one or more nsend commands allows you to generate a binary content of more than 256 bytes in length. depth <depth. wait <wait window in milliseconds (1-65535)> Allows the user to configure a wait window for the expected response. to search for the bexpect content. or beginning from offset if offset was specified. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the depth (the window) in bytes beginning from the start of the UDP data area. the server does not pass the expect step and the health check fails. If you need to specify offset. If the expected response is received within the wait window.

1.2 Command Reference Table 7-48 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage cur Lists the current script configuration.3.2. rcvcnt <expected content an integer value or a string> Enter the content the switch expects to receive from the SNMP agent on the real server.1.1. January 2006 . invert disable|enable Enables or disables the inversion of the expected value. 1. such as.1.0 max 30 sub-identifiers> Specify the Object Identifier (OID) to be sent in the SNMP GET request packet. del Deletes the current SNMP health check.OID to be sent in the SNMP request packet comm .Delete SNMP health check cur . an OID is of the form 1.Community string used in the SNMP request packet rcvcnt . /cfg/slb/advhc/snmphc SNMP Health Check Configuration [SNMP Health Check 1 Menu] oid .2.0. for example. weight disable|enable When enabled. the health check fails if the response packet contains the value specified in the receive content (rcvnt) field.Enable/disable inversion of expected value weight .3. When the invert option is enabled.Enable/disable readjusting of weights based on response del .4.Expected value in the SNMP response packet invert .1.7.11.6. the real server weights are dynamically adjusted based on SNMP health check response.5.Display current SNMP health check configuration Table 7-49 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc) Command Syntax and Usage oid <object identifier.1. comm <community string.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.6. The default community string is public.1872. The format of the OID depends on the MIB file. maximum 32 characters> Enter the community string used in the SNMP get request packet. 490 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.0. January 2006 491 .2 Command Reference Table 7-49 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current SNMP Health Check configuration.

in a manner similar to scriptable health checks.WTLS+WSP port number to health check wtlsprt . WTLS+WTP+WSP). The Nortel Application Switch Operating System provides a content-based health check mechanism where customized WSP packets are sent to the WAP gateways. [WAP Health Check Menu] wspcnt . wspport <wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WSP health checks will be performed. Connectionless WSP runs on UDP/IP protocol. wtpcnt Displays WTP and WSP Health Check Content Menu. WTP+WSP. wtpport <wtp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTP port number to health check. refer to the Application Guide. see page 495.WTLS port number to health check couple . For further details.WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu wspport .Enable/disable coupling with RADIUS Accounting Service cur . Application switches can be used to load balance the gateways in both modes of operation. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System allows you to configure three WAP gateway health check types for all four WAP services (WSP.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .WTP port number to health check wtlswsp .0. and the switch verifies the expected response. 492 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. ports 9200 and 9202 and connectionoriented (WTP) traffic runs on ports 9201 and 9203.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc WAP Health Check Configuration Wireless Session Protocol (WSP) is used within the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) suite to manage sessions between wireless devices and WAP content servers or WAP gateways. WTLS+WSP.WSP Health Check Content Menu wtpcnt .Display current WAP health check configuration Table 7-50 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wspcnt Displays WSP Health Check Content Menu. deployed on WAP gateways/servers. To view menu options.WSP port number to health check wtpport . The default port number is 9201. WSP content health checks can be configured in two modes: connectionless and connectionoriented. see page 494. To view menu options. The default port number is 9200.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. If the health check to any one of the four WAP services or Radius Accounting Service fails. The connectionless encrypted WTLS traffic uses default port 9202. January 2006 493 . The connection-oriented WTLS traffic uses default port 9203. wtlsprt <port number (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WTLS health checks will be performed.0. WTLS+WTP+WSP) with Radius Accounting Service. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration. then all of the four WAP services and Radius Accounting Service are disabled. couple disable|enable Enables or disables coupling together of all the four WAP services (WSP.2 Command Reference Table 7-50 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wtlswsp <wtls+wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTLS (Wireless Transport Layer Security) and WSP port number to health check.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. WTP+WSP. WTLS+WSP.

This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. 494 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.Offset in received WSP packet sndcnt .Content to be sent to the WAP gateway rcvcnt . rcvcnt <receive content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway.0.Content to be received from the WAP gateway cur .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt WSP Content Health Check [WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset . sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a connectionless WSP request to a WSP gateway. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.Display current WSP health check content configuration Table 7-51 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <Offset in the received WSP packet (0-512)> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packages. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of the content of the received packet.

GET PDU to be sent to the WAP rcvcnt . at which the comparison begins to match with the expected receive content. [WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset .Offset in received WSP PDU connect .Display current WTP+WSP health WAP gateway gateway the WAP gateway check content configuration Table 7-52 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/ waphc/wtpcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <offset in the received WSP PDU> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packets.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.REPLY PDU to be received from cur . January 2006 495 . connect <connect content as hexstring> Enter the content for the first switch-generated WSP session packet. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. The offset value is the number of bytes from the beginning of the WSP PDU. cur Displays current WTP+WSP health check content configuration. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a WSP request to a WSP gateway.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wtpcnt WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu This menu is used for configuring the health check for connection-oriented unencrypted WAP traffic. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of WSP PDU of the received packet. rcvcnt <receive content as a hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway.CONNECT PDU to be sent to the sndcnt .0. This command allows you to customize the headers in the connect message.

2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu You need to enable proxy IP address processing on the port to use this command.Set base type of Proxy IP address add . You can configure multiple proxy IP addresses based on either port or VLAN. whether it is port-based or VLAN-based.Display current Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-53 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage type <port|vlan> Defines the base type of the proxy IP address. January 2006 .Add port or VLAN to Proxy IP address rem .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration. You can configure up to 1024 proxy IP addresses on a per switch basis. 496 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A. [Proxy IP Address Menu] type . add <IP address> <port number|vlan number>|<port number-port number|vlan number-vlan number> Allows you to add either a port or a VLAN to a proxy IP address. rem <<PIP ID> <port#|vlan#>|<port#-port#|vlan#-vlan#>> Allows you to remove a port or a VLAN from a proxy IP address. This command also allows you to remove all ports or VLANs assigned to any proxy IP address.Remove port or VLAN from Proxy IP address cur .0.

rem <IP address> Allows you to remove a proxy IP address from the server load balancing peer.0. cur Displays the current proxy address configuration of the peer.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/peerpip SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu When this command is enabled.Add peer Proxy IP address rem . using Layer 2. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch. This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch. [Peer Proxy IP Address Menu] add . without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch.Rem peer Proxy IP address cur .Display current peer Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-54 Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Options (/cfg/slb/peerpip) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> Allows you to add a proxy IP address to the server load balancing peer. January 2006 497 . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.

0. del Delete the Workload Manager.Set port for Workload Manager del .0 0 498 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 320506-A.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/wlm WorkLoad Management Menu [Workload Manager 1 Menu] addr . January 2006 . port <TCP_port> Set the port number for the Workload Manager.Set IP address for Workload Manager port .Display current Workload Manager configuration Table 7-55 Workload Manager Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP_address> Set the IP address for the Workload Manager.0. For example: Current Workload Manager 1: IP address Port 0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Delete Workload Manager cur . cur Shows all Workload Manager statistics.

CHAPTER 8 The Operations Menu The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately.Enter key to enable software feature rmkey . the port returns to its normally configured operation.Change current user password clrlog .Operational IP Menu swkey . /oper Operations Menu [Operations Menu] port .Enter software feature to be removed passwd . January 2006 .Send NTP request The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration. you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change).Operational Bandwidth Management Menu security . For example.Turn on/off display syslog msgs to telnet/ssh sessions defalias .Operational Server Load Balancing Menu vrrp . with the understanding that when the switch is reset. but do not alter permanent switch configurations.Set default port alias ntpreq .Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu bwm .Operational Security Menu ip .Clear syslog messages displog . Port Mirroring menu options are accessible only to the Nortel Application Switch AD4 and Nortel Application Switch 184 Web Switches. 499 320506-A.Operational Port Menu slb .

slb Displays the Operational Layer 4 Menu. 500 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A. To view menu options. the Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu. displog on|off Turn on/off display syslog msgs to telnet/ssh sessions defalias Set the default port alias. To view menu options. see page 501. To view menu options. ip Displays the IP Operations Menu. see page 502. For details. security Go to the Operational Security menu. ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server. which has one sub-menu/option. You need to enter the current password in use for validation. passwd <15 char max> Allows the user to change the password. swkey <16-hexadecimal digit key to enable software feature> Sets key to enable software feature. see page 505. To view menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .0. see page 505.2 Command Reference Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu. To view menu options. For details. vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. see page 506. rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSL|BWM|Security)> Defines software feature to be removed. bwm Operational Bandwidth Management Menu. To view menu options. see page 505. see page 509. clrlog Clears all syslog messages. see page 510.

2 Command Reference /oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options [Operations Port 1 Menu] rmon . The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. January 2006 501 .Disable port cur . Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. cur Displays the current settings for the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. ena Temporarily enables the port. dis Temporarily disables the port. and for changing Remote Monitoring (RMON) status on a port. Table 8-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Temporarily enables/disables Remote Monitoring on the port.0.Current port state Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port.Enable/Disable RMON for port ena .Enable port dis .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

ena <real server number (1-1023)> Temporarily enables a real server.Global SLB Operations Menu sync . To take effect. the operations-level Server Load Balancing options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling real servers and synchronizing the configuration between the active/active switches. filter. see page 504.Current layer 4 operational state When the optional Layer 4 software is enabled. The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. 502 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A. port.2 Command Reference /oper/slb Operations-Level SLB Options [Server Load Balancing Operations Menu] group . see page 503. VRRP. gslb Displays Global SLB Operations Menu.Clear session table cur . and VR priorities on a peer switch (a switch that owns the IP address). To view menu options.Synchronize SLB.0.Disable real server sessdel .Real Server Group Menu gslb .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the Real Server Group Menu.Enable real server dis .Delete session table entry clear . January 2006 . sync Synchronizes the SLB. Bandwidth Management configuration. VRRP and other configurations on peers ena . To view menu options. peers must be configured on the Nortel Application Switch and the administrator password on the switch must be identical.

allow persistent http 1. clear Clears all session tables and allows port filter changes to take effect immediately. see “Disabling and Enabling Real Servers” in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. NOTE – This command provides for orderly server shutdown to allow maintenance on a server.Disable real server in this group cur . Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A. NOTE – This command disrupts current SLB and Application Redirection sessions. 1-1023> [P . /oper/slb/group Real Server Group Operations [Real server group 1 Menu] ena . January 2006 503 .Enable real server in this group dis .Current server group operational state Table 8-4 Real Server Group Operations Options (oper/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena <real server number (1-1023)> Enables real server in this group.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For more information.0 sessions) by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server Using the n (none) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server The real server will be returned to its configured state after a switch reset.2 Command Reference Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dis <real server number.0.2 Application Guide. sessdel Delete session table entry. cur Displays the current SLB operational state.0 sessions] p|n The disable command is used to temporarily disable real servers as follows: Using the p (persistent) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server (except for persistent http 1.

arem Remove all entries Global SLB DNS persistence cache.0. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 504 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A. add Add an entry to the Global SLB DNS persistence cache.2 Command Reference Table 8-4 Real Server Group Operations Options (oper/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage dis <real server number (1-1023)> Disables real server in this group.Query Global SLB selection add .Add entry to Global SLB DNS persistence cache arem . cur Displays current operational state of the server group.Remove all entries Global SLB DNS persistence cache Table 8-5 Global SLB Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage query Allows you to query the Global site selection. /oper/slb/gslb Global SLB Operations Menu [Global SLB Operations Menu] query .

When this command is executed. After the new election. Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A. the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). [VRRP Operations Menu] back . /oper/bwm Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options [Bandwidth Management Operations Menu] sndhist .0. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure.Set virtual router to backup Table 8-6 Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Menu Options (/oper/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-1024)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode.2 Command Reference /oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options. There are no other virtual routers available to take master control. clear Clear the BWM IP user entry table.Clear BWM IP user entry table Table 8-7 Bandwidth Operations Menu Options (/oper/bwm/sndhist) Command Syntax and Usage sndhist Sends the bandwidth history to a system administrator specified under /cfg/bwm/user (see page 316).Send BW History to SMTP server clear .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 505 . the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled.

506 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A.Display bogon IP Address/Mask oper .Remove operations destination IP Address/Mask darem .Remove all operations destination IP Address/Mask cfg . see page 506 /oper/security/ipacl IP ACL Operations Menu [IP ACL Operations Menu] add .Remove all operations source IP Address/Mask dadd .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. rem <IP address> <IP subnet mask> Remove the operations source IP mask. arem Remove all operations source IP addresses and Masks.Add operations source IP Address/Mask rem . To view menu options.Display operations IP Address/Mask cur .0.Display configuration IP Address/Mask bogon .Add operations destination IP Address/Mask drem .2 Command Reference /oper/security Security Menu [Security Menu] ipacl . dadd <IP address> <IP subnet mask> <timeout in minutes.IP ACL Operations Menu Table 8-8 Security Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ipacl Go to the IP ACL Operation menu. 1-10080> Add an operations destination IP address and Mask.Remove operations source IP Address/Mask arem . January 2006 . drem <IP address> <IP subnet mask> Remove an operations destination IP address and Mask.Display all IP Address/Mask Table 8-9 IP ACL Operations Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP subnet mask> <timeout in minutes. 1-10080> Add the operations source IP mask.

bogon Display bogon IP address and Mask. January 2006 507 . 0 operations destination IP ACL. 0 configuration destination IP ACL. oper Display operations IP addresses and Masks. Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A. cfg Display all configuration IP addresses and Masks. Current bogon IP ACL settings: 0 bogon source IP ACL. Current operations IP ACL settings: 0 operations source IP ACL. For example: >> IP ACL Operations# bogon Current bogon IP ACL settings: 0 bogon source IP ACL. cur Display all IP addresses and Masks. 0 configuration destination IP ACL.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 8-9 IP ACL Operations Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage darem Remove all of the operations destination IP addresses and Masks. For example: Current total IP ACL settings: 0 total source IP ACL.0. 0 total destination IP ACL. For example: Current operations IP ACL settings: 0 operations source IP ACL. 0 operations destination IP ACL. For example: Current configuration IP ACL settings: 0 configuration source IP ACL. Current configuration IP ACL settings: 0 configuration source IP ACL. Use "bogon" command to display.

cur Displays the current BGP operational state.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 . garp <IP address> <Vlan number> Send gratuitous arp. /oper/ip/bgp Operations-Level BGP Options [Border Gateway start stop cur Protocol Operations Menu] Start peer session Stop peer session Current BGP operational state Table 8-11 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage start <peer number (1-16)> Starts the peer session. stop <peer number (1-16)> Stops the peer session. To view the menu options see page 508.0.Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu garp .2 Command Reference /oper/ip Operations-Level IP Options [IP Operations Menu] bgp . 508 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A.Send gratuitous arp Table 8-10 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu.

NOTE – Each License Password will work only on the specific switch which has the MAC address you provided when registering your Licence Certificate. January 2006 509 . Nortel Networks will then provide a License Password. Once you have your License Password. “The Command Line Interface”). At the Operations# prompt. At the Main# prompt. Before you can activate optional software. you must register each License Certificate with Nortel Networks and provide the MAC address of the Nortel Application Switch Operating System switch that will run the optional software.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Connect to the switch’s command line interface and log in as the administrator (see Chapter 1. One software license is needed for each switch where the optional software is to be used. perform the following actions: 1.2 Command Reference /oper/swkey Activating Optional Software The swkey option is used for activating any optional software you have purchased for your switch. enter: Operations# swkey Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A. enter: Main# oper 3. You will receive a Licence Certificate for each software license purchased. 2. you must obtain a software license from your Nortel Networks representative or authorized reseller.0. Currently the following software packages are available for purchase and installation: Security Pack Bandwidth Management Global Server Load Balancing To obtain a software key.

123456789ABCDEF)> If the correct code is entered. For example: Enter Software Key: <16 hexadecimal-digit key to enable software feature (such as. you will see the following message: Valid software key entered. When prompted.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For example: Enter Software Feature to be removed:[GSLB]|BWM|Security: GSLB 510 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 320506-A.0. /oper/rmkey Removing Optional Software The rmkey option is used for deactivating any optional software. enter the following at the Operations Menu: Operations# rmkey When prompted. To review the deactivation options. Deactivated software is still present in switch memory and can be reactivated at any later time. enter the following at the Operations Menu: >> Operations# ? rmk Usage: rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSLB||BWM|Security|Linklb|ITM)> To deactivate optional software. Software feature enabled.2 Command Reference 4. enter your 16-digit software key code. enter the code for software to be removed. January 2006 .

Select config block to use on next boot .Upload selected software image via TFTP . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. The Boot Options Menu provides options for: Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via TFTP /boot Boot Menu [Boot Options sched image conf gtimg ptimg reset cur Menu] . January 2006 .CHAPTER 9 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu.Download new software image via TFTP . 511 320506-A.Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] .Scheduled Switch Reset Menu .Select software image to use on next boot .

This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off-peak hours.0.Set switch reset time cancel . and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu: /boot/sched Scheduled Reboot Menu [Boot Schedule Menu] set .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For example: >> Boot Schedule# cur Currently scheduled reboot time: none Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the Nortel Application Switch. A version of the image ships with the switch.Display current switch reset schedule The cur option displays the current scheduled reboot time. Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following: Loading the new image onto a TFTP server on your network Downloading the new image from the TFTP server to your switch Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset 512 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 320506-A.Cancel pending switch reset cur . and comes pre-installed on the device. you can upgrade the software running on your switch. cancel a previously scheduled reboot. You can set the reboot time. January 2006 .2 Command Reference Scheduled Reboot of the Switch This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. As new versions of the image are released.

called image1 and image2. At the Boot Options# prompt. When you download new software. you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1. you will need the following: The image or boot software loaded on a TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Setup the TFTP option (/cfg/sys/mgmt/tftp) for the TFTP connection. January 2006 513 . as well as boot software.0.2 Command Reference Downloading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images. Enter the hostname or IP address of the TFTP server. or boot. Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 320506-A. if your active image is currently loaded into image1. NOTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. To download a new software to your switch. note that you can override this setting with the option provided to these operational commands. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced: Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image> 3. However. This sets the default option for the gtimg and ptimg commands.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. you would probably load the new image software into image2. called boot. 1. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1). use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. For example. enter: Boot Options# gtimg 2. image2. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 379). When the above requirements are met. if needed.

and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset. enter: Boot Options# ptimg 2. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. However.2 Command Reference 4. Enter the name of the new software file on the server. Selecting a Software Image to Run You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot. You should next select a software image to run. January 2006 . 1. At the Boot Options# prompt. The system prompts you to confirm your request.0. Enter the desired image: Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file- name> 514 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 320506-A. The system prompts you for information. At the Boot Options# prompt. the file location is normally relative to the TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot). Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]: Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch You can upload a software image from the switch to a TFTP server. 5. as described below. enter: Boot Options# image 2. 1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

When you perform the save command. Under certain circumstances. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block. Enter the name or the IP address of the TFTP server: Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. At the Boot Options# prompt. you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. enter: Boot Options# conf 2.0. image2 currently contains Software Version 20. This can be useful when a custom-configured Nortel Application Switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1.1.0.1.7 Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test" on TFTP server 192. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your Nortel Application Switch was manufactured. it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. To have the file uploaded. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the TFTP server: Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> 5. There is also a factory configuration block. Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y Selecting a Configuration Block When you make configuration changes to the Nortel Application Switch.2 Command Reference 3.1.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. enter Y. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use: Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 320506-A. your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block.2. January 2006 515 .

0. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]: 516 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .2 Command Reference The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset.

NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart. January 2006 517 . depending on the topology of your network. enter: >> Boot Options# reset You are prompted to confirm your request. Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Resetting the Switch You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur. This process can be lengthy.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To reset the switch. at the Boot Options# prompt.

2 Command Reference 518 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 320506-A.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .

Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu arp .Dump state information to FLASH and reboot tsdmp .Reset SSL card Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the Nortel Application Switch after any one of the following occurs: The switch administrator forces a switch panic.IP6 Manipulation Menu debug . 519 320506-A. /maint Maintenance Menu NOTE – To use the Maintenance Menu.Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP cldmp . and then causes the switch to reboot.List FLASH dump panic . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route .Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp . The panic option. [Maintenance Menu] sys . causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory.System Maintenance Menu fdb . January 2006 . found in the Maintenance Menu.Debugging Menu uudmp .Clear FLASH dump lsdmp .Tech support dump pttsdmp . It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting.IP Route Manipulation Menu ip6 .Upload tech support dump via FTP/TFTP sslrst .CHAPTER 10 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information.

see page 522. tsdmp Dumps all Nortel Application Switch information. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. The watchdog timer forces a switch reset.0. For details. The switch reset key combination is <Shift><Ctrl><->. For details. For details. debug Displays the Debugging Menu. see page 522. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. see page 529. see page 525. To view menu options. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. 520 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A. panic Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options. statistics. For details. The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot. see page 527. To view menu options. ptdmp hostname filename [-mgmt| -data] Saves the system dump information using TFTP. For details. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. To view menu options. Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. see page 523.You can log the tsdump output into a file. For details. and configuration. see page 530. see page 528. ip6 Displays the IPv6 Manipulation Menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see page 530. and send it to Nortel Networks Tech Support for debugging purposes. see page 529. see page 531. January 2006 . see page 526. lsdmp Displays list flash dump. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes.2 Command Reference The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination on a device that is attached to the console port.

For details. see page 531. see page 531. sslrst Reset the SSL card.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint) Command Syntax and Usage pttsdmp <hostname> <filename> <-tftp|username password> [-mgmt|-data] Upload tech support dump using FTP/TFTP. January 2006 521 . For details.0. Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A.

Show FDB entries referenced by a single port dump . The options are used to perform system debugging.Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan .Show FDB entries for a single VLAN refpt .0. 522 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A.Set NVRAM flag word sfpinfo .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port .Show SFP information Table 10-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys) Command Syntax and Usage flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group. January 2006 .please wait Invalid: Port 1 does not support SFP's /maint/fdb Forwarding Database Options [FDB Manipulation Menu] find .Show FDB entries for a single port trunk .Delete an FDB entry clear .Show all FDB entries del .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For example: >> System Maintenance# sfpinfo 1 Probing SFP on port 1 .Clear entire FDB The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database.2 Command Reference /maint/sys System Maintenance Options This menu is reserved for use by Nortel Networks Customer Support group. sfpinfo <port_number> Show the SFP information. [System Maintenance Menu] flags . This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions.

Use “0” for unknown port number. Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456). dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database.2 Command Reference Table 10-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt . /maint/arp ARP Cache Options [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find . clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry. trunk <trunk number (1-12)> Displays all FDB entries for the specified trunk group. For details. 0 for unknown>> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 523 . port <port number. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays all FDB entries reference by a single port. see page 90.Show all ARP entries clear .Show ARP address list Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device.Clear ARP cache addr .Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan .0.

you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 112.80.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:82 1 1 empty 47.101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find.2 Command Reference Table 10-4 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. /maint/arp/port <port number> ARP Entries on a Single Port IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.16.---. clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Shows all ARP entries referenced by a single port.80. addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests. dump Shows all ARP entries.----.----.17. dump). port.0. January 2006 .169 00:04:75:db:1c:1a 1 1 empty NOTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch. refpt. 524 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A.80.----------------. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.4. vlan.17. port <port number> Displays ARP entries on a single port. 192.16.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. See page 524 for a sample output.81 00:e0:81:24:ef:3c 1 1 empty 47.--------------47.

3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:1234) Shows routes to a default gateway.Show all routes clear .Show a single route by destination IP address gw . NOTE – To display all routes. you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 108. dump Shows all routes. 192. January 2006 525 . see Table 4-20 on page 109 if <interface number (1-255)> Shows routes on a single interface.0.Clear route table Table 10-5 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP4 address (eg.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 192. see Table 4-19 on page 109 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Shows routes of a single tag. gw <default gateway IP4 address (eg.101)> | <IP6 address (eg.4. Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A.17.Show routes on a single interface dump . type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type. 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:1234)> Shows a single route by destination IP address.44)> <default gateway IP6 address (eg. For a description of IP routing tags.17. For a description of IP routing types.Show routes to a single gateway type .4.Show routes of a single tag if .2 Command Reference /maint/route IP Route Manipulation [IP Routing Menu] find . clear Clears the route table from switch memory.Show routes of a single type tag .

2 Command Reference /maint/ip6 IPv6 Manipulation Menu [IP6 Menu] nbrcache .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. January 2006 . This command is used to clear the IPv6 Neighbor Cache table.Neighbor Cache Manipulation Menu Table 10-6 IPv6 Manipulation Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage nbrcache Opens the Neighbor Cache menu whose only option is the clear command. 526 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A.

Show MP trace buffer sptb . sptb <port number (1-4)> Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. the MP trace buffer and SP trace buffers are saved into the snap trace buffer area. 2002.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. mask: 0x00800008.Show SP trace buffer spall . Displays all SP trace buffers. Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks. Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A. January 2006 527 . mask: 0x00800008 The buffer information is displayed after the header. The output from these commands can be interpreted by the Nortel Networks Customer Support division. The buffer information is displayed after the header. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30.0. Table 10-7 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug) Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer.Show designated SP for IP address vmasp6 . You can view the following information using the debug menu: Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced by the Switch Processor (SP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason.Show port-SP-MAC mapping vmasp . Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30.Show All SPs trace buffers clrcfg . 2002. 2001. spall Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header.Show designated SP for IP6 address The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation.2 Command Reference /maint/debug Debugging Options [Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf .Clear all flash configs portmap .

NOTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. vmasp6 <IP_address> Show designated SP for IP6 address. dump information can be read multiple times. If there is a dump available. the uudmp command will cause approximately 23. If you want to capture dump information to a file. enter: Maintenance# uudmp The dump information is displayed on your screen and. This will ensure that you do not lose any information.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see page 529. the system prompts as follows: >> Maintenance# uu Enter region to dump [main/bkp]: main Dumping main region: Use 'ptdmp' to extract panic dumps.0. at the Maintenance# prompt. Confirm proceed with large dump (15000 lines) [y/n]: 528 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory. For more information on clearing the dump region. /maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump Using this command. You can then contact Nortel Networks Customer Support for help analyzing the information. you must manually clear the dump region. To access dump information. vmasp <IP address> Displays the assigned SP (Switch Processor) for this IP address. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory. January 2006 . Once entered. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. dump information is presented in uuencoded format. if you have configured your communication software to do so. Using the uudmp command. captured to a file.300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command.2 Command Reference Table 10-7 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug) Command Syntax and Usage portmap Show port to SP to MAC mapping.

0. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. at the Maintenance# prompt. If the flash dump region is already clear. /maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information To clear dump information from flash memory. the following message appears: No FLASH dump available. enter: Maintenance# ptdmp <hostname> <filename> <-tftp|username password> [-mgmt|-data] Where server is the TFTP or FTP server IP address or hostname. the switch displays the following message: FLASH dump region is already clear.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. /maint/ptdmp <server> <filename> System Dump Put Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP or FTP server. the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command. and must be writable (set with proper permission. at the Maintenance# prompt. and not locked by any application). To save dump information via TFTP or FTP. enter: Maintenance# cldmp The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message: FLASH dump region cleared. NOTE – If the TFTP or FTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. January 2006 529 . and filename is the target dump file.2 Command Reference If the dump region is empty. Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A.

2005.7 from FLASH image1.2 Command Reference /maint/lsdmp Use the /maint/lsdmp command to view dump statistics... Jan 9 19:15:32 NOTICE system: link up on port 25 Enter password: 530 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A..0. For example: >> Maintenance# lsdmp The main dump was saved at 8:12:58 Fri Jun 3. at the Maintenance# prompt. Alteon Application Switch 2424 Rebooted because of Software PANIC.2. 2003: Version 20. /maint/panic Panic Command The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot. 2005... Booting complete 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9.. To select panic.. January 2006 .. A backup dump was saved at 14:47:31 Mon Jun 20. enter: >> Maintenance# panic A FLASH dump already exists. active config block.. Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]: Enter y to confirm the command: Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y The following messages are displayed: Loading Image:.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

0.0. For example: >> Maintenance# ? pttsdmp Usage: pttsdmp <hostname> <filename> <-tftp|username password> [mgmt|-data] >> Maintenance# pttsdmp Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: 0.. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region. Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A..0. Unscheduled System Dumps If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved. 2003. statistics.2 Command Reference /maint/tsdmp Use the /maint/tsdmp command to dump all dump information that can be used for technical support. The dump was performed earlier using the /maint/tsdmp command.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The dump was saved at 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9. the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch: Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. and configuration [y/n]: /maint/pttsdmp Use the /maint/pttsdmp command to upload a technical support dump using an FTP or TFTP connection. January 2006 531 .0 Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: dump.0. For example: >> Maintenance# tsdmp Confirm dumping all information.0. .0. /maint/sslrst Use the maint/sslrst command to reset the switch SSL card.txt Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server: username Enter password for username on FTP server: Connecting to 0. .

0.2 Command Reference 532 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .

Show pending config changes [global command] apply . January 2006 . Go to the main menu and enter the SSL processor level. always available] >> Main# ssl 533 320506-A. Login to the SSL processor Log into the SSL Processor as described in the following paragraphs.Boot Options Menu maint .Information Menu stats .Apply pending config changes [global command] save . # cd / -----------------------------------------------------------[Main Menu] info .Statistics Menu cfg . you must be logged in to the processor as the administrator.Configuration Menu oper .Save updated config to FLASH [global command] revert .SSL Accelerator Menu diff .CHAPTER 11 The SSL Processor Menu The SSL Menu is used to connect to the SSL processor.Exit [global command.Maintenance Menu ssl .Operations Command Menu boot . NOTE – To use the SSL Processor Menu.Revert pending or applied changes [global command] exit .

Show pending config changes [global command] apply . For example.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Maintenance menu diff . to request help on the “apply” command enter: SSL >> Main# help diff Show any pending configuration changes. January 2006 .Configuration menu boot .0. always available] SSL >> Main# NOTE – Help information on specific commands uses the command “help”.Revert pending config changes [global command] paste . login: admin Password: Alteon iSD SSL Hardware platform: 2424S Software version: 5.34 -----------------------------------------------------------[Main Menu] info .Restore saved config with key [global command] help . and not the “?” symbol used at other directory levels.0.0. The command must also be spelled-out in full. 534 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Exit [global command.Apply pending config changes [global command] revert .Statistics menu cfg . >> Main# ssl Connected to SSL Processor. Type "exit" to quit.2 Command Reference Enter the appropriate account information to logon to the processor.Show command help [global command] exit .Boot menu maint .Information menu stats .

For example: SSL >> Main# diff Configuration/ Certificate menu: new child "1" created apply Applies pending configuration changes. see page 545.0. For details. see page 652. see page 536. stats Go to the Statistics level of the SSL Processor menu. see page 649.2 Command Reference /ssl SSL Processor Menu [Main Menu] info stats cfg boot maint diff apply revert paste help exit Information menu Statistics menu Configuration menu Boot menu Maintenance menu Show pending config changes Apply pending config changes Revert pending config changes Restore saved config with key Show command help Exit [global command. boot Go to the Boot level of the SSL Processor menu. maint Go to the Maintenance level of the SSL Processor menu. For example: Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. see page 540. Use this command to undo configuration parameters set since last apply command. diff Shows any pending configuration changes. For details. For details. For details. January 2006 535 . always [global command] [global command] [global command] [global command] [global command] available] Table 11-1 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage info Go to the Information level of the SSL Processor menu. revert Remove pending configuration changes.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cfg Go to the Configuration level of the SSL Processor menu. For details.

January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. help Displays a summary of the global commands.0. you need to provide the password phrase you specified when selecting to include the private keys in the configuration dump. /ssl/info SSL Performance information menu [Information Menu] servers certs hsm sslvpn users ipsec ippool ip sys licenses access kick isdlist local ethernet ports events Show configured SSL servers Show configured certificates Show local HSM information Show configured VPNs Show logged in SSL VPN portal users Show logged in IPSEC users Show ip pool allocations Find information about an IP address Show system configuration Show SSL VPN portal license usage Print the access rules of an SSL VPN portal user Kick an SSL VPN portal user Show all iSDs and their operational status Show local iSD information Show local ethernet status information Show local port(s) information Inspect Events menu 536 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 11-1 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage paste Lets you restore a saved configuration that includes private keys. exit Leave the SSL Processor menu. Before pasting the configuration.

No key has been defined. Revocation: Automatic CRL: URL to retrieve CRL from = LDAP DN used for bind/authentication = Password to use when to authenticate = Refresh interval = 1d List of accepted signers of CRLs = Enable automatic retrieval = disabled hsm Displays information related to the HSM card(s) on the iSD310-SSL FIPS device to which you are currently connected.2 Command Reference Table 11-2 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage servers Displays the current SSL server settings.. certs Displays the certificate name.. January 2006 537 .---------------- ipsec [<vpnid> [<prefix>]] Show number of IPSEC users logged-in. Validate: key or certificate not defined..---. including SSL specific settings for each configured virtual SSL server. No key has been defined. Information about the current security mode (Extended Security mode or FIPS mode) in the iSD310-SSL FIPS cluster is displayed. For example: Number of currently logged in users: 0 VPN Id User Login -----. and key size for each installed certificate. For example: Certificate 1: Certificate name = No certificate information. For example: Number of active ipsec sessions for all VPNs: 0 ippool [<vpnid>] Displays the IP pool allocations.0. expiration date. users Shows all logged in VPN portal users.Variables.. Information related to the subject of the certificate is also displayed. sslvpn Show the configured VPNs. HSM information is only displayed when you are using the iSD310-SSL FIPS model. as well as user login information (SO or USER) for each HSM card on the iSD310-SSL FIPS device.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. -------------. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. serial number.----Source IP Access Group:Profile.

0.0 IP 0. .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0 Default gateway address = 0.71 License = IPSEC user sessions: 10 TPS: 300 SSL user sessions: 10 Default gateway address = 10. licenses [<vpn_ID>] Show the SSL VPN port licenses. For example: Global License Pools VPN Used Size -----------------------------------------------------SSL 0 10 IPSEC 0 10 access <vpnid> <username> Display the access rules for an SSL Portal user.0. kick <vpnid> <username> Kick an SSL VPN user. January 2006 .10.0 not allocated from IP pool sys Shows the system configuration.10.0. 538 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. For example (in part): System: Management IP (MIP) address = 10.0.72 iSD Host 1: Type of the iSD = master IP address = 10.255.10.255.0.2 Command Reference Table 11-2 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP_address> Display information about a specific IP address. For example: SSL >> Information# ip Enter IP to search for: 0.69 Ports = 1 Hardware platform = 2424S Host Routes: No items configured Host Interface 1: IP address = 10.10. .0.71 Network mask = 255.10.10.0.0 VLAN tag id = 0 Mode = failover Host Interface Routes: No items configured Interface Ports: 1 .10.10.

9 Kb) TX bytes:205486 (200. For example: SSL >> Information# isdlist IP addr type MIP Local cpu(%) mem(%) 10.71 master * * 2 52 op up local Displays the current software version.10. If more than one network is configured in the cluster. An asterisk (*) in the Local column indicates the particular iSD to which you have connected.10.6 Kb) Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. For example: I/f 1: RX packets:3438 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 I/f 1: TX packets:2738 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 I/f 1: RX bytes:220060 (214. RX packets: the total number of received packets TX packets: the total number of transmitted packets errors: packets lost due to error dropped: error due to lack of resources overruns: error due to lack of resources frame: error due to malformed packets carrier: error due to lack of carrier collisions: number of packet collisions Note: A non-zero collision value may indicate an incorrect configuration of the Ethernet autonegotiation. the information displayed relates to the iSD host in the cluster that currently is in control of the MIP. IP address. master/slave assignments.71 MAC address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:6f ethernet Displays statistics for the Ethernet network interface card (NIC) on the particular iSD host to which you have connected. For example: SSL >> Information# local Alteon iSD SSL Hardware platform: 2424S Software version: 5. ethernet statistics for the respective network is displayed.0.34 Up time: 11 days 1 hour 52 minutes IP address: 10. January 2006 539 . memory usage. iSD hardware platform. up time (since last boot). An asterisk (*) in the MIP column indicates which iSD in the cluster is currently is control of the Management IP. If you have connected to the MIP address.10. and Ethernet MAC address for the particular iSD host to which you have connected.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. and operational status for all the iSDs in the cluster. CPU usage.0.10.2 Command Reference Table 11-2 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage isdlist Displays the IP addresses. the information displayed relates to the iSD host in the cluster that currently is in control of the MIP. If you have connected to the MIP address.

see page 540. mode = full events Go to the Inspect events menu. /ssl/info/events SSL Performance Menu [Events Menu] alarms . If the link is up. speed = 1000. alarm ID number. alarm name. autoneg = on. For details. sender.Dump the event log file to a TFTP/FTP/SFTP server Table 11-3 SSL Performance Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage alarms Displays all alarms in the active alarm list by their main attributes: severity level.2 Command Reference Table 11-2 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage ports Displays the status of the local Ethernet interface (NIC) ports on the particular iSD host to which you have connected. the configured values for speed and duplex mode are shown instead. as well as a file name. For each port. link status (up/down) and Ethernet autonegotiation setting (on/off) is shown. and cause. Specify the IP address or host name of the TFTP server. If the link is down and autonegotiation is set to off. the information displayed relates to the iSD host in the cluster that currently is in control of the MIP. 540 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0. current values for speed (10/100/1000) and duplex mode (half/full) are also shown. January 2006 . download <protocol> <IP_address | hostname> <filename> Transmits the event log file from the iSD cluster to a file on a TFTP server.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For example: SSL >> Information# ports Port 1: link = up. If you have connected to the MIP address.List all pending alarms download . date and time when triggered.

as well as the number of active request sessions. and the total number of completed request sessions. January 2006 541 . Histograms. see page 545. To view menu options.0. To view menu options. dump Displays cluster-wide SSL statistics for each virtual SSL server in the cluster.2 Command Reference /ssl/stats SSL Performance Statistics menu [Statistics Menu] sslstats ipsec aaa dump SSL stats IPSEC stats AAA specific statistics Dump all information Table 11-4 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route) Command Syntax and Usage sslstats Go to the SSL statistics menu. see page 542. are not included in the output Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. and the total number of established SSL client connections as accumulated values for all virtual SSL servers in the cluster are also displayed. see page 548. To view menu options. The total number of initiated SSL client connections. ipsec Go to the IPSEC statistics menu. however. aaa Go to the AAA specific statistics.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

Total completed request sessions sslaccept . tpshisto Display the total number of cluster-wide TPS histograms for all servers. clear Erase all statistics for all IPs.Local statistics for each isdhost clear . activesess Display the number of currently active requests. To view menu options. sslconnect Display the total number of successful SSL connections.2 Command Reference /ssl/stats/sslstats SSL Performance Menu [SSL stats Menu] vpn . clihisto Display the total number of cluster-wide client data histograms for all servers. 542 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. server <srever_number> Displays the cluster-wide statistics for SSL servers.Cluster SSL Server statistics local .cluster wide server data histograms for all servers Table 11-5 SSL Performance Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vpn <VPN_number> Displays the cluster-wide statistics for SSL VPN.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .Total completed SSL accept sslconnect .Cluster-wide TPS histograms for all servers clihisto .cluster wide client data histograms for all servers srvhisto . see page 543. local Go to the Local SSL Statistics Menu.Clear all statistics for all IPs activesess . For example: active_sessions : 0 totalsess Display the total number of completed request sessions.Cluster SSL VPN statistics server .0. sslaccept Display the total number of completed SSL request sessions.Total completed SSL connect tpshisto .Number of currently active request sessions totalsess .

**** Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.ISD local client byte/s histos for all servers/ISDs . To view menu options.ISD local license statistics . tpshisto Display ISD local TPS histograms for all servers/ISDs. clihisto Display ISD local client data histograms for all servers and ISDs. January 2006 543 .0} dump Display all local statistical information.Dump all information Table 11-6 SSL Perfomance: SSL Local Statistics Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage isdhost <host_number> Go to the ISD local SSL Statistics Menu.Overview of isdhost local statistics .ISD local server data byte/s histos for all servers/ISDs .2 Command Reference Table 11-5 SSL Performance Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage srvhisto Display the total number of cluster-wide server data histograms for all servers. /ssl/stats/sslstats/local SSL Performance SSL Local Statistics Menu [Local SSL isdhost overview tpshisto clihisto srvhisto license dump Statistics Menu] .ISD local SSL server statistics menu .ISD local TPS histograms for all servers/ISDs . see page 544. overview Display the overall of the isdhost local statistics. For example: **** License stats at ISD number '1' License Limit reached times tps {ok. srvhisto Display ISD local server data histograms for all servers and ISDs.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. license Display local ISD license statistics.

0. dump Displays all statistical information.2 Command Reference /ssl/stats/sslstats/local/isdhost SSL Performance: Single ISD SSL Statistics Menu [Single ISD SSL Stats 1 Menu] server .Dump all information Table 11-7 SSL Perfomance: Single ISD SSL Statistics Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage server Displays statistics for the local ISD SSL server. srvhosto Displays ISD local server histograms for all servers. clihisto Displays ISD local client data histograms for all servers. 544 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.ISD local server byte/s histograms for all servers dump .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.ISD local TPS histograms for all servers clihisto .ISD local client byte/s histograms for all servers srvhisto .ISD local SSL server stats tpshisto . January 2006 . tpshisto Displays ISD local TPS histograms for all servers.

Clear all ipsec statistics for all IPs activesess .Total decoded kBytes dec . failedsess Display the number of failed IPSEC sessions.Decoded kB/sec last minute sesshisto . To view menu options. January 2006 545 .Cluster-wide ipsec decrypt histograms for all servers Table 11-8 IPSEC Statistics Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vpn <VPN_number> Displays cluster IPSEC server statistics. see page 546.Cluster-wide ipsec session histograms for all servers enchisto . dectot Display the total number of decoded kBytes.Cluster IPSEC Server statistics local .Local statistics for each isdhost clear . enc Display the total number of encoded kBytes in the last 60 seconds.Cluster-wide ipsec encrypt histograms for all servers dechisto . activesess Display the number of currently active IPSEC sessions. clear Clear all IPSEC statistics.Encoded kB/sec last minute dectot .Total completed ipsec sessions failedsess .Total failed ipsec sessions enctot . local Go to the local statistics menu. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0. enctot Display the total number of encoded kBytes.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference /ssl/stats/ipsec IPSEC Statistics menu [IPSEC stats Menu] vpn .Total encoded kBytes enc .Number of currently active ipsec sessions totalsess . totalsess Display the number of completed IPSEC sessions. dec Display the total number of decoded kBytes in the last 60 seconds.

Dump all information statistics histograms histograms histograms menu for all VPNs/ISDs for all VPNs/ISDs for all VPNs/ISDs Table 11-9 SSL Perfomance: Local IPSEC Statistics Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage isdhost Go to the ISD Local IPSEC server statistics menu. dechisto Display the Cluster-wide ipsec decrypt histograms for all servers. sesshisto Displays the local IPSEC session histograms for all VPNs and ISDs. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see page 547.ISD local IPSEC server . To view menu options.0.ISD local ipsec encrypt . 546 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.ISD local ipsec decrypt . enchisto Displays the local IPSEC encryption histograms for all VPNs and ISDs.ISD local ipsec session . /ssl/stats/ipsec/local SSL Performance: Local IPSEC Statistics Menu [Local IPSEC isdhost sesshisto enchisto dechisto dump Statistics Menu] . dump Display all IPSEC statistical information. enchisto Display the Cluster-wide ipsec encrypt histograms for all servers. dechisto Displays the local IPSEC decryption histograms for all VPNs and ISDs.2 Command Reference Table 11-8 IPSEC Statistics Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage sesshisto Display the Cluster-wide ipsec session histograms for all servers.

2 Command Reference /ssl/stats/ipsec/local/isdhost SSL Performance: Single IPSEC ISD Statistics Menu [Single ISD IPSEC Stats 1 Menu] vpn .ISD local IPSEC server stats activesess .0. January 2006 547 . activesess Display the locally active IPSEC sessions for all VPNs. dectot Display the total kBytes decoded for all VPNs.Locally total ipsec encoded kBytes all VPNs enc .ISD local ipsec sess histograms for all VPNs enchisto . enctot Display the total kBytes encoded for all VPNs.Locally total ipsec sessions all VPNs failedsess . Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. failedsess Display the failed IPSEC sessions for all VPNs.Dump all information Table 11-10 SSL Perfomance: Single IPSEC ISD Statistics Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vpn <VPN_number> Display the ISD local IPSEC server statistics.Locally total ipsec decoded kBytes all VPNs dec .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Locally failed ipsec sessions. sesshisto Display the ISD local IPSEC session histograms for all VPNs. dec Display the locally decoded kBytes for all VPNs.ISD local ipsec encrypt histograms for all VPNs dechisto . enchisto Display the ISD local IPSEC encrypted histograms for all VPNs. all VPNs enctot . totalsess Display the total of locally active IPSEC sessions for all VPNs.Locally ipsec decoded kB/sec last minute all VPNs sesshisto . enc Display the locally encoded kBytes for all VPNs.Locally active ipsec sessions all VPNs totalsess .ISD local ipsec decrypt histograms for all VPNs dump .Locally ipsec encoded kB/sec last minute all VPNs dectot .

ISD local authentication statistics (per VPN) dump .2 Command Reference Table 11-10 SSL Perfomance: Single IPSEC ISD Statistics Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage dechisto Display the ISD local ipsec decrypt histograms for all VPNs.SSL offload menu cert .Create test vpn.Restore configuration from TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP server dump .Dump configuration on screen for copy-and-paste 548 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. dump Display all ISD statistics.0.Dump all information Table 11-11 AAA Statistics Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage total <VPN_ID> Display the Cluster-wide authentication statistics for each VPN.Quick vpn setup wizard sys .Language support ptcfg . dump Display all AA statistics. /ssl/cfg SSL Performance Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] ssl . isdhost </cfg/sys/host number> Display the ISD local authentication statistics for each VPN.VPN menu test . portal and certificate quick .System-wide parameter menu lang . January 2006 .Cluster-wide authentication statistics (per VPN) isdhost .Certificate menu vpn .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. /ssl/stats/aaa AAA Statistics Menu [AAA Statistics Menu] total .Backup configuration to TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP server gtcfg .

see page 573. lang Go to the Language Support menu. To view menu options. see page 649. To view menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. see page 551. see page 554. vpn Go to the VPN menu. January 2006 549 . portal and certificate.0.0 VPN user name: Test_vpn VPN password: smith Do you want to configure IPsec? (yes/no) [no]: n Do you want to configure Netdirect? (yes/no) [no]: n Creating VPN 1 Creating Linkset 1 Name: base-links Creating Authentication 1 Calling /cfg/vpn 1/aaa/auth 1/local/add Test_vpn smith test Creating Group 1 Name: test Creating Access rule 1 Added base-links to linkset Created /cfg/cert 2 Use 'apply' to activate. To view menu options. cert Go to the Certificate menu. sys Go to the System-wide parameter menu. quick Create a VPN configuration using command prompts.0. test Create a test VPN. see page 649. To view menu options. For example: SSL >> Configuration# test Enter virtual IP address of test portal: 0.2 Command Reference Table 11-12 SSL Perfomance Configuration Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ssl Go to the SSL offload menu. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. To view menu options.

You need to provide the password phrase you specified when saving the configuration to the TFTP server. January 2006 . including private keys and certificates. private keys are encrypted using the wrap key that was generated when the first HSM card in the cluster was initialized. You are required to specify a password phrase before the information is sent to the TFTP server. 550 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. the certificate administrator must enter the passphrase that was defined by him or her using the /cfg/sys/user/caphrase command. NOTE – Note 1: If you have fully separated the Administrator user role from the Certificate Administrator user role. NOTE – Note: If you have fully separated the Administrator user role from the Certificate Administrator user role (by removing the admin user from the certadmin group). dump Display the configuration on-screen for a copy and paste operation. When a configuration backup is restored by using the gtcfg command. The configuration can later be restored by using the gtcfg command.0. the certificate administrator must enter the correct passphrase.transparently to the user. gtcfg Restores a configuration. NOTE – Note 2: When using the ptcfg command on an iSD310-SSL FIPS. from a TFTP server. The password phrase is used to protect the private keys in the configuration. If you restore the configuration by using the gtcfg command. you will be prompted for the password phrase you have specified.2 Command Reference Table 11-12 SSL Perfomance Configuration Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ptcfg Saves the current configuration.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the export passphrase defined by the certificate administrator is used to protect the private keys in the configuration . including private keys and certificates. to a TFTP server.

For example: SSL >> Configuration# test Enter virtual IP address of test portal: 0. To view menu options. test Create a test VPN.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/ssl SSL Configuration Server Menu [SSL Menu] server test quick . see page 552.SSL server menu . January 2006 551 . Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0. quick Create a VPN configuration using command prompts. portal and certificate.Create test server and certificate .0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0 VPN user name: Test_vpn VPN password: smith Do you want to configure IPsec? (yes/no) [no]: n Do you want to configure Netdirect? (yes/no) [no]: n Creating VPN 1 Creating Linkset 1 Name: base-links Creating Authentication 1 Calling /cfg/vpn 1/aaa/auth 1/local/add Test_vpn smith test Creating Group 1 Name: test Creating Access rule 1 Added base-links to linkset Created /cfg/cert 2 Use 'apply' to activate.0.Quick server setup wizard Table 11-13 SSL Configuration Server Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage server Go to the SSl Server menu.

January 2006 . rip <IP_address> Set the actual server IP address. vips <IP_address> Enter the virtual IP address for the server. trace Go to the Trace menu. proxy on|off Set the proxy mode.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 552 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.To view menu options. type <generic/http/socks> Set the port type. see page 554. standalone on|off Set the standalone mode.0.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/ssl/server SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu [Server 1 Menu] name vips standalone port rip rport type proxy trace ssl tcp adv del ena dis Set server name Set IP addr(s) of server Set standalone mode Set listen port of server Set real server IP addr Set real server port Set type (generic/http/socks) Set transparent proxy mode (on/off) Traffic trace menu SSL settings menu TCP endpoint settings menu Advanced settings menu Remove virtual server Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Table 11-14 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Enter the name of the server. rport <integer> Set the actual server port number. port <integer> Set the listen port for the server.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. see page 555.0. ena enabled|disabled Enable the virtual server. adv Go to the Advanced settings menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see page 557. tcp Go to the TCP endpoints menu. To view menu options.2 Command Reference Table 11-14 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ssl Go to the SSL Settings menu. del Remove the virtual server. To view menu options. see page 556. dis enabled|diabled Disable the virtual server. To view menu options. January 2006 553 .

traceroute <hostname> Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network.org/tcpdump_man. tcpdump Create a traffic dump.0.html. Information on creating dump patterns can be found at http://www. dnslookup <hostname> Lookup a hostname in DNS.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/trace SSL Configuration Server-specific Trace Menu [Trace Menu] ssldump tcpdump ping dnslookup traceroute Create traffic dump Create traffic dump Ping through backend interface Lookup a name in DNS through backend interface traceroute through backend interface Table 11-15 SSL Configuration Server-specific Trace Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ssldump Create a traffic dump.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.org/tcpdump_man.html. Information on creating dump patterns can be found at http://www.tcpdump.tcpdump. ping <hostname> Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. 554 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. January 2006 .

! permanently deletes the ciphers from the list (e. Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e.Set certificate verification level ciphers .Set cipher list ena .0. ciphers Set the cipher list.g. cachain <integerlist> Set the list of CA chain certificates.Set SSL cache size cachettl . cachesize <integer> Set the SSL cache size.Set protocol version verify . SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms).deletes the ciphers from the list.Set list of CA chain certificates protocol . cachettl <integer> Set the SSL cache timeout (in seconds). The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e. This option doesn't add any new ciphers it just moves matching existing ones. January 2006 555 . + moves the ciphers to the end of the list.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. . Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !. !RSA). Separate the signer list using commas. verify none|optional|require Set the verification level of the certificate.Set server certificate cachesize .g. protocol <issl2/ssl3/ssl23/tls1> Set the protocol version.Set list of accepted signers of client certificates cachain .Set SSL cache timeout cacerts . but the ciphers can be added again by later options. cacerts <integerlist> Set the list of authorized signers of client certificates.g. Separate the list using commas.Disable SSL Table 11-16 SSL Configuration Server-specific SSL Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage cert unset|set Create a server certificate.Enable SSL dis .2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/ssl SSL Configuration Server-specific SSL Menu [SSL Settings Menu] cert .or +. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. Additionally the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length. SSLv3:TLSv1). .

dis yes|no Disable SSL.Set crecbuf . 556 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 11-16 SSL Configuration Server-specific SSL Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ena yes|no Enable SSL.Set ssendbuf . 1-2147483647). srecbuf on|off Set the server TCP receive buffer size (in bytes). crecbuf auto|<2000 to 100000> Set the client TCP receive buffer size (in bytes). 1-2147483647).Set client client server server client client server server TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP write timeout keep alive timeout write timeout connect timeout send buffer size receive buffer size send buffer size receive buffer size Table 11-17 SSL Configuration Server-specific TCP Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage cwrite <integer> Set the client TCP write timeout (in seconds. 1-2147483647). swrite <integer> Set the server TCP write timeout (in seconds.Set ckeep . csendbuf auto|<2000 to 100000> Set the client TCP send buffer size (in bytes). sconnect <integer> Set the server TCP connect timeout (in seconds.Set srecbuf .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set csendbuf .0. /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/tcp SSL Configuration Server-specific TCP Menu [TCP Settings Menu] cwrite .Set sconnect .Set swrite . 1-2147483647). ssendbuf <generic/http/socks> Set the server TCP send buffer size (in bytes). January 2006 . ckeep <integer> Set the client TCP keep alive timeout (in seconds.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. loadbalanc Go to the Load Balancing menu. see page 559. To view the menu options. January 2006 557 . see page 558.0. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. To view the menu options. separated by commas. To view the menu options. see page 560. blockstrin <string> Set the strings to block. sslconnect Go to the SSL Connect menu.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv SSL Configuration Server-specific Advanced Menu [Advanced Settings string blockstrin loadbalanc sslconnect Menu] String menu Set strings to block Load balancing menu SSL connect menu Table 11-18 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage string Go to the String menu.

connect Special query. if-range. location. delete. content-type. accept-charset. expires. put. etag. post. via. content-location. transfer-encoding. max-forwards. accept-ranges. January 2006 . del string<string_number> Delete the string. params. accept-encoding. server. negate on|off Set a negative match scheme. www-authenticate. vary. cookie. other. content-range. separated by commas. if-unmodified-since. content-language. from. get. content-base. warning. allow. if-none-match. cache-control.0. unknown. proxy-authorization.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/string SSL Configuration Server Advanced String Menu [LB String 1 Menu] match location icase negate del Set string to match Set locations to perform the match in Set ignore case in to match Set negate the result of the match Remove string Table 11-19 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage match <string>|* Enter the string to match. authorization. header Methods options. For example: SSL >> LB String 1# match Current value: <not set> Enter match string (may contain *): location <locationlist> Set the match string locations. The current strings are excluded (on) or included (off). useragent. date. cookie-override Headers accept. x-forwarded-for. range. x-ssl icase on|off Set the string match as case respective yes (on) or no (off). pragma. last-modified. age. if-match. if-modified-since. set-cookie. proxy-authenticate. content-encoding. head. content-md5. content-length. host. accept-language. upgrade. proxyconnection. trace. keep-alive. 558 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. cookie2. connection. public. referer.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. retry-after. Possible values are: Macros url.

Backend servers menu ena . metric hash|roundrobin|leastconn Set the load balancing metric. To view the menu options.Set persistence strategy cookie . To view the menu options.Set health check type script .2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Menu [Load Balancing Settings Menu] type . persistenc none|cookie|session Set the persistence strategy. script Go to the heath check script menu. To view the menu options. interval <integer> Set the health check interval. remotessl Go to the Remote SSL connection menu. see page 565.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Note that this menu is accessible only when persistenc is set to “cookie”. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. see page 560. To view the menu options. see page 562.Remote SSL connect menu backend .Enable load balancing dis . see page 563.Health check script menu interval . backend Go to the Backend Servers menu. cookie Go to the Cookie settings menu.Set load balancing metric health .Cookie settings menu metric . January 2006 559 .Set health check interval (s) remotessl . health none|tcp|ssl|auto|script Set the health check type.Disable load balancing Table 11-20 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage type all|<string> Set the load balancing type.Set load balancing type persistenc .0.

Set cookie value length Table 11-21 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Cookie Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage mode insert | passive | rewrite Sets the cookie load balancing mode.Set cookie domain .Set cookie mode . dis enable|disable Disable load balancing. /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ cookie SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Cookie Menu [Cookie Settings mode name domain expires expiresdel localvips offset length Menu] . localvips Opens the Local VIPs menu. domain <domain_name> Sets the cookie domain name.Set cookie expires .Set cookie expires delta .2 Command Reference Table 11-20 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ena enable|disable Enable load balancing.Set cookie value offset .0. name <cookie_name> Sets the cookie name. expires <date_time> Sets the cookie expiration date and time.Set cookie name . For more information on this menu refer to page 562. January 2006 .Configure other local VIPs .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. expiresdel <0(session)-2147483647> Sets the cookie expiration delta value. 560 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.

0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 11-21 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Cookie Menu Options (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage offset <1-64> Sets the cookie value offset. length <0-64> Sets the cookie length Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. January 2006 561 .

2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ cookie/localvips Local VIP Configuration Menu [Local VIPs Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number Table 11-22 Local VIP Configuration Menu Command Syntax and Usage list Lists all configured values.List all values del .0.Delete a value by number add . insert <entry_index.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. add <ip_address> Adds an entry by IP address.Insert a new value move .Move a value by number 562 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Add a new value insert . ip_address> Adds an entry at a specific point by index and IP address. January 2006 . /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ script SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Health Script Menu [Health Check Script Menu] list . destination_index> Moves an entry from the source index to the destination index. del <entry_index> Deletes the entry indicated by the index value. move <source_index.

January 2006 563 .Set accepted ciphers for ssl connect verify . insert <position> <command> <timeout> <argument> Insert a new value.0.Verify server menu Table 11-24 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage protocol aissl2|ssl3|ssl23|tls1 Set the protocol version. /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ remotessl SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Menu [Remote SSL Connect Settings Menu] protocol .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. move <value> <value> Exchange one value for another. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. del <index> Delete a specific value.Set client certificate ciphers . add <command> <timeout> <argument> Add a new health script.2 Command Reference Table 11-23 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Health Script Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list Display all values.Set protocol version cert . 1 to 1500> Set the certificate number. cert <integer.

The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e.g. Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e. . SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms).deletes the ciphers from the list. see page 564.or +. but the ciphers can be added again by later options. Additionally the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length verify Go to the Verify Server menu. !RSA). January 2006 . Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set list of accepted signers of server's certificate Table 11-25 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Verification Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage verify none|require Set the ertification verification level. This option doesn't add any new ciphers it just moves matching existing ones.Set certificate verification level commonname .2 Command Reference Table 11-24 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ciphers <string> Set the accepted ciphers for SSL connection. ! permanently delets the ciphers from the list (e.g. + moves the ciphers to the end of the list.0. commonname <name> Set the server common name. SSLv3:TLSv1).Set server common name cacerts . . For example: SSL >> Remote SSL Connect Verify Settings# commonname Current value: [old_server_name] Give common name of server: <new_server_name> 564 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.g. /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ remotessl/verify SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Verification Menu [Remote SSL Connect Verify Settings Menu] verify . To view the menu options.

sslconnect on|off Set the SSL connection option.Set perform SSL connect if enabled for server remote .Set host name of remote server remotessl .Set load balancing strings lbop . January 2006 565 . /ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ backend SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Backend Server Menu [Backend Server 1 Menu] ip .Set IP addr of backend server port . port <port_number> Set the backend server port number. remote true|false Set the server as remote.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. rname <hostname> Set hostname of the remote server.Set server is remote rname .Enable backend server dis .Set remote site is ssl lbstrings .Set string load balancing operation del .Disable backend server Table 11-26 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Backend Server Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP_address> Set theIP address of the backend server. separated by commas.Remove backend server ena . Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Set backend server port sslconnect . as required.2 Command Reference Table 11-25 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Verification Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage cacerts <integer_list> Enter the certificate numbers.0.

Show how key is stored del .Show certificate short information subject .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Generate certificate request sign .Import key and certificate with TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP export .Set certificate name cert .Show certificate information info .Show key size keyinfo .Sign a certificate request test . /ssl/cfg/cert SSL Configuration Certificate Menu [Certificate 1 Menu] name . dis enable|disable Disable the backend server.Display certificate and key show .Set certificate key .Check if key and certificate match keysize .2 Command Reference Table 11-26 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Backend Server Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage remotessl true|false Set the remote site as SSL.Remove certificate 566 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Revocation menu genkey . separated by a comma.Set private key revoke .Show certificate subject information validate . lbstrings <integers> Set the load balance strings. lbop any|all|one|none Set the string load balancing operation.Export certificate and key with TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP display . del Remove the backend server.0.Generate signed client/server certificate request .Generate private key gensigned . ena enable|disable Enable the backend server. January 2006 .Generate test certificate and key import .

For example: Paste the key.. For example: Paste the certificate.. genkey 512|1024|2048|4096 Generate a private key. press Enter to create a new line. January 2006 567 .0.. gensigned <key> <certificate_number> Generate a certificate." (without the quotation marks) to terminate.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. and then type ".2 Command Reference Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Enter the name of the certificate. see page 571.. and then type ". > key <pasted_key_content> Paste the copied key. press Enter to create a new line. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. To view the menu options. > revoke Go to the Revoke menu." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. cert <pasted_certificate_content> Paste the content of a copied certificate.

SSL >> Certificate 1# request The combined length of the following parameters may not exceed 225 bytes. Country Name (2 letter code): CA State or Province Name (full name): Ontario Locality Name (eg. sign <key> <certificate_number> Sign a certificate.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. The private key will be lost unless you 'apply' or save it elsewhere using 'export'.ca Key size (512/1024/2048/4096) [1024]: 1024 Request a CA certificate (y/n) [n]: y Specify challenge password (y/n) [n]: n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST----MIIBvjCCAScCAQAwfjELMAkGA1UEBhMCQ0ExCzAJBgNVBAgTAk9OMRAwDgYDVQQH EwdPdHRhd2VhMQ4wDAYDVQQKEwVOb1RlbDEOMAwGA1UECxMFTWFpbnQxETAPBgNV BAMTCE5vVGVsLTEyMR0wGwYJKoZIhvcNAQkBFg5tYWludEBub3RlbC5jYTCBnzAN BgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEA2LJNQnjDxHXm1bunZF39o/1CJ7egEupd gXaIiDt1xQ5kWNlCcIhXrsksrpAOss/NMy2DNLmNd/31BO8XSvuZWs6LJxznZyBC 6WcSmOa6r96CnsvPPi/jIqAZQMbklwclH5Qa/JjSWuaoVdlVOAuhe58PqyQketXm 58w8n+Iy+a0CAwEAAaAAMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBAUAA4GBAMMhwai0XLkL+YT3qBBo tmtTL7DgH/7czR97lgXsDawZOWaiYq4tAEBSr+Ap1qxAqgS4VJxrjBZIYT6xQW6z MvHE20s+Reaf9cX9OePTvaSH9SUSKz8QNhPLUdBo7LOURUaF7aN5IWPBezGQwgjp Rxxf+chfXa7M8i7VdY9YyAHA -----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST----Use 'apply' to store the private key in the iSD until the signed certificate is entered. city): Ottawa Organization Name (eg.0. section): MaintCommon Name (eg. company): NoTel Organizational Unit Name (eg. your name or your server's hostname): NoTel-12 Email Address: maint@notel. January 2006 . 568 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage request Generate a certicate request.

ca Valid for days [365]: 200 Valid for days [365]: 200 Key size (512/1024/2048/4096) [1024]: 1024 Test key and certificate added. FTP server not found. company): NoTel Organizational Unit Name (eg. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# test The combined length of the following parameters may not exceed 225 bytes. Use 'apply' to activate.2 Command Reference Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage test Create a test certificate and key. section): Maint Common Name (eg. Country Name (2 letter code): CA State or Province Name (full name): Ontario Locality Name (eg. or connection rejected. your name or your server's hostname): NoTel-12 Email Address: maint@notel.0. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. export <proto> <server> <certfile> Export a key and certificate to a remote host. or connection rejected. import <proto> <server> <certfile> Import a remote certificate and key.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# export Select protocol (tftp/ftp/scp/sftp) [tftp]: ftp Enter hostname or IP address of server: NoTel-10 Enter export format (pem/der/net/pkcs12): pem Enter export pass phrase: <hidden_text> Reconfirm export pass phrase: <hidden_text> Enter name of combined key and certificate file on remote host: key_cert_from_NoTel-12 Error: Host not found. January 2006 569 . For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# import Select protocol (tftp/ftp/scp/sftp) [tftp]: ftp Enter hostname or IP address of server: NoTel-10 Enter filename on server: key_certificate2389 Retrieving key_certificate2389 from NoTel-10 Error: Host not found. city): Ottawa Organization Name (eg. FTP server not found.

. . For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# info Serial number: 0 (0x0) Expire: Jan 19 14:49:18 2006 GMT Certificate subject: C=CA ST=Ontario L=Ottawa O=NoTel OU=Maint CN=NoTel-12/emailAddress=maint@notel.0. .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.8E1E1EB54398437B 1NngBGmeIGxhndoR3+F4DNmYNCtH6tbVMZmmTCAu0ee9Ss9vjy6N3jXgMUy8RnfV 1dRLixDPlpAB5CwsSUBLROtvq6rhyZnwKbofz4UBon1tE33eX86uNrXGjdvPkfzD x8TrCXdcewY0W1xuPA6mnb0mHCn768fqoNd5YlXPMRbPrK/nTfvCHlfvVmHkzpw3 BrvNfqVpdijQkdv+X53gn7DbYBsFYKSLsjyZ1Dst1JFDS5W594by1P7WseRYi4Lq XPcmgZA7BtC5JV9d6Fwmd66Cois3WUxBtTeLJDFet6fr/9e3nXfa+pPyIgGGWAYE . January 2006 . info Show short-form certificate information. A9xlBRMYzppbzQVjjFK0maFRtuhIiEbexLJwTCEwfyVMk8juHvBWIQ== -----END RSA PRIVATE KEY---------BEGIN CERTIFICATE----MIID3jCCA0egAwIBAgIBADANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQQFADCBgjELMAkGA1UEBhMCQ0Ex EDAOBgNVBAgTB09udGFyaW8xDzANBgNVBAcTBk90dGF3YTEOMAwGA1UEChMFTm9U . show Show certificate information. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# display Encrypt private key (yes/no) [yes]: yes Enter export pass phrase: <hidden_text> Reconfirm export pass phrase: <hidden_text> Proc-Type: 4.ca 570 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.ENCRYPTED DEK-Info: DES-EDE3-CBC.2 Command Reference Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage display Display a certificate and key.

4.8) L/localityName (2. January 2006 571 .4.4.5.2.840.6) ST/stateOrProvinceName (2. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# del Certificate 1 will be deleted when changes are applied.1.11) CN/commonName (2.9.7) O/organizationName (2.1) validate <matched_key> <matched_certificate> Check if certificate and key are matched. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. = = = = = = = CA Ontario Ottawa NoTel Maint NoTel-12 maint@notel.3) emailAddress/emailAddress (1.5.5.10) OU/organizationalUnitName (2. keyinfo Displays how the key is stored.113549.5.4.4.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.5. del Delete the certificate and key.4. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# subject Certificate subject: C/countryName (2.2 Command Reference Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage subject Show certificate subject information. keysize Display key size (in bytes).5.ca /ssl/cfg/cert/revoke SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Menu [Revocation Menu] add addx del list rev import automatic Add decimal serial number to revocation list Add hex serial number to revocation list Cancel revocation for a serial number List revoked certificates Enter revocation list Import revocation list with TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP Automatic CRL retrieval menu Table 11-28 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage add <integer> Add a decimal serial number to the revocation list.

Set password to use when to authenticate interval .Set URL to retrieve CRL from authDN . automatic Go to the automatic retrieval menu.Set LDAP DN used for bind/authentication passwd . interval <time> Set the refresh interval. list List the revoked certificates. 572 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Disable automatic retrieval Table 11-29 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Automatic Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage url <URL> Set the URL value to retrieve the CRL. rev Paste a revocation list into another revocation list. January 2006 .Enable automatic retrieval dis .0.2 Command Reference Table 11-28 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage addx <hexidecimal_number> Add a hexidecimal number to the revocation list.Set refresh interval cacerts .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. authDN <LDAP-Distinguished-Name> Set the LDAP DN to be used for bind and authentication. passwd <string> Set the authentication password. /ssl/cfg/cert/revoke/automatic SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Automatic Menu [Automatic CRL Menu] url .Set list of accepted signers of CRLs ena . del <serial_number> Cancel the revocation of a serial number. import <proto> <server> <file> Import a remote revocation list.

To view the menu options. dis enabled|disabled Disable automatic retrieval. see page 602. see page 573. ipsec Go to the IPsec server menu. standalone on|off Set the standalone mode. Separate the lsit elements by commas ena enabled|disabled Enable automatic retrieval. server Go to the SSL server menu. /ssl/cfg/vpn SSL VPN Configuration Menu [VPN 1 Menu] ips standalone aaa server ipsec ippool portal linkset sslclient adv del Set IP addr(s) of the VPN Set standalone mode (no switch) AAA menu SSL server menu IPsec server menu IP address pool menu Portal look and feel menu Portal linkset menu SSL VPN client menu Advanced settings menu Remove VPN Table 11-30 SSL VPN Configuration Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ips <IP_address> Set the IP address of the VPN. see page 578. January 2006 573 .0. To view the menu options.2 Command Reference Table 11-29 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Automatic Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage cacerts <certificate_numbers> Create a list of accepted signers of CRLs. aaa Go to the AAA menu. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. To view the menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

see page 621. sslclient Go to the SSL VPN client menu.0. linkset Go to the Portal lonkset menu.2 Command Reference Table 11-30 SSL VPN Configuration Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ippool Go to the IP POOL menu. January 2006 . To view the menu options.To view the menu options.To view the menu options. To view the menu options. /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa SSL VPN Configuration Menu [AAA Menu] quick tg ttl auth authorder network service appspec filter group defgroup ssodomains ssoheaders radacct AAA setup wizard TunnelGuard menu Set login session TTL Authentication menu Set authentication server fallback order Network access menu Service access menu Application specific menu Client filter menu Group menu Set default group Single-Sign on enabled domains menu Single-Sign on headers menu RADIUS accounting menu Table 11-31 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage quick <IP_address> AAA setup wizard. To view the menu options. 574 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. see page 615.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see page 625. see page 627. del Remove the VPN. adv Go to the Advanced Settings menu. see page 619. portal Go to the Portal look and feel menu.

see page 597. see page 578. To view the menu options. To view the menu options. authorder <list_of_servers> Set the authetication server fallback order. filter Go to the Client Filter menu.To view the menu options. service Go to the Service Access menu. radacct Go to the Radius Accounting menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 575 . see page 576. see page 582. see page 584. appsec Go to the Application Specific menu. To view the menu options. see page 588. ssoheaders Go to the Single Sugn-on Headers menu. To view the menu options. Use a comma to separate entries. group Go to the Group menu.0. ssodomains Go to the Single sign-on enabled domains menu. see page 599. see page 585. To view the menu options. see page 589.To view the menu options. ttl <TTL for idle sessions (max 31d. To view the menu options. min 2m)> Set the login session TTL. To view the menu options. defgroup <name_of_group> Set the default group.2 Command Reference Table 11-31 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage tg Go to the TunnelGuard menu. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. network Go to the Network Access menu. To view the menu options. see page 597. auth Go to the Authentication menu.

2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/tg SSL VPN Configuration TunnelGuard Menu [TG Menu] ena dis quick recheck action retry list loglevel Enable TunnelGuard Disable TunnelGuard Quick TunnelGuard setup wizard Set recheck interval Set fail action Set UDP retry interval List SRS rules Set TunnelGuard applet loglevel Table 11-32 SSL VPN Configuration AAA TunnelGuard Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ena enable|disable Enable TunnelGuard.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 . dis enable|disable Disable TunnelGuard. 576 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0.

loglevel <string> Set the TunnelGuard applet log level. Which action do you want to use for TunnelGuard failure? (teardown/restricted) [restricted]: restricted Do you want to create a tunnelguard test user? (yes/no) [yes]: yes Enabling TunnelGuard Creating Linkset 1 Name: tg_passed This Linkset just prints the TG result Creating Linkset 2 Name: tg_failed This Linkset just prints the TG result Adding test SRS rule srs-rule-test This rule check for the presence of the file C:\tunnelguard\tg. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.txt Creating Group 1 Name: tunnelguard Creating Extended Profile 1 Giving full access when tg passed Creating Access rule 1 Creating Extended Profile 2 Giving no access when tg failed Using SRS rule: srs-rule-test Creating Authentication 1 Adding user 'tg' with password 'tg' Use 'diff' to view pending changes.0. or left in restricted mode with limited access.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. the session can be teardown.2 Command Reference Table 11-32 SSL VPN Configuration AAA TunnelGuard Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage quick <TTL for idle sessions (max 31d. action teardown|restricted Set the Fail action. 1-65535> Set the UDP retry interval. January 2006 577 . For example: SSL >> TG# quick In the event that the TunnelGuard checks fails on a client. retry <seconds. and 'apply' to commit recheck <seconds> Set the recheck interval. min 2m)> Use the Quick TunnelGuard setup wizard. list List the SRS rules.

The menu is available only if the type is Radius (# type radius). name <string> Set the authentication name.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view the menu options. cert.Set auth display name domain . ntlm. display <string> Set the authentication display name.Advanced settings menu del . January 2006 . The default is local.Set authentication mechanism name . see page 579. Creating Authentication 1 Select one of radius. you are prompted to create an authentication if one does not already exist.Set windows domain for backend single sign-on radius .Set auth name display .0. 578 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth menu level. ldap.0.0.0 Port (default is 1812): 1812 Enter shared secret: shared Leaving: RADIUS servers menu Enter vendor id [alteon]: alteon Enter vendor type [1]: 1 Leaving: RADIUS settings menu -----------------------------------------------------------[Authentication 1 Menu] type .Remove Authentication Table 11-33 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage type radius|ldap|ntlm|siteminder|cert|rsa|local Set the authentication scheme. radius <list_of_servers> Go to the Radius menu. siteminder. rsa or local: radius Auth name: Authentication_1 Entering: RADIUS settings menu Entering: RADIUS servers menu IP Address to add: 0.RADIUS settings menu adv . domain <string> Set the current windows domain for backend single sign-on.

the authentication type must be set to radius. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. del Remove the authentication. see page 582. 1 to 1000 seconds> Set the Radius server timeout. January 2006 579 . To view the menu options. /ssl/vpn/aaa/auth/type radius. [RADIUS Menu] servers vendorid vendortype timeout sessiontim macro RADIUS servers menu Set vendor id for group attribute Set vendor type for group attribute Set RADIUS server timeout Session Timeout menu User-defined Macro menu Table 11-34 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Radius Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage servers Go to the Radius servers menu. vendortype <vendortype> Set the vendor type. To view the menu options.0. sessiontim Go to the Sessiontim menu. see page 580. vendorid <string> Set the switch vendor ID. For example.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 11-33 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage adv Go to the Advanced menu. timeout <integer. see page 581. To view the menu options. see page 580. macro Go to the Macro menu. /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius menu level. To view the menu options.

Add a new value insert .Set vendor type for session timeout attribute ena .0. del <index_number> Delete a server value by name.Insert a new value move .Set vendor id for session timeout attribute vendortype . default=1812> <secret> Add a new value (server). move <value> <value> Move a value position in the list.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius/servers SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Servers Menu [RADIUS Servers Menu] list .Move a value by number Table 11-35 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Radius Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all values (servers). add <ip> <port.List all values del .Enable Session-Timeout dis .Delete a value by number add .Disable Session-Timeout 580 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius/ sessiontm SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Session Timeout Menu [SessionTimeout Menu] vendorid .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. insert <position> <ip> <port> <secret> Insert a value into the list. January 2006 .

January 2006 581 . move <value> <value> Move a value’s position in the list.2 Command Reference Table 11-36 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Radius Session Timeout Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vendorid <vendorid> Set the vendor ID number. vendortype <value> Set the Vendor Type number. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. del <value> Delete a value using its number.0. /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius/macro SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Macro Menu [Macro Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number Table 11-37 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Radius Macro Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all values. <string> <integer>)> Add a value.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. add <vendorid> <vendortype> <attribute_type (IP. ena enable|disable Enable session timeout. insert <index_position> <vendorid> <vendortype> <attribute_type_string> Insert a value. dis enable|disable Disable session timeout.

SSL >> AAA# network Enter network number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating Network 1 Network name: Network_1 -----------------------------------------------------------[Network 1 Menu] name .Set Secondary authentication server Table 11-38 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Advamced Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage groupauth <hostnames> Set the list of authentication servers. January 2006 . you are prompted to create a network if one does not already exist.Set network name subnet . see page 583.Subnet menu comment . /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/network SSL VPN Configuration Network Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/network menu level. Separate values using a comma. To view the menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. secondauth <hostname> Set the secondary authentication server.Remove network Table 11-39 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Network Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Set the network name.0. subnet Go to the Subnet menu.Set comment del .2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/adv SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Advanced Menu [Advanced Menu] groupauth . 582 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Set Authentication server list of group information secondauth .

Set network mask del . The network will be removed when the global /apply command is entered. mask <IP_address> Set the Network mask. net <IP_address> Set the subnet address.0 Enter network netmask: netmask -----------------------------------------------------------[Network Subnet 1 Menu] host .Set network address mask . Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Remove subnet Table 11-40 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Network Subnet Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage host <hostname> Set the hostname for the subnet.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. you are prompted to create a subnet if one does not already exist.2 Command Reference Table 11-39 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Network Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage comment <text_string> Create a text description (comment) about the network. /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/network/subnet SSL VPN Configuration Network Subnet Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/networksubnet menu level.0. SSL >> Network 1# sub Enter subnet number: (1-1023) 1 Creating Network Subnet 1 Enter host name: Subnet_1 Enter network address: 0. January 2006 583 .Set Host Name net .0. del Remove the network. del Remove the Subnet.

protocol tcp|udp Set the protocols that are allowed.udp): tcp Enter service ports: 1. January 2006 .2.Remove Service Table 11-41 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Service Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name <service_name> Set the service name.Set comment del .3 -----------------------------------------------------------[Service 1 Menu] name . use commas to separate.Set allowed protocols ports . ports <integers> Set the allowed ports. you are prompted to create a service if one does not already exist.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set service name protocol .Set allowed port comment . 584 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0. del Delete the service. comment <string> Create a description (comment) about the service. If nore than one. SSL >> AAA# service Enter service number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating Service 1 Service name: Service_1 Enter service protocol (list of tcp.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/service SSL VPN Configuration Service Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/service menu level.

Set comment del .Remove AppSpec Table 11-42 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Application specific Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name <appsec_name> Create an application name. For ftp you write the path as <ABSOLUTE FILE PATH>.0. For smb you write the path as /<WORKGROUP>/<FILESHARE>/<FILE PATH>.Set appspec name paths . ---------------------------------------------[AppSpecific 1 Menu] name . for example /home/share/public/ This will give access to the /home/share/public. paths Go to the Paths menu. for example /NORTEL/homes/public This will give access to the public directory in the homes share in the NORTEL workgroup/domain. you are prompted to create a network if one does not already exist.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/appspec SSL VPN Configuration Application specific Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/appspec menu level. To view the menu options. SSL >> AAA# appspec Enter appspec number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating AppSpecific 1 AppSpec name: AppSpec_1 Entering: Paths menu Path format: The paths are formated differently for different applications. January 2006 585 . see page 571. for example /intranet This will give access to the /intranet path on the web server.Paths menu comment . Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. For web servers you write the path <SERVER PATH>. Note that all paths are absolute from the root.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Enter path: /path Leaving: Paths menu.

0. 586 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. January 2006 . del Delete the application.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 11-42 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Application specific Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage comment <string> Create a description (comment) about the Application.

del <path_value> Delete a path by its number. For ftp you write the path as <ABSOLUTE FILE PATH>. for example /NORTEL/homes/public This will give access to the public directory in the homes share in the NORTEL workgroup/domain. Note that all paths are absolute from the root. for example /home/share/public/ This will give access to the /home/share/public.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/appspec/paths SSL VPN Configuration Application specific Paths Menu [Paths Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number Table 11-43 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Application specific Paths Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all paths.0. For web servers you write the path <SERVER PATH>. January 2006 587 . for example /intranet This will give access to the /intranet path on the web server. add Add a new path.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For example: SSL >> Paths# list Old: Pending: 1: /info SSL >> Paths# add Path format: The paths are formated differently for different applications. For smb you write the path as /<WORKGROUP>/<FILESHARE>/<FILE PATH>. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. Enter path: /home/storage insert <index> Insert a path into the path list.

Set filter name cert .Set authentication servers clientnet .Set access methods authserver .0. 588 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 11-43 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Application specific Paths Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage del Delete the path. January 2006 .IE cache wiper present tg .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. cert true|false|ignore Enter teh applicability of a certificate. /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/filter SSL VPN Configuration AAA Filter Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/filter menu level.Set client network reference comment . SSL >> AAA# filter Enter client filter number or name: (1-63) 1 Creating Client Filter 1 Filter name: Filter_1 -----------------------------------------------------------[Client Filter 1 Menu] name .Set comment del . tg true|false|ignore Set the state of the TunnelGuard checks passed.TunnelGuard checks passed methods .Client certificate present iewiper . you are prompted to create a service if one does not already exist.Remove client filter Table 11-44 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Filter Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name <filter_name> Set the filter name. iewiper true|false|ignore Set the prescence of the IE cache wiper.

SSL >> AAA# group Enter group number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating Group 1 Group name: Group_1 Enter number of sessions (0 is unlimited): 0 Enter user type (advanced/medium/novice): novice -----------------------------------------------------------[Group 1 Menu] name . clientnet <clientnet_hostname> Set client network reference.Set TunnelGuard SRS Rule ipsec .0. del Remove the client filter. January 2006 589 .Extended profiles menu tgsrs .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set group name access . you are prompted to create a service if one does not already exist.Print access rules restrict .Access rule menu print .Set number of login sessions usertype . authserver <hostnames> Set authentication server names. /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group menu level.Set portal user type linkset . If more than one.2 Command Reference Table 11-44 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Filter Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage methods ssl|ipsec|netdirect Set the access methods. separate the names using a comma.Remove group Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. comment Create a description (comment) of the filter.Linkset menu extend .Set comment del .IPsec menu comment .

see page 593.---Action ------ restrict <integer> Restrict the number of login sessions. 590 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. To view the menu options. see page 592. access Go to the Access rule menu. ipsec Go to the IPSEC menu. del Delete the group. comment Create a decription (comment) of the Group.To view the menu options.2 Command Reference Table 11-45 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Set tthe group name. To view the menu options. January 2006 . extend Go to the Extended Profiles menu. see page 595. To view the menu options. linkset Go to the Linkset menu. print Display the Access rules. The default is 0 (unlimited) usertype advanced|medium|novice Set the user level. see page 591.0. For example: SSL >> Group 1# print Network Ports ----------Proto Path ----.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. tgsrs <string> Set the TunnelGuard SRS rule.

you are prompted to create a service if one does not already exist.0. SSL >> Group 1# access Enter access rule number: (1-1023) 1 Creating Access rule 1 Enter network name: Network_1 Enter service name: Service_1 Enter application specific name: Application_1 Enter action (accept/reject): accept -----------------------------------------------------------[Access rule 1 Menu] network . service <service_name> Set the Service name reference.Set service reference appspec . January 2006 591 .Set access rule comment del .Set application specific reference action .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. action accept|reject Accept or reject the creation of this Access rule.Set action comment . comment Create a description (comment) of this Access rule. appspec <application_name> Set the application specific name reference. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Remove access rule Table 11-46 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Access Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage network <network_name> Enter the network name reference.Set network reference service .2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/access SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Access Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/access menu level. del Delete the Access rule.

move <value> <value> Move the linkset from one position to another in the linkset list.0.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/linkset SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Linkset Menu [Linksets Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number Table 11-47 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Linkset Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured linksets. add <linkset_name> Add a linkset name.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 592 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. January 2006 . insert <position> <name> Insert a linkset into the linkset list.

Remove profile Table 11-48 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage filter <client_filter_name> Set the client filter name reference. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. see page 595.Linkset menu del . linkset Go to the Linkset menu. you are prompted to create an extended service profile if one does not already exist. see page 594.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Access rule menu print . usertype advanced|medium|novice Set the portal user level.Set portal user type linkset . To view the menu options.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/extend SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/extend menu level. January 2006 593 . del Delete the Extended Profile. access Go to the Access Rule menu. To view the menu options.Print access rules usertype .Set client filter reference access . print Display the extended profile information. SSL >> Group 1# extend Enter profile number or name (1-63): 1 Creating Extended Profile 1 Enter client filter name: Filter_1 Enter user type (advanced/medium/novice): novice -----------------------------------------------------------[Extended Profile 1 Menu] filter .

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23..Set access rule comment del .Set network reference service .Set application specific reference action .2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/extend/access SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Access Menu [Access rule 1 Menu] network .Remove access rule Table 11-49 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Access Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage network <network_name> Set the network name reference. 594 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. January 2006 . del Delete the Extended Profile Access rule. comment Create a description (comment) of the Access rule. action accept|reject Accept or reject the Access rule change. appspec <application_name> Set the Application name reference.Set action comment .Set service reference appspec .0. service <service_name> Set the Service name reference.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/ipsec SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group IPsec Menu [IPsec Menu] secret utunnel . del <extended_profile_linkset_name> Delete the Extended Profile Linkset. insert <position> <name> Insert an Extended Profile linkset into the linkset list. January 2006 595 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. add <extended_profile_linkset_name> Add an Extended Profile linkset name.0.Set shared secret .Set user tunnel profile Table 11-51 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group IPsec Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage secret <string> Set the group Secret value. move <value> <value> Move the Extended Profile linkset from one position to another in the linkset list. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/extend/ linkset SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Linkset Menu [Linksets Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number Table 11-50 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Linkset Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured Extended Profile linksets.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 11-51 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group IPsec Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage utunnel <string> Set the user tunnel profile name. January 2006 . 596 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0.

Add a new value Table 11-52 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on enabled Domains Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the SSO domains. del <index> Delete an SSO domain. del <SSO Headers_name> Delete the SSO Header.Delete a value by number add .2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/ssodomains SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Enabled Domains Menu [SSO Domain menu Menu] list .0. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Delete a value by number add .Insert a new value move . add <domain_name> <mode.List all values del . /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/ssoheaders SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Headers Menu [SSO headers menu Menu] list .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.List all values del .Add a new value insert . normal|add_domain> Add an SSO domain. January 2006 597 .Move a value by number Table 11-53 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Headers Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured SSO Headers.

insert <position> <domain> <header_name> Insert a SSO Header into the headers list. January 2006 .0.2 Command Reference Table 11-53 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Headers Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage add <domain> <header_pattern> Add an SSO Header. 598 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. move <value> <value> Move the SSO Headers from one position to another in the SSO Headers list.

To view the menu options. vpnattribu Go to the VPN attribute menu. see page 599. see page 601.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/radacct SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu [RADIUS Accounting servers vpnattribu ena dis Menu] RADIUS accounting servers menu VPN attribute menu Enable RADIUS accounting Disable RADIUS accounting Table 11-54 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage servers Go to the Radius servers menu.0. January 2006 599 . ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/radacct/servers SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Servers Menu [RADIUS Accounting list del add insert move Servers Menu] List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number Table 11-55 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured Radius Accounting servers. ena enable|disable Enable AAA radius accounting. To view the menu options. dis enable|disable Disable AAA radius accounting. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. del <Radius_Accounting_server_name> Delete the SSO Header.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 11-55 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage add <ip_address> <port> <secret> Add a Radius Account. insert <position> <ip_address> <port> <secret> Insert a Radius account into the account list. move <value> <value> Move the Radius account from one position to another in the account list. January 2006 . 600 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. January 2006 601 . dnsname <fully_qualified_DNS_name> Set the DNS name of the server.2 Command Reference ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/radacct/vpnattribu SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting VPN attributes Menu [VPN Attribute Menu] vendorid .Set vendor id for the VPN attribute vendortype . 1-65534> Set the listen port of the server.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set vendor type for the VPN attribute Table 11-56 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting VPN attributes Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vendorid <vendorID> Set the vendor name. vendortype <integer> Set the vendor type. /ssl/cfg/vpn/server SSL VPN Configuration Server Menu [Server Menu] port dnsname trace ssl tcp http proxymap portal adv ena dis Set listen port of server Set DNS name of server Traffic trace menu SSL settings menu TCP endpoint settings menu HTTP settings menu Intranet proxy configuration menu Portal settings menu Advanced settings menu Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Table 11-57 SSL VPN Configuration Server Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage port <integer.

0. tcp Go to the TCP endpoint settings menu. See the tcpdump documentation for a desription of the patterns that are allowed. adv Go to the Advanced settings menu. /ssl/cfg/vpn/server/trace SSL VPN Configuration Server Traffic Trace Menu [Trace Menu] ssldump tcpdump ping dnslookup traceroute Create traffic dump Create traffic dump Ping through backend interface Lookup a name in DNS through backend interface traceroute through backend interface Table 11-58 SSL VPN Configuration Server Traffic Trace Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ssldump Create an SSL traffic dump. see page 606. proxymap Go to the Intranet Proxy configuration menu. see page 603. To view the menu options. ena enable|disable Enable the VPN server. see page 609. To view the menu options. (http://www. portal Go to the Portal menu. http Go to the HTTP settings menu. To view the menu options. To view the menu options. see page 605.2 Command Reference Table 11-57 SSL VPN Configuration Server Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage trace Go to the Trace menu.org/tcpdump_man. see page 609. see page 608. dis enable|disable Disable the VPN server.html). 602 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. To view the menu options.tcpdump. To view the menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.To view the menu options. ssl Go to the SSL settings menu. see page 602. January 2006 .

2 Command Reference Table 11-58 SSL VPN Configuration Server Traffic Trace Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage standalone on|off Create a TCP traffic dump.org/tcpdump_man.Set server certificate cachesize . cachettl <integer> Set the SSL cache timeout (in minutes). See the tcpdump documentation for a desription of the patterns that are allowed.0.Set SSL cache size cachettl . cachesize <integer.Disable SSL Table 11-59 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage cert <certicate_nuber. 1 to 1500> Set the IP address of the VPN.Set certificate verification level ena .tcpdump. traceroute Traceroute through backend interface.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. dnslookup <hostname> Lookup a name in DNS through the backend interface.html) traceroute .Set SSL cache timeout cacerts .Set list of accepted signers of client certificates cachain .traceroute through backend interface ping <hostname> Ping through the backend interface.Set list of CA chain certificates protocol . Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. 0 to 10000> Set the SSL cache size (kBytes).Set cipher list verify .Enable SSL dis . January 2006 603 . /ssl/cfg/vpn/server/ssl SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Settings Menu [SSL Settings Menu] cert . (http://www. Use this command to identify the route used for station-tostation connectivity across the network.Set protocol version ciphers .

cachain <certificate_numbers> Set the list of CA chain certificates. The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e.or +: ! permanently delets the ciphers from the list (e. Additionally. . SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms). use a comma to separate the entries. This option does not add any new ciphers.2 Command Reference Table 11-59 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage cacerts <certificate_numbers> Set the list of accepted signers of client certificates.g. .g. the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length. use a comma to separate the entries.deletes the ciphers from the list. If more than one. SSLv3:TLSv1). January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !. verify none|optional Set the certificate verification level. dis enable|disable Disable SSL. !RSA).g.0. + moves the ciphers to the end of the list. but the ciphers can be added again by later options. ena enable|disable Enable SSL. ciphers Set the cipher list. 604 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. protocol ssl2|ssl3|ssl23|tls1 Set the protocol version. Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e. If more than one.

1 to 2147483647s> Set the server TCP connect timeout. January 2006 605 . 1 to 2147483647s> Set the SOCKS client TCP keep alive heartbeat timeout.Set swrite . crecbuf auto|<integer. csendbuf auto|<integer. in seconds. 1 to 2147483647s> Set the server TCP write timeout. 2000 to 100000> Set the client TCP send buffer size (Bytes).Set srecbuf . crecbuf . srecbuf auto|<integer.Set server TCP send buffer size srecbuf . 2000 to 100000> Set server TCP receive buffer size (Bytes).2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/server/tcp SSL VPN Configuration Server TCP endpoint Settings Menu [TCP Settings Menu] cwrite . 2000 to 100000> Set the server TCP send buffer size (Bytes).Set csendbuf . 2000 to 100000> Set the client TCP receive buffer size (Bytes).Set server TCP receive buffer size ckeep <integer. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. 1 to 2147483647s> Set client TCP keep alive timeout.Set crecbuf .Set sconnect . skeep <integer. ssendbuf auto|<integer. swrite <integer.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. sconnect <integer.Set ckeep .Set client TCP receive buffer size ssendbuf .Set client TCP write timeout client TCP keep alive timeout socks client TCP keep alive heartbeat timeout server TCP write timeout server TCP connect timeout client TCP send buffer size client TCP receive buffer size server TCP send buffer size server TCP receive buffer size Table 11-60 SSL VPN Configuration Server TCP endpoint settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ips <integer.Set skeep . 1 to 2147483647s> Set client TCP write timeout.Set ssendbuf .

securecook on|off Set the “add secure” option for the session cookie.Add HTTP-X-ISD debug header addclicert .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set max line length Table 11-61 SSL VPN Configuration Server HTTP settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage downstatus unavailable|redirect|reset Set the server down reply status.Set max number of persistant client requests maxline .2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/server/http SSL VPN Configuration Server HTTP Settings Menu [HTTP Settings Menu] downstatus .Set MSIE session termination bug workaround maxrcount .Add SSL header sslxheader . To view the menu options. January 2006 .Set allow script caching allowica .Allow image caching allowdoc .Allow ICA file caching cmsie .Add SSL header with serial in hex sslsidhead .Add Client-Cert as a HTTP header addnostore .Allow document caching allowscrip .0. 606 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. addxfor on|off|anonymous|remove Add X-Forwarded-For header.Add no-cache/no-store HTTP header allowimage .Add X-Forwarded-For header addvia .SSL triggered rewrite menu securecook . sslxheader on|off Add an SSL header with serial number in hexadecimal. rewrite on|off Go to the SSl triggered Rewrite menu.Add SSL SID header addxfor . sslsidhead on|off Add an SSL SID header.Set add secure option to session cookie sslheader .Add Via header addxisd .Set server down reply status rewrite . sslheader on|off Add an SSL session ID header. see page 607.

January 2006 607 . addclicert on|off Set Client-Cert as a HTTP header. allowdoc on|off Set document caching allowscrip on|off Set allow script caching.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. /ssl/cfg/vpn/server/http/rewrite SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL triggered rewrite Menu [Rewrite Menu] rewrite ciphers response URI Set Set Set Set SSL triggered rewrite accepted ciphers source of response URI with the weak cipher alert Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. adddnostore on|off Set no-cache/no-store HTTP header. allowica on|off Set ICA file caching. maxline <integer> Set the maximum line length.0.2 Command Reference Table 11-61 SSL VPN Configuration Server HTTP settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage addvia on|off|anonymous|remove Set VIA header addxisd on|off Set HTTP-X-ISD debug header. maxrcount <integer> Set max number of persistant client requests. allowimage on|off Set image caching. cmsie on|off Set MSIE session termination bug workaround.

response iSD|WebServer Set the source of response.Delete a value by number add .2 Command Reference Table 11-62 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL triggered rewrite Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage rewrite on|off Set SSL triggered rewrite. January 2006 . For step-up certificates we recommend ALL:-RC2:SHA1:@STRENGTH ciphers <string> Set the accepted ciphers.0. This option doesn't add any new ciphers it just moves matching existing ones. Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !.Insert a new value move . 608 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.or +: ! permanently delets the ciphers from the list (e. but the ciphers can be added again by later options. [Proxy Mapping Menu] list . Additionally the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length. Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e. /cgi-bin/weakcipher.deletes the ciphers from the list.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Add a new value insert .Move a value by number Table 11-63 SSL VPN Configuration Server Intranet Proxy settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the server Intranet Proxy settings. SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms). URI <WebServer response only> Set the URI with the weak cipher alert.g. /ssl/cfg/vpn/server/proxymap SSL VPN Configuration Server Intranet Proxy settings Menu The PROXY menu is not available for type portal and socks servers. . The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e. + moves the ciphers to the end of the list.g. !RSA). .g.List all values del . For example. SSLv3:TLSv1).

January 2006 609 . move <value> <value> Move the Intranet Proxy server from one position to another in the server list.SSL connect menu Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Set use persistent session cookies Table 11-64 SSL VPN Configuration Server Portal settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage resetcoolki on|off Set the Reset session cookie in each request. persistent on|off Set the use of persistent session cookies. ssl/cfg/vpn/server/adv SSL VPN Configuration Server Advanced Menu [Advanced Settings Menu] traflog .0.UDP syslog Traffic Log menu sslconnect .Set Re-Set session cookie in each request .2 Command Reference Table 11-63 SSL VPN Configuration Server Intranet Proxy settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage del <Proxy_server_name> Delete the Intranet Proxy server. insert <position> <ip_address> <port> Insert a Intranet Proxy server into the Proxy server list.Set cookie domain . ssl/cfg/vpn/server/portal SSL VPN Configuration Server Portal settings Menu [Portal Settings resetcooki domain persistent Menu] .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. add <ip_address> <port> Add an Intranet Proxy server. domain <domain_name> Set the cookie domain name for the portal.

Set syslog facility ena .Enable traffic UDP syslog logging dis . To view the menu options.Set syslog portnumber priority .Disable traffic UDP syslog logging Table 11-66 SSL VPN Configuration Server UDP Syslog Traffic Log Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage sysloghost <IP_address> Set the IP address of the VPN. sslconnect on|off Go to the SSL Connect menu. January 2006 . 610 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. ssl/cfg/vpn/server/adv/traflog SSL VPN Configuration Server UDP Syslog Traffic Log Menu [Traffic Log Settings Menu] sysloghost .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. dis Disable traffic UDP syslog messaging.2 Command Reference Table 11-65 SSL VPN Configuration Server Advanced Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage traflog <IP_address> Go to the UDP syslog Traffic Log menu. facility <string> Set the syslog facility. To view the menu options. priority <syslog_name> Set the syslog priority. see page 611. udpport <UDP_port_number> Set the standalone mode.Set syslog priority facility . see page 610.Set syslog host IP udpport . ena enable|disable Enable traffic UDP syslog messaging.

Verify server menu Table 11-67 SSL VPN Configuration Server UDP Syslog Traffic Log Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage protocol ssl2|ssl3|ssl23|tls1 Set the Protocol version. see page 612. + moves the ciphers to the end of the list. Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e. Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !.2 Command Reference ssl/cfg/vpn/server/adv/sslconnect SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect Menu [SSL Connect Settings Menu] protocol . cert <certicate_number. 1 to 1500> Set the client certificate.g.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. ! permanently delets the ciphers from the list (e.Set accepted ciphers for ssl connect verify . SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms). !RSA).deletes the ciphers from the list. verify Go to the Verify server menu. Additionally the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length.or +. .g. To view the menu options. ciphers Set the accepted ciphers for SSL connection. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Set client certificate ciphers . The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e. January 2006 611 .0. SSLv3:TLSv1).Set protocol version cert . .g. but the ciphers can be added again by later options.

2 Command Reference ssl/cfg/vpn/server/adv/sslconnect/ verify SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect verify Server Menu [SSL Connect Verify Settings Menu] verify .Disable IPsec . 612 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. cacerts <certicate_numbers> Set the list of accepted signers for each server certificate. If more than one.Set list of accepted signers of clients certificate . January 2006 .Set certificate verification level commonname .Enable IPsec .Set list of accepted signers server's certificate Table 11-68 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect Verify Server Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage verify none|verify Set the Certicate Verication level. use a comma to separate each entry.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. /ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server Menu [IPsec Menu] ena dis quick ikeprof utunprof cacerts cert .IKE profile .User tunnel profile .Set server certificate Table 11-69 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ena [enable|disable] Enable IPsec. commonname <string> Set the server common name.Quick IPsec setup wizard .Set server common name cacerts .0.

0. January 2006 613 .2 Command Reference Table 11-69 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage dis [enable|disable] Disable IPsec.0. cert Set the server certicate.1.1 Enabled IPsec Creating IKE Profile 1 Name: vpn_1_1 Creating User Tunnel Profile 1 Name: vpn_1_1 You should create a AAA group for the user tunnel profile Enabled Pool Use apply to activate the changes ikeprof Go to the IKE profile menu.0. cacerts Set the list of accepted signers of clients certificate. quick Use the Quick IPsec setup wizard.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. utunprof Set the User tunnel profile. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0 Upper IP address in pool range: 1.1. For example: SSL >> IPsec# quick Do you want to use IPsec Group login? (yes/no) [no]: n Lower IP address in pool range: 0.

NAT menu deadpeer . enc Go to the Encryption mask menu. rekeytraf <integer> Set rekey traffic limit. pfs on|off Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy. del <IKE_profile_name> Disable IPsec.Dead peer menu Table 11-70 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Set the IKE profile name.To view the menu options. in KBytes.Set rekey traffic limit retransmit .0.Remove IKE Profile enc . January 2006 .Diffie-Hellman group mask menu pfs . see page 616.Set replay window size nat . dh Go to the Diffie_Hellman group mask menu. initcontac on|off Accept ISAKMP intitial contact payload. see page 615.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Menu [IKE Profile 1 Menu] name . 614 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Set rekey time limit rekeytraf . retransmit <integer> Set ISAKMP retransmit limit.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set IKE profile name del .Encryption mask menu dh . rekeytime <integer> Set the rekey time limit. in seconds.Set ISAKMP retransmit interval maxretrans .Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy initcontac . in seconds. To view the menu options.Set ISAKMP max attempts retransmits replaywins .Accept ISAKMP initial contact payload rekeytime .

2 Command Reference Table 11-70 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage maxretrans <integer> Set the maximum ISAKMP attempts to retransmit. replaywins <integer> Set replay window size.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. null_sha on|off Set NULL with SHA. hmac_sha on|off Set HMAC with SHA. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. January 2006 615 . deadpeer Go to the Dead Peer menu. see page 617.0. nat Go to the NAT menu.To view the menu options. see page 617. null_md5 on|off Set NULL with MD5. /ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof/enc SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Encryption Menu [Encryption Menu] hmac_md5 hmac_sha null_md5 null_sha des_md5 des_sha 3des_md5 3des_sha aes_128_sh Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set HMAC with MD5 HMAC with SHA NULL with MD5 NULL with SHA DES with MD5 DES with SHA 3DES with MD5 3DES with SHA 128 bits AES with SHA Table 11-71 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Encryption Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage hmac_md5 on|off Set HMAC with MD5.To view the menu options.

des_sha on|off Set DES with SHA. 3des_sha on|off Set 3DES with SHA. January 2006 .Set Diffie-Hellman group 2 dh5 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set Diffie-Hellman group 1 dh2 .Set Diffie-Hellman group 5 Table 11-72 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Diffie-Hellman Group Mask Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage dh1 on|off Set Diffie_Hellman group 1. 3des_md5 on|off Set 3DES with MD5. 616 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 11-71 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Encryption Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage des_md5 on|off Set DES with MD5. dh5 on|off Set Diffie_Hellman group 5. aes_128_sh on|off Set 128 bits AES with SHA. /ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof/dh SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile DiffieHellman Group Mask Menu [Diffie-Hellman Group Menu] dh1 . dh2 on|off Set Diffie_Hellman group 2.0.

keepalive <integer> Set the keepalive timeout.Set ESP UDP NAT detect .Set detect timeout .2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof/NAT SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile NAT Menu [NAT Menu] natdetect timeout keepalive . /ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof/deadpeer SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Dead Peer Menu [Dead Peer Menu] ena dis interval retransmit Enable dead peer detection Disable dead peer detection Set detect interval Set max retransmissions Table 11-74 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Dead Peer Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ena [enable|disable] Enable dead peer detection. in seconds.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 617 .Set keepalive timeout Table 11-73 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile NAT Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage natdetect disabled|auto|ipsec_capable|use_udp_encap Set ESP UDP detection.0. in seconds. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. dis [enable|disable] Disable dead peer detection. timeout <integer> Set the detection timeout.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. retransmit <integer> Set the maximum number retransmissions. upperip <upper_IP_address> Set the upper IP address in the pool range.0. info Display all of the IP Pool configuration information. proxyarp on|off|all Set proxy ARP on clean side interfaces. dis enable|disable Disable the IP Pool. January 2006 . /ssl/cfg/vpn/ippool SSL VPN Configuration IP Pool Menu [Pool Menu] ena dis lowerip upperip proxyarp info Enable pool Disable pool Set lower IP in pool range Set upper IP in pool range Set proxy arp on clean side interfaces Print alloc info for this VPN Table 11-75 SSL VPN Configuration IP IPool Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ena enable|disable Enable the IP Pool. 618 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. lowerip <lower_IP_address> Set the lower IP address in the pool range. in seconds.2 Command Reference Table 11-74 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Dead Peer Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage interval <integer> Set the detection interval.

January 2006 619 . logintext Set static text on login page.0 Enter filename on server: nortel_banner. redirect <URL> Set redirect URL. iconmode clean|fancy Set Home tab icon mode. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0.0.0." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. Write or paste the text to show up in the Login window. For example: SSL >> Portal# import Select protocol (tftp/ftp/scp/sftp) [tftp]: ftp Enter hostname or IP address of server: 0. banner Show installed banner file.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.. press Enter to create a new line. and then type ".gif restore Restores default Nortel banner.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/portal SSL VPN Configuration Portal Menu [Portal Menu] import restore banner redirect logintext iconmode linktext linkurl linkcols linkwidth companynam colors faccess lang wiper ieclear whitelist citrix Import banner image gif Restores default Nortel banner Show installed banner file Set redirect URL Set static text on login page Set Home tab icon mode Set static text on link page Set url input field on link page Set number of columns on home tab Set width of link columns on home tab Set company name used on portal pages Portal colors menu Full Access menu Portal language menu Set use ActiveX component for clearing cache Set use IE ClearAuthCache White-list settings menu Set Citrix support Table 11-76 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage import [<protocol> <hostname> <bannerfilename>] Import banner image gif..

companynam [<string>] Set company name used on portal pages. lang Go to the Portal language menu. press Enter to create a new line.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 620 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. see page 621. To view the menu options. whitelist Go to the White-list settings menu. Write or paste the text. linkcols [<integer>] Set number of columns on home tab. ieclear [on|off] Set use IE ClearAuthCache. and then type ". linkwidth [auto|0 to 100%] Set width of link columns on home tab." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. see page 622. To view the menu options. January 2006 . see page 621.To view the menu options. linkurl on|off Set URL input field on link page.2 Command Reference Table 11-76 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage linktext [<string>] Set static text on link page. wiper [on|off] Set use ActiveX component for clearing cache. see page 623. To view the menu options. Four can be considered a practical maximum.0. faccess Go to the Full Access menu... citrix [on|off] Set Citrix support. colors Go to the Portal Colors menu.

0.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/colors SSL VPN Configuration Portal Colors Menu [Portal Colors Menu] color1 . theme [default|aqua|apple|jeans|cinnamon|candy] Set the color theme. /ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/faccess SSL VPN Configuration Portal Full Access Menu [Full Access Menu] ena .Set portal color color4 .Set IPSEC Mode contip .Set portal color color2 .Set Contivity IP address contid .Set Contivity group ID contpass .Color theme 1 2 3 4 Table 11-77 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Colors Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage color1 [<HTML_color_syntax>] Set Portal color 1.Set portal color theme .Set Contivity group password portalmsg .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set text in 'Full Access' portal tab appletmsg . color2 [<HTML_color_syntax>] Set Portal color 2. January 2006 621 . color3 [<HTML_color_syntax>] Set Portal color 3.Set portal color color3 .Enable 'Full Access' tab dis . For example.Set text in 'Full Access' Applet window Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Disable 'Full Access' tab ipsecmode . #003399 for blue. color4 [<HTML_color_syntax>] Set Portal color 4.

Set the language to be used in the portal . and then type "." (without the quotation marks) to terminate." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. Write or paste the text to show up in the Full Access Portal window. For English.. Write or paste text to show up in the Full Access Applet window. press Enter to create a new line.Print charset in use . ipsecmode [contivity|native] Set the IPSEC Mode. January 2006 . press Enter to create a new line.0.. enter en..2 Command Reference Table 11-78 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Full Access Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ena [enable|disable] Enable 'Full Access' tab. /ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/lang SSL VPN Configuration Portal Language Menu [Portal Language setlang charset list Menu] . 622 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. contid [<string>] Set the Contivity group ID. appletmsg Set text in 'Full Access' Applet window.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.. contip [<IP_address>] Set Contivity IP address.. portalmsg Set text in 'Full Access' portal tab.. If you *only* enter "." a default text will be generated. contpass [<string>] Set a Contivity group password. and then type ".List supported languages Table 11-79 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Language Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ips [<ISO 639 Language Code>] Set the language to be used in the portal. dis [enable|disable] Disable 'Full Access' tab.

see page 623. /ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/whitelist/ domains SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Domains Menu [White-list menu Menu] list . January 2006 623 .List all values del .Add a new value Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 11-79 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Language Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage charset on|off Display the current character set. ena [enable|disable] Enable URL re-write whitelist.Configure white-list domains ena .Delete a value by number add . dis [enable|disable] Disable URL re-write whitelist. /ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/whitelist SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Menu [White-list Settings Menu] domains .Disable URL rewrite white-list Table 11-80 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage domains Go to the Domains menu.Enable URL rewrite white-list dis .0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For example: Charset = iso-8859-1 list Display all of the pre-defined languages. To view the menu options.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Table 11-81 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Domains Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list Go to the Domains menu.Set autorun support link . eg <b>A heading</b>): html Autorun Linkset (true/false) [false]: false -----------------------------------------------------------[Linkset 1 Menu] name .Link menu del .0. text [<text_type>] Set the text type. 624 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. only HTML is available (default). you are prompted to create a linkset if one does not already exist. January 2006 . autorun [true|false>] Set the autorun linkset option. SSL >> VPN 1# linkset Enter Linkset number or name (1-1023): 1 Creating Linkset 1 Linkset name: Linkset_1 Linkset text (HTML syntax.Remove tunnel Table 11-82 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Set the linkset name. /ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset menu level. del [<index>] Delete a value. see page 621.Set linkset text autorun . add [<domain_name>] Add a domain.Set linkset name text . To view the menu options. In the current release.

Set link type internal .Remove link Table 11-83 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage move [<link_number>] Move the link. SSL >> Linkset 1# link Enter Link number or name (1-1023): 1 Creating Link 1 Enter link text: Link_1 Enter type of link (hit TAB to see possible values) [internal]: <tab> smb ftp proxy custom mail telnet netdrive wts outlook netdirect terminal external internal eauto iauto Enter type of link (hit TAB to see possible values) [internal]: internal Entering: Internal settings menu Enter method (http/https): http Enter host (eg inside.company. see page 625. January 2006 625 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. you are prompted to create a link if one does not already exist.2 Command Reference Table 11-82 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage link Go to the Link menu.0. /ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset/link SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset/link menu level. To view the menu options.Set link text type . del [<linkset_number>] Remove the linkset.ca Enter path (eg /): /info Leaving: Internal settings menu -----------------------------------------------------------[Link 1 Menu] move .Move link text .Internal settings menu del . Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.com): NoTel.

com): NoTel. For example: SSL >> Internal menu# quick Enter method (http/https): http Enter host (eg inside.company.ca Enter path (eg /): / /ssl/cfg/vpn/sslclient SSL VPN Configuration SSL Client Menu [SSL VPN Client Menu] netdirect . January 2006 .2 Command Reference Table 11-83 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage text [<link_name>] Set the name of the link.Set XML client configuration 626 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. To view the menu options. type [link_type>] Set the link type. /ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset/link/internal SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Internal Setting Menu [Internal menu Menu] quick .Quick internal link wizard Table 11-84 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Internal Settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage quick Configure the link using the internal link wizard. internal Go to the Internal link menu. See the list of link types on page 625. del [<link_number>] Remove the link.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Allow Netdirect client xmlconfig . see page 626.

DNS settings menu . press Enter to create a new line.Set backend interface used by VPN . Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. and then type ". January 2006 627 . /ssl/cfg/vpn/adv/dns SSL VPN Configuration Advanced DNS settings Menu [DNS Settings Menu] search . dns Go to the DNS settings menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. xmlconfig Set the XML client configuration.2 Command Reference Table 11-85 SSL VPN Configuration SSL Client Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage netdirect [on|off] Allow a Netdirect VPN client. /ssl/cfg/vpn/adv SSL VPN Configuration Advanced Menu [Advanced Menu] interface dns log . If more than one domain. see page 627. Write or paste the text."(without the quotation marks) to terminate.Set DNS search list Table 11-87 SSL VPN Configuration Advanced DN S settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage search [<domain_names>] Set the domain search list. To view the menu options. log [all|login|http|portal|reject|socks] Set the log option. use a comma to separate each entry.Set log settings Table 11-86 SSL VPN Configuration Advanced Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage interface [<backend_interface_number>] Set the backend interface...0.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. see page 636. routes Go to the Routes menu. see page 636. host Go to the Host menu. time Go to the Time menu. see page 634. see page 634. To view menu options. adm Go to the Administrative Applcations menu. user Go to the Administrative Applcations menu. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 637. To view menu options. see page 630. dns Go to the Time menu. To view menu options. accesslist Go to the Access List menu. syslog Go to the RSA server menu. 628 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. rsa Go to the RSA server menu. January 2006 . see page 638.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/sys SSL Configuration System Menu [System Menu] mip host routes time dns rsa syslog accesslist adm user distrace Set management IP (MIP) address iSD host menu Routes menu Date and time menu DNS settings RSA Servers Syslog servers menu Access list menu Administrative applications menu User Access Control menu Disable tracing with tcpdump/ssldump Table 11-88 SSL Configuration System Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage mip [<IP_address>] Set the management IP (MIP) address.To view menu options.To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 629.0. see page 647.

Trace cannot be reactivated during the session. press Enter to create a new line.2 Command Reference Table 11-88 SSL Configuration System Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage distrace [yes|no] Deactivate trace. routes Go to the Routes menu. see page 633. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A." (without the quotation marks) to terminate.. interface Go to the iSD host interface menu. and then type ". license [<string>] Enter or paste the host license information. see page 631. January 2006 629 . /ssl/cfg/sys/host SSL Configuration System Host Menu [iSD Host 1 Menu] type ip license gateway routes interface port ports hwplatform halt reboot delete Set type of the iSD Set IP address Set License Set default gateway address Routes menu iSD host interface menu iSD port configuration menu Display physical ports Display hardware platform Halt the iSD Reboot the iSD Remove iSD Host Table 11-89 SSL Configuration System Host Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage type [master|slave] Set the iSD type. To view menu options. To view menu options.. gateway [<IP_address>] Set default gateway address. Paste the license. ip [<IP_address>] Set the IP address of the host. port Go to the iSD port configuration menu. To view menu options. see page 632.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23..0.

del [<route_number>] Delete a route by its number.Add a new value Table 11-90 SSL Configuration System Host Routes Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all host routes. reboot [yes|no] Reboot the iSD.2 Command Reference Table 11-89 SSL Configuration System Host Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ports Display the number of physical ports. /ssl/cfg/sys/host/routes SSL Configuration System Host Routes Menu [Host Routes Menu] list .Delete a value by number add . delete [<hostname>] Remove iSD Host. January 2006 . hwplatform Display hardware platform.List all values del . add [<destination> <netmask> <gateway>] Add a route. halt [yes|no] Halt the iSD platform.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. 630 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Set primary port delete .Set IP address netmask . ports Go to the Ports menu.Routes menu vlanid .Set VLAN tag id mode . To view menu options. January 2006 631 .0. mode [failover|trunking] Set the interface mode. routes Go to the Routes menu.Remove Host Interface Table 11-91 SSL Configuration System Host Interface Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ip [<IP_address>] Set the host inteface IP address.Set default gateway address routes . primary [<port_number>] Set the Primary port. gateway [<IP_address>] Set the Gateway IP address.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Interface ports menu primary . To view menu options.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/sys/host/interface SSL Configuration System Host Menu [Host Interface 1 Menu] ip . delete [<interafce_hostname>] Delete the interface. see page 633.Set mode ports .Set network mask gateway . netmask [<IP_address>] Set the inteface netmask. see page 632. vlanid [<integer>] Set the VLAN tag ID.

List all values del . When autonegotiation is not in use the default mode is full. speed <10 | 100 | 1000> Sets the port speed in Mbits per second when autonegotiation is not in use.Add a new value Table 11-92 SSL Configuration System Host Interface Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured interface routes.0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set autonegotiation speed . /ssl/cfg/sys/host/port SSL Configuration System Host Port Menu [Host Port 1 Menu] autoneg . mode <full | half> Sets the duplex mode of the port when autonegotiation is not in use.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/sys/host/interface/routes SSL Configuration System Host Interface Routes Menu [Host Interface Routes Menu] list . January 2006 .Set full or half duplex mode Table 11-93 SSL Configuration System Host Port Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage autoneg <on | off> Enables or disables autonegotiation on the port. The default is on.Delete a value by number add . add [<destination> <netmask> <gateway>] Add an interface route. del [<route_number>] Delete an interface route.Set Speed mode . 632 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.

Set system time tzone . To view menu options.Configure NTP servers Table 11-95 SSL Configuration System Time Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage date [YYYY-MM-DD] Enter the date. using a 24-hour clock scheme.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/sys/routes SSL Configuration System Menu [Routes Menu] list del add .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Set system date time . ntp Configure NTP servers. /ssl/cfg/sys/time SSL Configuration System Time Menu [Date and Time Menu] date . Use the list command to display the index numbers of all added static routes. January 2006 633 . del [<route_number>] Delete a route.Delete a value by number . time [HH:MM:SS] Set the time.Add a new value Table 11-94 SSL Configuration System Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured routes.0.Set Timezone ntp . This command removes the specified static route from the system configuration. add [<destination> <netmask> <gateway>] Add a static route. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. see page 634. tzone [<continent_number> <country_number> <region_number>] Set the time zone.List all values .

NTP should have access to a number of servers (at least three) in order to compensate for any discrepancies in the servers.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/sys/time/ntp SSL Configuration System Time NTP servers Menu [NTP Servers Menu] list .Delete a value by number add .Set ttl . cachesize [<integer>] Set the DNS cache size in kBytes.Set count .Set retransmit .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. /ssl/cfg/sys/dns SSL Configuration System DNS settings Menu [DNS Settings Menu] servers .Set hup .Add a new value Table 11-96 SSL Configuration System Time NTP Servers Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List the configured NTP servers. Use the list command to display the index numbers of all added NTP servers.List all values del .Set hdown .0. To view menu options. Adds an NTP server to the system configuration. 634 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. Removes the specified NTP server from the system configuration. see page 635.DNS cachesize .Set health . add [<IP_address>] Add an NTP server.. January 2006 .Set servers menu Local DNS cache size DNS Retransmit interval timer DNS Retransmit counter Max TTL Health check interval Health check down counter Health check up counter Table 11-97 SSL Configuration System DNS Settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage servers Go to the DNS Servers menu. The NTP server you add is used by the NTP client on the iSD to synchronize its clock. del [<NTP_server>] Delete the NTP server.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. in seconds.List all values del . health [<integer>] Set Health check interval. hdown [<integer>] Set Health check down counter hup [<integer>] Set Health check up counter sl/cfg/sys/dns/servers SSL Configuration System DNS Servers settings Menu [DNS Servers Menu] list .Add a new value insert .Insert a new value move . ttl [<integer>] Set the maximum TTL. move <value> <value> Move the DNS server from one position to another in the server list. in seconds.0.2 Command Reference Table 11-97 SSL Configuration System DNS Settings Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage retransmit [<integer>] Set the DNS retransmit interval timer value.Move a value by number Table 11-98 SSL Configuration System DNS Servers Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the DNS server settings. count [<integer>] Set the DNS Retransmit counter value. add <ip_address> Add a DNS server.Delete a value by number add . del <DNS_server_name> Delete the DNS server.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 635 . insert <position> <ip_address> Insert a DNS server into the DNS server list.

Insert a new value move .Add a new value insert . January 2006 .Import sdconf.Move a value by number 636 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. del Remove an RSA server. you are prompted to create an RSA server if one does not already exist.Delete a value by number add .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.rec file. import [<protocol> <host> <file>] Import a sdconf. rmnodesecr [<node_secret_name>] Remove a Node Secret.Set RSA server symbolic name import .rec file rmnodesecr .Remove Node Secret del .2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/sys/rsa SSL Configuration System RSA servers Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/sys/rsa menu level. SSL >> System# rsa Enter RSA Server number or name: (1-255) 1 Creating RSA Servers 1 RSA server symbolic name: RSA_1 -----------------------------------------------------------[RSA Servers 1 Menu] rsaname .List all values del . /ssl/cfg/sys/syslog SSL Configuration System SysLog Servers Menu [Syslog Servers Menu] list .0.Remove RSA server Table 11-99 SSL Configuration System RSA servers Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage rsname <string>] Set the RSA server symbolic name.

insert [<position> <ip_address> <local_facility>] Insert a Syslog server into the Syslog server list. move <value> <value> Move the Syslog server from one position to another in the server list. add <ip_address> Add a Syslog server.Delete a value by number add . To view all syslog servers currently added to the system configuration. /ssl/cfg/sys/accesslist SSL Configuration System Access List Menu [Access List Menu] list . add Add a new value to the accesslist. Only those machines listed will be allowed to access the iSD host via a Telnet or SSH connection (assuming that Telnet or SSH connections. Adds a single machine.2 Command Reference Table 11-100 SSL Configuration System SysLog Servers Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the Syslog server settings. use the list command. or a range of machines on a specific network. to the access list.List all values del . del <Syslog_server_name> Delete the Syslog server. The index numbers you specify must be in use.Add a new value Table 11-101 SSL Configuration System Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List the accesslist values. del [<acces_list_number>] Delete an accesslist. Moves a syslog server up or down in the list of configured servers.0. or both. are enabled). Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 637 .

Set telnet CLI access ssh . clitimeout [<integer>] Set the CLI idle timeout value.0. When set to off.HTTP access menu https . When set to on and not having added machine(s) to the access list. in seconds. The default SSH setting is off.Set CLI idle timeout audit . including connections from machine(s) added to the access list. When set to on and having added machine(s) to the access list. including connections from machine(s) added to the access list. To view menu options. When set to on and not having added machine(s) to the access list.Set SSH CLI access http . January 2006 . telnet Set the telnet CLI access. see page 639. The default Telnet setting is off. all SSH connections are rejected.HTTPS access menu sshkeys .Authentication menu telnet . When set to off. all SSH connections are allowed. all Telnet connections are rejected. only the specified machine(s) are allowed Telnet access. all Telnet connections are allowed. Enables or disables Telnet access. When set to on and having added machine(s) to the access list. Enables or disables SSH access. To view menu options.SSH host keys menu Table 11-102 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage snmp Go to the SNMP menu. see page 643. only the specified machine(s) are allowed SSH access.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/sys/adm SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Menu [Administrative Applications Menu] snmp . 638 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. ssh Set the SSH CLI access.Audit Settings Menu auth .SNMP menu clitimeout . audit Go to the Audit menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

see page 640. snmpv2-mib Go to the SNMPv2-MIB menu. versions [<SNMP_version_number>] Set the SNMP version. see page 641. see page 640.2 Command Reference Table 11-102 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage http Go to the HTTP access menu. To view menu options.0. To view menu options.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view menu options. see page 646. see page 644. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. such as v1. community Go to the SNMP community menu. https Go to the HTTP access menu. see page 645.To view menu options. To view menu options. /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Menu [SNMP Menu] ena dis versions snmpv2-mib community users target Enable SNMP Disable SNMP Set SNMP versions supported SNMPv2-MIB menu SNMP community menu SNMP USM Users Menu Notification target menu Table 11-103 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ena [true|false] Enable SNMP. sshkeys Go to the HTTP access menu. users Go to the SNMP USM Users community menu. dis [true|false] Disable SNMP. January 2006 639 . To view menu options.

iSD_cluster_name>] Assign a name to the managed iSD cluster.Set Write Community String trap . /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/snmpv2-mib SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMPv2 MIB SNMP Menu [SNMPv2-MIB Menu] sysContact sysName sysLocatio snmpEnable Set Set Set Set sysContact sysName sysLocation snmpEnableAuthenTraps Table 11-104 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMPv2MIB Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage sysContact [<name_of_a_person>] Set a system contact name. Designates a contact person for the managed iSD cluster. together with information on how to contact this person. snmpEnable [<SNMP_trap_value>] Set the snmpEnableAuthenTraps value. To view menu options. January 2006 .Set Read Community String write .2 Command Reference Table 11-103 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage target Go to the Notification target menu.Set Trap Community String 640 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. sysName [<string. sysLocatio [<string>] Set the system location. see page 642. /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/community SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Community Menu [SNMP Community Menu] read .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. If no monitor community name is specified. The default monitor community name is public write [<string>] Set the Write Community String. Specifies the monitor community name that grants read access to the Management Information Base (MIB). Specifies the control community name that grants read and write access to the Management Information Base (MIB).Set Authentication Password privpasswd . If no trap community name is specified.2 Command Reference Table 11-105 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Community Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage read [<string>] Set the Read Community String. neither write nor read access is granted.Set Security level permission .0. Enter user number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating SNMP User 1 User name: Maint_Chief Enter security level (none/auth/priv) [priv]: priv Enter permission (list of get. If no control community name is specified.set. The default trap community name is trap /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/users SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Users Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/users menu level.trap): get Enter auth password: <password> Enter priv password: <password> -----------------------------------------------------------[SNMP User 1 Menu] name . the sending of trap messages is disabled. Specifies the trap community name that accompanies trap messages sent to the SNMP manager. you are prompted to create a userID if one does not already exist.Set Encryption Password del .Set user name seclevel .Remove SNMP User Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Set Permission authpasswd . read access is not granted. January 2006 641 . trap [<string>] Set the Trap Community String.

SSL >> SNMP# target Enter Notification Target number: (1-) 1 Creating Notification Target 1 Enter target ip: 0. /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/target SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Target Menu To enter the /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/target menu level.Remove Notification Target 642 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Set target IP address port . privpasswd [<string>] Set the Encryption Password.Set SNMP version del . permission [get|set|trap] Set user Permission. authpasswd [<string>] Set the Authentication Password.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0 Enter snmp version (v1/v2c/v3): v1 -----------------------------------------------------------[Notification Target 1 Menu] ip .Set target port version .0. you are prompted to create a target if one does not already exist. January 2006 .0.0.2 Command Reference Table 11-106 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Users Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage name [<string>] Set the user name. del [<SNMP_user_ID>] Remove the SNMP User. seclevel [none|auth|priv] Set the user Security level.

dis[<true|false>] Disable audit. vendorid [<string>] Set the vendor ID. /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/audit SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Menu [Audit Menu] servers vendorid vendortype ena dis RADIUS Servers Menu Set vendor id for audit attribute Set vendor type for audit attribute Enable Audit Disable Audit Table 11-108 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage servers Go to the Servers menu.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. To view menu options. see page 644.0. ena [<true|false>] Enable Audit. port [<port_number] Disable SNMP. vendortype [<integer>] Set the vendor type.2 Command Reference Table 11-107 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Target Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage ip [<IP_address] Set the target IP address. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. version [v1|v2|v3] Set the SNMP version. del Delete the SNMP target. January 2006 643 .

add [<IP_address> <port> <secret>] Add an Audit server.Add a new value insert . move <value> <value> Move the Audit server from one position to another in the server list.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Insert a new value move . insert [<position> <IP_address> <port> <secret>] Insert a Audit server into the Audit server list. del <Audit_server_name> Delete the Audit server.0.List all values del .Move a value by number Table 11-109 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Servers Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the Audit server settings. January 2006 . /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/http SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTP Menu [HTTP Menu] port ena dis .Set HTTP Server port .Delete a value by number add .Enable server .Disable server 644 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/audit/servers SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Servers Menu [RADIUS Audit Servers Menu] list .

dis [true|false] Disable the HTTPS server. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Set HTTPS Server port .Enable server . January 2006 645 . ena [true|false] Enable the HTTPS server.0.2 Command Reference Table 11-110 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTP Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage port [<integer>] Set the HTTP server port. dis [true|false] Disable the HTTP server. ena [true|false] Enable the HTTP server.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Disable server Table 11-111 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTPS Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage port [<integer>] Set the HTTPS server port. /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/https SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTPS Menu [HTTPS Menu] port ena dis .

SSH known host keys menu Table 11-112 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Host keys Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage generate [yes|no] Generate new SSH host keys for the server cluster. see page 644.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/sshkeys SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Host keys Menu [SSH Host Keys generate show knownhosts Menu] . knownhosts Go to the Known Host Keys menu.Add a new SSH host key import . del [<hostkey_name>] Delete a host key.Retrieve SSH key from remote host Table 11-113 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Known SSH Host keys Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list [yes|no] Display the known SSH keys of remote hosts. show Show the SSH host keys for the server cluster. /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/sshkeys/knownhosts SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Known Host keys Menu [SSH Known Host Keys Menu] list . To view menu options.List known SSH keys of remote hosts del .Delete known SSH host key by index add .Show current SSH host keys for the cluster . 646 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 .0.Generate new SSH host keys for the cluster .

and root) only the oper user can be deleted. expire [DDdHHhMMmSS] Set the password expiry time and date.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. and then type ". del Delete a user ID. edit Go to the Edit a user menu..0. After a user account is added. Of the three built-in users (admin. Only users with Administrator rights can delete user accounts. you must also assign the user account to a group. /ssl/cfg/sys/user SSL Configuration System Menu [User Menu] passwd expire list del add edit caphrase Change own password Set password expire time interval List all users Delete a user Add a new user Edit a user menu Certadmin export passphrase Table 11-114 SSL Configuration System Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage passwd Change your current login password.2 Command Reference Table 11-113 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Known SSH Host keys Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage add Add a new SSH host key. Only users with Administrator rights can add user accounts. press Enter to create a new line. Paste the key. January 2006 647 . oper.. Removes the specified user account from the system. The password can contain spaces and is case respective. To view menu options. see page 648." (without the quotation marks) to terminate import [<hostname_or_IP_address>] Retrieve an SSH key from a remote host. add [<string>] Add a new user ID. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. list List all user accounts.

To view menu options. 648 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.List all values . see page 551. January 2006 . del [<user_group_name>] Delete a user group.Delete a value by number .Groups menu cur .0.Add a new value Table 11-116 SSL Configuration System User Edit Groups Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the user groups information.2 Command Reference Table 11-114 SSL Configuration System Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage caphrase [<string>] Set the Certadmin export passphrase. /ssl/cfg/sys/user/edit/groups SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu [Groups Menu] list del add . /ssl/cfg/sys/user/edit SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu [User User_1 Menu] groups . add [<string. user_group_name>] Add a user group.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Display current setting Table 11-115 SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage groups Go to theGroups menu. cur Display the user configurations.

If a language_shortform argument is used (e. vlist [<language_shortform>] List the ISO 639 language codes. list [<language_number>] List the pre-defined languages that have been loaded.. en for English).Import language definition file export . To view menu options. del [<language_deinition_filename>] Delete a language definition.Export language definition template list .Delete (custom) language definition Table 11-117 SSL Configuration System Language Support Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage import [<protocol> <host> <filename> <ISO_language_code>] Import a language definition file from another host. see page 651.List the loaded languages vlist .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference /ssl/cfg/lang SSL Configuration Language Support Menu [Language Support Menu] import . all of the codes that contain the argument characters are listed. export[<protocol> <host> <filename>] Export a language definition file.0. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.g. /ssl/boot SSL Boot Menu [Boot Menu] software halt reboot delete Software management menu Halt the iSD Reboot the iSD Delete the iSD Table 11-118 SSL Configuration Boot Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage software Go to Software Management menu.List ISO 639 language codes del . January 2006 649 .

The /boot/delete command is primarily intended for situations when you want to delete an iSD host that has either become isolated from the cluster. Log in as the admin user with the admin password to enter the Setup menu. SSH or a console connection. use the halt command in the iSD Host menu (/cfg/sys/cluster/host #) instead.2 Command Reference Table 11-118 SSL Configuration Boot Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage halt Halt the iSD. to its factory default configuration (all IP configuration is lost). The command stops the particular iSD host to which you have connected by Telnet. you can only access the device via a console connection. reboot Reboot the iSD. If you are connected by Telnet or SSH to the Management IP address (MIP). Under these circumstances. or a console connection.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. connect to the MIP address by Telnet or SSH and delete the iSD from the cluster by using the delete command in the iSD Host menu (/cfg/sys/cluster/host #). delete Delete an iSD host. from which you can perform the new and join commands. 650 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. or a console connection. use the reboot command in the iSD Host menu (/cfg/sys/cluster/host #) instead. SSH. you must use the /boot/delete command to present the Setup menu.0. SSH. After having performed a delete. The software itself will remain intact. Resets the particular iSD host to which you have connected via Telnet. or has been physically removed from the cluster without first performing the delete command from the iSD Host menu. NOTE – Note: If you receive a warning that the iSD you are trying to delete has no contact with any (other) master iSD in the cluster. Always use this command before turning off the device. The command reboots the particular iSD host to which you have connected by Telnet. January 2006 . If you are connected by Telnet or SSH to the Management IP address (MIP).

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 651 . download [<protocol> <host> <filename>] Download a new software package.34 SSL activate [<software_version>] Select the software version to run. del [<software_version>] Remove old software releases. Only software versions whose status is indicated as unpacked (using the cur command) can be removed.0.0.Select software version to run download . For example: SSL >> Software Management# cur Version Name ---------4.0.Remove unpacked/old releases Table 11-119 SSL Perfomance Software Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage cur Display the current software status.1.1.Download new software pkg. in case you do not want to activate the unpacked software upgrade package.2 Command Reference /ssl/boot/software SSL Performance Menu [Software Management Menu] cur . via TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP del .11 SSL 5.Display current software status activate . Removes a software upgrade package that has been downloaded by using the tftp or ftp command. Status -----old permanent Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.

chkcfg [all-isds | one-isd] [item. Th current system internal status is collected from the iSD host you are connected to (or optionally.Check applied configuration starttrace . tg. The file sent to the TFTP server does not contain any sensitive information related to the system configuration. dns. dumplogs Dump the log files.0. To view menu options. Valid tags are all.Tech suppt dump log files to TFTP/FTP/SFTP server dumpstat .Stop Trace Table 11-120 SSL Perfomance Maintenance Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage hsm Go to the HSM menu. and so on. 652 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A. net and direct_packet.] Check the applied configuration. netdirect. upref. ipsec.2 Command Reference /ssl/maint SSL Performance Maintenance Menu [Maintenance Menu] hsm .Start Trace stoptrace .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.Tech suppt dump curr. such as certificates.. ssl. ippool. System log file information is collected from the iSD host you are connected to (or optionally.HSM menu dumplogs . The information can then be used for technical support purposes. dumpstat Dump the current status.. ike. all iSD hosts in the cluster) and sends the information to a file in the gzip compressed tar format on the TFTP server you have specified. status to TFTP/FTP/SFTP server chkcfg . all iSD hosts in the cluster) and sends the information to a file in the gzip compressed tar format on the TFTP server you have specified. pptp. private keys. see page 653. stoptrace Stop the Trace. starttrace [<tags>] [<VPN>] Start trace. The information can then be used for technical support purposes. aaa. January 2006 .

splitkey Splits the wrap key used by the hardware security module onto the two black CODE iKeys. [HSM Menu] login .Split a wrap key onto CODE iKeys changepass .0. Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.Login to HSM cards on local iSD splitkey . January 2006 653 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. changepass <card number [0 | 1]> <iKey [HSM-SO | HSM-USER]> <current password for the selected iKey> <new password for the selected iKey> Sets the password for a HSM-SO or a HSM-USER iKey.Change iKey password Table 11-121 SSL Perfomance Maintenance HSM Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage login <HSM-USER password for the currently inserted HSM-USER iKey> Lets you log in to a HSM card. using the HSM-USER iKey and the correct password.2 Command Reference /ssl/maint/hsm SSL Performance HSM Menu The /ssl/maint/hsm menu is only available to HSM enabled iSDs.

January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference 654 Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu 320506-A.0.

only <Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt. telnet. and bgp <Message>: The log message Following is a list of potential syslog messages. LOG_WARNING FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>. LOG_CRIT. web server. ip. web server. LOG_ALERT. For example: Aug 19 14:20:30 <Log Label> The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>. LOG_ERR. console. <source IP address> -> <destination IP address>. and LOG_DEBUG <Thread ID> This is the software thread that reports the log message.APPENDIX A Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages: <Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message> where <Timestamp> The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. [<layer-4 ports>]. one of the following may be shown: console. or ssh. LOG_NOTICE. The following thread IDs are recorded: stp. [<TCP f1ags>]” ntp: ntp cannot contact primary NTP server <ip_address> cannot contact secondary NTP server <ip_address> 655 320506-A. vrrp. slb. LOG_WARNING. January 2006 . [<ICMP type>]. [<IP protocol>]. telnet. LOG_INFO. system. To keep this list as short as possible. ssh.

0.2 Command Reference LOG_ALERT stp: IP vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: gslb: gslb: gslb: gslb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: bgp: vrrp: vrrp: dps: dps: syn_atk tcplim own BPDU received from port <port_id> cannot contact default gateway <ip_address> received errored advertisement from <ip_address> received incorrect password from <ip_address> received incorrect addresses from <ip_address> received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address> cannot contact real server <ip_address> real server <ip_address> has reached maximum connections received update from <ip_address> for unknown remote server <ip_address> received update from <ip_address> for unknown virtual service received update for unknown remote server <ip_address> from <ip_address> received update for unknown service <ip_address:service> cannot contact real service <ip_address:real_port> real server failure threshold (<threshold>) has been reach for group <group_id> real server <ip_address> disabled through configuration Virtual Service Pool full.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. gSvcPool=MAX_SERVICES notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address> session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>) Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes manual hold down: <ip_address> SYN attack detected: <count> new half-open sessions per second hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes 656 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 320506-A. January 2006 .

2 Command Reference LOG_CRIT SYSTEM: temperature at sensor <sensor_id> exceeded threshold SYSTEM: internal power supply failed SYSTEM: redundant power supply failed SYSTEM: fan failure detected SSH can't allocate memory in load_MP_INT LOG_ERR mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ntp: isd: stp: stp: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> unable to listen to NTP port unable to listen to BOOTP_SERVER_PORT port Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH Error: Error writing config to FLASH Apply not done Save not done “<““apply””|““save””> is issued by another user. Try later” Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long Please configure primary RADIUS server address STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF Switch reset is required to turn STP on/off Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports 320506-A. January 2006 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 657 .0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

0. January 2006 .2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id> Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port port_mirr: Port Mirroring changes are not applied cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet Multiple static routes have same destination Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must have preemption enabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id> Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address> Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled Hot-standby must be enabled when a virtual router has a PIP address Virtual router <vr_id> IP interface should be <interface_id> Enabled real server <server_id> has no IP address Real server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Real server <server_id> (Backup for <server_id>) is not enabled Real server <server_id> has same IP address as virtual server <server_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as real server <server_id> Real server group <group_id> cannot backup itself Real server <server_id> cannot be added to same group Enabled virtual server <server_id> has no IP address 658 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> with same IP address must support same layr3 configuration Real server <server_id> cannot be backup server for both real server <server_id> and group <group_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address and vport as virtual server <server_id> RS <server_id> can't exist for VS <server_id> vport <virtual_port> Switch port <port_id> has same proxy IP address as port <port_id> Switch port <port_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> A hot-standby port cannot also be an inter-switch port There must be at least one inter-switch port if any hot-standby port exist “With VMA. ports 1-8 must all have a PIP if any one does” Client bindings are not supported with proxy IP addresses DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtual server to support FTP parsing Real server <server_id> and group %u cannot both have backups configured Virtual server <server_id> : port mapping but layer3 bindings Extracting length has to set to 8 or 16 for cookie rewrite mode DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtural server <server_id> to support URL parsing Port filtering must be disabled on port <port_id> in order to support cookie based persistence for virtual server <server_id> Virtual server <server_id>: port mapping but Direct Access Mode Virtual server %lu: support nonat IP but not layer 3 bindings Virtual servers: all that support IP must use same group Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> that include the same real server <server_id> cannot map the same real port or balance UDP Virtual server <server_id>: UDP service <virtual_port> with out-of-range port number 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. January 2006 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 659 .

<host_name>.<domain_name>” Direct access mode is not supported with default gateway load balancing SLB Radius secret must be 16 characters long Dynamic NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> must have same smask and dmask NAT filter <filter_id> cannot have port ranges NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes VIP <server_id> NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes RIP <server_id> Redirection filter <filter_id> must be cached Filter with L4 ports configured <port_id> must have IP protocol configured “For Global SLB.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Switch cannot support more than <MAX_VIRT_SERVICES> virtual services Switch cannot support more than <MAX_SMT> real services Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must have same L4 config Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must all have a PIP DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for ports <port_id> in order to do URL based redirection “Two services have same hostname.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. January 2006 . Web server must be moved from TCP port 80” Remote site <site_id> does not have a primary IP address Primary and secondary remote site <site_id> switches must differ Remote sites <site_id> and <site_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and real server <server_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and virtual server <server_id> must use different addresses Only <MAX_SLB_SITES> remote servers are allowed per group Only <MAX_SLB_SERVICES> remote services are supported Enabled external lookup IP address has no IP address domain name must be configured 660 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 320506-A.

<domain_name>” Loadbalance string must be added to real server <server_id> in order to enable exclusionary string matching intrval input value must be in the range [0-24] unapplied changes reverted unsaved changes reverted Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED Synchronization TX Error Synchronization TX connection RESET Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization TX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization RX connection RESET Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization RX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX 320506-A.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Network <static_network_id> has no VIP address duplicate default entry BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface <ip_interface_id> BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled Filter with ICMP types configured (<icmp_type>) must have IP protocol configure to ICMP “Two services have same hostname. January 2006 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 661 .0. <host_name>.

Try later” new configuration did not validate (rc = ) new configuration did not apply (rc = ) new configuration did not save (rc = ) Sync config apply error Restoring Current Config Sync rx tcp open error Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line Sync Version Failed .peer:%s config:%s Sync Password Failed-Bad Password Sync receive already in progress … cannot start Sync receive Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync receive 662 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 320506-A.Resuming Console thread “<""apply""|""save""> is issued by another user. January 2006 .0.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Synchronization connection early RCLOSE in RX Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout Synchronization Receive Timeout Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync Sync receive in progress … cannot start Sync Sync already in progress … cannot start Sync Config Sync route find error Config Sync tcp_open error Config Synchronization Timeout .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

January 2006 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 663 .0.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE system: system: system: system: system: system: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: internal power supply ok redundant power supply present and ok temperature ok fan ok rebooted <last_reset_information> rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in boot config block changed boot image changed switch reset from CLI syslog host changed to <ip_address> syslog host changed to this host second syslog host changed to <ip_address> second syslog host changed to this host Next boot will use active config block user password changed SLB operator password changed L4 operator password changed operator password changed SLB administrator password changed L4 administrator password changed administrator password changed scp <login_level> login “scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">” RADIUS server timeouts Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE <login_level> login on Console 320506-A.

2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE (Continued) mgmt: mgmt: “<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console” PANIC command from CLI port_mirr: “port mirroring is <""enabled""|""disabled"">” vlan: mgmt: mgmt: IP IP vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: Default VLAN can not be deleted <login_level> login from host <ip_address> “<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from” “default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">” default gateway <ip_address> operational virtual router <ip_address> is now master virtual router <ip_address> is now backup “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""diabled""> for real server <server_id>” “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “backup group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group group_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server <server_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “overflow group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” real server <ip_address> operational real service <ip_address:real_port> operational No services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> Services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address> 664 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 320506-A.0. January 2006 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. January 2006 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 665 .2 Command Reference LOG_INFO SYSTEM: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: ssh: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: bootp response from <ip_address> new configuration applied new configuration saved unsaved changes reverted Could not revert unsaved changes "<image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>." server key autogen starts server key autogen completes server key autogen timer timeouts new synch configuration applied new synch configuration saved Synchronizing from <host_name> Synchronizing to <host_name> Config Synchronization Transmit Successful Config Synchronization Receive Successful new configuration VALIDATED 320506-A.0. file <file_name> <software_version>" serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name> scp <login_level> login "scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">" <login_level> login on Console "<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console" <login_level> login from host <ip_address> "<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Telnet/SSH.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference 666 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 320506-A. January 2006 .

mib aosNetwork.mib In addition.MIB II Extension (IFX table) 667 320506-A. Version 3 supports two authentication protocols: MD5 and SHA. January 2006 .mib aosLayer7.Textual Convention MIB s5emt104. Up to 16 IP addresses can be configured in targetAddr table. UDP. Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs: RFC 1213 . Nortel MIBs are registered as Vendor 1872.mib -.mib aosTrap. TCP. SNMP Groups) RFC 1573 .mib aosSwitch.mib -.APPENDIX B Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP Agent The Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP agent supports SNMP Version 1.mib aosBwm.Ethernet Multi segment Autotopology MIB SNMPv1|v2|v3 traps can be sent to the hosts configured in targetAddr table. Version 2. the following SynOptics MIBS are also supported: synro193.mib aosPhysical. Address Translation. ICMP.SynOptics Registration MIB s5tcs112.mib -.mib -. Detailed SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP agent can be found in the following enterprise MIB documents: altroot. IP.mib aosLayer4. and Version 3. Interface.SynOptics Root MIB s5roo117.MIB II (System.

VACM MIB RFC 2576 .USM MIB RFC 2575 .0. Alarm.Bridge MIB RFC 1757 .2 Command Reference RFC 1643 .Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.3ad MIB for LACP The following SNMPv3 MIBs are supported: RFC 2571 .Target MIB RFC 2574 .EtherLike MIB RFC 1493 . Event Groups) RFC 1850 for OSPF RFC 1657 for BGP IEEE 802. Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service 668 Appendix B: Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP Agent 320506-A. History.Community MIB Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215: ColdStart WarmStart LinkDown LinkUp AuthenticationFailure The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493: NewRoot TopologyChange The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Nortel Application Switch Operating System: Table 11-122 Nortel Application Switch Operating System-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwDefGwUp altSwDefGwDown altSwDefGwInService Signifies that the default gateway is alive.MPD MIB RFC 2573 .RMON MIB (Statistics.SNMP Frame work RFC 2572 . January 2006 . Signifies that the default gateway is down.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. An altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to enter a valid username/password combination. Implementation of this trap is optional. A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been received from a router whose authentication key or authentication type conflicts with this router's authentication key or authentication type. January 2006 669 . altSwVrrpAuthFailure altSwLoginFailure Appendix B: Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP Agent 320506-A.2 Command Reference Table 11-122 Nortel Application Switch Operating System-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwDefGwNotInService altSwSlbRealServerUp altSwSlbRealServerDown altSwSlbRealServerMaxConnReached altSwSlbBkupRealServerAct altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeact altSwSlbBkupRealServerActOverflow altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeactOverflow altSwfltFilterFired altSwSlbRealServerServiceUp altSwSlbRealServerServiceDown altSwVrrpNewMaster altSwVrrpNewBackup Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in service Signifies that the real server is up and operational Signifies that the real server is down and out of service Signifies that the real server has reached maximum connections Signifies that the backup real server is activated due to availablity of the primary real server Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is available Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is overflowed Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is out from overflow situation Signifies that the packet received on a switch port matches the filter rule Signifies that the service port of the real server is up and operational Signifies that the service port of the real server is down and out of service The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Master' state. The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Backup' state.

January 2006 . An altSwSlbSessAttack trap signifies that an SLB attack has been detected.2 Command Reference Table 11-122 Nortel Application Switch Operating System-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwSlbSynAttack altSwTcpHoldDown An altSwSlbSynAttack trap signifies that a SYN attack has been detected. An altSwFanFailure trap signifies that a fan failure has occured. An altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits. An altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connection requests from a particular client will be blocked for a pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP connections from that client has reached a pre-determined threshold.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0. altSwTempExceedThreshold altSwSlbSessAttack altSwFanFailure 670 Appendix B: Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP Agent 320506-A.

Hold the <Shift> key down and hit D repeatedly until the following message appears: Nortel Application Switch . 2. 1. Using the serial cable. connect the Console port of an Nortel Application Switch to the serial port of your PC that supports XModem/1K XModem.2. Start hyper terminal (part of Microsoft Windows) and set the following parameters: Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None 3.PPCBoot 2. Power on the switch.APPENDIX C Performing a Serial Download You can perform a serial download of the new Nortel Application Switch software if you are upgrading Nortel Application Switch Operating System directly from any image. 4. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 671 320506-A. January 2006 . This procedure requires the following: A computer running terminal emulation software A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics) A binary switch firmware image (not the tftp file used for TFTP download) Use the following procedure to perform a serial upgrade.

. protocol: 1K XMODEM It will take about 15 minutes for the transfer to complete..2 Command Reference 5. January 2006 . Power off the switch. the switch will be inoperable. NOTE – Although slower. you will see: CCCC. 6. Select <Transfer-Send File> and choose the following: file: For example.2. 8. CAUTION—Do not power off the switch until you see the message: “Change your baud rate to 9600 bps and power cycle switch”.0. You should see the following sample log on your screen: Nortel Application Switch . otherwise.. This file can be downloaded from the CD that is shipped with the switch. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total bytes transferred: 0x4ff400 Extracting images. Make sure that the new binary firmware file is available on the computer. Press <Enter> on the key board of the PC that is connected to the console port of the switch.PPCBoot 2.. Do *NOT* power cycle the switch Updating flash. "21..Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. When the Console Port is successfully communicating with the PC.img" (Or the file previously downloaded to the computer) 7.0. XMODEM will work too if you choose not to use 1K MODEM. 9. ################################################################# Change your baudrate to 9600 bps and power cycle the switch ! 672 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 320506-A. wait for a few seconds and power the switch on. Reconfigure your terminal emulation software with the following parameters (only after you see the message displayed in step 4): Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 115200 8 None 1 None NOTE – You can perform serial downloads at 57600 baud rate by pressing Shift f or at 115200 baud rate by pressing Shift d..0.0_Serial. The switch will boot with the new software load.

January 2006 . and so on. The destination port (application socket: for example. Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header adherent to the IP specification (for example. preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority. ICMP. http-80/https-443/DNS-53) Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another address.) A group of real servers that are associated with a Virtual Server IP address. OSPF. In VRRP. UDP. The protocol of a frame. because it translates the destination IP address from the Virtual Server IP address. half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another. the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). or a filter. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. In general. Virtual server-based load balancing uses half NAT by design. A higher number will win out for master designation. network address translation can be said to have taken place. TCP. In VRRP. Preemption Priority Proto (Protocol) Real Server Group 673 320506-A. Default is 100. No NAT is when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated.Glossary DIP (Destination IP Address) Dport (Destination Port) NAT (Network Address Translation) The destination IP address of a frame. to that of one of the real servers.

Deny. VIP (Virtual Server IP Address) VIR (Virtual Interface Router) 674 Glossary 320506-A. a filter is configured in the switch. Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration. RIP (Real Server) SIP (Source IP Address) SPort (Source Port) Tracking The source port (application socket: for example. In redirection-based load balancing. Redirect to a Server Group.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference Redirection or Filter-Based Load Balancing A type of load balancing that operates differently from virtual server-based load balancing. SPort/Range or DPort/Range. An IP addresses that the switch load balances to when requests are made to a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). or NAT (translation of either the source IP or destination IP address). requests are transparently intercepted and “redirected” to a server group. a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation (with preemption enabled). Protocol. the destination IP address is not translated to that of one of the real servers. HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53). In VRRP. With this type of load balancing. redirection-based load balancing is designed to load balance devices that normally operate transparently in your network—such as a firewall. This filter intercepts traffic based on certain IP header criteria and load balances it. Filters can be configured to filter on the SIP/Range (via netmask). client or server designation (increments priority by 2 for each reals: healthy real servers (increments by 2 for each healthy real server) hsrp: HSRP announcements heard on a client designated port (increments by 10 for each) An IP address that the switch owns and uses to load balance particular service requests (like HTTP) to other servers. The source IP address of a frame. DIP/Range (via netmask). Instead. You can track the following: Vrs: Virtual Routers in Master Mode (increments priority by 2 for each) Ifs: Active IP interfaces on the Nortel Application Switch (increments priority by 2 for each) Ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each) l4pts: Active Layer 4 Ports. Real Server IP Address. or transparent Web cache. A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers. January 2006 . Therefore. The action on a filter can be Allow. spam filter. “Transparently” means that requests are not specifically destined for a Virtual Server IP address that the switch owns.0.

by the switch. as defined in RFC 2338. The switch announces this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP.0. and advertisements. Network address translation is done back and forth. A VRRP address that is a shared Virtual Server IP address. and forwards the frame to the server for which it is now destined. and the ARP tables in the devices around them would have two ARP entries with the same IP address but different MAC addresses. If there is more than one VLAN defined on the Nortel Application Switch. Should the master stop advertising. Virtual Server Load Balancing VRID (Virtual Router Identifier) VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) VSR (Virtual Server Router) Glossary 320506-A.0. as well as IP interfaces.2 Command Reference Virtual Router A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP. In VRRP.18. This process of replacing the destination IP (VIP) with one of the real server addresses is called half NAT. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. a value between 1 and 255 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. Requests destined for a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol. The switch then replaces the VIP and with one of the real server IP addresses (RIP's). since the packet would have the DIP of the VIP and not that of the server (RIP). a server would receive the frame that was destined for it's MAC address. The master is always advertising via the broadcasts. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements. If they didn’t. The VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}. Frames come to the switch destined for the VIP. one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. The backup switch is always listening for the broadcasts.0. which is owned by the switch. All IP interfaces on the Nortel Application Switch must be in a VLAN. refer to RFC 2338. the two switches would fight for ownership of the Virtual Server IP address. then the VRID number needs to be identical on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows whom to share with. The server would then drop the frame. forcing the packet up to Layer 3. updates the relevant checksums. Classic load balancing. If you have a VRRP address that two switches are sharing. One virtual router is associated with an IP interface. VSR is a Nortel proprietary extension to the VRRP specification. The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available.Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23. For a more detailed description. If the frames were not half NAT'ed to the address of one of the RIPs. The switches must be able to share Virtual Server IP addresses. are load balanced to a real server contained in the group associated with the VIP. then the VRRP broadcasts will only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member. With VRRP. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch is assigned. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as 224. the backup will take over ownership of the VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. as requests come and go. January 2006 675 .

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.2 Command Reference 676 Glossary 320506-A. January 2006 .0.

... 23 admpw (system option) . 424 backup configuration block ..................................................... 133 filters .......................................................................................................... January 2006 .............. 408 restoring ... 109 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) address list ........................................... 99 application redirection .. 205................................................ 515 backup server activations (SLB statistics) ............ 39 link.. 33 B backup SLB real server group option . 509 active configuration block ..................................................................... 319 bandwidth management contract configuration .......................... 260.................. 393 active port VLAN ................................................................................. 448 activating optional software ............... 356 as ................ 305... 332 STP information ........ 487 (SLB real server group option) content .................................. 415.. 356 autonomous system filter path action ........... 393 active Layer 4 processing ................................................. 264............. 228 bandwidth management configuration ..................... saving and loading configuration ............. 356 aspath .............................. 39 enable/disable on port .......................... 293 advertisement of virtual IP addresses .... 40 port speed........................................................ 524 IP route tag ......................................................... 424 / command .................. 313 setup....................... 319 677 320506-A..................................................................................................................... 671 3000 series............... 316 contracts ................................................................................................................................................................. 39................. 317 bandwidth management contract precedence value ...... 408 add SLB port option ................................... 311....... 56 [ ]........ 524 administrator account30....................................................................... 259 applying configuration changes .................................................................... 408 ptcfg .......................Index Symbols (MD5) ................... 260....................................... 448 filter states....................................................... 358 aging STP bridge option ........................................................................................................................... 39 auto-negotiation .................. 288 action (SLB filtering option) ............................................... 306 A abbreviating commands (CLI) .............................................. 423 apply (global command) ..... 60 access control system ............................... 464 addr ARP entries....................... 26 autoconfiguration duplex mode ............... 221 active IP interface ........................................ 408 active switch. 259 ASCII terminal ........................................................................................................ 393 active switch configuration gtcfg . 515 active FTP SLB parsing statistics .. 356 Numerics 1K XModem ................. 309........................................................................ 40 autonomous system filter action ................................................................... 39........... 414 within real server groups .......

............................................................................. 109 IP route type ...................................................... 60 tab completion .......... 528 Cisco Ether Channel ..............99 boot options menu .............Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23..............................262 baud rate console connection ....25 BGP configuration...........................................................................26 serial download ........................................ 237 port ........373 peer .................322 bandwidth management statistics ........................................................................ 23 global commands ...371 eBGP .508 BPDU.......................................................................0...................................... 230...322 underlimit TOS .................................................................................................................... for STP ....... bridge parameter menu........................................ 56 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ............................................................................................................................ 334 clear ARP entries ..................................374 IP address.................... 43 Browser-Based Interface ............511 BOOTP ................................. 228 binding table ........ 25 to 31........... 523 routing table ................................................... 109 broadcast domains ................................505 bandwidth management policy configuration .........371 peer configuration ....................................................109 configuration............................ January 2006 ................................................. 672 BBI ...................671 binary firmware image ............................................................................... See Bridge Protocol Data Unit......................................262 bootstrap protocol ................671...232 banner (system option)....................... 524 dump information ...................................................... 463 command (help) .............................................2 Command Reference Bandwidth Management options operations-level options .......... 529 FDB entry ........... 56 shortcuts ...........................380 Border Gateway Protocol ..................................................................... 234 history statistics .. 53 commands abbreviations .............375 remote autonomous system ...................322 hard bandwidth limit .........204...................................371 iBGP.... 60 stacking ................................................... 60 conventions used in this manual ........................................ 231 client traffic processing ......27 setup (enable/disable) ............................................................................... 233 switch processor contract statistics ..............................37 system option ............................ 525 clearing SLB statistics ...........437 BLOCKING (port state).........................331 broadcast IP route tag ............................109 keep-alive time ............................ 25 BWM contract rate statistics.......99 STP transmission frequency .............................................................................................322 reserve limit .................. 233 C capture dump information to a file...............................................................374 binary ..............................................373 router hops................................99 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) .......................................................................................322 buffer limit ...................... border router ...................................................................................................... 233 switch processor rate contract statistics ...........373 redistribution configuration ...........................331 Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters .............................330 bridge priority ........................................................................................... 33..........................................................................672 binding failure ......................................371 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) operations-level options .............................................371 in route ............322 over the limit TOS ..................322 soft bandwidth limit ........ 235 contract statistics..........................373 IP route tag ....... 60 678 Index 320506-A...... 339 broadcast IP address .....................................................

.....................Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23................ 228 designated port............................................... 403 switch IP address ............................................................... 671............................................................ 407 effect on Spanning-Tree Protocol ............................................... 344 TACACS+ ........................................ 427 downloading software ............... 303.... 39 link status ....... 350 save changes ............... 147 setup............ 270 user password .......................................... 311....... 313 port link speed .................................................................. 305......... 513 dropped frames (No Server Available) counter ... 357 connecting via console ............... 315 port trunking ................................... 449 direct (IP route type) ................ 259 dip (destination IP address for filtering) .......................... 515 selection ....................................... 346 dump command ...... load balancing for ............................ 259 default gateway interval......................................... 312 VLAN IP interface ................... 257 configuring routing information protocol .............. 515 backup................................................ 114 diff (global) command.............................................................................. 519 state information ...... 260 setup ........... 307 cost STP information ....................................................... 26 connecting ............................................................................................................ 303 flow control ........................ 305.............................................. 308................. 424 contracts.............. 309...................................... 252.................. 333 counters...... 26 via Telnet............... 99 disconnect idle timeout ................................... 252.................. viewing changes ............. 672 content SLB real server group option ........................... 39 320506-A......................................................... 292 view changes...... 307........ 515 factory . 309 IP static route ......... 312 VRRP .................................................................................................... 530 duplex mode.... 396 default password ..................................... 26 serial download settings ....... 259 VLAN default (PVID) .................................................... 303.. 262 debugging .......................................................................... 407 maintenance ................. 78.............. 304......................... 254 CPU utilization ...............2 Command Reference configuration administrator password ..................................................................................................................................... 192 Domain Name System (DNS) health checks .. 307....................... for health checks. 313 Gigabit Ethernet .. 272 current bindings ............ 406 setup command ..................... 307.. No Server Available (dropped frames) ............ 466 dmask destination mask for filtering ........ 109 directed broadcasts......... 259 Fast Ethernet .......... January Index 679 .............. 30 delete FDB entry ............................ 348 Layer 4 administrator password ............ 449 DNS statistics .............................................................. 523 deny (filtering) . 205........................................ 309.................................................. 346 metrics ..... 27 connection timeout (Real Server Menu option) ......... 62........................ 344 VLAN tagging ............................. 381 configuration block active .. 228 CPU statistics .................................... 305..................... 293 apply changes .......... 269................................. 227 D date setup.. 37 system option .......................... 310............... 396 round robin.............................................. .............................. 204........................................ 346 default gateway IP address ........0..... 350 DISABLED (port state) ..................... 205....................... 333 route cache................ 515 configuration menu . 254 cur (system option) ...................... 519 default gateway information .................... 31 Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) setting update interval ....................................... 317 copper ports ............................................................................................................ 292 operating mode ................. 99 STP port option............................. 308........................................................................................................................... 313 port mirroring .......... for health checks ........ 437 console port communication settings ....................................................... 228 dump configuration command .............. bandwidth management ....... 107 interval..................

... 309 680 Index 320506-A..................... 427 redirection (rport) ...........46 emulation software ........................................................................................................ 307...................................................................................... 272 group .............................................................. configuring ports for .............................Alteon EMS .............................................................. SLB .......... number of failed health checks ............................................ 428.....................................309 File Transfer Protocol .... 311........................ 272 Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) .... 466 system option .......... HSRV................................525 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link .................................................................... 309 global commands.......................222 full-duplex ..................................................................205............................................. 535 forwarding state (FWD) ............................ 34 Fast Ethernet Physical Link ....303 fastage ................................................................................ 56 global SLB maintenance statistics .......................................................... 408 E EMS. 228 filters IP address ranges .......................... 262 HSRP................Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.............................................. 427 redirects (Global SLB option) .. HTTP application health checks .......................99 H half-duplex ................................45 first-time configuration ........................................31......522................ 102 FTP server health checks .........................62.................171 fiber optic ports ....... 132 parameters for most protocols .............................. 309 Gigabit Ethernet configuration......................... 386... 346 IDSLB.................................. 492 hello STP information .... January 2006 ................. 307....... 31....449 Final Steps......303............................................ 346 script .........2 Command Reference dynamic routes ........523 Forwarding Database Information Menu ............................303.. 358 Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) use with VLAN-tagged environment .............. 25 hprompt system option ................ bridge port ................................................................................................................................................. 33 to 50 fixed IP route tag ......... 395 use with VRRP ............................0......350 forwarding database (FDB) .............. See Hot Standby Router Protocol....... 147 configuring ............................. 99 help ..........................................................................................331 FwdDel (forward delay)......................................427 FTP SLB maintenance statistics....334 F factory configuration block .............................................................. 307................... 490 WAP ..........................................222 FTP SLB statistics dump ..............482 FDB statistics ..............................................671 EtherChannel as used with port trunking ..................... 396 Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) priority increment value for L4 client ports ..........................................................39................................................................................................ 313 setup ......92........519 delete entry ........... 393 VRRP priority increment value ........... 488 SNMP ................................................................................... 209 global SLB statistics ...........................515 factory default configuration ..................220 filter statistics ........................................ 482 Greenwich ....... 40 forwarding con